Y0720c1609 PDF

FACTORY AUTOMATION
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers

General Catalog
Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

INDEX
10. Low Voltage Products Website
Introduction and Features of WS-V Series………………………………………………………………… 2
1. Outline of Circuit Breakers……………………………………………………………………………… 10
1 1) Product Line-up… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
2) Instructions for Application………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 12
2. Detailed Specifications… ……………………………………………………………………………… 13

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.............................. 14 5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers......................... 35
1) NF-C (Economy class)...........................................................14 1) MDU Breakers........................................................................35
2 6 Miniature Circuit Breakers.................................... 44

2) NF-S (Standard class)............................................................16
3) NF-L/NF-H/NF-R (High-performance class)...........................20 1) BH..........................................................................................44
4) NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)..........................................23 2) BV...........................................................................................46
2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers........................... 24 7 Circuit Protectors.................................................. 49
1) NV-C (Economy class)...........................................................24 1) CP..........................................................................................49
2) NV-S (Standard class)............................................................26 8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers...............................52
3) NV-H/NV-R (High-performance class)...................................28
1) Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series).................52
3 3 Motor Protection Breakers.................................... 30

1) NF-MB....................................................................................30
9 Earth Leakage Relays............................................ 54
1) Earth Leakage Relays............................................................54
4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers............................. 31
1) UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers........................31
2) UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers......................34
3. Special-purpose Breakers… …………………………………………………………………………… 57

4 1) Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers).............................................................................................................................. 58
2) DC MCCBs and DSN Switches.............................................................................................................................................................. 58
3) 400Hz MCCBs........................................................................................................................................................................................ 58
4. Selection… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 59
1 Construction and Operation................................. 60 8) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit......................74
1) Construction of MCCB............................................................60 9) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side....75
5 2) Construction of ELCB.............................................................62
2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB.............................. 63
10) Combination for Selective Breaking.....................................79
11) Combinations for Cascade Breaking....................................81
12) International Standard Conformance List.............................83
1) Selecting Procedure...............................................................63
2) Features and Performance.....................................................64 3 Selection of ELCB.................................................. 86
3) Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature.........66 1) Electric Shock Protection.......................................................86
4) Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity........68 2) ELCB Grounding Method.......................................................87
3) Rated Voltage and Number of Poles......................................88
6
5) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit......69
6) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit.............71 4) Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices........89
7) Selection of Motor Protection Breaker....................................73
5. Installation and Connection… ………………………………………………………………………… 91

1) Connection Types................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
2) Connecting Parts.................................................................................................................................................................................... 94
7
3) Standard Tightening Torque................................................................................................................................................................... 95
4) Crimp Terminal Type.............................................................................................................................................................................. 96
5) Busbar.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98
6) Insulation Distance on Power Source Side............................................................................................................................................ 99
WS-V Series Next-generation MCCB and ELCB, AE-SW Series ACB, DIN Series MCB
7) Effect of Installation Orientation........................................................................................................................................................... 100
8) Connection of Line and Load............................................................................................................................................................... 100
6. Accessories………………………………………………………………………………………………… 101
8 1 Internal Accessories............................................ 102 2 External Accessories.......................................... 117
1) Internal Accessories ............................................................102 1) F-type Operating Handle (Breaker Mount Type)..................117
2) Kinds of Internal Accessories ..............................................103 2) V-type Operating Handle (Door Mount Type).......................119
3) Operations and Ratings of Switches ...................................103 3) Terminal Covers...................................................................121
4) Maximum Number of Internal Accessories .........................104 4) Insulating Barriers................................................................124
5) Cassette Type Accessories . ...............................................109 5) Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders......127
9 6) Shunt Trip (SHT) .................................................................111

7) Undervoltage Trip (UVT) .....................................................112
6) Mechanical Interlocks (MI)...................................................129
7) Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers.......130
8) Lead Wire Drawing . ............................................................114 8) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical Operation Device......133
9) Lead Wire Terminal Block ...................................................114 9) Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and Handle Caps.......136
10) Test Button Module (TBM) ................................................115 10) IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters...................................137
11) Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) ...................................................116
7. Characteristics and Dimensions… …………………………………………………………………… 139
1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers............................ 140
• NF30-CS................................................................................140
3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers........................... 198
• NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU......................................................198 1
• NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV....................................................142 • NF100-CVFU, NV100-CVFU.................................................200
• NF125-CV/SV/HV..................................................................144 • NF125-SVU/HVU, NV125-SVU/HVU.....................................202
• NF125-UV..............................................................................146 • NF225-CWU...........................................................................204
• NF250-CV/SV/HV..................................................................148 • NF250-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU.....................................206
• NF250-UV..............................................................................150 • NF400-SWU/HWU.................................................................208
• NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV,
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV..................................................152
• NF630-SWU/HWU.................................................................210
4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers....................... 212 2
• NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV......................................154 • NF250-SEV/HEV with MDU...................................................212
• NF400-CW/SW......................................................................156 • NF400-SEP/HEP with MDU...................................................214
• NF400-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................158 • NF630-SEP/HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP/HEP with MDU.....216
• NF400-UEW...........................................................................160 5 Miniature Circuit Breakers,
• NF630-CW/SW......................................................................162 Residual Current Circuit Breakers,
3
• NF630-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................164 Residual Current Circuit Breakers
• NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW...............................................166 with Overcurrent Protection and
• NF800-SDW...........................................................................168 Isolating Switch................................................... 218
• NF800-UEW...........................................................................170
• BH,BH-P.................................................................................218
• NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW.................................................172
• BH-D6, BH-D10......................................................................219
• NF1250-SDW.........................................................................174
• BH-DN....................................................................................220
• NF1600-SEW.........................................................................176
• BV-D.......................................................................................221
4
• NF1600-SDW.........................................................................178
• BV-DN....................................................................................222
2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers......................... 180 • KB-D.......................................................................................223
• NV32-SV, NV-63CV/SV/HV...................................................180 6 Circuit Protectors................................................. 224
• NV125-CV/SV/HV..................................................................182
• CP30-BA................................................................................224
• NV250-CV/SV/HV..................................................................184
• NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV......................................186
7 Electrical Operated Cicuit Breakers................... 225
• NV400-CW/SW......................................................................188
5
• NV400-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................190
• NV630-CW/SW......................................................................192
• NV630-SEW/HEW.................................................................194
• NV800-SEW/HEW.................................................................196
8. Handling and Maintenance……………………………………………………………………………… 231

1) Storage and Transportation.................................................................................................................................................................. 232
2) Standard Working Conditions............................................................................................................................................................... 232
3) Mounting and Connections ................................................................................................................................................................. 232
4) Maintenance and Inspections............................................................................................................................................................... 234
6
5) Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
9. Appendix…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 239
1) Handle Operation Angle Dimensions................................................................................................................................................... 240
2) MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions...................................... 241
3) ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................. 242 7
4) List of Product Weights........................................................................................................................................................................ 243
5) Switching the Adjustable Items............................................................................................................................................................. 244
6) Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................. 247
7) List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values...................................................................................................................................... 248
8) Ordering Information............................................................................................................................................................................ 249
9) Melshort 2............................................................................................................................................................................................. 251
10) Low Voltage Products Website........................................................................................................................................................... 252 8
1
Since we, Mitsubishi Electric, launched the first low-voltage circuit breakers in Japan in
1933, low-voltage circuit breakers has satisfied the needs of the age and led the industry
market for more than half a century all over the world.
By bringing together our years of experience and technologies, we would like to introduce
“WS-V Series” circuit breakers with superior aspects such as the higher breaking
capacity, design for easy use, standardization of accessory parts, compliance to the up to
date international standards and so on.
We believe “WS-V Series” circuit breakers will fulfill every customer’s needs with its high
performance and we will continue to develop and manufacture superior products that
contribute to a better life for all people.
2
3
High-Performance
Technologies based on long year experience are brought together

to realize more improved performance
The new circuit breaking technology “Expanded ISTAC” has improved the current-limiting
performance and upgraded the overall breaking capacity.
Expansion of the conductor under the stator shortens the contact parting time of the mover
as compared to the conventional ISTAC structure.
The current-limiting performance has been improved remarkably. (The maximum peak
current value has been reduced by approx. 10%.)
Example of breaking capacity improvement New circuit breaking technology (Expanded ISTAC)
Grid
Arc
Previous Model NF250-SW New Model NF250-SV Movable conductor
50kA /25kA 85kA /85kA Current C

(at 230VAC) (at 230VAC) Current
Increased reaction force of Reaction circuit

movable conductor
Current B Fixed conductor
Breaking capacity of 5 models is 20% to 50% higher than the
.
W & WS Series
Improvement of breaking capacity on Breaking capacity comparison with a conventional model
250AF-C/S/H models (Fixed) & 125.250AF-R 20 %
250-RG
models (Thermal/Adjustable). UP
250-H 50 %
UP
Model Name
250-S 20 %
UP WS-V Series
WS Series
250-C 38.8%
UP
125-RG 20 %
UP
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

kA at 400VAC lcu
4
The new electronic circuit breakers (with display) and MDU breakers
can display various measurement items
This will enable energy management through “visualization”, which leads to energy saving.
The display is on the circuit breaker body and

shows circuit information.
Detailed setting can be done on the display.
The display turns red during alarms.
Display Current
Alarm
in each phase
Electronic Circuit Breaker Measuring Display Unit

(with display) Breaker
Intelligent Communications through CC-Link

Measuring data can be transmitted to Personal Computer through CC-Link.
LAN(Ethernet)
EcoWebServer
Electronic Energy Energy MELSEC-Q Series

multi-measuring measurement unit measurement unit programmable
instrument Measuring (EMU3 Series) (EcoMonitorPro) controller
Display Unit Air Circuit Breaker
Breaker (AE-SW Series)
5
Standardizaion
Compact design for easy to use

The thermal adjustable circuit breakers and electronic circuit breakers are smaller.
NF250-SGW NF250-SGV
Volume ratio 79%

(Compared with our conventional models)
(Conventional model : 105 × 165 × 86mm) (New model : 105 × 165 × 68mm)
250AF circuit breakers’ fixed types (NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NV250-CV,

NV250-SV, NV250-HV), thermal adjustable types (NF250-SGV, NF250-HGV, NF250-RGV),
and electronic types (NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV) are the same
size, leading to the reduction and standardization of panel design.
Types of internal accessories are reduced from 3 types to 1 type

Standardization of internal accessories contributes to the reduction of stock and
delivery time.
Conventional models Three types For 32/63AF
For 125AF
For 250AF
New models One type For 32 to 250AF

Applicable accessories
AL AX AL+AX SHT UVT
32AF and 63AF circuit breakers can now be used in both AC and DC circuits without
specifying when ordering. This will lead to prevention of ordering mistakes.
The earth leakage circuit breakers can now be equipped with a voltage shunt trip device (SHT).
6
High Quality
Innovative manufacturing using a robot-cell production line

This manufacturing innovation takes
the pursuit of increased productivity,
shortened manufacturing lead-time and
improved quality to the upper limits.
Robot-cell Production Line
Individual unit production management system

A multi-model, single-unit flow production system is utilized the ultimate multi-cycle production
method. The production line is controlled using barcodes to manage the model information for
each unit. Small-lot, flexible production that’s one step ahead!
Manual Adjustment Work
Timely Resupply
Component Barcode
Barcode Reader
7
Environment
Use of Various Recyclable Materials

The circuit breakers are made of thermo-plastic materials that are easy to recycle.
(Some models are partially made of thermoset materials.)
The major plastic parts bear material identifications so that they can be recycled.
Nonuse of Hazardous Substances

Eco-friendly design is used for all circuit breakers, and they do not use hazardous
substances. The circuit breakers comply with RoHS regulation.
Energy Saving at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Fukuyama Works

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Fukuyama Works uses
energy saving support devices such as MDU breakers and
EcoServer to save energy through “visualization” of
energy. Along with “visualization”, Fukuyama Works also
installed high-efficiency equipments to further promote
energy saving.
Through energy saving activity, Fukuyama Works has
successfully reduced its electrical power consumption rate
by 27% in 2007 (compared with 1990).
8
Global
Global Networks of Sales Offices and Production Bases

Our sales networks are designed to comfort customers internationally through the
worldwide distributors. Constantly contactable distributors enable us to accommodate
customer’s needs for smooth supply.
Sales Office:62
branch office :19
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DALIAN representative office :43
INDUSTRY PRODUCTS CO.,LTD (available in 56 countries)
Production Base :2
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
CORPORATION
FUKUYAMA WORKS
9
1 Outline of Circuit Breakers
Product Line-up
Frame (A)
Classification 20 30 32 40 50 60 63 70 100 125 160
1 Molded Case
NF-C
Economy class
NF-S
Standard class
NF30-CS
NF32-SV
NF63-CV
NF63-SV
NF125-CV
NF125-SV
NF125-SEV
NF125-SGV
NF160-SGV
Circuit Breakers NF-H/L NF63-HV

NF125-HV NF125-LGV NF160-LGV
High-performance class NF125-HEV NF125-HGV NF160-HGV
NF-R/U NF125-RGV
NF125-UV
Outline of Circuit Breakers
Ultra current-limiting class

NV-C NV63-CV NV125-CV
Economy class
Earth Leakage NV-S NV125-SV
NV32-SV NV63-SV
Standard class NV125-SEV
Circuit Breakers
NV-H/R NV63-HV
NV125-HV
High-performance class NV125-HEV
Motor Protection MB30-CS
NF63-CV (*1)
NF-MB NF63-SV (*1)
NF125-SV (*1)
Breakers NF32-SV (*1)
NF100-CVFU
UL 489 Listed MCCB NF50-SVFU NF125-SVU
UL 489 Listed NF125-HVU
Circuit Breakers NV100-CVFU
UL 489 Listed ELCB NV50-SVFU NV125-SVU
NV125-HVU
Measuring Display
MDU Breakers
Unit Breakers
BH
Miniature Circuit Breakers BH-DN BH-D6 BH-D10
BH-P
Residual Current Circuit Breaker BV-D
Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload Protection BV-DN
Isolating Switch KB-D
Circuit Protectors CP30-BA CP-S
Air Circuit
AE-SW
Breakers
Related
Earth Leakage Relays NV-ZBA, NV-ZSA, NV-ZHA, NV-ZLA
Components
Note *1 When placing an order, specify “MB.”
WS-V Series (New models)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-C NF-S NF-H NF-L NF-R NF-U
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Motor Protection Breakers

NV-C NV-S NV-H NV-R NF-MB
UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers

UL 489 Listed MCCB UL 489 Listed ELCB MDU Breakers
10
1 Outline of Circuit Breakers
225 250 400 600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
NF250-CV
NF250-SEV
NF400-CW
NF250-SV NF250-SGV NF400-SW NF630-SW
NF630-CW
NF800-SDW
NF400-SEW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW
NF800-CEW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
1
NF250-HV NF250-LGV
NF250-HEV NF250-HGV NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF800-HEW
NF250-RGV NF400-REW NF800-REW
NF250-UV NF630-REW NF800-UEW
NF400-UEW

NV250-CV NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV250-SV NV400-SW NV630-SW
NV250-SEV NV800-SEW
NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV250-HV NV400-HEW
NV250-HEV NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV400-REW
NF250-SV (*1)
NF225-CWU
NF400-SWU NF630-SWU
NF250-SVU NF400-HWU NF630-HWU
NF250-HVU
NV250-SVU
NV250-HVU
NF250-SEV with MDU NF400-SEP with MDU NF630-SEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU
NF250-HEV with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU
AE630-SW AE1000-SW AE1250-SW AE1600-SW AE2000-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA AE5000-SW AE6300-SW
AE2000-SWA AE4000-SW
Miniature Circuit Breakers

BH-DN BH-D6 BH-D10 BH BH-P
Residual Current Circuit Breaker

Residual Current Circuit Breaker Isolating Switch
with Overload Protection
BV-D BV-DN KB-D
Circuit Protectors Air Circuit Breakers Related Components

CP30-BA CP-S AE-SW Earth Leakage Relays
11
Instructions for Application
1. Safety Precautions
d Carefully read the safety precautions prior to use the [Explanation of warning symbols]
circuit breaker correctly.
1
Incorrect handling of the product will result in a
DANGER
d Important safety instructions are given below. Strictly hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury.
observe the instructions. Incorrect handling of the product may result in a
d Be sure to communicate these safety precautions to the CAUTION
hazardous situation according to circumstances.
end user.
Instructions for use
DANGER
Do not touch the terminal area. Doing CAUTION
so can cause an electric shock. When the circuit breaker automatically breaks a circuit, turn on the
The earth leakage circuit breakers are handle after removing the cause. Failure to do so may cause an electric
designed to operate when the difference shock or a fire.
between leaving current and returning [Earth leakage circuit breaker]
current exceeds the specified value. In Ground the earth terminal of electrical equipment.
the case shown in this figure, earth Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a fire.
leakage is not detected. Therefore, Press the test button to check the operation once a month or so. If the
never touch the two bare live parts. The earth leakage circuit breaker is not turned off, it is out of order.
circuit breaker will not operate upon Earth leakage circuit breaker Consult an electrician.
occurrence of an electric shock.
Instructions for maintenance
Instructions for installation
CAUTION
CAUTION
The circuit breakers shall be maintained by persons with specialized
The electrical work shall be performed by qualified personnel (electrical
knowledge.
workers).
Before maintaining, turn off the upstream circuit breaker, and ensure that
Before performing wiring work, turn off the upstream circuit breaker, and
no current is flowing through the circuit breaker to be maintained.
ensure that no current is flowing through the circuit breaker to be wired.
Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.
Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.
Retighten the terminals periodically.
When connecting any wire, tighten the terminal screw to the torque
Failure to do so may cause a fire.
specified in the instruction manual. Failure to do so may cause a fire.
When the model comes with insulating barriers as standard accessories,
install the insulating barriers without fail. Instructions for disposal
Do not install the circuit breaker in an abnormal environment with high
temperature, high moisture, dust, corrosive gas, vibration or shock. CAUTION
Doing so may cause a fire or make the circuit breaker inoperative.
Protect the circuit breaker so that foreign particles, such as dust, When disposing of the product, treat it as industrial waste.
concrete powder and iron powder, and rain water will not enter the circuit
breaker.
Failure to do so may make the circuit breaker inoperative.
[Earth leakage circuit breaker]
When using an earth leakage circuit breaker for use only in single-phase
3-wire or 3-phase 4-wire systems, connect the neutral wire to the neutral
phase without fail. If they are not connected, the circuit breaker may not
operate in the case of open phase or overcurrent, thereby resulting in a fire.
Connect the circuit breaker to a power supply appropriate to the rating of
its body.
Failure to do so may make the circuit breaker inoperative or damage it.
Tighten securely the lead wire in the open phase to the neutral wire on
the load side.
If the wires are not connected, the open phase of the neutral wire cannot
be detected.
When there are two terminal screws for the neutral pole, tighten the
screws alternately. Failure to do so may loosen the screws, thereby
causing a fire.
2. Instructions for Application

(1) Please note that the specifications for the products in this catalog are subject to change without prior notice.
(2) The products in this catalog are designed and manufactured as general-purpose products for general
industrial uses. If you intend to use them for a special purpose, such as nuclear power, electric power,
aerospace, medical or passenger vehicle equipment or systems, please contact our sales representative.
(3) We are not responsible for compensation for damage caused by any reason not attributable to us,
opportunity loss or lost earnings of customer caused by trouble of our product, damage, secondary
damage, accidents or damage to any product other than our product caused by special circumstances or
any other operation.
12
Detailed Specifications
1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2
1) NF-C (Economy class)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
2) NF-S (Standard class)……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
3) NF-L/NF-H/NF-R (High-performance class)………………………………………………………………………………………………………
14
14
16
20
4) NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 23
2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers 24

1) NV-C (Economy class)… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 24
2) NV-S (Standard class)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 26
3) NV-H/NV-R (High-performance class)… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 28
3 Motor Protection Breakers 30

1) NF-MB… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 30
4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers 31

1) UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 31
2) UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 34
5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers 35

1) MDU Breakers………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 35
6 Miniature Circuit Breakers 44

1) BH… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 44
2) BV… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 46
7 Circuit Protectors 49
1) CP… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 49
8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 52

1) Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 52
9 Earth Leakage Relays 54

1) Earth Leakage Relays………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 54
13
Detailed
2 Specifications 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
NF-C (Economy class)

Frame (A) 30 50 60 63 100 125
Model NF30-CS NF63-CV NF125-CV
Image
2
Rated current In (A) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 50 (60) 63
3 5 10 15 20 30 (60) 63 125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 600 600 600 600 600
690V − − − − − −
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
500V − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/4 7.5/4

440V − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5
1 Detailed Specifications
IEC 60947-2 415V 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5

AC
EN 60947-2 400V 1.5/1.5 5/5 5/5 5/5 10/5 10/5
(Icu/Ics) 380V 1.5/1.5 5/5 5/5 5/5 10/5 10/5
230V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15
200V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15
DC 250V − 2.5/2.5 (*7) 2.5/2.5 (*7) 2.5/2.5 (*7) 7.5/4 (*4) 7.5/4 (*4)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 4 8 8 8 8 8
Current (*1) AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible
Suitability for isolation − Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 6,000 (AC415V) 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
Utilization category A A A A A A
Pollution degree 2 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 50 75 60 90 60 90
dimensions (mm)
c
b 96 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.9
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Cassette-type Installation and
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − d d

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud (assembled in) dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) − d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d(*5) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)

102
Shunt trip (SHT) − d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) − d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − − − − − −
Closed (S) d d d d d d
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 − d d d d d
Waterproof (W) − − d − d − d − d − d
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − − − d − d
External accessories
Mechanical Panel mounting − d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*10) Breaker mounting − d d d d d
LC d d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d
device
HL-S − d d d d d
External (F) − d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) − d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) − d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) − d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d d − −
CE marking TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)  (NK, LR, ABS)     
Automatic tripping device Hydraulic magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button − (*2) Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 140 142 144
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC.
*2 It is attached with the alarm switch. Line Line
*3 In case of a current rating of 100A, it does not specify NK rating.
*4 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively.
*5 The standard lead drawing is performd laterally. Load drawing is also available.
*6 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame Load
Load
(excluding UVT). 3-pole 4-pole
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right.
*8 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*9 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary.
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped).
*10 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.
14
2 Detailed Specifications 1
NF-C (Economy class)

225 250 400 600 630 800
NF250-CV NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW
2
(100) 125 150 Adjustable
250 250 300 350 400 500 600 630
175 200 225 (*3) 400 450 500 600 700 800
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3
600 600 690 690 690 690
− − − − − −
10/8 10/8 15/8 18/9 18/9 18/9
15/12 15/12 25/13 36/18 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 40/20 40/20 40/20 40/20
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25
15/12 (*4) 15/12 (*4) 20/10 (*4) 20/10 (*4) 20/10 (*4) −
8 8 8 8 8 8
AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
8,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
4,000 4,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
A A A A A B
3 3 3 3 3 3
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A
105 105 140 140 140 210
165 165 257 257 257 275
68 68 103 103 103 103
92 92 134 134 134 155
1.3 1.5 1.3 1.5 4.4 5.0 5.2 6.0 5.2 6.0 10.9
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
d d − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
d(*6) d(*6) d d d d
d d d d d d
− − − − − d(*9)
d d − − − −
d d d d d d
− d − d d d d d
d d d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
d d d d d d
d d d d d d
d d − − − −
d d d d d d
d d d d d d
d d d d d d
d d d d d d
d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d
− − − − − −
TÜV approval TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
     
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
148 156 162 166
Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed.
2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block.
3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.
15
Detailed
NF-S (Standard class)

Frame (A) 30 32 50 60 63
Model NF32-SV NF63-SV
Image
2
Rated current In (A) 3 4 (5) 6 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16
32 (60) 63
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 15 16 20 25 (30) 20 25 (30) 32 40 50
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 600 600
690V − − − − −
500V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5

440V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
IEC 60947-2 415V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5

AC
EN 60947-2 400V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
(Icu/Ics) 380V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
230V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 15/15
200V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 15/15
DC 250V 2.5/2.5 (*5) 2.5/2.5 (*5) 7.5/7.5 (*5) 7.5/7.5 (*5) 7.5/7.5 (*5)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8
Current (*1) AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 15,000
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 6,000 6,000 6,000 8,000 8,000
Utilization category A A A A A
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 50 75 50 75 50 75 100 50 75 100 50 75 100
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.45 0.65 0.45 0.65 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.55 0.75 1.0
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dBar stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d

102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − − − − −
Closed (S) d d d − d − d −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 d d d − d − d −
Waterproof (W) − d − d − d − − d − − d −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − − −
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting d d d − d − d −
LC d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d − d − d −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)    −  −  −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 142 142
*2 In case of a current rating of 100A, it does not specify NK rating. Line Line
(In case of NF250-SV, three and four poles can be used for up to 500 and 600VDC)
*4 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
(excluding UVT). Load
Load
*5 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. 3-pole 4-pole
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right.
*7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.
16

100 125 125 125 160 225 250
NF125-SV NF125-SGV NF125-SEV NF160-SGV NF250-SV
2
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 (100) 125 150 160
125 16-32 32-63 63-125 125-160 250
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 175 200 225 (*2)
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8
18/18 18/18 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30
25/25 25/25 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36
50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
40/40 (*3) 40/40 (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3) − 20/20 (300V) (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3)
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1)
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 25,000 50,000 25,000 40,000 25,000 25,000
10,000 10,000 30,000 10,000 15,000 10,000 10,000
A A A A A A A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A
60 90 120 60 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140
130 130 165 165 165 165 165
68 68 68 68 68 68 68
90 90 92 92 92 92 92
0.7 1.0 1.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
d d d d d d d d d d
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d d d d d d d
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d
− − − d − − −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d −
− d − − d − d − d − d − d − d −
− d − d d d d d d
d − d − d d − d d − d −
d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d
− d d − d d d d d d
− − − − − − −
Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration TÜV approval Self-declaration TÜV approval Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
 −  −  (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL) −  −  −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
144 152 154 152 148
17
Detailed

Frame (A) 250 250 400 400 600 630
Model NF250-SGV NF250-SEV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW
Image
2
Rated current In (A) 125-160 140-200 250 300 Adjustable 200 225
80-160 125-250 500 600 630
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 175-250 350 400 250 300 350 400
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
690V 8/8 8/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10
500V 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30

440V 36/36 36/36 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42
IEC 60947-2 415V 36/36 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50

AC
EN 60947-2 400V 36/36 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50
(Icu/Ics) 380V 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
230V 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
200V 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
DC 250V 20/20 (300V) (*2) − 40/40 (*2) − 40/40 (*2) 40/40 (*2)
Current AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 10,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Utilization category A A A B A A
Rated short time with stand current Icw (kA) at 0.25s − − − 5 − −
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A A N/A A N/A N/A
ca
a a 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140 185
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 165 257 257 257 257
Overall
b c 68 68 103 103 103 103

ca 92 92 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.2 4.6 5.2 6.8 6.0 7.6 5.4 6.2 8.0 5.4 6.2 8.0
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
d
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) d d d − − − − − − − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d

102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − d − d (*5) − −
Closed (S) d − d − − − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 d − d − d − d − d − d −
Waterproof (W) d − d − d − d − d − d −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 d d d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting d d − d − d − d − d −
LC d d − − − −
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL) − q − q − q − q −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 152 154 156 158 162
*2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Line Line
(excluding UVT).
*4 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Not
available for use with connection as shown on the right. Load
Load
*5 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. 3-pole 4-pole
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped) AS for flush plate type, an outline differs from a standard.
*7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.
18

630 800 800 1000 1250 1200 1600 1600
NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF800-SDW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SEW NF1600-SDW
2
Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450 Adjustable 500 600 700 Adjustable 600 700 800 Adjustable 800 1000 1200
(700) 800 1000 1250 1600
400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800 800 900 1000 1000 1200 1250 1400 1500 1600
3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
10/10 10/10 − 25/13 25/13 − 25/13 −
30/30 30/30 − 65/33 65/33 − 65/33 −
42/42 42/42 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
50/50 50/50 − 85/43 85/43 − 85/43 −
85/85 85/85 − 125/63 125/63 − 125/63 −
85/85 85/85 − 125/63 125/63 − 125/63 −
− − 40/40 − − 40/20 − 40/20
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC AC DC AC AC DC AC DC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
6,000 4,000 4,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000
1,000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
B B A B B A B B
7.6 9.6 − 20 at 0.1 20 at 0.1 − 20 at 0.1 −
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A N/A A A N/A A A
140 185 210 280 210 210 280 210 280 210 210 280 210
257 275 275 406 406 406 406 406
103 103 103 140 140 140 140 140
155 155 155 190 190 190 190 190
6.5 8.3 10.9 14.2 9.0 23.5 30.7 23.5 30.7 22.0 34.5 41.2 32.0
dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − − − − − − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d d d d d d − d − d − −
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d d d d
d (*5) d (*5) − d (*5) d (*5) − d (*5) −
− − − − − − − −
d − d − d − − − − − − −
d − d − d − − − − − − −
d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
d d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d − − − − −
− − − − − − − −
d d d d d d d d
d d d − − − − −
d d d d d d d d d d d
d d d − − − − −
d d d d d d d d − −
d d d d d − − − − −
d d d d d d d − −
− − − − − − − −
Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − Recognition in process −
q − q − − q − q − − − −
Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
164 166 168 172 172 174 176 178
19
Detailed
NF-L / NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class)

Frame (A) 50 60 63 100 125 125 125 125
Model NF63-HV NF125-HV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-RGV
Image
2 Rated current In (A)

Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use)
Number of poles
10 15 16 20 25
30 32 40 50
2 3 4 2
60
3 4 2
(63)
3 4
15 16 20 30 32 40
50 60 63 75 80 100
2 3 4 2
125
3 4
16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50
45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125
2 3 4
16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50
45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125
2 3 4
16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 40-50
50-63 63-80 80-100 100-125
2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 –
500V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/23 30/23 36/36 50/38 –

440V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 50/50 65/65 125/125

IEC 60947-2 415V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 50/50 70/70 150/150
AC
EN 60947-2 400V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 50/50 75/75 150/150
(Icu/Ics) 380V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 50/50 75/75 150/150
230V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 90/90 100/100 150/150
200V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 90/90 100/100 150/150
DC 250V 7.5/7.5 (*5) 7.5/7.5 (*5) 7.5/7.5 (*5) − − 20/20 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) −
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Current AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1) AC AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 15,000 15,000 15,000 25,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 50,000
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 8,000 8,000 8,000 10,000 10,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
Utilization category A A A A A A A A
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 50 75 100 50 75 100 50 75 100 90 120 90 120 105 140 105 140 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 165 165 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.5 1.8
d d
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) d d d d d d d d

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − − − − − − − −
Closed (S) d − d − d − d − d − d − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 d − d − d − d − d − d − d − −
Waterproof (W) − d − − d − − d − d − d − d − d − −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − d d d d d
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d d d d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*4) Breaker mounting d − d − d − d − d − d d d
LC d d d d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d d −
94
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d − d − d − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) q − q − q − q − q −  (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL)
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
*2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Line Line
(excluding UVT).
*5 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Load
Load
Not available for use with connection as shown on the right. 3-pole 4-pole
20
NF-L / NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class)

125 160 160 225 250 250 250 250
NF125-HEV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV NF250-HV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV NF250-RGV
16-32 32-63 63-125

3 4 2
125-160
3 4 2
125-160
3 4 2
125 150 160
175 200 225
3 4 2
250
3 4
125-160 140-200
2
175-250
3 4
125-160 140-200
2
175-250
3 4
125-160 160-200
2
200-250
3
2
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
10/8 8/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 −
50/38 36/36 50/38 50/38 50/38 36/36 50/38 −
65/65 50/50 65/65 65/65 65/65 50/50 65/65 125/125
70/70 50/50 70/70 70/70 70/70 50/50 70/70 150/150
75/75 50/50 75/75 75/75 75/75 50/50 75/75 150/150
75/75 50/50 75/75 75/75 75/75 50/50 75/75 150/150
100/100 90/90 100/100 100/100 100/100 90/90 100/100 150/150
100/100 90/90 100/100 100/100 100/100 90/90 100/100 150/150
− 20/20 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 20/20 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) −
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 40,000 40,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
10,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
A A A A A A A A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105
165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165
68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
92 92 92 92 92 92 92 92
1.7 2.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.5 1.8
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3)
d − − − − − − −
− d − − − − d − − −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d − −
d − d − d − d − d − d − d − −
d d d d d d d d
d − d d d − d − d d d
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d d −
− − − − − − − −
Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
 (LR, ABS, GL) −  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) q − q −  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL)
Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
154 152 152 148 152 152 152
21
Detailed
NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class)

Frame (A) 250 400 630 800
Model NF250-HEV NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF630-HEW NF630-REW NF800-HEW NF800-REW
Image
2
Rated current In (A) Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450 Adjustable 400 450
80-160 125-250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 400 500 600 630 400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800 500 600 700 800
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 10/8 35/18 − 35/18 − 15/15 −
500V 50/38 50/50 70/35 50/50 70/35 50/50 70/35

440V 65/65 65/65 125/63 65/65 125/63 65/65 125/63
IEC 60947-2 415V 70/70 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63
AC
EN 60947-2 400V 75/75 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63
(Icu/Ics) 380V 75/75 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63
230V 100/100 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75
200V 100/100 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75
DC 250V − − − − − − −
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Current AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 25,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000 4,000
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 10,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 500 500
Utilization category A B B B B B B
Rated short time with stand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s − 5 5 7.6 7.6 9.6 9.6
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A
ca
a a 105 140 140 185 140 140 185 140 210 280 210
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 257 257 257 257 275 275
Overall
b c 68 103 103 103 103 103 103

ca 92 155 155 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.7 2.2 6.0 7.6 6.0 6.5 8.3 6.0 10.9 14.2 10.9
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) d d − − − − − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
accessories
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*1) d d d d d d d d d d
Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 d d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2) d (*2)
Closed (S) − − − − − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 d − − − − − − −
Waterproof (W) d − − − − − − −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 d d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3)

129
interlock (MI) (*4) Breaker mounting d − d − d d − d d − d
LC d − − − − − −
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) − q − q q − q q − q
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 154 158 158 164 164 166 166
Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame
(excluding UVT). Line Line
*2 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary.
(Standard type is thus SLT equipped).
Load Load
3-pole 4-pole
22
NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)

125 250 400 800
NF125-UV NF250-UV NF400-UEW NF800-UEW
2
15 20 30 40 Adjustable 200 225 250 Adjustable 400 450 500
125 150 175 200 225 250
50 60 75 100 125 300 350 400 600 700 800
2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4
690 690 690 690
10/10 15/15 − 35/35
200/200 200/200 170/170 170/170
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200
− − − −
8 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 25,000 6,000 4,000
10,000 10,000 1,000 500
A A B B
− − 5 9.6
3 3 3 3
N/A N/A A A
90 120 105 140 140 280 210 280
191 240 297 322 322
68 68 200 200
90 92 252 252
1.35 1.5 1.9 2.5 2.7 3.7 16.2 25.4 27.6 33.7
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
dBar stud dBar stud − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
d − d − d − −
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1)
d (*1) d d (*1) d d d
d d d d
− − d (*2) d (*2)
− − − −
− − − −
− − − −
d d d (*3) d (*3)
d d d d
− − − −
d d − −
d d d d
d d d d
d d d d
d d d − −
d d d d
− − − −
d − d − − −
− − − −
Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
− − − −
q − q − q − −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
146 150 160 170
23
Detailed
2 Specifications 2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV-C (Economy class) Harmonic Surge Ready

Frame (A) 50 60 63 100 125
Model NV63-CV NV125-CV
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25
(60) 63 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (30) 32 40 50
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W,
Phase line (*1) 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) AC 100-240 100-440 100-240 100-440 100-240 100-440 100-440 100-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500

Time-delay High-speed
Rated current sensitivity (mA) 30 30 30

selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
at I∆n 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

Max. operating time (s)
at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
type
Max. operating time (s) (*3) − − − (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

Internal non-operating (s) (or more) − − − (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5
breaking capacities (kA)
Rated short-circuit
415V − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5

IEC 60947-2 400V − 5/5 − 5/5 − 5/5 10/5 10/5
EN 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 230V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15
200V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15
100V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15
Current AC AC AC AC AC
Reverse connection (below 230VAC) Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
operating cycles With current 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A
ca
a a 75 75 75 90 90
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.7 0.75 0.7 0.75 0.7 0.75 1.0 1.0
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Installation and
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) − − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)
Cassette-type
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)

accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 102 d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)

Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)
Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) − − − − −
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d
Test button module (TBM) 115 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Closed (S) − − − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 − − − − −
Waterproof (W) − − − − −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − d d
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting d d d d d
LC d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d
117
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition − Recognition in process − Recognition in process − Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − − − − −
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 180 182
Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage circuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, *6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to single- *7 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 630A frame.
phase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *8 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.
*2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC.
*3 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit
breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds
and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
*4 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for
installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT).
*5 Standard type is SLT equipped.
24
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV-C (Economy class) Harmonic Surge Ready

225 250 400 600 630
125 150 175 200 225

3
250
3
250 300 350 400
3
500 600
3
(630)
3 2
3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W
100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 200-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500
− −
selectable selectable selectable
0.1 0.1 0.1 − −
0.04 0.04 0.04 − −
(100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
(0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
15/12 15/12 25/13 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18
25/19 25/19 36/18 36/18 36/18
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25
36/27 36/27 50/25 50/25 50/25
36/27 36/27 50/25 − −
6 6 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
8,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
4,000 4,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
A A A A A
2 2 3 3 3
A A A A A
105 105 140 140 140
165 165 257 257 257
68 68 103 103 103
92 92 134 155 155
1.7 1.7 6.1 6.9 6.9
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
− − − − −
d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)
d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)
d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4)
d (*4) d (*4) d d d
− − − − −
d d d d d
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
− − − − −
− − − − −
− − − − −
d d d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
d d d d d
d d d d d
d d − − d
d d d d d
d d d d d
d d d d d
d d d d d
d d d d d
d d d d d
− − − − −
− − − − −
TÜV approval TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
− − − − −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
184 188 192
Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when 4. Rated operational voltage Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range
an order is placed. 100-240V 100/110/200/220/230/240V 85-264V
2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire 100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 85-484V
terminal block. 200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 170-484V
3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity
specified in the shaded cells.
25
Detailed
NV-S (Standard class) Harmonic Surge Ready

Frame (A) 30 32 50 60 63 100 125 125
Model NV32-SV NV63-SV NV125-SV NV125-SEV
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (5) 6 10 (15) (5) (10) (15) 16 20 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
(32) (60) 63 125 63-125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 16 20 25 (30) 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3)
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4
3f3W, 3f3W,
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W,
Phase line (*1) 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 3f4W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) AC 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 100-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
at I∆n 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − − − (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable)
type
Max. operating time (s) (*4) − − − − − (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable)

Internal non-operating (s) (or more) − − − − − (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 25/25 25/25 36/36
Rated short-circuit
415V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/30 30/30 36/36

IEC 60947-2 400V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/30 30/30 36/36
EN 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 230V 10/10 10/10 15/15 15/15 15/15 50/50 50/50 85/85
200V 10/10 10/10 15/15 15/15 15/15 50/50 50/50 85/85
100V 10/10 10/10 15/15 15/15 15/15 50/50 − 50/50 − 85/85
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Current AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection (below 230VAC) Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Number of Without current 10,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
operating cycles With current 6,000 6,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Utilization category A A A A A A A A
Rated short time withstand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s − − − − − − − −
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A A
ca
a a 75 75 75 75 75 90 120 90 120 105 140
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 92
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Installation and
d
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Cassette-type
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 102 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d
Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) − − − − − − − −
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d d d d d
Test button module (TBM) 115 d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
Closed (S) − − − − − − − d −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 − − − − − − − d −
Waterproof (W) − − − − − − − d −
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − − − d d d
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*8) Breaker mounting d d d d d d − d − d −
LC d d d d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d d d − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − − − − − − − −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection)
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 180 180 182 186
Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage cirsuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, *5 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend to adhesion
connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to single- attachment of a breaker as standard below 250A frame. (excluding UVT.)
phase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *6 Standard type is SLT equipped.
*2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *7 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
*3 In case of time delay type, rated current is produced with 20 amp. or more. *8 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.
*4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit *9 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.
26
NV-S (Standard class) Harmonic Surge Ready

225 250 250 400 400 600 630 630 800
NV250-SV NV250-SEV NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NV800-SEW
2
125 150 175 Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450
250 125-250 250 300 350 400 500 600 (630)
200 225 250 300 350 400 400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800
3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 3
3f3W, 3f3W,
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W,
3f3W, 1f2W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W
1f2W 1f2W
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 200-440 100-440 200-440
(30),100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 (30),100/200/500
− − − −
selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 − − − −
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 − − − −
(100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) 100/200/500selectable 100/200/500selectable (100/200/500selectable) 100/200/500selectable
(0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable
(0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) 0.1/0.5/1.0 0.1/0.5/1.0 (0.1/0.5/1.0) 0.1/0.5/1.0
Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
36/36 36/36 36/36 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42
36/36 36/36 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
36/36 36/36 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50
85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 − − 85/85 −
6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
25,000 25,000 25,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
10,000 10,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 500
A A A A B A A B A
− − − − 5 − − 7.6 9.6
2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
A A A A A A A A A
105 105 105 140 140 185 140 140 140 185 210
165 165 165 257 257 257 257 257 275
68 68 68 103 103 103 103 103 103
92 92 92 155 155 155 155 155 155
1.9 1.9 1.9 6.4 6.2 8.2 6.9 6.9 7.1 8.9 15.3
dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − − − − − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
− − − − − − − − −
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d d d d d
− − − − − − − − −
d d d d d d d d d
d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
− − d − − − − − −
− − d − d − − − d − −
− − d − d − − − d − −
d d d d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d − − − − − −
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
d d d d d d d d d
− − − − d − − d −
− − − − − − − − −
TÜV approval TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
− − − − − − − − −
Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
184 186 188 190 192 194 196
an order is placed. 100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 85-484V
2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire 200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 170-484V
terminal block.
27
Detailed
NV-H / NV-R (High-performance class) Harmonic Surge Ready

Frame (A) 50 60 63 100 125 125 225 250 250
Model NV63-HV NV125-HV NV125-HEV NV250-HV NV250-HEV
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (15) 16 20 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 125 150 175
(60) 63 125 63-125 250 125-250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3) 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 3
3f3W, 3f3W,
3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W,
Phase line (*1) 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 3f4W 3f3W, 1f2W
1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) AC 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 (30),100/200/500


selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
at I∆n 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable)
type
Max. operating time (s) (*4) − − − (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable)
Internal non-operating (s) (or more) − − − (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65
Rated short-circuit
415V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
IEC 60947-2 400V 10/8 10/8 10/8 50/38 50/38 75/75 75/75 75/75 75/75
EN 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 230V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
200V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 100/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
100V 25/19 25/19 25/19 100/75 − 100/75 − 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Current AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection (below 230VAC) − − − − − − − − −
Number of Without current 15,000 15,000 15,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000
operating cycles With current 8,000 8,000 8,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Utilization category A A A A A A A A A
Rated short time withstand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s − − − − − − − − −
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A A A
ca
a a 75 75 75 90 120 90 120 105 140 105 105 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 165 165 165 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.75 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 1.9 2.5 1.8 1.8 1.9
Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal
Installation and
d d
connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − − − − − −

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Cassette-type
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 102 d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) − − − − − − − − −
Test button module (TBM) 115 d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
Closed (S) − − − − − − − − −
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 − − − − − d − − − d
Waterproof (W) − − − − − d − − − d
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting d d d d − d − d − d d d
LC d d d d d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d d
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) − − − − − − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d − − − − − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognized
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − − − − − − − − −
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection)
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage cirsuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, *5 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend to adhesion
connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to single- attachment of a breaker as standard. (excluding UVT.)
phase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *6 Standard type is SLT equipped.
*2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *7 Not isolation compatible.
*3 In case of time delay type, rated current is prodused with 20 amp. or more. *8 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.
*4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit
28
NV-H / NV-R (High-performance class) Harmonic Surge Ready

400 400 630 800
NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400

3 4
Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400
3
Adjustable 300 350 400 500 600 630
3
Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800
3 2
3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f4W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
(30), 100/200/500 selectable (30), 100/200/500 selectable − −
0.1 0.1 − −
0.04 0.04 − −
(100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
(0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
(0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
65/65 125/63 65/65 65/65
70/70 125/63 70/70 70/70
70/70 125/63 70/70 70/70
100/100 150/75 100/100 100/100
100/100 150/75 100/100 100/100
100/100 150/75 100/100 100/100
8 8 8 8
AC AC AC AC
Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
− − − −
6,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 500
B B B B
5 5 7.6 9.6
3 3 3 3
A A A A
140 185 140 140 210
257 257 257 275
103 103 103 103
155 155 155 155
6.6 8.2 6.6 7.1 15.3
dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal
− − − −
dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud
− − − −
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5)
d d d d
− − − −
d d d d
d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
− − − −
d − d d d
d − d d d
d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
d d d d
d d d d
− − − −
d d d d
d d d d
d d d d
d d d d
d d d d
d d d d
− − − −
− − − −
Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration
Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
− − − −
Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
190 190 194 196
an order is placed. 100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 85-484V
2. The setting is set to 500mA and delivered when not specifying 200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 175-484V
the rated current sensitivity and the time of time-delay type of
operation to 2.0 seconds.
3. Specify “FP-LT” when using a flush plate product with a lead-
wire terminal block.
4. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire
terminal block.
29
Detailed
2 Specifications 3 Motor Protection Breakers
NF-MB Please specify MB

Frame (A) 30 32 50 100 225
Model NF32-SV NF63-CV NF63-SV NF125-SV NF250-SV
200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V 200/220V 400/440V
A A A A A A
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
25 5.5 11 32 7.5 15 45 11 22 7.1 1.5 − 100 − 55 225 55 110
Rated current In (A) 16 3.7 7.5 40 − 18.5 5 − 2.2 90 22 45 200 − −
Rated motor capacity (kW) 12 − 5.5 32 7.5 15 4 0.75 1.5 71 18.5 37 175 45 90
10 2.2 − 25 5.5 11 63 15 30 150 37 75
8 − 3.7 16 3.7 7.5 45 11 22 125 30 −
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 7.1 1.5 − 12 − 5.5 (40) − 18.5
5 − 2.2 10 2.2 − 32 7.5 15
(45°C for marine use) 4 0.75 1.5 8 − 3.7 (25) 5.5 11
2
(16) 3.7 7.5
(12.5) − 5.5
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
440V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 25/25 36/36
Rated short-circuit
IEC 60947-2 415V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36

EN 60947-2 AC 400V 5/5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36
(Icu/Ics) 380V 5/5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36

230V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 50/50 85/85
Current AC AC AC AC AC AC
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
operating cycles With current (440VAC) 6,000 6,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 10,000
ca
a a 75 75 75 75 90 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 130 130 130 130 130 165
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.7 1.0 1.6
accessories connections
Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − d d

Rear (B) 92 dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d
Alarm switch (AL) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1)
Closed (S) d d d d d d
Enclosure Dustproof (I) 130 d d d d d d
Waterproof (W) d d d d d d
Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − − d (*3) d (*3)
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d d d

129
interlock (MI) (*2) Breaker mounting d d d d d d
LC d d d d d d
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d d d
device
HL-S d d d d d d
117
Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d
Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d d
94
Plug-in (PM) d d d d d d
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 d d d d − −
CE marking Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration TÜV approval
Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) q q q q q q
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on Remarks: 1. The motor circuit breakers do not have an applicable rated motor
side (excluding UVT). capacity. Select a motor circuit breaker based on the total load
*2 Not isolation compatible. current of the motor.
*3 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. 2. Products with rating parenthesized are produced when an order is
placed.
3. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead wire terminal
block.
4. The circuit breaker has the rated short circuit breaking capacity
5. Please refer to “Table 4-17”, of Page 73 for details.
30
Detailed
2 Specifications 4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Frame (A) 50 100 125
Model NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU NF125-HVU
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (*4) (3) 5 10 15 20 30 60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 15 20 30 40 50 60 15 20 30 40 50 60
125 125
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (IEC 30°C) 40 50 100 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Rated AC (V) 240 240 480 480 600Y/347 600Y/347
voltage DC (V) − − − − − −
600Y/347V − − − − 18 18
UL 489 480V − − 30 30 50 50
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − − − −
240V 14 14 50 50 100 100
120V − − − − − −
DC 60V − − − − − −
690V − − 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5
500V − 7.5/4 18/9 18/9 25/13 25/13
440V 7.5/4 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
380V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
230V 15/8 15/8 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
250V − − − − − −
DC
60V − − − − − −
Current (*1) AC AC AC AC AC AC
Reverse connection − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
ca
a a 36 54 50 75 90 90 90 90
dimensions (mm)
c
b 120 150 160 160 160 160
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page d d d d d d
External accessories (*2) Cassette-type Installation and
Front (F)
accessories (*2) connections
Solderless terminal (SL) − d d d d d

Bar (BAR) 92 − d (*5) d d d d
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) − d (*5, 6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6)
Alarm switch (AL) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7)
Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 − − − − − −
Handle lock (HL) d d d d d d
127
device (HL-S) d d d d d d
117
Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 d d d d d d
cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3)
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 Standard accessory Standard accessory − − − −
CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced Line Line
that are compatible with both AC and DC. when an order is placed.
*2 These accessories differ from the general and CE/CCC products in 2. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking
specifications. Please consult us for details. capacity specified in the shaded cells.
*3 The standard structure conforms to IP20 (finger protection). 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase
*4 The rated ambient temperature for NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU, circuits.
NF125-SVU and NF125-HVU is specified at 40°C also by IEC. Load
3-pole 4-po
*5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers.
*6 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/
AMP-N) are available. In this case, a busbar terminal is not provided
on the load side.
*7 These cassette type circuit breakers can be installed by the customer.
They can be installed with their side faces in close contact (except
NF50-SVFU and UVT).
US UL Standard 489
UL File No.E167691 Body
UL File No.E108284 Accessories
Canada CSA Standard

C22.2 No.5
31
Detailed
2 Specifications 4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

Frame (A) 225 250
Model NF225-CWU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (*5) 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
250 250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (IEC 30°C) 200 225 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 3
Rated AC (V) 240 480 480 600Y/347 600Y/347
voltage DC (V) − − − − −
600Y/347V − − − 18 18
UL 489 480V − 35 35 50 50
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − − −

240V 35 65 65 100 100
120V − − − − −
DC 60V − − − − −
690V − 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5
500V 10/5 25/13 25/13 36/18 36/18
440V 15/8 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
380V 18/9 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
230V 35/18 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
250V (*3) 10/5 − − − −
DC
60V − − − − −
Current (*1) AC/DC compatible AC AC AC AC
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a a 105 105 105 105 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 185 185 185 185
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68

ca 92 92 92 92 92
Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page d d d d d
Front (F)
(*2) connections
Solderless terminal (SL) − d d d d

Bar (BAR) 92 d d d d d
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
Alarm switch (AL) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
External accessories (*2) accessories
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d
Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 d(*6) − − − −
Handle lock (HL) d d d d d
127
device (HL-S) d d d d d
117
Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 d d d d d
cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − (*4)
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − − − − −
CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 204 206 206
Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced Line Line
that are compatible with both AC and DC. when an order is placed.
*2 These accessories differ from the general products in specifications. 2. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking
Please consult us for details. capacity specified in the shaded cells.
*3 When using a 3-pole circuit breaker, use two poles. When wired as 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase
shown right, NF225-CWU can be used at up to 400 V DC. circuits.
Load L
*4 Since NF225-CWU comes with a protective cover, it has an IP20 (finger 3-pole 4-pole
protection) structure as standard. Other models have IP20 (finger
protection) structures as standard.
*5 The rated ambient temperature for NF250-SVU and NF250-HVU is
specified at 40°C also by IEC.
*6 Not isolation compatible.
*7 These cassette type circuit breakers can be installed by the customer.
They can be installed with their side faces in close contact (except
UVT). US UL Standard 489
*8 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/
AMP-N) are available. In this case, a busbar terminal is not provided UL File No.E167691 Body
on the load side. UL File No.E108284 Accessories
Canada CSA Standard

C22.2 No.5
32
UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

Frame (A) 400 630
Model NF400-SWU NF400-HWU NF630-SWU NF630-HWU
Image
2
Rated current In (A)
250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 500 600 630 500 600 630
Rated ambient temperture 40°C
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Rated AC (V) 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
voltage DC (V) − − − −
600Y/347V 20 25 20 25
UL 489 480V 35 65 35 65
CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − −
240V 65 100 85 100
120V − − − −
DC 60V − − − −
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690
690V 10/10(5/5)(*4) 15/10 10/10 15/10
500V 30/30(25/25)(*4) 42/42 30/30 42/42
440V 42/42(36/36)(*4) 65/65 42/42 65/65
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 45/45(36/36)(*4) 70/70 45/45 70/70
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45(36/36)(*4) 70/70 45/45 70/70
380V 50/50(42/42)(*4) 70/70 50/50 70/70
230V 85/85(65/65)(*4 ) 100/100 85/85 100/100
250V − − − −
DC
60V − − − −
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
Current AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection Possible Possible Possible Possible
Utilization category A A A A
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A
ca
a 140 140 210 210
dimensions (mm)
a c
b 257 257 275 275
Overall
b c 103 103 103 103

ca 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 5.7 5.7 9.6 9.6
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page − − − −
Front (F)
accessories connections
Solderless terminal (SL) d − d(*7) −

Bar (BAR) 92 d(*5) d(*5) d(*5) d(*5)
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) d(*5) − d(*5) −
Alarm switch (AL) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d d d
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d
Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2) d(*1)(*2)
Handle lock (HL) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)

127
device (HL-S) − − − −
External (F) d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d
Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 d d d d
cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 − − − −
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − − − −
CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes: *1 Not isolation compatible. Remarks: 1. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking
*2 Not acquire the TÜV certification. capacity specified in the shaded cells.
*3 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend 2. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase
to adhesion attachment of a breaker as standard below 250A frame. circuits.
(excluding UVT.)
*4 The values in parentheses apply to the circuit breakers with solderless
terminals.
*5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers.
*6 Please consult us. (Models which are not UL or TUV certified but can
be locked in the ON and OFF positions are available.)
*7 Not available for 630A.
US UL Standard 489
Canada CSA Standard

C22.2 No.5
33
Detailed
2 Specifications 4 UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (Harmonic Surge Ready)

Frame (A) 50 100 125 250
Model NV50-SVFU NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU
Image
2
Rated current In (A) (5) (10) 15 20 60 (70) 75 15 20 30 (40) 15 20 30 (40) 125 150 175 125 150 175
125 125 250 250
Rated ambient temperture 40°C 30 40 50 (80) (90) 100 50 60 75 100 50 60 75 100 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Phase line (*1) 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W
UL 489 120-240 120-240 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480
Rated operational
voltage AC V IEC 60947-2
100-240 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
EN 60947-2
30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500
High-speed
Rated current sensitivity In mA 30 50 30 50 100

selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
Pickup current, UL 1053 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln 75% of ln
Max. operating time (s) at 5ln (*4) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Earth leakage indication system Display window Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
480V − − 30 30 50 50 35 35 50 50
UL 489
AC 240V 14 14 50 50 100 100 65 65 100 100
Rated short-circuit
CSA C22.2 No.5-02

120V 14 14 50 50 100 100 65 65 100 100
440V − 7.5/4 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
IEC 60947-2 400V − 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics) 230V 15/8 15/8 15/8 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
100V 15/8 15/8 15/8 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection (below 240VAC) − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible
Utilization category A A A A A A A A A A
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A A A A A A A
ca
a a 36 54 75 90 90 90 90 105 105 105 105
dimensions (mm)
c
b 120 150 160 160 160 160 185 185 185 185
Overall
b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68
ca 90 90 90 90 90 90 92 92 92 92
Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page d d d d d d d d d d
Front (F)
External accessories (*2) accessories (*2) connections
Solderless terminal (SL) − d d d d d d d d d

Bar (BAR) 92 − d(*5) d d d d d d d d
Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) − d(*5, *6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6)
Alarm switch (AL) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
Auxiliary switch (AX) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
102
Shunt trip (SHT) − d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) − d d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 − d d d d d d d d d d
Test button module (TBM) 115 d(*9) − d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9) d(*9)
Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 − − − − − − − − − −
Handle lock (HL) d d d d d d d d d d
127
device (HL-S) d d d d d d d d d d
External (F) d d d d d d d d d d
117
operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d d d
Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 d d d d d d d d d d
cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 d(*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3)
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 Standard accessory Standard accessory − − − − − − − −
CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval
CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process
Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Page of Characteristics and dimensions 198 200 202 202 206 206
Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage circuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed.
device, connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. 2. Rated operational voltage Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range
*2 These are different from general models in specifications. Consult us
120-240V (UL) 120/240V 66-264V
for the details.
*3 The standard structure conforms to IP20 (finger protection). 120-240-480V (UL) 120/240/480V 66-528V
*4 The maximum operating time is 0.1 according to UL 1053. 240V (UL) 240V 132-264V
*5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers. 100-230V (IEC) 100/110/200/220/230V 85-253V
*6 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/ 100-240V (IEC) 100/110/200/220/230/240V 85-264V
AMP-N) are available. In this case, a bar terminal is not provided on 100/110/200/220/
100-230-400-440V (IEC)
the load side. 230/240/254/265/ 85-484V
100-440V (IEC)
*7 Circuit breakers for 100 V AC do not have obtained CCC certificate. 380/400/415/440V
*8 These cassette type accessories can be installed by the customer. 230-400-440V 230/240/254/265/
195-484V
They can be installed with their side faces in close contact with circuit (IEC) 380/400/415/440V
breakers (except NV50-SVFU and UVT).
*9 Standard type is SLT equipped.
US UL Standard 489
Canada CSA Standard

C22.2 No.144
C22.2 No.5
34
Detailed
2 Specifications 5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers
MDU Breakers
Frame (A) 250 400 630 800
Model NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU NF400-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU
Image
2
Rated current In (A) Adjustable 125-250A Adjustable 200 225 250 Adjustable 300 350 400 Adjustable 400 450 500 500
Rated ambient temperture 40°C (12.5A Step) 300 350 400 500 600 630 600 700 800
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W,
Phase line 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
690V 8/8 10/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 15/15 10/10 15/15
500V 18/18 30/23 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50

Rated short-circuit
440V 36/36 50/50 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65

415V 36/36 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
IEC 60947-2
AC 400V 36/36 75/75 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
(Icu/Ics)
380V 36/36 75/75 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
200V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
100V − − − − − − − −
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
Current AC AC AC AC
Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
Reverse connection (below 240VAC) − − − −
Number of Without current 25,000 6,000 6,000 4,000
operating cycles With current 10,000 1,000 1,000 500
Utilization category A B B B
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A A A A
ca
a a 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280
dimensions (mm)
c
b 165 257 275 275
Overall
b c 68 103 103 103

ca 92 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (Breaker mounting) (kg) 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.3 6.2 8 6.2 8 10.7 13.8 10.7 13.8 11.1 14.4 11.1 14.4
MDU installation Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*1) Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*2)
Front (F) Page
Installation and
d d d d d d d
connections
Rear (*3) (B) d d d d d d d

92
Plug-in (PM) − − − −
Alarm switch (AL) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)
Cassette-type
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) 102 d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)

Undervoltage trip (UVT) d d d d d d d
MDU transform AL, AX, AL + AX (MG) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4)
With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d d
Alarm contact Pre-alarm (PAL) d PAL 1a d PAL 1a d PAL 1a d PAL 1a
116
output (*5) Trip-indicator (TI) − d PAL 1a, OAL 1a d PAL 1a, OAL 1a d PAL 1a, OAL 1a
Electrical operation device (*6) (NFM) 133 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type Available only for the MDU panel mounting type. Disavailable alarm contact output.
Mechanical Panel mounting d d d d
129
interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting − − Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
External accessories (*2)
d(*9) d(*9)
LC d − − −
Handle lock
HL 127 d d d d
device
HL-S Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
External (F) Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
117
operating handle (V) Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
TC-L d(*8) d d(*8) d Available only for the MDU panel mounting type
Terminal TC-S d(*8) d d(*8) d −
121
cover TTC d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8)
BTC d(*8) d d(*8) d Available only for the MDU panel mounting type and line side
Rear stud (B-ST) 94 d d(*8) d d − − −
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection)
MDU measurement specifications See. 36
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Notes: *1 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the screws and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m, 5m and
10m can be specified when ordering. And dimension of the front panel drilling of the breaker is different between breaker mounting and panel mounting.
*2 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the nuts and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m, 5m and 10m
can be specified when ordering.
*3 For 250AF breakers, the studs are packed as standard. For 400/630/800AF breakers, please specify the installation angle of the studs because it is installed to the breaker before
shipping.
*4 It can be installed to the breaker by each customer.
*5 In the case of the breaker with alarm contact output, the module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker and the control power (AC/DC 100-240V 50-60Hz 5VA) is
needed. The Output function for alarm output of PAL can set “Self-holding” or “Auto-reset”. Default setup is “Auto-reset”.
*6 For 250AF of electrical operation device, AL is used for the trip indication as standard. The breaker with alarm output contact is not available.
*7 Not isolation compatible.
*8 In the case of breaker mounting, the terminal cover is special type for MDU breaker.
*9 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type.
35
Detailed
Measuring Display Unit Breakers

(Circuit Breakers with Measuring Display Unit)
dThree major features of Measuring Display Unit Breakers
1. Saving of space and labor for installation
2. Improved and diversified functions
3. Provision of total cost advantages
2 Measuring Display Unit Breakers with built-in VT and CT and Measuring Display Unit realize measurement, display and
transmission of electric circuit information in small space with less installation and wiring work and provide total cost
advantages.
The Measuring Display Unit Breakers full of functions in small bodies are suitable for monitoring and protection of electric
circuits and maintenance of equipment. A wide variety of models applicable to various networks supports the customers’ energy
saving activities through detailed energy control as energy saving supporting devices.
dSimply realizing measurement and monitoring of electric circuits for supporting

various types of energy saving control
The circuit breakers measure and display the load current, line voltage, electric power, electric energy, harmonic current, leak
current and power factor to realize detailed energy control. They support customers’ energy saving control.
WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers

Applicable models Examples of installation of measuring display unit
NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU Breaker mounting Panel mounting
dThe measuring display unit can be installed on

the body or panel.
Note: The size of holes in the face board of the circuit breaker body varies depending
on whether the measuring display unit is installed on the body or the panel.
rModel list rMeasuring Display Unit cable list

Model type Type name Type name Cable length
CC-Link communication MDU-DP-C MDU-DP-CB-2M 2m
Electric energy pulse output MDU-DP-P MDU-DP-CB-3M 3m
No transmission MDU-DP-N MDU-DP-CB-5M 5m
MDU-DP-CB-10M 10m
W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers Examples of installation of measuring display unit
Breaker mounting Panel mounting
Applicable models
NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU,
NF630-HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP with MDU, NF800-HEP with MDU
dThe measuring display unit can be installed on the body or panel.
rModel list
Model type Type name Remarks
CC-Link communication MDU-AC • The model names do not include .
Electric energy pulse output MDU-AP • When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the body, specify the A frame type in .
No transmission MDU-AN For example, when the circuit breaker NF400-SEP with MDU and the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication
are combined, the model name is MDU-AC400. If 630A frame or 800A frame is used, specify 630 or 800 in .
• When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the panel, specify the cable length (0.5 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m or 10 m) in .
For example, when the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication is installed on the panel with a 3-m cable,
the model name is MDU-AC-PANEL 3M.
36
dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (1)

The measurement and display items vary depending on the model or frame A.
(For the measurement accuracy, please refer to page 39.) Applicable models
NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU
Table 2-1
Model With CC-Link
Storage communication
Display Remarks
(*3) Communication
Measurement and memory items (accuracy) (*1) (*2)
Each phase −
Present value General (average value) (*5) −
Phase with max. value − −
Load current
2
Present value of demand Each phase −
(±1.0%)
(*4) Phase with max. value −
Max. demand value among all phases
Time of occurrence of max. demand value among all phases
Between each lines −
Present value
Line voltage General (average value) (*5) −
(±1.0%) Max. value among all lines
Time of occurrence of max. value among all lines
Fundamental wave of each phase −
Present value Each order of each phase −
General of each phase (*6) −
Max. value of fundamental wave among all phases
Time of occurrence of max. value of fundamental wave among all phases −
Harmonic current Max. value in each order of each phase
(±2.5%) Time of occurrence of max. value in each order of each phase
General of each phase (*6) −
Demand value (*4) General max. value among all phases
Time of occurrence of general max. value among all phases
General distortion factor of each phase − −
Content in each order of each phase − −
Present value −
Electric power Present value −
(±1.5%) Demand value (*4) Max. value
Time of occurrence of max. value
Present value −
Reactive power Present value −
(±2.5%) Demand value (*4) Max. value
Time of occurrence of max. value
Integrated value
Electric energy Amount for last 1 hour −
(±2.0%) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
Max. value of amount for 1 hour
(*7)
Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour
Integrated value
Reactive energy Amount for last 1 hour −
(±3.0%) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
Max. value of amount for 1 hour
(*7)
Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour
Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) Information on fault after previous reset or last fault, and cause of fault
Cause of fault (*8)
Cause of fault (continuously monitored)
Present value −
Power factor
(±5.0%) Max. value
Time of occurrence of max. value −
Frequency (±2.5%) Present value −
PAL, OVER, The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL
Alarm of circuit breaker IDM_AL, ILA_AL, IUB_AL, −
module (option) is used.
(*9)
Neutral line open phase alarm − − The neutral line open phase alarm is given only on the display.
Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) − − On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
State of ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX) − − On installation of auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
circuit breaker Number of times of tripping of circuit breaker − On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
Number of times of opening and closing of circuit breaker − On installation of auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option)
Time setting Initial setting and resetting after power failure are necessary (no power failure compensation)
By default, the demand time limit is 2 min.
Demand time limit setting (*4)
It can be set in the range from 0 to 15 min in 1-min steps.
By default, the function is off.
The parameters can be set in the following ranges.
IDM_AL (current demand alarm) Function: ON/OFF
Pickup current: 50 to 100% (1% step)
Demand time limit: 1 to 10 min (1-min step), 15, 20, 25 and 30 min
By default, the function is off.
ILA_AL (current open phase alarm) Function: ON/OFF
Pickup current: 10%, fixed (no setting)
Operating time: 30 sec (no setting)
Default settings By default, the function is off.
IUB_AL (unbalanced current alarm) Function: ON/OFF
Pickup current: 30%, fixed (no setting)
30 When the single-phase 3-wire type is set, the function is turned on.
Neutral line open phase alarm Rated operating overvoltage: 135 V AC (no setting)
Phase switching setting Default: No phase switching
Alarm retention (self-retention or automatic reset) setting Default: Automatic reset
Phase and wire type Default: 3-phase 3-wire
Electric energy arbitrary setting
Reactive energy arbitrary setting
Display direction Default: Vertical One of vertical, horizontal 1 and horizontal 2 can be selected.
Notes: *1 The term “each phase” used for load current and harmonic current refers to phase 1, 2, 3 or N. However, the phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
The term “between each phase” used for line voltage refers to between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 1 and N, 2 and N or 3 and N. However, voltage between phases 1 and N, 2
and N and 3 and N is applicable only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
These circuit breakers measure the values every 0.25 sec. Therefore, even when a low order circuit breaker operates, operating current may not be measured.
*2 Each maximum value is the largest value among values obtained from the start of operation (after the previous reset) to the present.
*3 The integrated value of electric energy and the integrated value of reactive energy are stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 30 minutes, the fault current and the cause are
stored upon occurrence of fault, the set values are stored when they are set, and other values are stored every 30 minutes in the nonvolatile E2PROM.
*4 The demand time limit cannot be set individually. It is common to the items.
*5 The average values of load current and line voltage are calculated as shown below when the phase and wire type is specified.
Phase and wire type Average present value of current Average present value of voltage
Single-phase 2-wire Average present value of current = phase 3 current Average present value of voltage = voltage between phases 2 and
Single-phase 3-wire Average present value of current = (phase 1 current + phase 3 current)/2 Average present value of voltage = (voltage between phases 1 and 2 + voltage between phases 2 and 3)/2
3-phase 3-wire Average present value of current = (phase 1 current + phase 2 current + Average present value of voltage = (voltage between phases 1 and 2 + voltage between
3-phase 4-wire phase 3 current)/3 phases 2 and 3 + voltage between phases 3 and 1 phases)/3
*6 Sum of values of harmonic components in third to 19th orders except fundamental wave component
*7 The reverse power is not measured.
*8 If the upper limit of the fault current measurement range (rated current 125 to 250 A (adjustable): 4000 A, rated current 50, 60, 75, 100, 125 A (fixed): 2000 A)) is exceeded when
overload or short circuit fault occurs, the cause of the fault may not be displayed, and the fault current may not be measured. For fault current, display of cause of fault and measurement
of fault current are enabled when the AL for transmission with the Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed.
*9 When the alarm retention mode has been set to Automatic reset, the alarm display on the Measuring Display Unit will be reset automatically. When the alarm retention mode is
Self-retention, the alarm display will be self-retained. In the self-retention mode, the display can be reset through the alarm reset operation (collective reset). OVER will be automatically
reset regardless of the mode setting.
37
Detailed
dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (1)

The measurement and display items vary depending
on the model or frame A. Applicable models
(For the measurement accuracy, please refer to page 40.) NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU,
Table 2-2
Model Electric energy With CC-Link
MDU Storage with pulse output communication
Pulse output Remarks
Display (*1) Communication
Measurement and memory items (accuracy) (*3) (*1)
2
Present value of each phase – –
Demand value of each phase Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable
Load current – –
(Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)
Average present value (*11)
(±2.5%) Max. demand value (general value) (*4) – –
–
Time of occurrence of max. value Max. demand value after previous reset
– –
(year, month, day, hour, minute)
Present value between each phases

– –
Line voltage Average present value (*11)
Max. value (general value) (*4)
– –
(±2.5%)
Time of occurrence of max. value –
– Max. value after previous reset (not demand value)
(year, month, day, hour, minute) –
Current value in 3rd, 5th, 7th … 19th orders of each phase – –

Max. value in 3rd, 5th, 7th … 19th orders (general value) (*4) –
Max. value after previous reset (not demand value)
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – –
Harmonic current
(±2.5%) Current value of general harmonics of each phase (*10) – – Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable
Demand value of general harmonics of each phase (*10) – – (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)
Max. demand value (general value) (*4) –
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – Max. demand value after previous reset
–
Current value (also reverse power is measured) – – Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable
Electric power Demand value (also reverse power is measured) – – (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)
(±2.5%) Max. demand value –
Max. demand value after previous reset
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – –
Electric energy (integrated value) (*5) Value accumulated from previous reset to present
Electric energy Electric energy per time (*5) – – Amount for 1 hour from hour to hour on built-in clock
(±2.5%) Max. value of electric energy per time (*5) –
Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute) – Max. demand value after previous reset
–
– Information on fault after previous reset or last fault,
Cause of fault Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) (*11) – and cause of fault (continuously monitored)
Power factor
Present value – –
(±5%)
Alarm of
PAL, OVER (*6) (*11) – –
circuit breaker LED on
State of Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) – – – When alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed
circuit breaker ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX) – – – When auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed
Initial setting and resetting after power failure are
Time setting – – –
necessary (no power failure compensation).
Demand time limit setting (*7) – Default: 2 min

Setting in 1-min steps in range from 0 to 15 min
PAL pickup current setting Default: 100%
* Setting on circuit breaker body – Setting in 5% steps in range from 70 to 100%

Default settings The Measuring Display Unit does Default setting on breaker body is 70% unless
not have the setting function. otherwise specified.
Default: 1 kWh/pulse
Pulse unit setting – – Setting to 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh,
1000 kWh or 10000 kWh
Phase switching setting – Default: No phase switching
Alarm retention (self-retention or automatic reset) setting – Default: Automatic reset
Notes: *1 The electric energy (integrated value) is stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 2 hours, the fault current and the cause are stored upon occurrence of fault, the demand
time limit, EPAL sensitivity current, PAL pickup current, pulse unit, alarm retention and phase switching settings are stored when they are set, and other values are stored every 2
hours in the nonvolatile E2PROM.
Each maximum value is the largest value among values obtained from the start of operation (after the previous reset) to the present.
*2 Every time the electric energy is integrated in the pulse unit (the unit can be set to 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh, 1000 kWh or 10000 kWh), a pulse is output. Counting can be
performed with a PLC.
*3 The term “each phase” used for load current and harmonic current refers to phase 1, 2, 3 or N. However, the phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
The term “between each phase” used for line voltage refers to between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 1 and N, 2 and N or 3 and N. However, voltage between phases 1 and N,
2 and N and 3 and N is applicable only on 4-pole circuit breakers.
The electric energy data is 6-digit data of up to 999999 kWh. The voltage and harmonic current are 3-digit data, and others are 4-digit.
These circuit breakers measure the values every 0.25 sec. Therefore, even when a low order circuit breaker operates, operating current may not be measured.
*4 Each general value indicates the value only of the phase with the maximum value.
*5 The electric energy is not measured in the case of reverse power flow.
*6 When the alarm retention mode has been set to Automatic reset, the PAL alarm LED display on the Measuring Display Unit front panel will be reset automatically. When the alarm
retention mode is Self-retention, the alarm display will be self-retained. In the self-retention mode, the display can be reset through alarm reset operation (collective reset). OVER
will be automatically reset regardless of the mode setting.
*7 The demand time limit cannot be set individually. It is common to the items.
*8 Sum of values of harmonic components in third to 19th orders except fundamental wave component.
*9 The average present value of load current is the average value of current among phases 1, 2 and 3 (the current of the phase N is not included even in the case of a 4-pole circuit
breaker). When the circuit breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, the calculated value is displayed. However, ignore it. The average present value of line voltage is the average
value of voltages between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and 3 and 1 (the voltages between phases 1 and N, 2 and N and 3 and N are not included in the case of a 4-pole circuit breaker).
*10 Setting at the pre-alarm current Ip (which can be set in the range from 70 to 100% of the rated current In in 5% steps) on the circuit breaker body. The Measuring Display Unit does
not have the setting function.
*11 The operating time of PAL is shown below.
PAL Same as pre-alarm operating time Tp on circuit breaker body
38
dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (2) Applicable models

NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU
Table 2-3
Item Specification
Data updating cycle 250 ms (harmonic current: 2 s)
Current and voltage: ±1.0% (to rating input)
Electric power: ±1.5% (to rating input)
Reactive power: ±2.5% (to rating input)
Harmonic current: ±2.5% (to rating input)
Tolerances Power factor: ±5%
2
Frequency: ±2.5%
Electric energy: ±2.0% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 5 to 100% of current rating, power factor 1)
Reactive energy: ±3.0% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 10 to 100% of current rating, power factor 0)
Fault current: ±15% (*1)
Demand time limit setting range 0 to 15 min (1-min steps)
Voltage circuit (1f2W, 3f3W)
Voltage circuit (1f3W) 440 V (only 4-pole breakers applicable to 3f4W)
Rated
Voltage circuit (3f4W)
input
Current circuit Load current/harmonic current: 250 A
Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz (automatic discrimination of frequency)
(1) Wh (integrated value) Stored in EEPROM (nonvolatile memory)
Power failure (2) Max. value * Wh and varh are stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 30 min.
compensation (3) Setting data * Max. value is stored every 30 min. Setting data are stored when they are set.
Clock No power failure compensation
Clock accuracy Approx. 1 min/month
External dimensions (unit: mm) See Characteristics and Dimensions.
Control power supply Compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz (allowable voltage range: 85% to 110%), 12 VA (*2)
Function for switching phases to be measured to 1-3 and 3-1
Other functions PAL alarm, self-retention/automatic reset setting function (*3)
Function for counting number of times of opening and closing of circuit breaker body (*4)
Notes: *1 The measurement of fault current of load is enabled when the AL switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit Breaker
body.
*2 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC)
*3 The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL module (option) is used.
*4 The function is enabled when the AX switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit Breaker body.
dNetwork Specifications for Measuring Display Unit

[Electric energy pulse output] [CC-Link communication]
Table 2-4 Table 2-5
Item Specification Item Specification
Output Solid state relay (SSR), no voltage a Communication speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps
Communication method Broadcast polling method
elements contact (Ca and Cb terminals: no polarity)
Synchronization method Frame synchronization method
Contact capacity Compatible with 24V DC and 100 to 200 V AC, 20 mA
Encoding method NRZI
Output pulse unit 1, 10, 100, 1000 and 10000 kWh/pulse (settable) Transmission format Conforming to HDLC
Output pulse width 0.35 to 0.45 s Number of occupied stations Remote device occupying 1 station
Max. wiring length 100m Meet the following conditions.
When a system consists only of Measuring Display Units, up to 42 units can be connected.
Condition 1 for number of connected units
(1×a) + (2×b) + (3×c) + (4×d) q 64
a: Number of units occupying 1 station
b: Number of units occupying 2 stations
Number of connected
c: Number of units occupying 3 stations
units
d: Number of units occupying 4 stations
(16×A) + (54×B) + (88×C) q 2304
A: Number of units at 1 remote I/O station q 64
B: Number of units at remote device station q 42
C: Number of units at local station q 26
Station number Setting in range from 1 to 64 (Set the station number without fail.)
CC-Link version CC-Link Ver.1.10
Master Remote I/O Remote I/O Local station Local station

station station or remote station or remote or intelligent or intelligent
device station device station device station device station
Max. total extension

cable length and Cable length between stations
cable length between
stations Max. total extension cable length
Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (with use of 110-ohm terminal resistance)
Communication speed 156kbps 625kbps 2.5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps
Cable length between stations 0.2 m or more
Max. total extension cable length 1200m 900m 400m 160m 100m
Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables)
Connecting cable
* Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be used simultaneously.
Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (HYPERLINK “http://www.cc-Link.org/”).
39
Detailed
dSpecifications for Measuring

Applicable models
dDisplay Unit (2) NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU,
Table 2-6
Item Specification
Data updating cycle 250 ms (harmonic current: 2 s)
Current, voltage and Electric power: ±2.5% (to rating input)
Power factor: ±5%
Tolerances
Electric energy: ±2.5% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 5 to 100% of current rating, power factor 1)
Fault current: ±15%
2
Demand time limit setting range 0 to 15 min (1-min steps)
Voltage circuit (1f2W, 3f3W)
Voltage circuit (1f3W) 440 V (only 4-pole breakers applicable to 3f4W)
Rated Voltage circuit (3f4W)
input Load current/harmonic current: 100 A/225 A/400 A/600 A/800 A (Automatic discrimination. Determined based on A frame of circuit breaker.
Current circuit
100 A when rated current of 225 A frame is 100 A or less) Leakage current: 500 mA
Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz (automatic discrimination of frequency)

(1) Wh (integrated value) Stored in EEPROM (nonvolatile memory)
Power failure (2) Max. value * Wh is stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 2 hours
compensation (3) Setting data * The max. value is stored every 2 hours. The setting data is stored when it is set.
Clock No power failure compensation
Clock accuracy Approx. 1 min/month
External dimensions (unit: mm) W×D×H: 90×75×30
Control power supply Compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz (allowable voltage range: 85% to 110%), 12 VA (*1)
Function for switching phases to be measured to 1-3 and 3-1
Other functions
ECA/PAL alarm, self-retention/automatic reset setting function
Note: *1 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC)
dNetwork Specifications for Measuring Display Unit

[Electric energy pulse output] [CC-Link communication]
Table 2-7 Table 2-8
Item Specification Item Specification
Output Solid state relay (SSR), no voltage a Communication speed 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps
Communication method Broadcast polling method
elements contact (Ca and Cb terminals: no polarity)
Synchronization method Frame synchronization method
Contact capacity Compatible with 24V DC and 100 to 200 V AC, 20 mA
Encoding method NRZI
Output pulse unit 1, 10, 100, 1000 and 10000 kWh/pulse (settable) Transmission format Conforming to HDLC
Output pulse width 0.35 to 0.45 s Number of occupied stations Remote device occupying 1 station
Max. wiring length 100m Meet the following conditions.
When a system consists only of Measuring Display Units, up to 42 units can be connected.
(1×a) + (2×b) + (3×c) + (4×d) q 64
a: Number of units occupying 1 station
b: Number of units occupying 2 stations
Number of connected
c: Number of units occupying 3 stations
units
d: Number of units occupying 4 stations
(16×A) + (54×B) + (88×C) q 2304
A: Number of units at 1 remote I/O station q 64
B: Number of units at remote device station q 42
C: Number of units at local station q 26
Station number Setting in range from 1 to 64 (Set the station number without fail.)
CC-Link version CC-Link Ver. 1.10
Master Remote I/O Remote I/O Local station Local station

station station or remote station or remote or intelligent or intelligent
device station device station device station device station
Cable length between stations
CMax. total extension cable length

Max. total extension Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (with use of 110-ohm terminal resistance)
cable length and
Communication speed 156kbps 625kbps 2.5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps
cable length between
Cable length between stations 0.2 m or more
stations
Max. total extension cable length 1200m 900m 400m 160m 100m
When the Measuring Display Unit is installed on the panel, the terminal block on the
panel mounting plate and the terminal block on the Measuring Display Unit are
connected with a CC-Link cable having a one-way length of 15 cm and an entire length
of 30 cm. When connecting the unit in consideration of the following three points.
(1) The one-way length of the CC-Link cable, 15 cm, is included in the distance
(1) between stations.
(2) The entire length of the CC-Link cable, 30 cm, is included in the maximum
(1) transmission distance (total extension distance).
Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables)
Connecting cable * Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be used
simultaneously.
Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (HYPERLINK “http://www.cc-Link.org/”).
40
dCautions when Using Measuring Display Unit Breakers (common instructions)

Measuring accuracy
(1) The accuracy of measurement of current or voltage is indicated as the percentage of error to the rated current or voltage for
measurement by the Measuring Display Unit.
The measurement rated current is the maximum rated current of each ampere frame. For W & WS Series Measuring Display
Unit Breakers, the accuracy is the max. rated current × ±2.5%. For WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the
accuracy is the max. rated current × ±1%.
(For example, when the rated current of NF630-SEP with Measuring Display Unit is 350 A, the measurement rated current is
630 A, and the current accuracy is 630 A × ±2.5% = ±15 A.)
2
* The measurement rated voltage is 440 V. (Common to all A frames)
When the current is less than 1.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit
Breakers or less than 2.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit
Breakers or when the voltage is less than 5.0% of the measurement rated voltage in the case of WS-V Series Measuring
Display Unit Breakers or less than 2.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of W & WS Series Measuring
Display Unit Breakers, the current or voltage is cut off, and zero is displayed.
(2) When the current is cut off, the current is displayed as 0 A. However, if the current is 0.4% or more of the measurement rated
current, the electric energy is measured.
(3) The accuracy of power factor is the percentage to electrical angle of 90°. A power factor of 50% or less is displayed as a
reference value.
(4) The accuracy of electric energy is ±2.0% of the true value in the case of WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers and
±2.5% of the true value in the case of W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers in the range of measurement rated
voltage (100 V to 440 V) × current (measurement rated current of 5 to 100%).
How to use Measuring Display Unit Breaker on single-phase 2-wire circuity

(1) Connect the breaker as shown in the right figure.
The phase 1 on the load side is charged. Insulate it. Connection on single-phase 2-wire circuit
As measurement data, use the current of the phases 2 and 3 and the voltage between the 1 2 3
phases 2 and 3.
Although the current of the phase 1 and the voltage between the phases 1 and 2 and the Line side
phases 3 and 1 are measured, ignore the measurements. The Measuring Display Unit is
designed for 3-phase 3-wire and single-phase and 3-wire circuits.
On W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the average values of load current
and line voltage are calculated from the values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 (between the
Load side
phases). Ignore these measurement values.
Also when the breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, ignore these values. ATTENTION: Live part
Load
When using any WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker, set the phase and wire type.
Phase sequence of Measuring Display Unit Breaker *Phase N is provided only on 4-pole breakers.
The phase sequence of Measuring Display Unit Breaker can be set Line side
1 2 3 N 3 2 1 N
by using the phase switching function as shown below.

When the breaker is installed vertically with the power supply side
upward (see the right figure), the phase sequence is set as stated below.
No phase switching: 1, 2, 3 and N from the left (default)
With phase switching: 3, 2, 1, and N from the left
Set the phase sequence in accordance with the installation and Load side
No phase switching (default) With phase switching
wiring methods.
Notes (1) The phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers. Busbar 1 2 3
Notes (2) Note that the position of the phase N is unchanged Load side Line side Line side Load side
Notes (2) regardless of the phase switching setting. 1 1
2 2
Reverse connection of Measuring Display 3 3
Unit Breaker Measurement phase

Phase switching setting: No phase switching
Measurement phase
Phase switching setting: With phase switching
The Measuring Display Unit Breakers cannot be connected with the
power supply and load sides set reversely.
Installation of Measuring Display Unit Breaker in close contact

The Measuring Display Unit Breakers must not be installed in close contact.
(1) In the case of 400, 630 or 800A frame, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 30 mm or more on the right side of
the breaker to connect the connecting cables and fitting the connecting cable connectors.
(2) In the case of WS-V Series Measuring display Unit Breaker, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 40 mm or
more on the right side of the breaker to connect the connecting cables.
41
Detailed
dCautions when using Measuring Display Unit Breaker (For Measuring Display Unit)
Transmission method
(1) One of No transmission, With pulse output and With CC-Link communication should be specified.
(2) W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker with CC-Link communication cannot be manufactured for installing the
Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body.
(3) When With transmission is selected, data which can be transmitted depends on the function of the Measuring Display Unit
Breaker body. The transmission options cannot be installed or changed later. Specify the options when issuing the initial
order.
(4) For the maximum number of connected units and transmission distance for each transmission type, see the following tables.
2
<WS-V Measuring Display Unit Breakers>
Tables 2-4 and 2-5
<W & WS Measuring Display Unit Breakers>
Tables 2-7 and 2-8
Installation of Measuring Display Unit

(1) When the installation of Measuring Display Unit on panel has been specified, the breaker will come with the panel mounting
parts, mounting screws and 2-m connecting cable (standard).
(The 0.5-, 3-, 5- or 10-m connecting cable can be specified.)
(2) If the installation position of the Measuring Display Unit is changed from the panel to the body or vice versa, the Measuring
Display Unit and the breaker body must be returned to the manufacturer for modification.
Measuring Display Unit Breaker with CC-Link communication

(W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers)
(1) If you intend to use the circuit breaker with its pane out on the face board, specify the installation on panel.
dChange of display direction for breaker mounting

<WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker>
(1) When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body installed in the horizontal direction, the direction of the
display can be changed according to the installation direction.
(2) The display direction is set on the display unit.
Line side
Line Load Load Line

side side side side
Load side
Default display direction Installation with line side on left Installation with line side on right
<W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker>

(1) When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body installed in the horizontal direction, the direction of the
display of Measuring Display Unit can be changed for ease in reading according to the installation direction.
(2) Remove the screws on the rear panel of the Measuring Display Unit, and change the direction according to the installation
direction.
Display of Measuring Display Unit Display of Measuring

Display Unit Measuring Display Unit
display mounting screws
Installation with power Installation with power

supply side on left supply side on right
Default direction of Measuring Display Unit display
42
MEMO
43
2
Detailed
2 Specifications 6 Miniature Circuit Breakers
Model BH BH-P
Frame (A) 70 100 100 70 100 100
Image
2
Rated current (A)

70 70, 100 70, 100 70 70, 100 70, 100

at ambient temperature 40°C
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
AC230/400V 3 − 3 −
IEC 60898-1
Rated short cirsuit
AC400V − 3 − 3
capacity (kA)
− DC125V 1 1
Instantaneous tripping Type C (5 In <, 10 In)
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c b 95 74
Dimensions
(mm)
b c 57.5 60.5
ca 77.5 79
Mass (kg) 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.13 0.26 0.38
Clamp terminal Plug-in (line) Clamp (load)
Connection (*1)
Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic
Terminal cover d −
Mounting plate d −
Optional
accessories
Terminal base − d
Lock cover d d
Approved by − LR, GL, NK − − LR, BV, AB, GL, NK −
Notes: *1 If reguired solderless terminal can be supplied.

(BH : Line and Load side, BH-P : Load side only)
44
Model BH-D6 BH-D10 BH-DN
Image
Number of poles [P] 1 2 3 4(3+N)*1 2(1+N)*1 1 2 3 4(3+N)*1 2 (1+N)*1

*2 *2 *2
Instantaneous tripping Type B, C, D Type B, C Type B, C, D Type C*2
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 440 440 230
0.5, 1, 1.6, 2,
Rated current In [A] 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 3, 4, 6, 10, 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13,
2
13, 16, 20, 6, 10, 16, 20
at ambient temperature 30°C 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
25, 32, 40
Rated AC 230V 6 – 6 10 – 4.5
short- IEC 60898-1
circuit 230/400V 6 – – 10 – –
capacity (Icn)
[kA] 400V – 6 – – 10 –
Number of Without current 8,000 10,000 20,000
operating cycles With current 8,000 10,000 20,000
Dimensions ca a 18 36 54 72 36 18 36 54 72 18
[mm] a c
b 87 87 88
b c 44 44 44
ca 70 70 70
Type of overcurrent release Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Mounting IEC35mm rail IEC35mm rail IEC35mm rail
Applicable wire size 1 to 25mm2 1 to 25mm2 1 to 10mm2
Weight [kg] 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.25 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.12
Alarm switch (AL) d d –
Mass
optional Auxiliary switch (AX) d d –
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) d d –
Terminal connection Solderless Solderless Solderless
Based on standard IEC 60898-1 IEC 60898-1 IEC 60898-1
CE marking EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration
CCC GB 10963.1 GB 10963.1 GB 10963.1
Notes: *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).
*2 Type B (3 In <,  5 In), Type C (5 In <,  10 In), Type D (10 In <,  20 In)
Model BH-D10 (For DC)
Image
Number of poles [P] 1 2

Instantaneous tripping Type B, C*3
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 250
Rated current In [A] 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13,
at ambient temperature 30°C 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Rated short- IEC 60898-2 DC 125V 10 –
circuit
capacity [kA] (Icn) 250V – 10
Number of Without current 8,000

operating cycles With current 4,000
Dimensions ca a 18 36
[mm] a c
b 87
b c 44
ca 70
Type of overcurrent release Thermal-magnetic
Mounting IEC35mm rail
Applicable wire size 1 to 25mm2
Weight [kg] 0.15 0.3
Alarm switch (AL) d
Mass
optional Auxiliary switch (AX) d
accessories
Shunt trip (SHT) d
Terminal connection Solderless
Based on standard IEC 60898-2
CE marking EN 60898-2 : Self-declaration
CCC GB 10963.2
Notes: *3 Type B: (5 In <,  7 In), Type C: (7 In <,  15 In)
45
Detailed
RCCB RCBO
Model BV-D Model BV-DN
Image Image
Number of poles [P] 2(1+N)*1 4(3+N)*1 *3 Number of poles [P] 2(1+N)*1

Rated current [A] 25, 40, 63 Rated current [A] 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
at ambient temperature 30°C at ambient temperature 30°C
2
Rated voltage [VAC] 230 230/400 Rated voltage [VAC] 230
Rated current sensitivity Inn [mA] 30, 300 Rated current sensitivity Inn [mA] 30, 100, 300
Max. operating time at 5Inn [s] 0.04 Max. operating time at 5Inn [s] 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Rated conditional short-circuit current [kA] 6 Breaking capacity [kA] sym. (IEC 61009) 4.5
Dimensions ca a 36 72 Tripping characteristics Type C*2

[mm] a c
b 85 Dimensions ca a 36
[mm] a c
b c 44 b 88
ca 70 b c 44
Mass [kg] 0.2 0.35 ca 70
Rated making and breaking capacity Im [A] 500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A) Mass [kg] 0.19
Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc [kA] 6
Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic
Rated residual making and breaking capacity Inm [A] 500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A)
Rated conditional residual short-circuit current Inc [kA] 6 Without current 20,000
Without current 8,000 Number of 20,000 (In 6,10,16,20A)
Number of operating cycles With current 15,000 (In 25A)
operating cycles With current 8,000 10,000 (In 32,40A)
Type of overcurrent release – Type of overcurrent release Thermal-magnetic
Mounting IEC35mm rail Mounting IEC35mm rail
Applicable wire size 1 to 25mm2 Applicable wire size 1 to 16mm2
Weight [kg] 0.2 0.35 Weight [kg] 0.19
Terminal connection Solderless Terminal connection Solderless
Based on standard IEC 61008-2-2 Based on standard IEC 61009-2-2
CE marking EN 61008-2-2 : Self-declaration CE marking EN 61009-2-2 : Self-declaration
CCC GB 16916.22 CCC GB 16917.22
Notes: *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).
*2 Type C: (5 In <,  10 In)
*3 For use to three phase 4-wire type. When using, it be sure to connect the neutral wire to the neutral phase. Not available for use to three phase 3-wire type.
Isolating switch
Model KB-D
Image
Number of poles [P] 1 2 3 4(3+N)

Utilization category AC22A class
Rated current [A] 32, 63, 80
Rated voltage [VAC] 230 400
Short time withstand current [A] 20 3 In, 1s
Short-circuit making capacity [A] 20 3 In
Dimensions ca a 18 36 54 72
[mm] a c
b 87
b c 44
ca 70
Mass [kg] 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36
Number of Without current 20,000

operating cycles With current 3,000
Mounting IEC35mm rail
Applicable wire size 1 to 25mm2
Weight [kg] 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Terminal connection Solderless
Based on standard IEC 60947-3
CE marking EN 60947-3 : Self-declaration
CCC GB 14048.3
46
Accessories for Miniature Circuit Breakers

Functions of Accessories
Internal accessory Function
AL Alarm switch Electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker.
AX Auxiliary switch Electrically indicates the On/Off status of the circuit breaker.
SHT Shunt trip

Electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote location.
Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or 70 to 125% of the DC rated voltage. 2
Equipping of Accessories
Model BH, BH-P, BH-DN,
Accessory BH-D6 BH-D10
BV-DN, KB-D, BV-D
AL  
AX   –
SHT  
: Accessory equipped
–: Accessory not equipped
Specifications
AL AX AL+AX AX+AX
Type
AL-05DLS AX-05DLS ALAX-05DLS AX2-05DLS
Configuration 1C 1C 2C 2C
Contact
Contact capacity 400VAC, 2A 230VAC, 5A 120VDC, 0.4A 48VDC, 1.5A 24VDC, 4A
Line – – AX AX
Function
Load AL AX AL AX
Connection Clamp terminal
Compliance standard IEC 60947-5-1
SHT
Type
SHTA400-05DLS SHTD048-05DLS
Cut-off switch Equipped
Voltage 110-400VAC 24-48VDC
110VAC 60VA
24VDC 75VA
Input power requirement 230VAC 250VA
48VDC 300VA
400VAC 750VA
Operating time [ms] < 20
Connection Solderless terminal
Compliance standard IEC 60947-2
* Secure a sufficient input power supply so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).
* The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until the time the main contact of the breaker starts to open.
47
Detailed
Combinations of Accessories
AL
AX
2AX
2 ALAX
Accessory
SHT
connection combinations
AX+SHT
AL+SHT
2AX+SHT
ALAX+SHT
Breaker AL AX AL+AX AX+AX SHT
Outline Drawing
AL-05DLS AX-05DLS ALAX-05DLS SHTA400-05DLS
AX2-05DLS SHTD048-05DLS
Type
ALAX-05DLS Solderless terminal
47.5
44.5
44.5
44.5
87
45
95
45
45
45
92
92
M3.5 screw M3.5 screw
M3.5 screw
17 44
17 44 17 44 9 18 17 44
9 9 M5 screw
70max
70max 70max 70max
Connection of Line and Load Side

AL-05DLS AX-05DLS ALAX-05DLS AX2-05DLS
Line Line Line Line
11 AXc 11 AXc
12 14 11 AX 12 AXb 12 14 11 AX 12 AXb
14 AXa 14 AXa
95 ALc 11 AXc 95 ALc 21 AXc

96 98 95 96 ALb 14 12 11 12 AXb 96 98 95 96 ALb 24 22 21 22 AXb
AL AX AL AX
98 ALa 14 AXa 98 ALa 24 AXa
Load Load Load Load
Installation of Accessories (AX, AL, SHT)

( 1) Installation (2) Removal
1 Off 2 Hook
1
3 Insert
2
4 Click
48
Detailed
2 Specifications 7 Circuit Protectors
Frame (A) 30
Model CP30-BA CP-S
Image
2
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5 2.5
Rated current (A) 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AC (V) 250 250 –
Rated voltage (V)
UL 1077 DC (V) 65 125 – 65 –
CSA C22.2 No.235 (*11) AC 2.5kA at 250V 1.5kA at 250V –
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V – 1kA at 65V –
Rated short-circuit IEC 60934 1.5kA at 230V
capacity (kA) AC 250
EN 60934 2.5kA at 120V
(Icn) 1kA at 120V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 60V 1kA at 60V
(1kA at 60V) (*7)
EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 –

IEC 60947-2 AC 2.5/2.5kA at 230V –
(Icu/Ics) DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V – –
AC-DC common use d – (*1) – (*8)
Reverse connection d –
AC250V 50/60Hz 1500A 0.02s
Rated short time current AC125V 50/60Hz 2500A 0.02s
–
(for switch only type) DC65V 1000A 0.02s
DC125V 1000A 0.02s
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 (T40) 25 (T25)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Operating characteristics
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (*2) Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Mode of tripping Medium type (M), (MD) Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM] Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]
Fast type (F) Fast type (F), (FD)
Method of operation S-type (IEC 60934)
Trip-free behaviour Trip-free (IEC 60934)
Mass (kg) 0.08 0.16 0.23 0.06 0.12 0.18
Retractable small terminal cover (TC-S) dStandard IP20 (front, terminal covers closed) [Certified of TUV] –
Inertial delay (ID) d (Medium, Slow type: AC only) d (Medium, Slow, Fast type: AC only)
Alarm switch (AL) d (1c) d (1c) (*7)
Auxiliary switch (AX) d (1c) d (1c)
Shunt trip (SHT) d (for relay type) (*3) d (for parallel and relay type: AC only)
Accessories
Large terminal cover (TC-L) d (*6) –
Flushpanel mounting brackets (FP) d –
Back facing wiring termnal (BT) d (*4), (*6) –
Lock cover (LC) – d –
Accessory terminal cover (TC) d (*6) –
20A or less : Screw terminal M4 Male tub terminal 6.3mm (#250)
Main body
Connection 30A : Screw termnal M5 [Screw terminal M4 (series type only)]
Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch Screw terminal M3.5 Male tub terminal 2.8mm (#110)
Srface, IEC rail mounting
Main body mounting method Panel mounting
Flush panel mounting (option)
International standard UL(cURus), CCC (*5) UL(UR) (*9), (*10) –
Operating characteris is
Medium type (M) only.
EN 60934 : TUV approval The rated current, 0.3A,
CE Marking EN 60934 : TUV approval (*10)
EN 60947-2 : Self-declaration (*5) 2A, 3A and 7A are not
applied.
Notes: *1 The 3-pole products are for AC use only.

*2 Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above.
*3 In poles equipped with a shunt tripping mechanism, the overcurrent tripping element is not operative (switched shunt tripping).
*4 For back-face wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with 30A, or 20A or less.
*5 UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.
*6 It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV.
*7 In case of DC use, only DC65V is available.
*8 Specify if for DC use when ordering.
*9 Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.)
*10 Connection is male tub terminal only.
*11 CP30-BA only.
Remarks: 1. Products for non-standard conditions are special order. (Low temperature, 1st and 2nd-degree moisture fungal treatment, corrosion-resistant)
2. Although a buzzing sound may occur when an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of the rated current for AC use, performance is not effected. Please take this point into
consideration when selecting units for use in quiet environments.
3. Please use in environments free of high temperatures, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact.
Also, do not use it in a circuit with inrush current or harmonics. Problems may result.
49
Detailed
2 Specifications 7 Circuit Protectors
Internal circuits and examples of application

Available
Operating characteristics dRatings of alarm switches (AL) and auxiliary switches (AX)
Internal circuit Instantaneous type High speed type Medium speed type Low speed type shunt
model (1) For CP30-BA
I F FD M MD S SD trip
Serial type AC DC
CP30-BA d d − d d d d − Classification Voltage Current (A) Voltage Current (A)
(V) Resistive load Inductive load (V) Resistive load Inductive load
Ratings of For (250) (1) (0.5) 50 1 0.5
CP-S d d d d d d d − Max.
items other general 125 3 1 30 2 1
Serial type with auxiliary switch than those load Min. 0.1A/15VAC 0.1A/15VDC
CP30-BA d d − d d d d − shaded in For minute Max. 125 0.5 − 30 0.5 −
Table 1 load Min. 1mA/24VDC, 2mA/12VDC, 5mA/6VDC
For (250) (1) (0.5) (50) (1) (0.5)
CP-S −
2
d d d d d d d Ratings general Max. 125 3 (1) 30 (2), 0.5 (1)
of items load
Serial type with alarm switch Min. 0.1A/15VAC 0.1A/15VDC
shaded in
CP30-BA − −
d d d d d d Table 1 For minute Max. 125 (0.5), 0.1 − 30 (0.5), 0.1 −
load Min. 1mA/24VDC, 2mA/12VDC, 5mA/6VDC
CP-S d d d d d d d − Remarks: 1. The switches having the ratings in parentheses are manufactured at the
Remarks: 1. customer’s request. (Specify the voltage). Such switches do not conform to UL
Relay type shunt trip Remarks: 1. (cURus), CCC or CE Marking requirements.
(with SHT) CP30-BA − − − − − − − d

SHT (2) For CP-S
CP-S − − − − − − − d AC DC
Current (A) Current (A)
Voltage (V) Voltage (V)
Parallel type shunt trip Resistive load Inductive load Resistive load Inductive load
(with SHT) 250 3 2 250 0.2 0.2
SHT CP-S − − − − − − − d 125 5 3 125 0.4 0.4
− − − 30 4 3
− − − 14 5 4
Relay type current trip Remarks: 1. When using these switches to a circuit with a minute load (125 V AC, 0.1 A or
Remarks: 1. 30 V DC, 0.1 A or less), designate the application as minute load.
CP-S d d d d d d d −
dRatings of shunt trip (SHT) coils
Parallel type current trip (1) For CP30-BA
CP-S d d d d d d d − Ratings
Rated operating voltage (V) Time rating
100-200 Compatible with 100 to 200 V AC and 100 V DC
10 sec or less
24-48 Compatible with 24 to 48 V DC
Switch type
Coil resistance, resistance and impedance (at25°C)
CP-S − − − − − − − − Voltage (V) Impedance for AC (W) DC resistance for DC (W)
24-48 − 160
100-200 2400 2100
Remarks: 1. The allowable range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage for AC and 75 to 120%
Remarks: 1. of the rated voltage for DC.
Internal accessories Remarks: 2. The time rating is 10 seconds or less. Configure the circuit on which voltage
Remarks: 1. will not be applied for more than 10 seconds.
Auxiliary switch (AX) (2) For CP-S

Operates in conjunction with the main circuit operating Ratings
Rated operating voltage (V) Time rating
mechanism to electrically retrieve the ON/OFF status of protector. 100 Compatible with 100 to 120 V AC (50/60Hz)
200 Compatible with 200 to 240 V AC (50/60Hz) 10 sec or less
Alarm switch (AL) 24, 48, 100 DC24, DC48, DC100
Coil resistance, resistance and impedance (at25°C)
Operates in conjunction with the main circuit operating Voltage (V) Impedance for AC (W) DC resistance for DC (W)
mechanism to electrically retrieve the tripping status of 24 − 110
48 − 110
protector. 100 1100 400
Remarks (1) When the handle of CP30-BA is constrained in the ON status, it 200 1100 −
Remarks (1) does not issue the alarm signal even if it is tripped. Remarks: 1. The allowable range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage for AC and 75 to 120%
Remarks: 1. of the rated voltage for DC.
Remarks (2) The alarm switch will be reset when the body is reset or turned on. Remarks: 2. The time rating is 10 seconds or less. Configure the circuit on which voltage
Remarks: 1. will not be applied for more than 10 seconds.
Shunt trip (SHT)
dOperation of auxiliary switch and alarm switch
A parallel relay type protector, which can break the circuit Switch status
Protector status
instantaneously when receiving an external signal CP30-BA, CP-S
Off or trip
AX
Inertial delay device AXa (open) / ALa (closed)
AXb (open) / ALb (closed)
Off or ON
The inertial delay device is designed to avoid unnecessary AL
AXc / ALc
operation caused by inrush current of transformer or lamp

load. The device can withstand unrepeated one pulse of crest ON
value 20 times higher than the rated current (pulse time = 8 AX
AXa (closed) / ALa (open)
ms). It can be added to circuits having high, medium and low AXb (closed) / ALb (open)
Trip
speed operating characteristics. (It cannot be added to AXc / ALc
AL
instantaneous or DC types.)
Table 1 List of numbers of internal accessories which can be fitted AL AX AL or AX SHT

AX AX More than one AL AL+AX SHT AL+SHT or AX+SHT AL+AX+SHT
Type name
1P 2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 3P 1P 2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 3P
CP30-BA − −
CP-S − − − −
Remark: 1. All accessories should be fitted on the internal accessory terminal block.
50
Circuit Protectors
Installation and connection

Installation method With screws On IEC rails With embedded fittings On panel
Appearance
Circuit protectors with AL, AX and/or SHT

cannot be installed by this method.
CP30-BA
CP-S
d
−
d
−
d
−
−
d 2
Installation posture
The operating characteristics of electromagnetic 100%
(instantaneous) type circuit protectors are not 115%

ON
ON 95%
Reference for change
affected by the installation posture. However,
when installing a fluid electromagnetic (high, ON
ON
medium or low speed) type circuit protector, pay 120% 90%

attention to the installation angle because the ON
operating current value is changed under the ON
influence of the gravity applied to the iron core in 115%

ON
95%
ON
the oil dash pot. 100%
Generally, it is recommended to use the circuit ON
No change in this direction
protectors in the vertical direction.
Electric wires which can be connected and applicable screw terminals

CP30-BA
Classification Shape of terminal Electric wire size used (mm2) Applicable screw terminals Tightening torque (N • m)
Threaded terminal 0.25-1.65 R1.25-4 R1.25-5
(standard 20 A or less M4 M4 1-1.4
specification) 1.04-2.63 R2-4 R2-5
Body
2.63-6.64 R5.5-4 R5.5-5
Cross recessed 30A M5 M5 1.8-2.2
or slotted 6.64-10.52 *8-5NS (made by JST)
Wire retaining 0.25-1.65 R1.25-3.5

Alarm and auxiliary
screw (square M3.5 0.7-0.9
switch terminals Cross recessed
washer) or slotted 1.04-2.63 R2-3.5
*Use the screw terminal 8-5NS made by JST.
51
Detailed
2 Specifications 8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series)

Frame (A) 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000
Model AE630-SW AE1000-SW AE1250-SW AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA AE2000-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA
Image
2 AE1600-SW (Drawout type) dSee the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit
Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.
Rated current (CT rating) In (A) 630 (*1) 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 (*1) 2500 3200 4000
315-346.5-378-409.5- 500-550-600- 625-687.5-750- 800-880-960- 1000-1100-1200- 1000-1100-1200- 1250-1375-1500- 1600-1760-1920- 2000-2200-2400-
Rated current setting Ir (A) (adjustable)
441-472.5-504-535.5- 650-700-750- 812.5-875-937.5- 1040-1120-1200- 1300-1400-1500- 1300-1400-1500- 1625-1750-1875- 2080-2240-2400- 2600-2800-3000-
(Rated ambient temperature 40°C)

567-598.5-630 800-850-900- 1000-1062.5- 1280-1360-1440- 1600-1700-1800- 1600-1700-1800- 2000-2125-2250- 2560-2720-2880- 3200-3400-3600-
(For marine use 45°C)
(*1) 950-1000 1125-1187.5-1250 1520-1600 1900-2000 1900-2000 (*1) 2375-2500 3040-3200 3800-4000
Number of poles 3, 4 (*2)
Rated insulation voltage V 1000
Current carrying capacity of neutral pole A 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 AC690V
(ka symmetrical RMS)
65 75
Rated breaking
BS
capacity
JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1 Ann.2 AC600V 65 75

NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS, DNV, CCS AC240-500V 65 85
Ics = % Icu 100%
Rated short-time withstand current (kA symmetrical RMS) 1 second 65 75
Suitability for isolation Compatible
Reverse connection Possible
Without current 25000 20000
Number of operating cycles With current
(690 V AC) 5000 1500 1500 1000 500
Utilization category B
Pollution degree 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A
Fixed 3-pole product 410×340×290 410×475×290
Outline dimension (mm) type 4-pole product 410×425×290 410×605×290
Height (H) x width (W) x depth (D) Drawout 3-pole product 430×300×368 430×435×368 430×439×368
type 4-pole product 430×385×368 430×565×368 430×569×368
Fixed 3-pole product 40 41 42 47 60 61 63 81
type 4-pole product 50 51 52 57 72 73 75 99
Weight (kg) Drawout 3-pole product 63 64 65 70 92 93 95 108
(Without Accessory) type 4-pole product 77 78 79 84 113 114 116 136
Cradle 3-pole product 26 31 35 36 49
only 4-pole product 30 35 43 44 61
CE Marking Self-declaration
CCC recognition ( Certified) 
Marine approval Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS, DNV, CCS)
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection)
dWhen the MCR is provided, the breaking capacity may be changed. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622.
dSee the catalog of Low-voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details of the accessories.
Notes: *1 AE630-SW and AE2000-SW having low rating types are available. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.
*2 The 4-pole products do not have obtained the marine approval.
*3 4 (HN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 50% of the rated current, for 4poles.
4 (FN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 100% of the rated current, for 4poles.
*4 ( ) shows the value for 4P FN type.
*5 Marine approval value is 138kA.
Features
d Higher reliability by High operating durability (Mechanical) d Various connections
d Increase of rated short-time withstand current Various connections for panel structures
Combination of the Electronic trip relay (ETR) with MCR (*1) enables are available. (See the following figure.)
increase of the choice coordination range.
d Applicability to increase and decrease of load and improvement of Connections
protection coordination Connections Vertical terminal Front terminal
Horizontal Vertical (*1) Front
The electronic tripping system enables detailed setting of tripping characteristics. Model
(standard) (VT) (FT)
adapter
(VTA)
adapter
(FTA)
The system uses RMS detection resistant to distorted waves.

d More improved Electronic trip relay (ETR) and transmission functions Fixed
type
(FIX)
To flexibly meet various requirements, functions suitable for purposes can be
(Standard) FIX-VT (FIX-VTA) (FIX-FTA)
selected effectively. In addition, improved measuring functions are provided,
so that the circuit breakers are applicable to CC-Link, PROFIBUS-DP and Drawout
type
MODBUS transmission and helpful in establishing various electrical circuit (DR)
measurement monitoring systems and energy-saving systems in combination (Standard) (DR-VT) (DR-FT) (DR-VTA) (DR-FTA)
Notes: *1 For AE2000-SWA, AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW, AE5000-SW and
with measuring display unit breakers. s: *1 AE6300-SW models, vertical terminal only is available.
Notes: *1 MCR is an abbreviation for marking current release. It has INST characteristic
only when the circuit breaker in the OFF state turns ON (closes). The circuit
breaker will lose the INST characteristic after closing, and it will have LTD and
STD characteristics.
52
Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers
Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series)

Frame (A) 4000 5000 6300
Model AE4000-SW AE5000-SW AE6300-SW
Image
(Reference)
AE6300-SW
(Drawout type)
dSee the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit
Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.
2
Rated current (CT rating) In (A) 4000 5000 6300
Rated current setting Ir (A) (adjustable)
2000-2200-2400-2600-2800-3000-3200-3400- 2500-2750-3000-3250-3500-3750-4000-4250- 3150-3465-3780-4095-4410-4725-5040-5355-5670-
(Rated ambient temperature 40°C)
3600-3800-4000 4500-4750-5000 5985-6300
(For marine use 45°C)
Number of poles 3, 4 (HN, FN) (*3)
Rated insulation voltage V 1000
Current carrying capacity of neutral pole A 2000 (4000) (*4) 2500 (5000) (*4) 3150 (6300) (*4)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 AC690V
(ka symmetrical RMS)
85
Rated breaking
BS
capacity
JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1 Ann.2 AC600V 85

NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS AC240-500V 130 (*5)
Ics = % Icu 100%
Rated short-time withstand current (kA symmetrical RMS) 1 second 100
Suitability for isolation Compatible
Reverse connection Possible
Without current 10000 (3P) /5000 (4P)
Number of operating cycles With current
(690 V AC) 1000
Utilization category B
Pollution degree 3
EMC environment condition (environment A or B) A
Fixed 3-pole product 414×873×290
Outline dimension (mm) type 4-pole product 414×1003×290
Height (H) x width (W) x depth (D) Drawout 3-pole product 480×875×368
type 4-pole product 480×1005×368
Fixed 3-pole product 160 160 160
type 4-pole product 180 180 180
Weight (kg) Drawout 3-pole product 233 233 240
(without Accessory) type 4-pole product 256 256 263
Cradle 3-pole product 118 118 125
only 4-pole product 133 133 140
CE Marking Self-declaration
CCC recognition ( Certified) 
Marine approval Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS)
Automatic tripping device Electronic (effective value detection)
Electronic trip relay (ETR) Type code
Additional function
Extension module(EX1) Network
BIF-CC
● Main setting module ● Optional setting module ● Power supply Display(DP1) BIF-PR
G1: Ground fault protection P1: AC DC100-240V • Display onto panel board(DP2) BIF-MD
WS1, WB1, WM1, AE630-1600-SW,
VT unit(VT)
WF1 AE2000-3200-SW, N5: Neutral pole 50% protection P2: DC24-60V
AE4000-SW E1: Earth leakage protection P3: AC100-240V / DC100-125V Wire system (when EX1 is specified)
WS2, WB2, WM2, AE2000-SWA, with output contact 3φ3W
WF2 AE4000-SWA, AP: 2nd Additional Pre-alarm
P4: DC24-60V with output contact 3φ4W
AE5000-SW NA: Without optional setting EX1
P5: DC100-240V Normal connection
WS3,WB3,WM3, AE6300-SW
WF3 ● ETR Auxiliary Equipment with output contact (SSR) Reverse connection
Temperature alarm(TAL) Normal connection: Upper terminal is connected
WS : General use to power supply.
MCR switch(MCR-SW) Reverse connection: Lower terminal is connected
WM : Generator protection use to power supply.
WB : INST/MCR only For the details of the characteristics, alarm contact output and expanded functions *The display is optional.
WF : Protective coordination use of the ETR, see the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622.
53
Detailed
2 Specifications 9 Earth Leakage Relays
Earth Leakage Relays

Interchangeable leakage relays (*1)
Harmonic surge ready Harmonic surge ready
Model Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Hole diameter mm NV-ZBA NV-ZSA NV-ZHA NV-ZLA
15 ZT15B – ZT15B – ZT15B ZT15B
30 ZT30B – ZT30B – ZT30B ZT30B
Model name of ZCT combined 40 ZT40B – ZT40B – ZT40B ZT40B
(*5) 60 – ZT60B – ZT60B ZT60B ZT60B
80 – ZT80B – ZT80B ZT80B ZT80B
100 – ZT100B – ZT100B ZT100B ZT100B
2
Image
Phase line type 3f4W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

120 • 240 selectable
JIS 120 • 240 selectable – –
Control voltage AC V
UL/JIS (*2) 120 • 240 selectable
– – 240 • 440 selectable
UL/CE (*3) 240 • 440 selectable
480
30 30
High 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated sensitivity current mA 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
speed selectable selectable
selectable selectable
type
Max. operating time (s) 0.1 0.1
JIS – –
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Rated sensitivity current mA 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
Delay (200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)
type
Operating time (s) (*4) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
High Rated sensitivity current mA 30 50 30 50
speed
type Max. operating time (s) 0.1 0.1
High
UL/JIS speed Rated sensitivity current mA – – 100 • 200 • 500 selectable 100 • 200 • 500 selectable
• Max. operating time (s) (*4) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Delay
type Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) – • 0.1 • 0.5 – • 0.1 • 0.5
High Rated sensitivity current mA 30 • 50 • 100 selectable 30 • 50 • 100 selectable
speed
type Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆n 0.04 0.04
100 • 300 • 500 selectable 100 • 300 • 500 selectable
UL/CE Rated sensitivity current mA – –
Delay 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
type
Max. operating time (s) at 2I∆n (*4) 0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
Inertial non-operating time (s) at 2I∆n 0.1 • 0.5 0.1 • 0.5
Earth leakage indication Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button) Electric type (LED) Mechanical type (button)
Push button Push button
Push button or control power Push button or control power
Resetting method (conbined with earth leakage (conbined with earth leakage
switch off switch off
indicator) indicator)
Configuration 1c 1a1c 1a1c 1a1c
Continuous current capacity A 5 5 5 5
Built-in contact
cosf=0.4 cosf=0.4 cosf=0.4 cosf=0.4

cosf=1 cosf=1 cosf=1 cosf=1
L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007 L/R=0.007
120VAC 5 2 120VAC 5 3 120VAC 5 2 120VAC 5 3
240VAC 5 2 240VAC 3 2 240VAC 5 2 240VAC 3 2
Contact capacity A 24VDC 5 2 415VAC 2 1 24VDC 5 2 480VAC 1 1
30VDC 4 3 Use auxiliary relay for AC415V contact. 30VDC 3 3
100VDC 0.4 0.4
200VDC 0.2 0.2
Front dClamp terminal dClamp terminal dClamp terminal dClamp terminal

Connection
Rear – dClamp terminal dClamp terminal dClamp terminal
Standard attachment (Front connection) Mounting screw
Mass kg Relay 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
External Terminal cover d (TC-ZBA) d (TC-ZSA) d (TC-ZSA) (*6) d (TC-ZSA) (*6)
accessories Mounting hook for IEC 35mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture d (DIN-ZBA) – – –
Max. consumption VA 3
UL1053 UL1053
US UL standard (UR certified) – – Recognized component Recognized component
Conforming
standard
(File No.E196562) (File No.E196562)

Canada CSA standard – – LR103083(Certified No.) LR103083(Certified No.)
Declaration for conformity Declaration for conformity
European CE marking – – IEC 60947-2 AnnexB IEC 60947-2 AnnexB
EN 60947-2 AnnexB EN 60947-2 AnnexB
Notes: *1 Interchangeable leakage relays can be easily combined with other relays and our ZCT. However, products Remarks: 1. Relays with rates shown in parentheses are special-
with 30mA sensitivity (excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can only be used in combination with ZT15B, ZT30B and order.
ZT40B. 2. The relay complies with CE marking conformity
*2 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and JIS standards are indicated together. For JIS declaration only when used with CE marking type
voltage indications, 100-200V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover is 240-440V MCCB with a voltage tripping device to interrupt
changeover, and 460V and 480V are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/JIS”. current during ground fault.
*3 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and CE standards are indicated together. For CE 3. NV-ZBA/ZSA
voltage indications, 120-230V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeoever is 240-440V Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
selectable, which are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/CE”. 120V 80-126V 100 • 110V • 120V
*4 When operating times are 0.3 and 0.45sec, 0.8 and 1.0sec and 1.6sec, the relay operates between 0.15 and 240V 160-252V 200 • 220 • 240V
0.45sec, 0.6 and 1.0sec and 1.2 and 2.0sec, respectively. 415V 320-484V 400 • 415 • 440V
*5 Can be combined with an interchangeable ZCT equipped with a primary conductor. Refer to the next page
for details. 4.NV-ZHA/ZLA
*6 Not UL-certified. Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
120V 80-132V 100 • 110 • 120V
240V 160-264V 200 • 220 • 230 • 240V
440V 304-484V 380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
480V 368-528V 460 • 480V
54
Earth Leakage Relays
Interchangeable ZCT
Type ZT15B ZT30B ZT40B ZT60B ZT80B ZT100B
Aperture diameter (mm) 15 30 40 60 80 100
Mass (kg) 0.2 0.4 0.6 2.0 2.6 3.3
Rated short time current 50 (peak value)
Dimensions (mm) a 48 68 85 140 160 185
b 52 52 52 90 90 90
c 70 90 100 150 169 190
e
2
d d 25 50 50 100 100 100
a
e 40 40 40 70 70 70
ZCT aperture diameter and wire size
15 30 40 60 80 100
ZCT aperture diameter (mm)
Max. 600V rated wire size in mm2 (current in amperes)
Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire 14 (88) 60 (217) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992) 800 (1185)
1f2w
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 38 (190) 60 (260) 250 (655) 400 (870) 600 (1140)
1f3w Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 250 (556) 500 (842) 725 (1095)
3f3w Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 22 (135) 60 (260) 200 (560) 325 (760) 600 (1140)
Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992)
3f4w
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable – 14 (105) 38 (190) 100 (365) 250 (655) 400 (870)
Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors

Type ZTA600A ZTA1200A ZTA2000A
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (VAC) 600
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value)
a a 227 227 360
b 256 298 250
ba
b
ba 366 444 594

c 42 78 79
c
ca ca 125 176 214
ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors

Frame (A) 600 1200 2000 3200
ZBA NV-ZBA3200
ZSA NV-ZSA3200
Type Interchangeable ELR and interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors
ZHA NV-ZHA3200
ZLA NV-ZLA3200
Number of poles 3
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value)
a a 227 227 360 490
b 256 298 250 320
ba
b
ba 366 444 594 868

c 42 78 79 111
c
ca ca 125 176 214 290

Mass (kg) 6.5 11 27 54
Control voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) Inertial non-operating time (s)
ZBA 120 • 240 (*1) 100 • 200 • 500 (*1)
High-speed type
120 • 240 (*1) 0.1 —
ZSA 100 • 200 • 500 (*1)
240 • 415 (*1)
ZBA 120 • 240 (*1) 100 • 200 • 500 (*1) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (*1) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
120 • 240 (*1) 100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

Specification of ZSA 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (*1) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
240 • 415 (*1) (200 • 500 • 1000 (*1))
ELRs
Time-delay type 100 • 200 • 500 (*1) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 (*1) – • 0.1 • 0.5
120 • 240 (*1)
( High-speed •
Time-delay type ) ZHA
240 • 440 (*1) 100 • 300 • 500 (*1)
300 • 500 • 1000 (*1)
0.45 • 1.0 (*1) (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
100 • 200 • 500 (*1) 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 (*1) – • 0.1 • 0.5
120 • 240 (*1)
ZLA 240 • 440 (*1) 100 • 300 • 500 (*1)
480 0.45 • 1.0 (*1) (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
300 • 500 • 1000 (*1)
Note: *1 Selectable.
55
2
56
MEMO
Special-purpose Breakers
3
1) Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers)… …………………………………………………………………………………………… 58
2) DC MCCBs and DSN Switches……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 58
3) 400Hz MCCBs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 58
57
3 Special-purpose Breakers 1 Mag only, DC, DSN and 400Hz
1. Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers)

NF63-CV/SV/HV AC, DC
NF125-CV/SV/HV AC, DC Rated current x 10
Fixed NF250-CV/SV/HV AC, DC (AC)
NF400-CW/SW (DC)
AC, DC
NF630-CW/SW
High: Rated current x 10
NF800-SEW AC
Low: Rated current x 2
NF800-SDW DC High: 8000A Low: 3200A
3 Adjustable
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
AC
AC
Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C,
S and H series breakers.
NF1250-SDW High: 8000A 2. For more details, contact your dealer.
DC
NF1600-SDW Low: 3200A
2. DC MCCBs and DSN Switches Wiring diagram for DC usage.

Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because
the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary DC
breakers are suitable for low voltages, special-voltage
3 DC breakers are recommended for voltages in excess of
250VDC. Breakers for 550V are all 4-pole models.
The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all Wiring diagram for DC use.
identical to the S Series breakers with the same Remark: 1. The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the one
designations.
1 Special-purpose Breakers
shown here.
Model NF63-SV NF125-SV NF250-SV NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW

Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (VDC) 400 550 440 550 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
2/2 10/10 20/20 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/20 40/20
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Remark: 1. Time constant: 10ms or below.
• DC side
These breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard communication failure (Mag Only breakers can also be
system DC side breakers. They protect the thyristor used for this purpose). Use these breakers in
from short circuiting when there is a power or combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
Model NF125-SV NF250-SV NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (VDC) 250 440 300 500 250 480 250 480 250 480 250 480 250 480
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
40/40 10/10 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20
Instantaneous trip current min.) 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 900A 1000A 1400A 2500A 3200A
• DSN switches
These are standard MCCBs without the automatic The appearance, size, drilling plan and available
tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six accessories are all identical to similar standard S and
times the rated current. C Series MCCBs.
Model DSN63-CV DSN125-CV DSN250-CV DSN400-CW DSN630-CW DSN800-CW
Rated current (A) 63 125 250 400 630 800
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC/DC) 500/250 500/250 500/250 600/250 600/250 600/250
Max. switching current (AC/DC) 378/155 750/310 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000
Model DSN32-SV DSN63-SV DSN125-SV DSN125-SGV DSN160-SGV DSN250-SV DSN250-SGV DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW
Rated current (A) 32 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (AC/DC) 500/250 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 690/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250
Max. switching current (AC/DC) 192/80 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000
3. 400Hz MCCBs
Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuits.
When standard MCCBs are used in high-frequency
• Specifications
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
circuits (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous characteristics drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to
are shifted higher. The 400Hz MCCB is recommended the standard S and H Series breakers of the same
for use in 400Hz circuits. designation.
Model NF125-SV NF125-HV NF250-SV NF250-HV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW (*1) NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
16, 20, 32, 40, 16, 20, 32, 40, 125, 150 125, 150 225, 250 200-350 300-500 400-600 600-800 800-1200
Rated current (A) 400, 500
50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 175, 200 175, 200 300, 350 adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage (V) 690
690V 8/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 25/13 25/13
Rated breaking capacity 500V 18/18 30/23 30/30 50/38 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 65/33 65/33
(kA) 440V 25/25 50/38 36/36 65/65 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 85/43 85/43
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 400V 30/30 50/38 36/36 75/75 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/43 85/43
230V 50/50 100/75 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 125/63 125/63
Note: *1 Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)
58
1 Construction and Operation
Selection
1) Construction of MCCB……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 60
2) Construction of ELCB……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 62
4 60
2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB 63

1) Selecting Procedure… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 63
2) Features and Performance………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64
3) Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature………………………………………………………………………………………… 66
4) Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity………………………………………………………………………………… 68
5) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit… …………………………………………………………………………… 69
6) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit…………………………………………………………………………………………… 71
7) Selection of Motor Protection Breaker… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 73
8) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 74
9) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side… ………………………………………………………………………………… 75
10) Combination for Selective Breaking… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 79
11) Combination for Cascade Breaking……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 81
12) International Standard Conformance List… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 83
3 Selection of ELCB 86
1) Electric Shock Protection… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 86
2) ELCB Grounding Method… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 87
3) Rated Voltage and Number of Poles……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 88
4) Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices… ………………………………………………………………………… 89
59
4 Selection 1 Construction and Operation
1. Construction of MCCB Adjustable Instantaneous Tripping Current

On electronic molded case circuit 6
8 10
12
breakers, the instantaneous tripping

current can be adjusted only by turning 4 16
the knob. Therefore, optimum II(×225A)
Arc-Extinguishing Device characteristics for load can be obtained. Example of adjusting knob
MCCBs feature excellent arc-

extinguishing performance by
virtue of the optimum
combination of grid gap,
shape, and material.
Molded case Molded case
Magnetic flux
(Cover) (Base)
Grid
Arc
Magnetic
force
Arc extinction
Contact
Switching Mechanism
The contacts open and close
rapidly, regardless of the Overcurrent
moving speed of the handle, Tripping Device
minimizing contact wear and Detects overcurrent
4 ensuring safety. and trips the circuit

breaker.
1 Selection
t n
eme
movpid
Ra
Link-mechanism
operation Terminal
Fig. 4.1 Construction
Trip Button (Push to Trip) Handle

Enables tripping mechanically 1. Trip indication
from outside, for confirming the The automatically tripped condition is indicated by the handle in the center position
operation of the accessory between ON and OFF, the yellow (or white) line cannot be seen in this position.
switches and the manual 2. Resetting
resetting function. Resetting after tripping is performed by first moving the handle to the OFF position to
engage the mechanism, then returning the handle to ON to reclose the circuit.
3. Trip-Free
Even if the handle is held at ON, the breaker will trip if an overcurrent flows.
ON OFF Trip
Handle indication
4. Contact On Mechanism
Even in the worst case in which welding occurs owing to an overcurrent, the breaker
will trip and the handle will maintain to ON, indicating the energizing state.
4-pole Breaker
• The 4-pole breaker is designed for 3-phase 4-wire circuits. A neutral pole without an overcurrent tripping U(1) V(2) W(3) N
element is provided at the right end. The construction and operation are the same as class S, H and U breakers.
(Electronic molded case circuit breakers with frame size of 1600A or less have overcurrent tripping
elements on the neutral poles.)
• Since the four poles are simultaneously opened and closed, the user will not fail in turning on
the neutral pole or carelessly open the pole.
(The standard construction is designed to close the neutral pole earlier and open it later than
the voltage pole.) Fig. 4.2 4-pole Breaker (NF250-SV)
60
4 Selection 1
Construction and Operation
Automatic Tripping Devices

Thermal-Magnetic Type
( NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV, NF125-CV/SV/HV, NF250-CV/SV/HV

NF400-CW/SW, NF630-CW/SW, NF800-SDW, etc. )
Armature Trip bar
Bimetal 1. Time-Delay Operation
An overcurrent heats and warps the bimetal to
Heater actuate the trip bar.
2. Instantaneous Operation
If the overcurrent is excessive, the amature is
attracted and the trip bar actuated.
Fig. 4.3
Thermal-Magnetic Type (NF1250-SDW)

Trip bar 1. Time-Delay Operation
An overcurrent heats and warps the bimetal to
Latch actuate the trip bar.
Bimetal
If the overcurrent is excessive, magnetization of the
Armature
Stationary core
stationary core is strong enough to attract the
armature and actuate the trip bar. 4
Heater Fig. 4.4
Hydraulic-Magnetic Type (NF30-CS etc.)
1 Selection
Armature 1. Time-Delay Operation
Pole piece
At an overcurrent flow, the magnetic force of the
Trip bar coil overcomes the spring, the core closes to the
Damping spring
pole piece, attracts the armature, and actuates the
Coil trip bar.
The delay is obtained by the viscosity of silicon oil.
Silicon oil
If the overcurrent is excessive, the armature is
instantly attracted, without the influence of the
moving core.
Moving core
Pipe Fig. 4.5
Principle of Electronic Trip Relay (ETR) Operation 1. The current flowing in each
(NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV, etc.) NF400-SEW~NF800-CEW
NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW, etc. ( ) phase is monitored by a
current transformer (CT).
2. Each phase of the transformed
Power-source side terminal Power-source side terminal
Breaking mechanism
current undergoes full-phase
Breaking mechanism
Trip coil Trip coil rectification in the rectifier circuit.
Custom C
3. After rectification, each of the
CT Microcomputer CT Microcomputer currents are converted by a peak-
Rectifying circuit
Rectifying circuit
CT CT
CV Trigger circuit
conversion and an effective-value
Trigger circuit
CT A/D CT A/D
convertor
conversion circuit.
Characteristics S/W
convertor SSW
CT
Over-current
CT
PSS
LSW
Over-current 4. The largest phase is selected
indication LED
indication LED CPU Pre-alarm from the converted currents.
CPU indication LED
WDT WDT PSW
Pre-alarm 5. Each time-delay circuit generates
output (Option)
Input and a time delay corresponding to the
Input and output output WDT:
WDT:
Watchdog timer Test input
Watchdog timer
Characteristics circuit
largest phase.
Test input Characteristics
Load-side setting part circuit Load-side
terminal
setting part 6. The trigger circuit outputs a
terminal Load-current indication LED (70%)
trigger signal.
Fig. 4.6.1 Fig. 4.6.2 7. The trip coil is excited, operating
Number of tripping devices the switching mechanism.
Descriptions (e.g. 2P1E and 2P0E) are not given in the number of poles fields of some models. For these models, the same
number of overcurrent tripping devices as the number of poles is provided in the circuit breakers.
2 poles: 2P2E, 3 poles: 3P3E, 4 poles: 4P4E or 4P3E
(Some 4-pole models do not have overcurrent tripping devices for the neutral poles.)
61
4 Selection 1 Construction and Operation
2. Construction of ELCB Switching Mechanism

The contacts open and close
rapidly, regardless of the moving
speed of the handle, minimizing
contact wear and ensuring safety.
Arc-Extinguishing Magnetic flux
Device Grid Window Frame
ELCBs feature excellent
Since the handle, trip button, test
arc-extinguishing Arc button, leakage display button and
performance by virtue Magnetic
force nameplate are located in one
of the optimum
area, it is easy to cut the panel.
combination of grid gap,
Arc extinction
shape, and material.
Sensitivity Switching Device
The rated sensitivity current can be
easily changed.
Trip Button (Push to Trip) A 3-stage switching device for
100, 200 and 500 mA and a
Enables tripping mechanically
2-stage switching device for 200
from outside, for confirming the
and 500 mA are available.
operation of the accessory
switches and the manual
resetting function. Leakage Display
Target type with display button.
The display is automatically
reset by the handle.
Overcurrent Tripping Device Test Button
4 The use of the proven The button has excellent

mechanism of ELCBs ensures durability and performance to
reliable detection of overcurrent. withstand inspection at start.
Leakage Tripping Device

The semiconductor circuit unit,
1 Selection
which is the most important part

Fig. 4.7 Construction of the device, is an electronic
type using highly reliable ICs.
For improvement of the function
for removing harmonic and surge
Rated operational voltage
100-240V
Applicable circuit voltage
100/110/200/220/230/240V
Available voltage range
80 to 264V
components, two filters are
100-440V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 80 to 484V provided to prevent unnecessary
200-440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 160 to 484V operations.
100-200-415V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 80 to 484V
200-415V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 160 to 484V
The ZCT detects any minute
current. It is covered with a
Operation magnetic shield and never
1. When an earth fault occurs, voltage is induced on the secondary operates unnecessarily owing to
side of the ZCT. motor starting current.
2. Factors of unnecessary operations, i.e. surge and noise Test button
components, are removed from the induced voltage. Transformer
High Low
3. The signal level is discriminated, and, when the level exceeds the voltage voltage
specified level, the electromagnetic device is excited to trip the ZCT
M
circuit breaker body.
3
Overload and short-circuit
The use of the proven mechanism of ELCBs ensures reliable
Magnetic
device
Senstivity
detection of overcurrent and earth fault to break the circuit. EB selector ED
Revision to EN and GB Standards

Leakage display
Products for European markets must conform to the CE Marking M: Motor
ZCT: Zero-phase-sequence current transformer
Directives. To affix the CE mark to a product, it is necessary that the
product conforms to European Standard (EN Standard). Fig. 4.8 Circuit configuration of ELCB
Products for China must conform to Chinese GB Standard to affix Fig. 4.8 (NV63-SV)
the CCC mark.
The third edition (2003) of EN Standard for circuit breakers, EN
60947-2, and GB Standard GB 14048.2 (2008) prescribe that the
R
functions of earth leakage circuit breakers should normally work
even in open phase condition. Products based on the previous EN S
Standard (second edition) have not been approved since June, T
2006. Products based on the previous GB Standard (2001) have Earth fault
not been approved since January, 2011. detecting
electronic
qWS-V Series Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (conforming to CE circuit
and CCC Standards) and UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit
Breakers with earth leakage protection conform to the third edition
Fig. 4.9 Circuit diagram in 3-phase power supply ELCB
of EN 60947-2 and GB 14048.2 2008 as 3-phase power supply
earth leakage circuit breakers.
62
4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB
1. Selecting Procedure
MCCB (NF)
Phase and wire type, voltage, Applicable phase and wire type 2 poles: 1-phase 2-wire 3 poles: 1-phase 2-wire, 1-phase 3-wire, 3-phase 3-wire 4 poles: 3-phase 4-wire
Circuit used DC or AC, frequency, Specification list (pages 12 to 33)
Applicable standard standard List of received certifications (page 84)
Kind and size of electric wire

Relationship between temperature and electric wire (page 66)
Kind and working conditions
Selection of circuit breaker for motor branch circuit (page 71)
Determination of of load
Selection of circuit breaker for electric lamp or electric heater circuit (page 69)
Selection conditions in internal
rated current standard and electrical
Selection of motor protection breaker (page 73)
Selection of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74)
equipment technical
Selection of circuit breaker on transformer primary side (page 75)
standards
Determination of Transformer capacity

Application based on breaking capacity (page 68)
Electric wire thickness and
interrupting capacity length Table of combinations for cascade breaking (page 81)
Examination of Selective breaking Operating characteristic curve (pages 140 to 216)

coordination Table of combinations for selective breaking (page 79)
Determination of model Use Circuit Breakers for special purpose (pages 58)
Connection and molded case Installation and connection (pages 92 to 100)
4
Installation method circuit breaker Boxed Circuit Breakers (page 130)
Internal accessories and Internal accessories (pages 102 to 116)

Accessories external accessories External accessories (pages 117 to 137)
Electric operation Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers (pages 133 to 135)
2 Selection
ELCB (NV)
Circuit used Phase and wire type, voltage, Specification list (pages 22 to 32)
DC or AC, frequency,
Applicable standard standard List of received certifications (page 84)
Kind and size of electric wire

Kind and working conditions Relationship between temperature and electric wire (page 66)
Determination of of load Selection of circuit breaker for motor branch circuit (page 71)
Selection conditions in internal Selection of circuit breaker for electric lamp or electric heater circuit (page 69)
rated current standard and electrical Selection of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74)
equipment technical Selection of circuit breaker on transformer primary side (page 75)
standards
Determination of Transformer capacity Application based on breaking capacity (page 68)

Electric wire thickness and
interrupting capacity length Table of combinations for cascade breaking (page 81)
Determination of Purpose of protection Purpose of protection (page 86)

rated sensitivity Obligation of installation Selection of rated sensitivity current of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74)
Method of switching between rated voltage and rated sensitivity current (page 246)
current
Examination of Selective breaking Operating characteristic curve (pages 180 to 203)

Ground fault protection Table of combinations for selective breaking (page 79)
coordination coordination Combinations of ground fault protection coordination and devices (page 89)
Determination of model Use Circuit Breakers for special purpose (pages 58)
Connection and molded case

Installation method circuit breaker Installation and connection (pages 92 to 100) Boxed Circuit Breakers (page 130)
Internal accessories and Internal accessories (pages 102 to 116)

Accessories external accessories External accessories (pages 117 to 137)
Electric operation Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers (pages 133 to 135)
63
2. Features and Performance

Features of MCCB
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (NF)
qTime-delay trip function
This function conforms to the allowable current and time Table 4-1 Overcurrent trip operating time (IEC 60947-2)
characteristics of electric wire and prevents operation Rated current of circuit breaker Operating time
caused by the staring current of a load device. When the (A) for 130% current
63 or less Within 1 hr.
overcurrent is large, the operating time is short, and when Over 63 Within 2 hrs.
the overcurrent is small, the operating time is long.
In the case of electronic type
The electronic time-delay trip function includes a long time
limit trip function conforming to the allowable current and Occurrence Operation Start of opening Completion
time characteristics of conductor and a short time limit trip of short-circuit of tripping device of contact of breaking
function for selective breaking for branch NFB. The short Relay time Mechanism delay time Arc time
time limit function operates after a delay of some cycles
(0.06 to 0.3 s) at overcurrent exceeding the short time Contact parting time
limit tripping current. These functions can be adjusted by Max. total interrupting time
the knob. Since the relay time is normally 2 to 5 ms, if large current flows for
wInstantaneous trip function more than this time, the circuit breaker operates instantaneously.
This function breaks the circuit immediately when short-
Fig. 4.10 Instantaneous operating time
circuit current flows. A circuit breaker on which the
instantaneous tripping current is adjustable has the
4 advantage that coordination in operation with other

protective devices, such as electromagnetic switches and
low-voltage air circuit breakers, can be easily obtained. The
instantaneous operating time (total interrupting time) can be
divided as shown in Fig. 4-10.
2 Selection
eOperating characteristic curve

The operating characteristic curve indicates the relationship
between magnitude of overcurrent and operating time. The
maximum-minimum operating characteristic curve indicates
that the operating time is in the range. Figs. 4-11 and 4-12
show examples of operating characteristic curves.
Long time limit tripping

Max (adjustable)
Max
Operating time
Operating time
Min
Short time limit tripping
(adjustable)
Min
Instantaneous tripping
Max. total interrupting time
Recoverable (adjustable)
time
Max. total interrupting time
Relay time
Long time Short time Relay time
Time delay tripping Instantaneous tripping limit tripping limit tripping Instantaneous tripping
Current Current
Fig. 4.11 Example of operating characteristic curve Fig. 4.12 Example of operating characteristic curve of electronic type
Motor Protection Breakers

The motor protection breakers are circuit breakers to be There are many kinds of motors, and the motors have
used to protect general induction motors. They prevent various allowable characteristics for overcurrent. Therefore,
motors being burnt not only by short-circuit current of when applying a motor breaker, it is necessary to compare
circuits, but also by overcurrent caused by overload the allowable characteristics and the operating
operation and locking of motors. characteristics of the motor breaker.
The Motor Protection Breakers are finely classified Note that, particularly, submersible motors may not be
according to rated current so that the breakers can be protected by ordinary motor breakers because their
applied to various types of motors. allowable locked time is short.
Although their time-delay trip and instantaneous trip When the motor starting current is large and the starting
functions are almost the same as those of MCCB, they are time is long and when the frequency of intermittent operation
designed to operate within 2 seconds to 30 seconds at is high, motor breakers are unsuitable. In such a case, the
600% of the rated current in consideration of protection from use of a combination of an electromagnetic switch and
motor starting current and locked current. MCCB (combination starter) is recommended.
64
4 Selection 2
Selection of MCCB and ELCB
Characteristics of MCCB for DC circuits

When a 2-pole MCCB (250 V DC or less) is used on a DC circuit, connect the poles in series. When a 3- or 4-pole MCCB is
used, refer to page 60 (for special DC voltage) or pages 14 to 21 (for DC).
If the breaker is not connected as specified, its tripping characteristics and breaking performance will change, and it cannot be
used.
Current-limiting characteristic
The current limiting refers to reduction of estimated short-circuit current
Current
depending on the circuit to prevent flow of the larger short-circuit current. Conventional short-circuit
current waveform
The use of a class S, H or R which has excellent current-limiting
characteristic or class U enables to reduce the passing energy at short-
circuiting and protect the devices in the electric circuit from Max. peak current
electromagnetic force and thermal stress. Passing current
Time
(AC415V) (×106)
100 400 40
80
Max. passing energy I2 t (A2 · s)

60 200 20
Short-circuit current max.
40 peak value NF800-UEW
NF250-SV NF250-HV
Max. peak current Ip (kA)
100 10
Max. peak current Ip (kA)
80 NF800-UEW 8
NF125-SV/HV (125A)
NF125-SV/HV (40 to 100A) 60 NF400-UEW 6
20
Short-circuit current 40 4 NF400-UEW
NF125-SV/HV (30A)
max. peak value NF250-UV
NF125-SV/HV (20A)
10 NF125-SV/HV (15A) 20 NF125-UV 2
8
6 NF63-SV/HV 10 1
8 0.8
4 6 0.6 NF250-UV
4
4 0.4
2 NF125-UV
2 0.2
1 1 0.1
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80100 200 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80100 200
Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym. Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym. Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym.
Fig. 4.13 Fig. 4.14 Fig. 4.15
2 Selection
Passing current peak value Passing current peak value Passing I²t characteristic
characteristic of classes S and H characteristic of classes U of class U (415 VAC)
(415 VAC) (415 VAC)
Performance
Short-circuit breaking performance Opening/closing performance
Short-circuit current corresponding to the rated interrupting Table 4-2 shows the durability against opening and closing.
capacity is interrupted. See the durability against opening and closing as reference
Outline of short-circuit test (IEC 60947-2) when using a circuit breaker as a switchgear.
qRated limit short-circuit interrupting capacity (Icu) The durability against tripping by SHT (shunt tripping device),
Operating duty: O – 3 min – CO UVT (undervoltage tripping device) and trip button is 10% of
wRated service short-circuit interrupting capacity (Ics) the total durability against opening and closing.
Operating duty: O – 3 min – CO – 3 min – CO Note: Opening and closing operations are regarded as one
Upper limit of temperature rise of terminal after breaking: time.
80K or less If a circuit breaker is regularly used to trip, the life of the
O duty: The circuit breaker in the ON status carries and circuit breaker will be significantly reduced.
interrupts short-circuit current.
Table 4-2 D
urability of MCCB against opening and closing
CO duty: A shorted circuit is formed, and the circuit
(IEC 60947-2)
breaker is turned on to carry and interrupt short-circuit
current. Rated current Frequency of opening Durability against opening and closing (times)
(A) and closing (times/hour) With Without
Total current flow current flow
100 or less 120 1500 8500 10000
101 to 315 120 1000 7000 8000
316 to 630 60 1000 4000 5000
631 to 2500 20 500 2500 3000
2501 or more 10 500 1500 2000
65
3. Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature

Operating current vs. ambient temperature
Rated current of circuit breakers is adjusted for the rated ambient temperature. This is because circuit breakers are
often installed in a casing as a switchboard or a control board, and temperature of the installed place of the breaker
becomes higher than ambient temperature of the wires. If temperature of the installation site of circuit breakers
greatly differ from the rated ambient temperature, it is necessary to correct rated current according to the
temperature correction curve (shown in the Paragraph of characteristics and outside shape in the catalog). Load
current can be increased up to the rated current corrected according to ambient temperature.
However, set current rating with enough allowance while taking fluctuation of power voltage and load current into
consideration so that maximum operating current may not exceed the rated current.
(1) Cautionary instructions for using heat resistive wire

For using insulated wires of higher heat resistance than that of 600 V PVC insulated wire (allowable temperature
60°C), it is necessary to take the following points into consideration.
For circuit breakers, size of test wire is stipulated by each test current in IEC60947-1
If size of connection wire is thinner than the test wire size, temperature of the breaker terminals increases and
overcurrent tripping operation characteristic may change in some cases. (Operating time becomes shorter usually.)
4 At motor load, for example, influence of change in operation characteristic by difference in size of connection wire
is insignificant and can be disregarded because the load current is far lower than the rated current of the circuit
breaker.
2 Selection
Table 4-3 Size of test wire

Range of test current Conductor size
(A) (mm2)
0 < ≤ 8 1.0
8 12 1.5
12 15 2.5
15 20 2.5
20 25 4.0
25 32 6.0
32 50 10
50 65 16
65 85 25
85 100 35
100 115 35
115 130 50
130 115 50
150 175 70
175 200 95
200 225 95
225 250 120
250 275 150
275 300 185
300 350 185
350 400 240
66
4 Selection 2
(2) Connection of aluminum conductors

• When aluminum conductors are connected, be careful to prevent the contact resistance (due to the oxidized film
of aluminum) from being increased.
• The surface of the connection point of the aluminum conductors shall be properly treated by plating (zinc
displacement-Copper-Silver) or by joint compound. If the treatment is done only by joint compound, reliability is
low, this should be limited to when plating is impossible (eg. at site).
• For aluminum cables, use compression terminals that are exclusively for aluminum cables.
• The compression portion of the terminal shall be provided with taping, and the aluminum wire shall not be
exposed to the atmosphere.
Taping
Circuit breaker
Aluminum cable
Compression terminal for

aluminum cable
Fig. 4.16 Example of connection of aluminum conductor 4

(3) Maximum operating current of installation without clearance between breakers
2 Selection
In case of installation without clearance between breakers, because malfunction failures can result by heat of
breaker, use the operating current not to exceed the below value.
Table 4-4
Model Maximum operating current
BH BH-P
CP30-BA CP-B CP-S
NF30-CS
NF32-SV NF63-CV NV32-SV NV63-CV
NF63-SV NF63-HV NV63-SV NV63-HV
NF125-CV NF125-SGV NF125-SEV NV125-CV
NF125-SV NF125-LGV NF125-HEV NV125-SV 80% of rated current
NF125-HV NF125-HGV NV125-HV
NF125-RGV
NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV
NF250-CV NF250-LGV NV250-CV
NF250-SV NF250-SGV NV250-SV NV250-SEV
NF250-HV NF250-HGV NF250-RGV NV250-HV NV250-HEV
NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW

NF400-REW NF400-UEW NV400-REW
NF630-CW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NV630-CW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW 90% of rated current
NF630-REW
NF800-CEW NF800-SDW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
NF800-REW NF800-UEW
67
4. Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity

MCCB (NF) Class C, FAU Series Classes S, H and R
Table 4-5 230VAC ( The correlation between transformers and interrupting capacities is intended for short-circuiting just under the secondary
voltage of 3-phase standard transformer, 210 V or 420 V, or the voltage of single-phase 3-wire transformer, 210 V. )
3ph trans. capacity (kVA) 30 or less 50 to 75 100 150 to 300 500 to 1500 2000 to 3000
1ph trans. capacity (kVA) 20 or less 30 to 50 75 100 to 150 200 to 300 −
Breaking
2.5 5 7.5 10 15 25 30 35 36 50 85 100 125 150 170 200
capacity (kA) (sym)
NF30-CS
30 • 32 NF32-SV
NF30-FAU (*1)
50 • 60 • 63 NF50-FAU
(*1) NF63-CV NF63-SV NF63-HV
NF125-SEV NF125-HEV
100 • 125 NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-RGV NF125-UV
Frame (A)
NF125-HV
NF250-SV NF250-HV
225 • 250 NF250-CV NF250-RGV NF250-UV
NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
400 NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW
600 • 630 NF630-CW NF630-SW/SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW
800 NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW
1000 to 4000 NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW
*1 The breaking capacity of NF30-FAU and NF50-FAU having a rated current of 5 A is 1.5 kA.
Table 4-6 440VAC

Trans. capacity (kVA) 30 or less 50 to 100 150 to 300 500 to 1000 1500 to 2000 2500 to 5000
Breaking
1.5 2.5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 35 36 50 65 85 125 200
capacity (kA) (sym)
4 30 • 32 NF30-CS NF32-SV
50 • 60 • 63 NF63-CV NF63-SV NF63-HV

NF125-SV NF125-HV
100 • 125 NF125-CV NF125-RV NF125-UV
NF125-SEV NF125-HEV
Frame (A)
2 Selection
NF250-SV NF250-HV
225 • 250 NF250-CV NF250-RV NF250-UV
NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
400 NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW
600 • 630 NF630-CW NF630-SW/SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW
800 NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW
1000 to 4000 NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW
ELCB (NV) Class C, FAU Series Classes S, H and R
Table 4-7 230VAC ( The correlation between transformers and interrupting current is intended for short-circuiting just under the secondary
voltage of 3-phase standard transformer, 210 V or 420 V, or the voltage of single-phase 3-wire transformer, 210 V. )
3ph trans. capacity (kVA) 30 or less 50 to 75 100 150 to 300 500 to 1500 2000 to 3000
1ph trans. capacity (kVA) 20 or less 30 to 50 75 100 to 150 200 to 300 −
Breaking
1.5 2.5 5 7.5 10 15 25 30 35 36 50 85 100 125
capacity (kA) (sym)
30 • 32 NV30-FAU (*1) NV32-SV
50 • 60 • 63 NV50-FAU (*1) NV63-CV NV63-SV NV63-HV

Frame (A)
NV125-SV NV125-HV
100 • 125 NV125-CV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV
NV250-SV NV250-HV
225 • 250 NV250-CV
NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
400 NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW
600 • 630 NV630-CW NV630-SW/SEW NV630-HEW
800 NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
*1 The interrupting current of NF30-FAU and NF50-FAU having a rated current of 5 A is 1.5 kA.
Table 4-8 440VAC

Trans. capacity (kVA) 30 or less 50 to 100 150 to 300 500 to 1000 1500 to 2000 2500 to 5000
Breaking
2.5 5 7.5 10 15 25 30 35 36 50 65 70 85 125
capacity (kA) (sym)
30 • 32 NV32-SV
50 • 60 • 63 NV63-CV NV63-SV NV63-HV
NV125-HV
100 • 125 NV125-CV
Frame (A)
NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV

NV250-SV NV250-HV
225 • 250 NV250-CV
NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
400 NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW
600 • 630 NV630-CW NV630-SW/SEW NV630-HEW
800 NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
68
4 Selection 2
In some lighting apparatuses, the service life of circuit breakers may be reduced by the influence of inrush current applied when
the lamps are turned on. Periodically check for abnormal temperature rise of the circuit breaker in such an apparatus.
5. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit

The maximum working current is 0.8 times the rated current of each circuit breaker.
MCCB (NF)
Table 4-9 230VAC
Max. working Rated current Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym)
of circuit 2.5 5 7.5 10 15 25 30 36 50 85 100 125 150 170 200
current (A) breaker (A)
12 15
16 20 NF30-CS BH-P NF32-SV
BH-P (110/220V) NF125-HV
24 30 NF125-SV
NF63-SV NF63-HV
32 40
BH-P (110/220V)
40 50 NF63-CV NF125-RGV NF125-UV
48 60
NF125-SV NF125-HV
60 75
NF125-SEV NF125-HV NF125-HEV
80 100 NF125-CV
100 NF125-SEV
125
120 150
140 175
NF250-SV NF250-HV
160 200 NF250-CV NF250-RGV NF250-UV
NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
180 225
200 250
240 300
NF400-SW NF400 NF400
280 350 NF400-CW NF400-REW
NF400-SEW -HEW -UEW
320 400
400 500 NF630-SW NF630
NF630-CW NF630-REW
480 600 NF630-SEW -HEW NF800
560 700 NF800 -UEW
NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-REW
640 800 -HEW
800
960
1120
1000
1200
1400
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
4
1280 1600
2 Selection
Table 4-10 440VAC
of circuit 1.5 2.5 5 7.5 10 25 30 36 45 50 70 85 125 150 200
current (A) breaker (A)
12 15
NF125-SV
16 20 NF30-CS NF32-SV NF32-SV

NF125-HV
24 30
NF63-SV NF63-HV
32 40
NF63-CV NF125-SV NF
40 50 NF63-CV NF125-RGV
NF125-SEV
NF125-SEV
125-UV
NF125-HV
NF125-SV
48 60
NF125-HV NF125-RGV
60 75
NF125-HEV NF125-HEV
80 100 NF125-CV
100 125
120 150
140 175 NF250-SV
NF250-HV NF
160 200 NF250-CV NF250- NF250-RGV
NF250-HEV 250-UV
180 225 SEV
200 250
240 300 NF400-SW NF400-
280 350 NF400-CW NF400-REW NF400-UEW
320 400 NF400-SEW HEW
400 500 NF630-SW NF630-
NF630-CW NF630-REW
480 600 NF630-SEW HEW
NF800-UEW
560 700 NF800-
NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-REW
640 800 HEW
800 1000 NF1000-SEW
960 1200 NF1250-SEW
1120 1400
NF1600-SEW
1280 1600
69
ELCB (NV)
Table 4-11 230VAC
current (A) (A) 2.5 5 7.5 10 15 25 30 36 50 85 100 125
12 15
16 20 NV32-SV NV32-SV
NV125-HV
24 30
NV63-HV
32 40
40 50 NV63-CV NV63-SV
48 60 NV125-
NV125-HV HV
60 75
NV125-SEV NV125-
80 100 NV125-CV NV125-SV
HEV
100 125
120 150
140 175 NV250-
NV250-SV HV
160 200 NV250-CV
NV250-SEV NV250-
180 225 HEV
200 250
240 300
NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400 NV400
280 350
NV400-SEW -HEW -REW
320 400
400 500 NV630-SW NV630
NV630-CW
480 600 NV630-SEW -HEW
4 560
640
700
800
NV800-SEW
NV800
-HEW
Table 4-12 440VAC

2 Selection
current (A) (A) 2.5 5 7.5 10 25 30 36 45 50 70 85 125
12 15
16 20 NV32-SV
NV125-SV NV125-HV
24 30 NV63-SV NV63-HV
NV63-CV
32 40
NV63-CV
40 50
48 60 NV125-HV NV125-
NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV125-HV HEV
60 75
NV125-CV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV
80 100
100 125
120 150
140 175 NV250-SV NV250-HV
160 200 NV250-CV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
180 225
200 250
240 300 NV400-
SW NV400-
280 350 NV400-CW NV400-REW
HEW
320 400 NV400-SEW
400 500 NV630-SW NV630

NV630-CW
480 600 NV630-SEW -HEW
560 700 NV800
NV800-SEW
640 800 -HEW
70
4 Selection 2
6. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit

(direct-to-line starting or Y-∆ starting)
Motor is protected from overload by Electromagnetic
MCCB (NF) electromagnetic switch. Circuit breaker is installed M
switch
Table 4-13 200/220VAC for 3-phase induction motor to protect circuit from short-circuit.
For 4-pole Electromagnetic Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym)
motor contactor 2.5 7.5 15 25 30(*1) 50 85 100 150(*2) 200
Output Full-
load
Heater
Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Type Model Model
Model nominal Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating
(kW) current
(A) (A) name
0.1 0.7 0.7
N10-N21 NF30-CS (3) NF32-SV (3) NF63-SV (3) NF63-HV (10) NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
0.2 1.2 1.3
0.4 2.1 N10-N21 2.1 NF30-CS 5 NF32-SV 5 NF63-SV 5 NF63-HV (10) NF125-SV (15) NF125-UV (15)
NF125-HV (15)
Direct-to-line starting
0.75 3.7 N10-N21 3.6 NF30-CS 10 NF32-SV 10 NF63-SV 10 NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-UV (15)
NF125-HV (15)
1.5 6.4 N10-N25 6.6 NF30-CS 15 NF32-SV 15 NF63-SV 15 NF63-HV 15 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV 15 NF125-UV (15)
2.2 9.1 N10-N35 9 NF30-CS 20 NF32-SV 20 NF63-SV 20 NF63-HV 20 NF125-SV 20 NF125-HV 20 NF125-UV 20
3.7 15 N18-N35 15 NF30-CS 30 NF32-SV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30 NF125-SV 30 NF125-HV 30 NF125-UV 30
N25·N35·
5.5 22 22 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV 50 NF125-HV 50 NF125-UV 50
N50·N65
7.5 29 N35·N50-N80 29 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF125-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
11 44 N50-N95 42 NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 75 NF125-HV 75 NF125-UV 75
5.5 22 — 22 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV 50 NF125-HV 50 NF125-UV 50
7.5 29 — 29 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF125-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
11 44 — 42 NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 75 NF125-HV 75 NF125-UV 75
15 55 — 54 NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 100 NF125-HV 100 NF125-UV 100
18.5 67 N80-N125 67 NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 100 NF125-HV 100 NF125-UV 100
Y-∆ starting
4
45 164 N180-N400 150 NF400-CW 400 NF400-SW 300 NF400-HEW 250 NF400-REW 250 NF400-UEW 250
55 195 N220-N400 180 NF630-CW 500 NF400-SW 300 NF400-HEW 300 NF400-REW 300 NF400-UEW 300
75 267 N300·N400·(N600) 250 NF630-CW 600 NF630-SW 500 NF400-HEW 400 NF400-REW 400 NF400-UEW 400
90 320 N300·N400·(N600·N800) 330 NF800-CEW 600 NF630-SW 600 NF630-HEW 500 NF630-REW 500 NF800-UEW 500
110 385 N300·N400·(N600·N800) 330 NF800-CEW 600 NF630-SEW 600 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 600
132 470 (N600·N800) 500 NF1000-SEW 700
160 580 (N600·N800) 500 NF1250-SEW 800
2 Selection
200 720 (N800) 600 NF1600-SEW 1000
Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NF250-CV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NF1000- to 1600-SEW is 125kA.
Table 4-14 400/440VAC for 3-phase induction motor

motor contactor 1.5 2.5 7.5 10 25 30(*1) 50(*2) 70 150(*3) 200
Output Full-
load Heater
Model nominal Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating
(kW) current
(A) (A)
0.2 0.6 N10-N21 0.7 NF30-CS (3) NF32-SV (3) NF63-SV (3) NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
0.4 1.1 N10-N21 1.3 NF30-CS (3) NF32-SV (3) NF63-SV (3) NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
0.75 1.9 N10-N21 1.7 NF30-CS 5 NF32-SV 5 NF63-SV 5 NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
1.5 3.2 N10-N21 3.6 NF30-CS 10 NF32-SV 10 NF63-SV 10 NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
2.2 4.6 N10-N21 5 NF30-CS 10 NF32-SV 10 NF63-SV 10 NF63-HV 10 NF125-SV (15) NF125-HV (15) NF125-UV (15)
3.7 7.5 N11-N35 6.6 NF30-CS 20 NF32-SV 20 NF63-SV 20 NF63-HV 20 NF125-SV 20 NF125-HV 20 NF125-UV 20
5.5 11 N18-N35 11 NF30-CS 30 NF32-SV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30 NF125-SV 30 NF125-HV 30 NF125-UV 30
7.5 15 N20-N35 • N50 15 NF30-CS 30 NF32-SV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30 NF125-SV 30 NF125-HV 30 NF125-UV 30
N25 • N35 •
11 22 22 50 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV 50 NF125-HV 50 NF125-UV 50
N50 • N65
15 28 N35 • N50-N80 28 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF125-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
18.5 34 N50-N95 35 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF125-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
5.5 11 − 11 NF63-CV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30 NF125-SV 30 NF250-HV 30 NF125-UV 30
7.5 15 − 15 NF63-CV 40 NF63-SV 40 NF63-HV 40 NF125-SV 40 NF250-HV 40 NF125-UV 40
11 22 − 22 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV 50 NF250-HV 50 NF125-UV 50
15 28 − 28 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF250-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
18.5 34 − 35 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF250-HV 60 NF125-UV 60
22 42 − 42 NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 75 NF250-HV 75 NF125-UV 75
Y-∆ starting

90 160 N180-N400 150 NF250-SEV 225 NF250-HEV 225 NF400-REW 225 NF400-UEW 225
110 192 N180-N400 180 NF400-SW 350 NF400-HEW 300 NF400-REW 300 NF400-UEW 300
132 233 N220-N400 250 NF400-SW 400 NF400-HEW 400 NF400-REW 400 NF400-UEW 400
160 290 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 NF630-SW 500 NF630-HEW 500 NF630-REW 500 NF800-UEW 500
200 360 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NF630-SW 600 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 600
220 389 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) − NF630-SW 600 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 600
250 430 (N600 • N800) 500 NF630-SEW 700 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 700
300 500 (N600 • N800) 500 NF800-SEW 700 NF800-HEW 700 NF800-REW 700 NF800-UEW 700
Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NF250-SV and NF250-SEV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NF400-SW is 45kA. *3 The breaking capacity of NF400- to 800-REW is 125kA.
Remarks: 1. Circuit breakers are selected under the starting conditions shown in the right table.
2. Protection coordination is examined under the condition of cold start at 40°C. Starting conditions for selection
3. The ratings in parentheses apply to cases where thermal relays with saturating reactor are used. Direct-to-line Startup inrush current (× full-load current)
4. Although the inrush current upon switching to ∆ connection fluctuates depending on the residual magnetic flux at star Motor capacity starting time
starting, ∆ connection closing phase or power supply transformer capacity, in most cases, the inrush current is less than (600%) Direct-to-line starting Y-∆ starting
the values shown in the right table. 0.2 to 7.5kW 10s 12 times 16 times
5. The maximum starting current is the effective value of current (value after transient phenomena disappear) at the time
when the rotator starts to rotate. 11 to 55 10 12 17
6. It was assumed that the Y-∆ starting would be performed by the open transition method which is a general method but is 75 to 300 10 14 18
known to carry large transient inrush current.
71
ELCB (NV)
Table 4-15 200/220VAC for 3-phase induction motor
motor contactor 2.5 7.5 15(*1) 25 30(*2) 50 85 100 150
Full-
Output load Heater
current Model nominal Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating
(kW) (A) (A)
0.1 0.7 0.7
N10-N21 NV30-CS (5) NV63-CV (5) NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
0.2 1.2 1.3
0.4 2.1 N10-N21 2.1 NV30-CS 5 NV63-CV 5 NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
0.75 3.7 N10-N21 3.6 NV30-CS 10 NV63-CV 10 NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
1.5 6.4 N10-N25 6.6 NV30-CS 15 NV63-CV 15 NV32-SV 15 NV63-HV 15 NV125-SV 15 NV125-HV (15)
2.2 9.1 N10-N35 9 NV30-CS 20 NV63-CV 20 NV32-SV 20 NV63-HV 20 NV125-SV 20 NV125-HV 20
3.7 15 N18-N35 15 NV30-CS 30 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30
5.5 22 N25 • N35 • N50 • N65 22 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-HV 50
7.5 29 N35 • N50-N80 29 NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV63-HV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
11 44 N50-N95 42 NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75
15 55 N65-N125 54 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
5.5 22 − 22 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-HV 50
7.5 29 − 29 NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV63-HV 60 NV125-CV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
11 44 − 42 NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75
15 55 − 54 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
18.5 67 N80-N125 67 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
Y-∆ starting
22 85 N95-N150 82 NV250-CV 150 NV250-SV 150 NV250-HV 150

30 110 N125-N220 105 NV250-CV 175 NV250-SV 175 NV250-HV 175
37 130 N150-N220 125 NV250-CV 225 NV250-SV 225 NV250-HV 225
45 164 N180-N400 150 NV400-CW 400 NV400-SW 300 NV400-HEW 250 NV400-REW 250
55 195 N220-N400 180 NV630-CW 500 NV400-SW 300 NV400-HEW 300 NV400-REW 300
75 267 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 NV630-CW 600 NV400-SEW 400 NV400-HEW 400 NV400-REW 400
90 320 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 500 NV630-HEW 500
110 385 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 600 NV630-HEW 600
Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NV32-SV is 10kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NV250-CV is 36kA.
4 Table 4-16 400/440VAC for 3-phase induction motor

motor contactor 2.5 5 7.5 10 25 30(*1) 50(*2) 70 125
Output Full- Heater
load nominal Model
Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating
(kW) current
(A) (A)
2 Selection
0.2 0.6 N10-N21 0.7 NV63-CV (5) NV32-SV (5) NV63-SV (5) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
0.4 1.1 N10-N21 1.3 NV63-CV (5) NV32-SV (5) NV63-SV (5) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
0.75 1.9 N10-N21 1.7 NV63-CV 5 NV32-SV 5 NV63-SV 5 NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
1.5 3.2 N10-N21 3.6 NV63-CV 10 NV32-SV 10 NV63-SV 10 NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
2.2 4.6 N10-N21 5 NV63-CV 10 NV32-SV 10 NV63-SV 10 NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15)
3.7 7.5 N11-N35 6.6 NV63-CV 20 NV32-SV 20 NV63-SV 20 NV63-HV 20 NV125-SV 20 NV125-HV 20
5.5 11 N18-N35 11 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30
7.5 15 N20-N35 • N50 15 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30
11 22 N25 • N35 • N50 • N65 22 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-HV 50
15 28 N35 • N50-N80 28 NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV63-HV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
18.5 34 N50-N95 35 NV125-CV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
22 42 N50-N95 42 NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75
30 55 N65-N125 54 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
37 65 N80-N150 67 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
45 82 N95-N150 82 NV250-CV 125 NV250-SV 125 NV250-HV 125
5.5 11 − 11 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30
7.5 15 − 15 NV63-CV 40 NV63-SV 40 NV63-HV 40 NV125-SV 40 NV125-HV 40
11 22 − 22 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-HV 50
15 28 − 28 NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV125-CV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
18.5 34 − 35 NV125-CV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60
22 42 − 42 NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75
Y-∆ starting
30 55 − 54 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100

37 65 − 67 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100
45 82 − 82 NV250-CV 150 NV250-SV 150 NV250-HV 150
55 96 N125-N220 105 NV250-CV 175 NV250-SV 175 NV250-HV 175
75 134 N150-N220 125 NV250-CV 225 NV250-SV 225 NV250-HV 225

90 160 N180-N400 150 NV250-SEW 225 225 NV250-HEW 225 NV400-REW 225
110 192 N180-N400 180 NV400-SW 350 NV400-HEW 300 NV400-REW 300
132 233 N220-N400 250 NV400-SW 400 NV400-HEW 400 NV400-REW 400
160 290 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 NV630-SEW 500 NV630-HEW 500
200 360 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 600 NV630-HEW 600
Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NV250-SV and NV250-SEV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NV400-SW is 45kA.
Remark: 1. For the selecting conditions, please refer to the remarks on page 73.
Example of Y-∆ starting current waveform (crest value envelope)

Pump load S phase current
Steady load current crest value = 2×283A

Inrush current crest value at switching
to ∆ connection6680A
Operation in Operation in
Y connection ∆ connection
72
4 Selection 2
7. Selection of Motor Protection Breaker

Motor Protection Breakers In principle, the operating characteristic curve of a selected motor
breaker must be lower than the heat characteristic of the motor.
The following table shows the rated capacities of standard
squired‑cage 3-phase motors (4-pole) made by Mitsubishi Electric.
The starting conditions are shown in the table.
Table 4-17 for 3-phase induction motor
Model Motor Protection Breaker NF32-SV NF63-CV NF63-SV NF125-SV NF250-SV
Rated 230V 7.5 7.5 15 50 85

breaking
capacity (kA) 415V 2.5 2.5 7.5 30 36
600% starting 32 A or less: 2 32 A or less: 2 32 A or less: 2
2 5
time limit (s) 40 A or more: 7 40 A or more: 7 40 A or more: 7
Startup inrush 1200 1200 1200 1200 1100
current limit (%)
Example of rated capacity Model for
of motor (kW) Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current combination with
electromagnetic
200/220V 400/440V contactor
0.4
0.2
0.4
0.75
N10-N21
4
2 Selection
0.75 1.5 4 4 4
2.2 5 5 5
1.5 7.1 7.1 7.1

3.7 8 8 8
N11-N35
2.2 10 10 10
5.5 12 12 12 (12.5) N18-N35
N20-N35
3.7 7.5 16 16 16 (16) N50
N25 • N35
N50 • N65
5.5 11 25 25 25 (25)
N35
7.5 15 32 32 32 32 N50-N80
18.5 40 40 (40) N50-N95

11 22 45 45 45
N65-N125
15 30 63
18.5 37 71
N80-N125
22 45 90 N90-N125
55 100
55 N125-N220
30 125
37 75 150 N150-N400
45 90 175 N180-N400
200
55 110 N220-N400
225
Remarks: 1. Fot the rated curent in parentheses, breakers will be manufactured to order.
2. The approximate values of inrush current at direct-to-line starting are shown below. Up to 7.5 kW: 1000% 11 kW or more: 1200% 75 kW or more: 1400%
When the starting current is large and the starting power factor is low, a combination with an electromagnetic switch selected in accordance with “Table of selection of circuit
breaker for motor branch circuit” shown on page 73 is suitable.
Cautions
(1) Note that any circuit breaker operates when the startup inrush current, starting current and starting time exceed the conditions shown in the above table.
Particularly, high-efficiency motors generally have higher starting current and lower starting torque compared to general-purpose motors, and motor breakers cannot be used for such motors.
(2) Note that a circuit breaker may operate when an electromagnetic contactor is opened or closed while a motor is running.
(3) Select a motor breaker having rated current approx. 1.0 to 1.1 times higher than the full load current of motor.
73
8. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit Install MCCB or ELCB on the primary side
(power supply side) of the inverter. If it is
installed on the secondary side, it may cause
electronic circuit trouble or overheating.
Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit Note The life cycle of the circuit breaker for the circuit on the inverter primary side
Since current containing harmonic components will flow, the will be reduced under the influence of transient inrush current. Install a switch.
rated current of circuit breaker must be approx. 1.4 times the Table 4-18 3-phase 200 V class
inverter input current. Inverter input capacity Rated current of circuit breaker Inverter input capacity Rated current of circuit breaker
kVA A kVA A
NFB 5.5 30 41 175
R 9 40 52 225
Power supply
Inverter U
Motor
S V
12 50 66 300
IM 17 75 80 350
T W 20 100 100 500
28 125 110 500
34 150 132 600
Selection of rated sensitivity current of Earth Leakage Circuit Table 4-19-1

Examples of leakage current from line
Breaker for Inverter Circuit when IV cable is wired in close contact
Select the rated sensitivity current as stated below. with ground (wiring in metallic conduit)
Circuit breakers for harmonics and surge: Rated sensitivity current I∆n  10 × {Ig1 + Ign + Ig2 + Igm} (3-phase 220V 60Hz)
General circuit breakers: Rated sensitivity current I∆n  10 × {Ig1 + Ign + 3 × (Ig2 + Igm)} Wire size Leakage current/km
mm2 mA
 6 135
Example 1  Ig1, Ig2: Leakage current from line  10 140
6mm 2×5m 6mm 2×20m  Ign: Leakage current from noise filter on inverter input side 
 16 169

 Igm: Leakage current from motor operating on commercial power supply 25 176
NV 35 203
4
Noise filter
Inverter 3-phase 50 205
IM 220V 2.2kW
70 241
95 247
I 1 I n I 2 I m
Table 4-19-2
2 Selection
Example 2 Example of leakage current from 3-phase induction motor (220V 60Hz)
50mm 2×5m 50mm 2×20m Motor output (kW) Leakage current (mA)
2.2 0.2
3.7 0.29
NV 5.5 0.32
Noise filter
Inverter 3-phase 7.5 0.42
IM 220V 22kW
11 0.55
15 0.63
I 1 I n I 2 I m 18.5 0.72
22 0.8
30 0.96
37 1.1
Example of selection 1 Example of selection 2

Breaker for harmonics and surge General breaker Breaker for harmonics and surge General breaker
5 5 5 5
Leakage current Ig1 135 × = 0.675 135 × = 0.675 Leakage current Ig1 205 × = 1.025 205 × = 1.025
1000 1000 1000 1000
Leakage current Ign 0 (without noise filter) Leakage current Ign 0 (without noise filter)
20 20 20 20
Leakage current Ig2 135 × = 2.7 135 × × 3 = 8.1 Leakage current Ig2 205 × = 4.1 205 × = 12.3
1000 1000 1000 1000
Leakage current Igm 0.18 0.18 × 3 = 0.54 Leakage current Igm 0.72 0.72 × 3 = 2.16
Total leakage current Ig 3.555 11.465 Total leakage current Ig 5.845 15.485
Rated sensitivity 100 200 Rated sensitivity 100 500
current (> Ig × 10) current (> Ig × 10)
Remarks: 1. Circuit breakers for harmonics and surge can detect earth fault on the secondary side of inverter only when the operating frequency is 120 Hz or less. In the case of star
connection by neutral point grounding method, the sensitivity current for earth fault on the inverter secondary side is degraded. In this case, for protective ground for load device,
apply Class C grounding (10 Ω or less).
2. For general circuit breakers, the leakage current from the line between inverter and motor shall be calculated as three times the leakage current at the commercial frequency in
consideration of harmonic content.
3. For the model names of circuit breakers for harmonics and surge, refer to the specification list in Section 2 of this document. Models not for harmonics and surge are general
breakers.
74
4 Selection 2
9. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side

Notes 1. The life cycle of the circuit breaker for the circuit on the transformer primary side will be significantly reduced under the
influence of excited inrush current. Install a switch to open and close the circuit.
2. Select a circuit breaker based on the example of excited inrush current of each transformer. When using a circuit
breaker for a transformer, check the magnitude of excited inrush current with the transformer manufacturer.
Single-phase 210-V
Table 4-20-1 MCCB
Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Example of transformer excited inrush current 3
Transformer Rated Crest Crest Crest
capacity primary value of Rating value of Model Rating value of Model Rating
current first wave Model first wave first wave
kVA A A A A
(multiple) (multiple) (multiple)
NF63-CV(*1) 30
NF125-CV(*1) 60 NF63-CV(*1) 50
NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50
5 23.8 45 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 100 37 NF125-CV(*1) 60 24
NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 75
NF125-SV 50
NF125-SEV 50 NF63-CV(*1) 50
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 150
7.5 35.7 45 37 NF125-CV(*1) 75 24 NF125-CV(*1)(*2) 60(50)
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 125
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 125 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 75
NF125-CV(*1) 100
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 200 NF125-CV(*1) 60
10 47.6 43 37 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150 24
NF250-SEV 125
NF400-CW 400
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 225 NF125-CV(*1) 100
15 71.4 43 NF400-SW 300 35 23
NF250-SEV 125 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW 200
20
30
95.2
143
43
37
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW
400
200
200
35
34
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW
NF400-SEW
350
200
200
23
23
NF250-CV, NF250-SV
NF250-SEV
NF400-SW
200
125
300
4
NF630-SW 500 NF400-SEW 200
NF630-SEW(*1) 300 NF400-SEW(*1) 300
50 238 35 34 NF630-SEW 300 23
NF1000-SEW 500 NF630-SEW 300
2 Selection
NF800-SEW(*1) 400
75 357 30 29 NF800-SEW(*1) 400 22 NF630-SEW 400
NF1250-SEW 600
100 476 27 NF1000-SEW 800 28 NF1600-SEW 800 20 NF800-SEW(*1) 600
150 714 24 − − 24 − − 19 NF1600-SEW 800
200 952 21 − − 22 − − 19 − −
300 1429 17 − − 18 − − 16 − −
500 2381 − − − 17 − − − − −
Table 4-20-2 ELCB

Transformer Rated Crest Crest Crest
kVA A A A A
NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 100 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 75 NV125-CV 60
5 23.8 45 37 24
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 50 NV125-SEV 50 NV125-SV 50
NV125-SEV 50
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 150 NV125-SEV 50 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 75
7.5 35.7 45 37 24
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 125 NV125-SEV 50
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 200 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 150 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 100
10 47.6 43 37 24
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125 NV250-SEV 125 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 125
NV400-CW 400
NV250-CV, NV250-SV 225 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 150
15 71.4 43 NV400-SW 300 35 23
NV250-SEV 125 NV250-SEV 125
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 200
NV400-SW 400 NV400-SW 350 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 200
20 95.2 43 35 23
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 200 NV400-SEW 200 NV250-SEV 125
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 200 NV400-SW 300
30 143 37 34 NV400-SEW 200 23
NV630-SEW 300 NV400-SEW 200
NV630-SEW 300
50 238 35 − − 34 NV630-SEW 300 23
NV800-SEW 400
75 357 30 − − 29 − − 22 NV630-SEW 400
100 476 27 − − 28 − − 20 − −
150 714 24 − − 24 − − 19 − −
200 952 21 − − 22 − − 19 − −
300 1429 17 − − 18 − − 16 − −
500 2381 − − − 17 − − − − −
Notes *1 Examples of selection of high-instantaneous circuit breakers (special models) for primary side of transformer.
*2 The circuit breakers with rating in parentheses are special models.
Remarks: 1. For the circuit breakers whose rated current is adjustable, the rated current values are shown.
2. The crest value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the crest value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall
not exceed the lower limit crest value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value
does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the crest value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be
separately selected.
75
Single-phase 420-V
Table 4-21-1 MCCB
Transformer Rated Peak Peak Peak
capacity primary Rating Rating Rating
value of
current first Model value of Model value of Model
kVA wave A first wave A first wave A
A (multiple) (multiple) (multiple)
NF63-CV(*1) 30 NF32-SV 15 15
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV
5 11.9 45 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 50 37 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 15 24 40
NF125-SV
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 50 NF125-SV 15 15
NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 30
NF63-CV(*1) 50
7.5 17.9 45 37 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60 24 NF125-SV 30
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 75
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 60 NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF63-CV(*1) 30
NF125-CV(*1) 60 NF63-CV(*1) 50 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50
10 23.8 43 37 24
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 100 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 75 NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-SV 50
NF125-CV(*1) 100 NF63-CV(*1) 50
NF125-CV(*1) 60
15 35.7 43 NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 150 35 23 NF125-CV(*1)(*2) 60(50)
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 100
NF125-CV(*1) 100
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 200 NF125-CV(*1) 60
20 47.6 43 35 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150 23
NF250-SEV 125
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 225 NF125-CV(*1) 100
30 71.4 37 NF400-CW 350 34 23
NF250-SEV 125 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150
NF400-SW 250
NF400-SW 400 NF400-SW 400
50 119 35 34 23 NF250-SEV 150
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW 200 NF400-SEW 200
NF400-SW 400
75 179 30 NF630-SW 500 29 NF400-SEW 200 22
NF400-SEW 200
4 100 238 27
NF400-SEW(*1)
NF630-SW
300
600
300
28
NF400-SEW(*1)
NF630-SEW
300
300
20 NF400-SEW 350
NF400-SEW(*1) 400
150 357 24 NF630-SEW(*1) 400 − − − 19
NF630-SEW 400
200 476 21 NF800-SEW(*1) 600 22 NF800-SEW(*1) 600 19 NF800-SEW(*1) 600
2 Selection
300 714 17 NF1250-SEW 800 18 NF1600-SEW 800 16 NF1250-SEW 800

500 1190 − − − 17 − − − − −
Table 4-21-2 ELCB

kVA A A A A
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 50 NV32-SV 15 NV32-SV 15
5 11.9 45 NV125-CV 60 37 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15 24 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15
NV125-SV, NV125-HV 50 NV125-SV 15 NV125-SV 15
NV32-SV 30
NV63-CV, NV63-SV 60
7.5 17.9 45 NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 75 37 24 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 30
NV125-CV, NV125-SV 60
NV125-SV 30
NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 100 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 75
10 23.8 43 37 24 NV125-CV 60
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 50 NV125-SEV 50
NV125-SV 50
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 150 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 100 NV125-CV, NF125-SV 75
15 35.7 43 35 23
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125 NV125-SEV 50 NV125-SEV 50
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 200 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 150 NV125-CV, NF125-SV 100
20 47.6 43 35 23
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125
NV250-CV, NV250-SV 225 NV250-SV, NV250-SV 150
30 71.4 37 NV400-CW 350 34 23
NV250-SEV 125 NV250-SEV 125
NV400-SW 250
NV400-SW 400 NV400-SW 400
50 119 35 34 23 NV250-SEV 150
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 200 NV400-SEW 200
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 200 NV400-SW 400
75 179 30 29 NV400-SEW 200 22
100 238 27 28 20 NV400-SEW 350
NV630-SEW 400
150 357 24 − − 24 − − 19
NV800-SEW 400
200 476 21 − − 22 − − 19 − −
300 714 17 − − 18 − − 16 − −
500 1190 − − − − − − − − −
2. The peak value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the peak value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall
not exceed the lower limit peak value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value
does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the peak value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be
76
4 Selection 2
3-phase 210-V
Table 4-21-3 MCCB
capacity primary Rating Rating Rating
value of
current first Model value of Model value of Model
NF32-SV 20
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 20 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 20
5 13.7 25 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 20 26 18
NF125-SV 20 NF125-SV 20
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 20
NF63-CV(*1) 30
NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 50
7.5 20.6 25 26 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50 18 NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 50 NF125-SV 30
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 50
NF63-CV(*1) 40
NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50
10 27.5 24 26 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60 18 NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-CV(*1) 50
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 60 NF125-SV 50
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60
NF63-CV(*1) 50
NF63-CV(*1) 50 NF125-CV(*1) 60
15 41.2 24 26 18 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 100 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 100
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 60
NF125-CV(*1) 75
NF125-CV(*1) 75 NF125-CV(*1) 75
20 55.0 20 26 NF125-SEV 75 18
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 125
NF125-CV(*1) 100
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 200 NF125-CV(*1) 100
30 82.5 20 NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 150 26 18
NF250-SEV 125 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 175 NF400-CW 400
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 200
50 137 20 NF400-CW 350 23 NF400-SW 300 16
NF250-SEV 175
NF400-SW 250 NF400-SEW 200
NF400-SW 400 NF400-SW 350 NF400-SW 300
4
75 206 21 18 14
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW 250 NF400-SEW 250 NF400-SEW 250
NF400-SEW(*1) 350
NF400-SW 350
100 275 21 NF630-SW 600 17 NF400-SEW 350 13
NF400-SEW 300
NF630-SW 500
150 412 17 NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW 500 14 NF630-SEW 500 13
NF630-SEW 500
2 Selection
200 550 16 NF800-SEW(*1) 700 13 NF800-SEW 700 12 NF800-SEW 700
300 825 16 NF1600-SEW 1000 13 NF1250-SEW 1000 12 NF1000-SEW 1000
500 1375 − − − 11 NF1600-SEW 1600 11 NF1600-SEW 1600
Table 4-21-4 ELCB

kVA A A A A
NV32-SV 20 NV32-SV 20 NV32-SV 20
5 13.7 25 NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 20 26 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 20 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 20
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 50 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50 NV32-SV 30

7.5 20.6 25 NV125-CV 60 26 NV125-CV 60 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 30
NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50
10 27.5 24 26 18 NV125-CV 60
NV125-SV 50
15 41.2 24 26 18
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 50 NV125-SEV 50 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 60
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 100 NV125-SEV 75 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 100
20 55.0 20 26 18
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 75 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 125 NV125-SEV 75
30 82.5 20 26 18
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 175 NV400-CW 400
NV250-CV, NV250-SV 200
50 137 20 NV400-CW 350 23 NV400-SW 300 16
NV250-SEV 175
NV400-SW 250 NV400-SEW 200
NV400-SW 400 NV400-SEW 250 NV400-SW 300
75 206 21 18 14
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 250 NV400-SW 350 NV400-SEW 250
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW 350 NV400-SW 350
100 275 21 17 NV400-SEW 350 13
NV630-SEW 500 NV630-SEW 500
150 412 17 NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW 500 14 13
NV800-SEW 500 NV800-SEW 500
200 550 16 − − 13 − − 12 NV800-SEW 700
300 825 16 − − 13 − − 12 − −
500 1375 − − − 11 − − 11 − −
77
3-phase 420-V
Table 4-21-5 MCCB
capacity primary Rating value of Rating value of Rating
value of
current first Model Model Model
NF32-SV 10
NF30-CS 30 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 10
5 6.9 32 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 10 26 18
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 10 NF125-SV 15
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 15
NF32-SV 15
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 15 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 15
7.5 10.3 32 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 15 26 18
NF125-SV 15 NF125-SV 15
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 15
NF32-SV 20
NF32-SV 20 NF32-SV 20
10 13.7 31 26 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 20 18 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 20
NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-SV 20 NF125-SV 20
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 20
NF63-CV(*1) 40
15 20.6 31 26 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50 18 NF125-CV(*2) (50)
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 50 NF125-SV 30
NF63-CV(*1) 40
NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF63-CV(*1) 40
20 27.5 26 26 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60 18 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50
NF125-CV(*1) 50
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60
NF63-CV(*1) 50
NF125-CV(*1) 60 NF63-CV(*1) 50
30 41.2 24 NF125-CV(*1) 50 26 18
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 100
NF125-CV(*1) 100
NF125-CV(*1) 100
50 68.7 22 NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 150 23 16 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 100
NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150
75 103 15 18 14 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150
4
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 125 NF250-SEV 125
100 137 15 17 13 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 175
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 175 NF250-SEV 175
NF400-CW 400 NF400-CW 400
NF400-SW 300
150 206 15 NF400-SW 300 14 13 NF400-SW 250
NF400-SEW 250
NF400-SW 350 NF400-SW 350
2 Selection
200 275 14 13 NF400-SW/SEW 350/350 12

NF630-CW 600
NF630-SW 500
300 412 10 NF630-SW 500 13 NF630-SEW 500 12
NF630-SEW 500
NF800-SEW(*1) 800
500 687 15 11 NF800-SEW 800 11 NF800-SEW 800
NF1250-SEW 800
Table 4-21-6 ELCB

capacity primary Rating value of Rating value of Rating
value of
current first Model Model Model
NV32-SV(*1) 15(10)
NV32-SV(*1) 15(10) NV32-SV(*1) 15(10)
NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) 15(10)
5 6.9 32 26 NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) 15(10) 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) 15(10)
NV63-HV 15
NV125-SV 15 NV125-SV 15
NV125-SV, NV125-HV 15
NV32-SV 15 NV32-SV 15 NV32-SV 15
7.5 10.3 32 NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 15 26 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15
NV32-SV 20
NV32-SV 20 NV32-SV 20
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 20
10 13.7 31 26 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 20 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 20
NV125-CV 50
NV125-SV 20 NV125-SV 20
NV125-SV, NV125-HV 20
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 60 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50 NV32-SV 30
15 20.6 31 NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 60 26 NV125-CV 60 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 30
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-SV 30
NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50
20 27.5 26 26 18 NV125-CV 60
NV125-SV 50
30 41.2 24 26 18 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 75
50 68.7 22 23 16 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 100
75 103 15 18 14 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 150
100 137 15 17 13 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 175
NV400-CW 400 NV400-CW 400
NV400-SW 300
150 206 15 NV400-SW 300 14 13 NV400-SW 250
NV400-SEW 250
NV400-SW 350 NV400-SW 350 NV400-SW 350
200 275 14 13 12
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 350 NV400-SEW 350 NV400-SEW 350
NV630-CW, NV630-SW 600 NV630-SEW 500
300 412 10 13 12 NV630-SEW 500
500 687 15 − − 11 − − 11 − −
78
4 Selection 2
10. Combination for Selective Breaking

Continuous
Combinations of main circuit breaker for coordination and branch circuit power supply Main circuit breaker
breakers capable of selective breaking and the breaking capacity (sym

kA) for selective breaking at the installation point of the branch circuit
breaker are shown below.
Branch circuit breaker
Circuit in good condition

Table 4-22-1 Combination for selective breaking
440VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA 230VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA
Ra Main Circuit breaker Ra Main Circuit breaker
sh ted breaker sh ted breaker
ca ort-c ultim ca ort-c ultim
NF125-HEV
NF250-HEV
NF125-SEV
NF250-SEV
NF400-SEV
NF125-SEV
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
NF400-SEW
NF125-HEV
NF250-HEV
NF400-HEW
NF630-HEW
NF800-CEW
NF800-HEW
NF400-HEW
NF630-HEW
NF800-CEW
NF800-HEW
NF250-SEV
NF630-SEW
NF800-SEW
NF630-SEW
NF800-SEW
pa irc at pa irc at
city uit e city uit e
of bre of bre
ea aki ea aki
ch ng ch ng
bre bre
ak ak
Branch er Branch er
breaker Icu(kA) 36 65 36 65 42 65 42 65 36 42 65 85 85 breaker Icu(kA) 50 100 85 100 85 100 85 100 50 85 100 125 125
NF32-SV 2.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 NF32-SV 7.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
NV32-SV 5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 NV32-SV 10 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
NF63-SV NF63-SV
7.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
NV63-SV NV63-SV
NF63-HV NF63-HV
10 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 10 10 20 20 25 25 25 25 25
NV63-HV NV63-HV
NF125-SV NF125-SV
NF125-SEV NF125-SEV
25 – – 2.5 2.5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 50 – – 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 15 15 18 18 18 18 50
NV125-SV NV125-SV
NV125-SEV NV125-SEV
NF125-SGV
NF125-LGV
NF125-HV
36
50
50
–
–
–
–
–
–
2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5
2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5
2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15
15
18
15
15
18
15
15
18
15
15
18
15
15
18
15
15
18
36
42
50
NF125-SGV
NF125-LGV
NF125-HV
85
90
100
–
–
–
–
–
–
2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5
2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5
2.5 2.5 10 10
15
15
25
15
15
25
18
18
35
18
18
35
18
18
35
18
18
35
85
85
100
4
NV125-HV NV125-HV
NF125-HGV 65 – – 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 15 15 15 15 15 15 42 NF125-HGV 100 – – 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 15 15 18 18 18 18 85
NF160-SGV 36 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 NF160-SGV 85 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
2 Selection
NF160-LGV 50 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 15 15 15 15 25 NF160-LGV 90 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
NF NF
| NF160-HGV 65 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 15 15 15 15 25 | NF160-HGV 100 – – – – 6.4 6.4 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
S NF250-SV S NF250-SV
• •
NF250-SEV NF250-SEV
L 36 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 L 85 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
• NV250-SV • NV250-SV
H NV250-SEV H NV250-SEV
• •
NF250-SGV 36 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 NF250-SGV 85 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
NV NV
| NF250-LGV 50 – – – – – – 10 10 15 15 15 15 25 | NF250-LGV 90 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
S NF250-HV S NF250-HV
• •
NF250-HEV NF250-HEV
H 65 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 H 100 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
NV250-HV NV250-HV
NV250-HEV NV250-HEV
NF250-HGV 65 – – – – – – 10 10 15 15 15 15 25 NF250-HGV 100 – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 50
NF400-SW NF400-SW
42 – – – – – – – – 13 13 13 13 20 85 – – – – – – – – 13 13 13 13 20
NV400-SW NV400-SW
NF400-SEW NF400-SEW
42 – – – – – – 9.5 9.5 13 13 13 13 20 85 – – – – – – – – 13 13 13 13 20
NV400-SEW NV400-SEW
NF400-HEW NF400-HEW
65 – – – – – – 9.5 9.5 10 10 10 13 20 100 – – – – – – – – 13 13 13 13 20
NV400-HEW NV400-HEW
NF400-REW NF400-REW
125 – – – – – – 9.5 9.5 10 10 10 13 20 150 – – – – – – 9.5 9.5 13 13 13 13 20
NV400-REW NV400-REW
NF630-SW NF630-SW
NF630-SEW NF630-SEW
42 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20 85 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20
NV630-SW NV630-SW
NV630-SEW NV630-SEW
NF630-HEW NF630-HEW
65 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20 100 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20
NV630-HEW NV630-HEW
NF63-CV NF63-CV
2.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 2.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
NV63-CV NV63-CV
NF NF125-CV NF NF125-CV
10 – – 2.5 2.5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 15 10 30 – – 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 10 15 15 15 15 15 25
| NV125-CV | NV125-CV
C NF250-CV C NF250-CV
• 15 – – – – – – 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15 • 36 – – – – – – 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 25
NV NV250-CV NV NV250-CV
| NF400-CW | NF400-CW
C 25 – – – – – – – – 10 10 10 13 20 C 50 – – – – – – – – 13 13 13 13 20
NV400-CW NV400-CW
NF630-CW NF630-CW
36 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20 50 – – – – – – – – – – – – 20
NV630-CW NV630-CW
NF125-RGV 125 – – 2.5 2.5 15 15 30 30 30 42 50 50 85 NF125-RGV 150 – – 2.5 2.5 22 22 65 65 50 85 85 85 125
NF NF125-UV 200 – – 2.5 2.5 15 15 30 30 30 42 50 50 85 NF NF125-UV 200 – – 2.5 2.5 22 22 65 65 50 85 85 85 125
| |
NF250-RGV 125 – – – – – – 15 15 15 25 25 25 85 NF250-RGV 150 – – – – – – – – 18 50 50 50 125
R R
• NF250-UV 200 – – – – – – 15 15 15 25 25 25 85 • NF250-UV 200 – – – – – – – – 18 50 50 50 125
U NF400-UEW 200 – – – – – – 9.5 9.5 15 15 15 15 25 U NF400-UEW 200 – – – – – – – – 15 15 15 15 25
NF800-UEW 200 – – – – – – – – – – – – – NF800-UEW 200 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Note *1 Rated currents of branch breakers are 50A or less. BH-P 2.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 – 2.5 – 2.5 2.5 – 2.5 2.5
Remarks: 1. It is considered that the instantaneous tripping characteristic values of main BH-D6
6 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
circuit breakers have been set to the maximum values. BH TYPE B
2. For the selectivity in the overcurrent range, separately check the coordination BH-D6
on the operating characteristic curve. 6 – – – – – – – – – – – – –
TYPE C
79
Table 4-22-2 Combination for selective breakingwith AE-SW Series
440VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA 230VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA

R Main Low-voltage air circuit breaker AE-SW R Main Low-voltage air circuit breaker AE-SW
sh ated breaker sh ated breaker
ca ort- ulti ca ort- ulti
AE1000-SW
AE1250-SW
AE1600-SW
AE2000-SW
AE2500-SW
AE3200-SW
AE1000-SW
AE1250-SW
AE1600-SW
AE2000-SW
AE2500-SW
AE3200-SW
AE2000-SWA
AE4000-SWA
AE2000-SWA
AE4000-SWA
pa cir ma pa cir ma
AE630-SW
AE630-SW
cit cui te cit cui te
yo tb yo tb
f e rea f e rea
ac ki ac ki
h b ng h b ng
rea rea
Branch ke Branch ke
r r
breaker Icu(kA) 65 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 breaker Icu(kA) 65 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF32-SV 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 NF32-SV 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
NV32-SV 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 NV32-SV 10 9(10) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
NF63-SV NF63-SV
7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15 9(10) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
NV63-SV NV63-SV
NF63-HV NF63-HV
10 9(10) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 9(25) 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
NV63-HV NV63-HV
NF125-SV NF125-SV
25 7(25) 20(25) 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 9(50) 45(50) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
NV125-SV NV125-SV
NF125-SEV NF125-SEV
36 7(36) 20(36) 25(36) 30(36) 36 36 36 36 36 85 9(65) 45(65) 50(65) 50(65) 50(65) 85 85 85 85
NV125-SEV NV125-SEV
NF125-SGV 36 9(36) 20(36) 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 NF125-SGV 85 16(65) 45(65) 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF125-LGV 50 9(50) 20(50) 36(50) 50 50 50 50 50 50 NF125-LGV 90 16(65) 45(65) 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF125-HV NF125-HV
50 9(50) 30(50) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 9(65) 50(65) 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NV125-HV NV125-HV
NF125-HGV 65 9(65) 20(65) 36(65) 65 65 65 65 65 65 NF125-HGV 100 16(65) 45(65) 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF160-SGV 36 9(36) 15(36) 25(36) 36 36 36 36 36 36 NF160-SGV 85 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF160-LGV 50 9(50) 15(50) 25(50) 42(50) 42(50) 50 50 50 50 NF160-LGV 90 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF160-HGV 65 9(65) 15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65) 65 65 65 65 NF160-HGV 100 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF250-SV NF250-SV
NF NF
| NF250-SEV | NF250-SEV
36 7(36) 14(36) 19(36) 25(36) 25(36) 36 36 36 36 85 9(65) 20(65) 22(65) 42(65) 42(65) 50(85) 85 85 85
S NV250-SV S NV250-SV
• NV250-SEV • NV250-SEV
4
L L
• NF250-SGV 36 7(36) 15(36) 25(36) 36 36 36 36 36 36 • NF250-SGV 85 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
H NF250-LGV 50 7(50) 15(50) 25(50) 42(50) 42(50) 50 50 50 50 H NF250-LGV 90 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
• NF250-HV • NF250-HV
NV NV
| NF250-HEV | NF250-HEV
65 7(65) 15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65) 65 65 65 65 100 9(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
S NV250-HV S NV250-HV
• NV250-HEV • NV250-HEV
2 Selection
H H
NF250-HGV 65 7(65) 15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65) 65 65 65 65 NF250-HGV 100 9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65) 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF400-SW NF400-SW
42 – – 18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 33(42) 42 42 42 85 – – 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75) 85 85
NV400-SW NV400-SW
NF400-SEW NF400-SEW
42 9(42) 15(42) 18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 39(42) 42 42 85 9(65) 15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75) 85 85
NV400-SEW NV400-SEW
NF400-HEW NF400-HEW
65 9(65) 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 39(65) 65 65 100 9(65) 15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75) 85 85
NV400-HEW NV400-HEW
NF400-REW NF400-REW
125 9(65) 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 39(75) 80 80 150 9(65) 15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75) 85 85
NV400-REW NV400-REW
NF630-SW NF630-SW
NF630-SEW NF630-SEW
42 – – – 24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 37(42) 42 42 85 – – – 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)
NV630-SW NV630-SW
NV630-SEW NV630-SEW
NF630-HEW NF630-HEW
65 – 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 37(65) 48(65) 48(65) 100 – 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)
NV630-HEW NV630-HEW
NF800-SEW NF800-SEW
42 – – 18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 37(42) 42 42 85 – – 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)
NV800-SEW NV800-SEW
NF800-HEW NF800-HEW
65 – – 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 37(65) 48(65) 48(65) 100 – – 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)
NV800-HEW NV800-HEW
NF63-CV NF63-CV
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
NV63-CV NV63-CV
NF125-CV NF125-CV
NF 10 9(10) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 NF 30 9(30) 15(30) 18(30) 24(30) 24(30) 30 30 30 30
NV125-CV NV125-CV
| |
C NF250-CV C NF250-CV
15 9(15) 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 36 9(36) 15(36) 18(36) 24(36) 24(36) 36 36 36 36
• NV250-CV • NV250-CV
NV NF400-CW NV NF400-CW
| 25 – 15(25) 18(25) 25 25 25 25 25 25 | 50 – 15(50) 20(50) 27(50) 27(50) 42(50) 50 50 50
C NV400-CW C NV400-CW
NF630-CW NF630-CW
36 – – – 24(36) 24(36) 30(42) 36 36 36 50 – – – 24(50) 24(50) 30(50) 40(50) 50 50
NV630-CW NV630-CW
NF800-CEW 36 – – 18(36) 24(36) 24(36) 30(42) 36 36 36 NF800-CEW 50 – – 18(50) 24(50) 24(50) 30(50) 40(50) 50 50
NF125-RGV 125 35(65) 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 NF125-RGV 150 65 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
NF NF125-UV 200 50(65) 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 NF NF125-UV 200 65 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
| NF250-RGV 125 9(65) 50(65) 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 | NF250-RGV 150 9(65) 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
R R
• NF250-UV 200 9(65) 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 • NF250-UV 200 9(65) 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85
U NF400-UEW 200 9(65) 15(65) 18(65) 29(65) 29(65) 48(75) 85 85 85 U NF400-UEW 200 9(65) 15(65) 18(65) 29(65) 29(65) 48(75) 85 85 85
NF800-UEW 200 – – 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 37(75) 68(75) 68(75) NF800-UEW 200 – – 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 37(75) 68(75) 68(75)
Notes *1 The values in the table represent the max. rated current for both Series AE-SW air
circuit breakers and branch breakers, and the selective co-ordination applies when
the air circuit breakers instantaneous pick up is set to maximum.
*2 The numerals shown in parentheses are for AE-SW with MCR. (When set MCR.)
80
4 Selection 2
11. Combinations for Cascade Breaking

Main circuit breaker
The following tables show the combinations of circuit breakers capable (Backup circuit breaker)
of cascade breaking and the cascade breaking capacities (symmetrical

values, sym kA). The criteria conform to IEC 60947-2. Branch circuit breaker
(Backed up circuit breaker)
Short-circuit
Table 4-23-1 440VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA

Main NF-S • NV-S • NF-H • NV-H NF-C • NV-C NF-R • NF-U
breaker
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW

Ra paci
ca
ted ty o
NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW
NF400-REW, NV400-REW
NF800-SEW, NV800-SEW
NF125-RGV, NV125-RGV
ult f ea
NF400-CW, NV400-CW
NF630-CW, NV630-CW
NF400-SW, NV400-SW
NF630-SW, NV630-SW
im ch
NF125-HV, NV125-HV
NF250-HV, NV250-HV
NF250-CV, NV250-CV
NF125-SV, NV125-SV
NF250-SV, NV250-SV
ate b
sh rea
ort ke
-ci r
rcu
NF630-REW
NF800-REW
NF800-CEW
NF400-UEW
NF800-UEW
NF125-HGV
NF160-HGV
NF250-HGV
NF250-RGV
NF125-SGV
NF160-SGV
NF250-SGV
NF125-LGV
NF160-LGV
NF250-LGV
it b
NF125-UV
NF250-UV
rea
kin
g
Branch
breaker Icu(kA) 25 36 50 50 65 36 50 65 36 36 50 65 65 42 65 125 42 65 125 42 65 125 85 15 25 36 36 125 200 125 200 200 200
NF32-SV 2.5 10 14 14 14 14 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 − − − − − − − − − − 5 − − − 35 125 35 50 − −
NV32-SV 5 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 − − − − − − − − 50 125 35 50 − −
NF63-SV 7.5 14 14 14 20 20 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 − − 10 10 − 50 125 50 50 10 10
NV63-SV 7.5 14 14 14 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 − − − − − − − − − − − 10 10 − 50 125 50 50 − −
NF63-HV
10 20 30 30 30 30 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 15 15 15 14 14 14 − − − − − − − − 125 125 50 50 − −
4
NV63-HV
NF125-SV
25 − 36 36 50 50 36 36 50 − 36 50 42 50 35 35 35 35 35 35 30 35 35 30 − − − − 125 200 125 200 50 35
NV125-SV
NF NF125-SGV 36 − − 50 − 50 − 50 50 − − 50 − 50 − 50 50 − 50 50 − 50 50 − − − − − 125 200 125 200 50 −
| NF125-LGV 50 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 50 −
S NF125-HV
• 50 − − − − 65 − − 65 − − − − 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 85
NV NV125-HV
2 Selection
| NF125-HGV 65 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 85
S NF160-SGV 36 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 50 50 − 50 50 − 50 50 50 − − − − − − 125 200 85 85
•
NF NF160-LGV 50 − − − − − − − 65 − − − − 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 65 − − − − − − 125 200 85 85
| NF160-HGV 65 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
L NF250-SV
• 36 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 50 50 − 50 50 − 50 50 − − − − − − − 125 200 85 85
NF NV250-SV
| NF250-SGV 36 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 50 50 − 50 50 − 50 50 50 − − − − − − 125 200 85 85
H NF250-LGV 50 − − − − − − − − − − − − 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
•
NV NF250-HV
| 65 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
NV250-HV
H NF250-HGV 65 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW
42 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 65 65 − 65 65 − 65 65 − − − − − − − − − 200 200
NV400-SW
NV400-SEW
NF630-SW
NF630-SEW
42 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 65 65 − 65 65 − − − − − − − − − − 200
NV630-SW
NV630-SEW
NF63-CV
2.5 10 14 14 14 14 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 − − − − − − − − − − 5 − − − 35 125 35 50 5 −
NV63-CV
NF NF125-CV
10 20 30 30 30 30 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 − − 14 14 14 125 200 50 125 14 14
| NV125-CV
C NF250-CV
• 15 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 30 30 30 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 50 −
NV NV250-CV
| NF400-CW
C 25 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 30 − − − − − − − − 50 50
NV400-CW
NF630-CW
36 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 42 50 50 42 50 50 42 − − − − − − − − − 200
NV630-CW
Note Rated currents of main breakers are maximum values.
81
Table 4-23-2 230VAC (IEC 60947-2) sym.kA

Main NF-S • NV-S • NF-H • NV-H NF-C • NV-C NF-R • NF-U
breaker

Ra paci
ca
ted ty o
NF400-REW, NV400-REW
NF800-SEW, NV800-SEW
NF125-RGV, NV125-RGV
ult f ea
NF400-CW, NV400-CW
NF630-CW, NV630-CW
NF400-SW, NV400-SW
NF630-SW, NV630-SW
im ch
NF125-HV, NV125-HV
NF250-HV, NV250-HV
NF250-CV, NV250-CV
NF125-SV, NV125-SV
NF250-SV, NV250-SV
ate b
sh rea
ort ke
-ci r
rcu
NF630-REW
NF800-REW
NF800-CEW
NF400-UEW
NF800-UEW
NF125-HGV
NF160-HGV
NF250-HGV
NF250-RGV
NF125-SGV
NF160-SGV
NF250-SGV
NF125-LGV
NF160-LGV
NF250-LGV
it b
NF125-UV
NF250-UV
rea
kin
g
Branch
breaker Icu(kA) 50 85 90 100 100 85 90 100 85 85 90 100 100 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 125 36 50 50 50 150 200 150 200 200 200
NF32-SV 7.5 42 50 50 50 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 35 50 − −
NV32-SV 10 42 50 50 50 50 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 14 14 14 14 14 14 − − − − 25 14 14 − 125 200 35 50 − −
NF63-SV 15 42 85 85 85 85 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 30 30 30 30 30 30 − − − − 25 − − − 125 200 85 125 − −
NV63-SV 15 42 85 85 85 85 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 − − − − − − − − − − 25 − − − 125 200 85 125 − −
NF63-HV
25 50 85 90 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 − − − − − 30 30 − 125 200 85 125 − −
NV63-HV
NF125-SV
50 − 85 90 100 100 85 85 85 − 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 125
NV125-SV
NF NF125-SGV 85 − − − 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 125
| NF125-LGV 90 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 200
S NF125-HV
• 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 125
NV NV125-HV
| NF125-HGV 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 125 200 200 200
S NF160-SGV 85 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 125
•
NF NF160-LGV 90 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
| NF160-HGV 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
L NF250-SV
• 85 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 125
NF NV250-SV
| NF250-SGV 85 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 125
H
4
NF250-LGV 90 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
•
NV NF250-HV
| 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
NV250-HV
H NF250-HGV 100 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 200
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW
85 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 100 − − − − − − − − 200 200
NV400-SW
2 Selection
NV400-SEW
NF630-SW
NF630-SEW
85 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 100 − − − − − − − − − 200
NV630-SW
NV630-SEW
NF63-CV
7.5 35 50 50 50 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 125 200 35 50 − −
NV63-CV
NF NF125-CV
30 35 85 85 85 85 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 − − − − − − − 125 200 85 125 50 −
| NV125-CV
C NF250-CV
• 36 − − − − − − − − 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 − − − − − − − − − 125 200 200 50
NV NV250-CV
| NF400-CW
C 50 − − − − − − − − − − − − − 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 − − − − − − − − 200 200
NV400-CW
NF630-CW
50 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 − − − − − − − − − 200
NV630-CW
BH
BH 2.5 30 42 42 42 42 7.5 7.5 7.5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 − − − − − − − − − − − 5 − − − 125 200 − − − −
BH-P
Note Rated currents of main breakers are maximum values.
82
4 Selection 2
12. International Standard Comformance List

12.1 UL and CSA Approval Product
UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories) Standards: UL 489, UL 1077
UL is an organization in the US which establishes safety standards, i.e. UL Standards, conducts safety verification test based on
the UL Standards, issues the certificates to approved products and allows the manufacturers to attach the certification mark to
the products. The UL certification mark has been spread widely in the US. Some states and cities oblige manufacturers to
receive the UL certification. When devices, control panels and machines are exported to the US, these products must be UL
certified. UL certified products have received UL Recognition or UL Listing in conformity to UL Standards (UL 489, UL1077) and
allowed to be used in control panels and machines to be exported to the US.
: UL Recognition : UL Listing
Refers to component certification for products Refers to product certification for products which can be sold directly to
designed to be built in other products and devices. UL end-users and used by end-users. These products can be used also as
recognized products can be used in control panels, built-in components in control panels, machine tools and control units.
machine tools and control units. Some models vary in external dimensions and terminal structure from
standard models. Please refer to the page of UL listed products for details.
CSA (Canadian Standard Association) Standards: CSA C22.2 No.5-02

The CSA Standards are product safety standards established by CSA. In Canada, the safety of electric products is regulated by
the state laws, and some state laws prescribe that circuit breakers shall be certified by the CSA Standards. Therefore, when
devices, control panels and machines are exported to Canada, these products must be CSA certified. UL certified products have
received CSA certification from the testing body UL and allowed to be used in control panels and machines to be exported to
Canada. UL has been authorized as a testing, certification and quality certification body by SCC, and CSA certified products
tested by UL have been approved by the safety regulations in all states of Canada. It is allowed to attach the following
certification marks to products certified by both UL and CSA. (It is also allowed to attach the separate marks for the US and 4
Canada as before.)
: Recognition for US and Canada : Listing for US and Canada
2 Selection
UL and CSA recognition of components by testing body UL UL and CSA recognition of components by testing body UL
12.2 CCC (China Compulsory Certification) Approval Product

Low-voltage circuit breakers are designated as products to be compulsorily certified in China. To export such
products to China and sell them in China, it is necessary to obtain the CCC certification.
12.3 Corresponding to EC (European Community) Directive

Corresponding to LVD (Low Voltage Directive)
aWhen using a low voltage circuit breaker as a component and indicating conformity with the EC Directives
The CE Marking is required when a low voltage circuit breaker is distributed as a single device in
EU. However, when the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is unnecessary
to affix the CE Mark to the low-voltage circuit breaker used as a built-in component. When the CE
Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a product certified
by a third party shown in Item d (TÜV certified product) as a low voltage circuit breaker.
sMeasures for export of low voltage circuit breaker as single unit
When exporting a low-voltage circuit breaker as a single unit in EU, the circuit breaker is covered by the Low Voltage Directive.
The certification of conformity with the Low Voltage Directive is self-declared as a rule. The applicable product standards are
shown below.
EN 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear-Part 2: Circuit-breakers
EN 60934 Circuit-breakers for equipment (CBE)
dModels certified by third party (TÜV certified products)
When the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a low voltage circuit breaker
certified by a third party (TÜV certified product) as a built-in component.
Corresponding to EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Directive
The Directive prescribes that products shall not emit high-intensity radio waves to the outside and shall not be affected by
external electromagnetic waves. Molded case circuit breakers (electronic type) and earth leakage circuit breakers are covered
by the EMC Directive.
Corresponding to Machinery Directive
Low voltage circuit breakers are components used in equipment, such as machine tools and control units, and are not covered
by any machinery directive. When the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a low
voltage circuit breaker certified by a third party (TÜV certified product) as a built-in component.
83
dMolded Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Protection Breakers

Classification
North American Safety Mark Compulsory Mark Third Party Mark
Society (*1)
UL Stgandards CSA Standards CCC CE TÜV NK
Specifications Applicable Models and Assignments Rheinland
Class
USA Canada China Europe Germany
Japan
NF30-CS − − − − −
NF63-CV, NF125-CV − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
C − − − − −
NF250-CV
NF400-CW, NF630-CW, NF800-CEW − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF32-SV, NF63-SV, NF125-SV − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF125-SEV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −

NF250-SV − − − − −
(Except for 4P)
NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV, NF250-SEV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
S NF400-SW, NF630-SW
NF400-SEW, NF630-SEW − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF800-SEW, NF800-SDW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF1600-SEW − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
General NF1250-SDW, NF1600-SDW − − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NF63-HV − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF125-HEV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
L/H/R NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV,
− − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NF250-HGV, NF250-HEV, NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV
NF400-HEW, NF400-REW
NF630-HEW, NF630-REW − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF125-UV − − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
U NF250-UV, NF400-UEW − − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
4 NF800-UEW − − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −

NF32-SV MB, NF63-CV MB,
Motor − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
NF63-SV MB, NF125-SV MB
Protection − − − − −
NF250-SV MB
NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU − − − − −
NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU − − − − −
UL 489 NF225-CWU − − − − (Except for 250A) (Except for 250A) −
2 Selection
UL − − − −
Listed NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU −
NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU
− − − − − −
Note *1 Except for 4 poles breaker.
Remark: 1. KC (Korea Certification) Mark and GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.
dEarth Leakage Circuit Breakers

North American Safety Mark Compulsory Mark Third Party Mark Classification Society
UL Stgandards CSA Standards CCC CE TÜV NK
Rheinland
Specifications Class Applicable Models and Assignments USA Canada China Europe Germany
Japan

NV63-CV, NV125-CV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
(Except for 2P)
C
NV250-CV − − − − − −
NV400-CW, NV630-CW − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NV32-SV, NV63-SV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NV125-SV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
S NV250-SV − − − − − −
CE and CCC
NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW,
− − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV800-SEW
NV63-HV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NV125-HV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
H/R
NV125-HEV, NV250-HV, NV250-HEV − − − − − (Self Declaration) − −
NV400-HEW, NV400-REW, NV630-HEW, NV800-HEW − − − − − − − − −
NV50-SVFU, NV100-CVFU − − − − −
UL 489 − − − − −
UL NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU
Listed − − − − −
NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU
dMiniature Circuit Breakers

Compulsory Mark
CCC CE
Applicable China Europe
Specifications Class
Models
BH − −
IEC BH
BH-P − −
BH-D6 (Self Declaration)
BH-D10 (Self Declaration)
BH-DN (Self Declaration)
General DIN
BV-D (Self Declaration)
BV-DN (Self Declaration)
KB-D (Self Declaration)
84
4 Selection 2
dCircuit Protectors
North American Safety Mark Compulsory Mark Third Party Mark Classification Society
UL Stgandards TÜV NK
CSA Standards CCC CE
Rheinland
Specifications Class Applicable Models and Assignments USA Canada China Europe Germany
Japan
(EN 60934)
− − − − (EN 60947-2) (EN 60934) −
CP30-BA
General CP −
(Self-Declaration)
CP-S − − − − − − − − −
dAir Circuit Breakers

North American Safety Mark Compulsory Mark Third Party Mark
UL Stgandards TÜV
CSA Standards CCC CE
Rheinland
Specifications Class Applicable Models Assignments USA Canada China Europe Germany
AE630-SW, AE1000-SW
AE1250-SW, AE1600-SW
IEC 60947-2
AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW
SW or − − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
JIS C 8201-2-1
IEC
AE630-SH, AE1000-SH
AE1250-SH, AE1600-SH
SH IEC 60947-2 − − − − − − (Self Declaration) −
AE3200-SH
AE630-SW, AE1000-SW
4
SW − − − − − − − −
JEC JEC 160
AE630-SH, AE1000-SH
SH − − − − − − − −
AE3200-SH
2 Selection
AE630-SW, AE1000-SW
CCC AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW − −
SW CCC − − − (Self Declaration) −
Note *1 Except for four poles breaker.
Remark: 1. GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.
dMolded Case Circuit Breakers , Motor Protection Breakers, Air Circuit Breakers, Circuit Protectors and Miniature Circuit Breakers (Classification Society)
Classification societies (Note)
NK LR ABS GL BV CCS DNV
Specifications Class Applicable Models
United
Japan USA Germany France China Norway
Kingdam
NF30-CS − − − −
NF63-CV, NF125-CV Scheduled to be certified
C NF250-CV Scheduled to be certified
NF400-CW, NF630-CW − −
NF800-CEW −
NF32-SV, NF63-SV, NF125-SV Scheduled to be certified
NF250-SV Scheduled to be certified
NF400-SW, NF630-SW −
S
NF400-SEW, NF630-SEW

NF800-SEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW − − − −
NF63-HV, NF125-HV Scheduled to be certified
NF250-HV Scheduled to be certified
H/R NF400-HEW, NF400-REW

General NF630-HEW, NF630-REW (HEW) −
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW −
NF125-UV, NF250-UV Scheduled to be certified
U
NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW − −
NF32-SV MB, NF63-CV MB
Motor
NF63-SV MB, NF125-SV MB Scheduled to be certified
Protection
NF250-SV MB
AE630-SW, AE1000-SW
AE
AE4000-SWA
AE4000-SW, AE5000-SW, AE6300-SW − −
CP CP30-BA − − − − − −
BH BH-P − −
Remark: 1. Four poles breakers does not acquire Classification Society approval.
85
4 Selection 3 Selection of ELCB
1. Electric Shock Protection

The safety standards for current passing through the human body are determined based on physiological
phenomena as shown below.
In places where secondary accidents may be caused by electric shock: Area below the curve b
In places where secondary accidents will not be caused by electric shock: Area below the curve c1
Time for which current flows (t)
Current through body (IB)
4 Fig. 4.17 Influence of AC (15 Hz to 100 Hz) on human body (IEC/TS60479-1)

3 Selection
86
4 Selection 3
Selection of ELCB
2. ELCB Grounding Method

Select the rated sensitivity current based on the grounding method, purpose of protection and protection ground
resistance value of load device. If the line is excessively long, the circuit breaker may operate unnecessarily owing
to leakage current. Calculate the leakage current referring to Table 4-25. In this case, it is common to select
sensitivity current approx. 10 times as high as the leakage current.
Table 4-24
Type of TN system
TT system IT system
earthing system TN-C system TN-S system TN-C-S system
L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
L2 L2 L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3 L3 L3
Typical PEN N PE N
arrangement PE PEN N
PE PE
The touch voltage is limited to 50V.
Zs Ia 50 V RA In 50 V Id RA 50 V
Zs: fault loop impedance (Ω) RA: sum of the resistances RA: sum of the resistances
Ia: current causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting device RA: of the earth electrode of the earth electrode
within the time as below (A) RA: and the protective and the protective
U0: nominal line to earth voltage (V) RA: conductor (Ω) conductor (Ω)
Protective In: rated current sensitivity (A) Id: first fault current (A)
condition
Maximum disconnection times (sec)
Branch circuits rated 32 A and less
4
U0 AC Others
120 V 230 V 400 V Over 400 V
TN system 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 5
3 Selection
TT system 0.3 0.2 0.07 0.04 1
Earth
- MCCBs
leakage - MCCBs - MCCBs - Insulation monitoring
- ELCBs - ELCBs
protective Not ELCBs - ELCBs devices + ELCBs
(except in TN-C zone)
device
Table 4-25 Leakage current when 600-V vinyl insulated wire is laid on 1-km ∆-connected 3-phase 3-wire 200-V line Table 4-26
Distance from
Leakage current
grounded part A 4 m or more B 10 cm or more C 1.5 mm or more D In close contact conversion table
Wiring • Wiring on first floor ceiling of • Wiring in RC building • Vinyl tube burying • Wiring in metallic Type of line Magnification
work wooden building • Wiring with vinyl tube and • Vinyl tube laying in conduit Single-phase 100-V line 0.3
• Wiring on second and higher exposed wiring in steel frames close contact with steel • Wiring in metallic duct
floors of wooden building (Except C and D) frames in steel building Single-phase 3-wire 200-V line 0.3
• Aerial wiring
Wire size 3-phase 415-V line
(Except C and D) 0.7
( connection)
Y
8 mm2 or less 0.60 mA/km 1.29 mA/km 19.9 mA/km 100 mA/km
14 0.66 1.44 22.1 110
22 0.72 1.55 23.9 120
38 0.81 1.75 26.9 135
60 0.99 2.14 32.9 165
100 1.14 2.46 37.9 189
150 1.25 2.72 41.8 209
250 1.46 3.16 48.6 243
325 1.52 3.29 50.7 253
500 1.71 3.69 56.8 284
Notes *1 The leakage current on rubber insulated wire (RB) is about 70% of the above values, and that on 3-core 600-V cross-linked polyethylene
insulated wire (CV) is about 50%.
*2 At 50 Hz, the values are 84% of the above values.
*3 To obtain the leakage current on another line, multiply the values shown in Table 4-25 by the magnification shown in Table 4-26.
*4 To determine the line length, add the length of all wires after ELCB installation point.
87
4 Selection 3 Selection of ELCB
3. Rated Voltage and Number of Poles

Select the rated voltage and number of poles Voltage fluctuation range in which leakage protection function is operable
264
according to the circuit voltage and type. The following 80 121 160 242 320 484
Voltage (V)
table shows the standard circuit voltage values. 100 200 253 300 400 500
100-200V
However, even at special voltage, if the voltage
100-230V
including the circuit voltage fluctuation is within the
100-240V
voltage range shown right, the leakage protection
100-200-415V
device will operate. 100-440V
200-415V
Switching 200-440V
between
100 and 200 V Switching between
Voltage switching 100V 200 and 415 V
type 200V 415V
Specific voltage 100V 200V 415V
product
Table 4-27
Circuit type Single-phase 2-wire 100- or 200-V circuit Single-phase 3-wire 100- and 200-V circuit
100V
100V 200V 200V
4 100V
2-pole 3-pole 2-pole 3-pole 2- or 2- or

breaker breaker breaker breaker 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole
Example of breaker breaker breaker
connection
3 Selection
・100-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V

・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V
・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V
・100-200V ・100-200V ・100-200V
・100-200V ・100-200V ・100-200V ・100-200V
・200-415V ・100V ・200-415V
・100-240V ・100-230V ・100-240V ・100-230V
・100-230V ・100-240V ・100-240V
・100V ・200-415V
・100-440V ・100-230V ・100-230V
・200-440V
・200-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V
・200-440V
Circuit type 3-phase 3-wire 200-V circuit 3-phase 3-wire 415-V circuit
200V 415V
2- or
3-pole 3-pole
Example of breaker 3-pole 3-pole
breaker breaker breaker
connection
・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V
・100-200V ・100-200V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V
・200-415V ・200-415V ・200-415V ・200-415V
・100-440V ・100-240V ・415V ・415V
・100-230V ・100-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V
・200-440V ・200-440V ・200-440V ・200-440V
Circuit type 3-phase 4-wire 415-V circuit
415V
240V
Example of 4-pole 3-pole 3-pole 2- or 3-pole

connection breaker breaker breaker 3-pole breaker
N breaker
・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V ・100-200-415V

・200-415V ・200-415V ・200-415V ・200-415V ・200-415V
・100-440V ・415V ・415V ・100-240V ・100-440V
・200-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V ・100-440V ・200-440V
・200-440V ・200-440V ・200-440V
<Cautions when selecting and connecting>

(1) When a 3-pole circuit breaker is used as a 2-pole one, use the right and left poles.
(2) For the mains of a 3-phase 4-wire 415-V circuit, use a 4-pole circuit breaker having a rated voltage of 415 V or 440 V, and connect the neutral pole to the N pole on the right side.
88
4 Selection 3
Selection of ELCB
4. Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices

Table 4-28
Protection type Details Installation point Combination
On general lines, the protection grounding resistance is • Time-delay ELCB
With selectivity only for Main circuit
relatively large and the earth fault current is small. In this • Combination of MCCB and time-delay earth leakage relay
earth fault breaking case, install a time-delay relay on the main circuit and a High-speed ELCB
high-speed relay on a branch circuit. Branch circuit
The selectivity for earth fault breaking is as stated above. • Class S time-delay ELCB
With selectivity for earth Significant short-circuit fault very rarely occurs because of Main circuit • Combination of MCCB (class U) and time-delay
fault breaking and its nature (in most cases, circuits are broken at the early earth leakage relay
cascade type of stage of earth fault). This protection is applied when the • Class C time-delay ELCB
short-circuit breaking continuity of power supply is expendable. Branch circuit • Combination of MCCB (class C) and high-speed
(Refer to the combination for cascade breaking on page 83.) earth leakage relay
Combination of electronic MCCB and time-delay
With selectivity for earth This protection is applied when selectivity is necessary in Main circuit
earth leakage relay
fault breaking and the entire area of fault.
(Refer to the combination for selective breaking on page 81.) • High-speed ELCB
short-circuit breaking Branch circuit
• Combination of MCCB and high-sspeed earth leakage relay
Remark: 1. “Time-delay or high-speed earth leakage relay” refers to NV-ZBA, NV-ZSA, NV-ZHA or NV-ZLA.
Characteristic of time-delay
1.0
relay with sensitivity of
500 mA (0.3 s)
NV1
0.5 NV-ZSA
Operating time (s)
0.4 ZT60B 500mA 0.8s
4
Selective 3
0.3 breaking Time-delay
on earth
fault
0.2
ZT40B 3 NV2 3
NV5
NV-ZSA NV125-CV
0.1 200mA 0.3s 30mA 0.1s
Characteristic of Selective Time-delay High-speed
3 Selection
Point B
high-speed relay with breaking
sensitivity of 30 mA on earth
fault
(within 0.1 s)
NV3
NV32-SV 3 3
NV4
30mA 0.1s NV63-CV
High-speed 30mA 0.1s
High-speed
Point A
15 30 250 500 600700800 1000
Earth fault current (mA)
Fig. 4.18 Example of coordination of time-delay and high-speed relays for earth fault breaking
89
4
3 Selection
90
MEMO
Installation and Connection
5
1) Connection Types… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 92
2) Connecting Parts…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 94
3) Standard Tightening Torque… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 95
4) Crimp Terminal Type… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 96
5) Busbar… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 98
6) Insulation Distance on Power Source Side… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 99
7) Effect of Installation Orientation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 100
8) Connection of Line and Load…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 100
91
Installation
5 and Connection 1 Installation and Connection
1. Connection Types
Table 5-1 Connection
Front connection (F) Rear (B)
Connection type (Code address) Screw terminal Busbar terminal Solderless (BOX) Bar stud Round stud
(AMP-N) (BAR) terminal (SL) (B-ST) (B-ST)
Image Please refer to

page 98.
A
B
A
B
NF30-CS − − −
C • S • H • MB
NF32-SV • NF63-CV • NF63-SV • NF63-HV − −

NF125-CV • NF125-SV • NF125-HV •
−
NF125-SEV • NF125-SGV • NF125-LGV • NF125-HEV • NF125-HGV
NF160-SGV • NF160-LGV • NF160-HGV • NF250-CV • NF250-SV • NF250-HV •
−
NF250-SEV • NF250-HEV • NF250-SGV • NF250-LGV • NF250-HGV
NF400-SW • NF400-SEW • NF400-HEW • NF400-REW • NF400-CW − − −
NF630-SW • NF630-SEW • NF630-HEW • NF630-REW • NF630-CW

NF800-SEW • NF800-HEW • NF800-REW • NF800-SDW • NF800-CEW − − −
NF1000-SEW • NF1250-SEW • NF1600-SEW
R•U
MCCB
NF125-UV −
NF125-RGV • NF250-RGV • NF250-UV −
NF400-UEW
− − −
NF800-UEW
NF50-SVFU − − −
NF100-CVFU − −
NF125-SVU
− −
NF125-HVU
UL NF250-SVU
− −
NF250-HVU
NF225-CWU − − −
NF-SKW • NF-SLW − − −
5 BH BH-P
NV32-SV • NV63-CV • NV63-SV • NV63-HV
(Only load side)

− −
−
−
−
−

C•S•H
NV125-CV • NV125-SV • NV125-HV •

− −
NV125-SEV • NV125-HEV
ELCB
NV250-CV/SV/HV • NV250-SEV/HEV − −
NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW −
1 Installation and Connection
NV630-SW • NV630-SEW • NV630-HEW • NV630-CW − −

−
NV800-SEW • NV800-HEW
Kind of terminal screw (A) With insulating base (tube) for
(Circuit breakers having frame size of 1000A and more are not provided with terminal screws (A).) installation of metallic board
The bar stud installation position
Shape can be turned 90° on all models
(except NF800-UEW).
The current-carrying capacity of a
vertically installed bus bar is
Pan-head screw with clamp Pan-head screw Bolt (Hex-socket) Bolt larger than that of a horizontally
Screw size M5 M8 M8 2×M8 M10 installed bus bar even if the bus
bars have the same dimensions.
NF32-SV BH-P NV32-SV NF NV NF NF NV NF
63-CV 63-CV 63-CV(60, 63A) 63-CV(60, 63A) 125-SEV 400-UEW 800-SEW 400-CW
63-SV 63-SV 63-SV(60, 63A) 125-HEV
63-SV(60, 63A) 125-RGV (4P) 800-HEW 400-SW
63-HV 63-HV 63-HV(60, 63A) 63-HV(60, 63A) 125-SGV 800-CEW 400-SEW
50-SVFU(*1) 125-CV 125-CV 125-LGV 800-SEW 400-HEW
125-SV 125-SV 125-HGV 800-HEW 400-REW
160-SGV
Remarks
125-HV 125-HV 800-REW 400-UEW(3P)

160-LGV
125-SEV 125-SEV 160-HGV 800-UEW 630-CW
125-HEV 125-HEV 250-CV 800-SDW 630-SW
100-CVFU 250-SV 630-SEW
125-SVU 250-HV 630-HEW
250-SEV
In case of clamp connection (*1) 125-HVU 250-HEV 630-REW
Type 125-UV 250-SGV NV
250-LGV 400-CW
250-HGV 400-SW
250-RGV
250-UV 400-SEW
qWhen the wire size is 5.5 mm2 or more, divide the 225-CWU 400-HEW
wires, and connect them. 250-SVU 400-REW
250-HVU 630-CW
wWhen connecting wires differing in size, for NV
example, f1.6 wires and 5.5-mm2 wires, connect 125-SEV 630-SW
the two kinds of wires together to a crimp terminal 125-HEV 630-SEW
because the thinner wires easily come off. 250-CV 630-HEW
eDo not tighten directly solid wires and cords 250-SV
250-HV
consisting of thin copper wires used as strands, for 250-SEV
example f1.6 and 1.25-mm2 wires, together. 250-HEV
Note *1 It is impossible to directly connect the wires of 40- and 50-A, NF/NV 50-SVFU.
92
5 Installation and Connection 1
Plug-in (PM) Plug-in type for distribution board

Bar stud Screw terminal For distribution board for electric lamps
(PM) (PM) (BPA)
− − −
− −
− −
− −
− −

− −
(Except for NF1600-SEW)
− (Except for 4P) −
(Except for 4P) − −

− −
(Except for NF800-UEW)
− − −
− − −
− − −
− − −
− − −
− − −
−
−
−

− 5
− −
− −

− −
The circuit breaker can be connected only by pushing it onto the preliminarily wired terminal block. Install it Mounting base for distribution board for electric
tightening the supplied screws through the mounting holes. lamps.
For the external dimensions, refer to page 139.
Table 5-2 List of terminal screws (B)

Connection type Front Rear Plug-in
Model
C•S•H
NF400-CW • NF400-SW • NF400-SEW • NF400-HEW • NF400-REW • NF630-CW • NF630-SW • NF630-SEW

M12 bolt
NF630-HEW • NF630-REW • NF800-CEW • NF800-SEW • NF800-HEW • NF800-REW • NF800-SDW • NF-SKW • NF-SLW
MCCB
NF1000-SEW • NF1250-SEW M12 bolt

NF1600-SEW M10 bolt —
U
NF400-UEW M12 bolt

NF800-UEW M12 bolt —
C•S•H
NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW • NV630-SW • NV630-SEW • NV630-HEW • NV630-CW • NV-SKW M12 bolt
ELCB
NV800-SEW • NV800-HEW M12 bolt
93
Installation
2. Connecting Parts
For the connection shown in the table on the previous page, the following parts are available as connecting parts.
Table 5-3 Studs on rear surface (B-ST)
Number Applicable models Set of Stud shape and
Type name Remarks
of poles MCCB ELCB order major included parts
ST-05SV2 2 ★Round studs
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NV32-SV, NV63-CV
sets Round studs (with insulating tube)
ST-05SV3 3 NF63-HV NV63-SV, NV63-HV
(2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
ST-05SV4 4 NF63-SV, NF63-HV — Bolts and nuts
ST-1SV2 2 —
NF125-CV, NF125-SV ★Bar studs
ST-1SV3 3 NV125-CV, NV125-SV Bar studs (with insulating tube)
NF125-HV(3, 4P) sets
ST-1SV4 4 NV125-HV (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
Bolts and nuts
ST-1HV2 2 NF125-HV(2P) —
ST-2SV2 2 NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV —
NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV
ST-2SV3 3
NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV ★Bar studs
NV125-SEV, NV125HEV One set
NF250-CV, NF250-SV Bar studs (with insulating tube)
NV250-CV, NV250-SV includes the
NF250-LGV/HGV, NF250-HV (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
NV250-HV, NV250-SEV parts for one
ST-2SV4 4 NF250-SEV, NF250-RGV sets Bolts and nuts
NV250-HEV unit. Please
NF250-HEV, NF125-SGV/HGV
place an
NF125-LGV, NF160-SGV
order for the
NF160-LGV/HGV
number of
—
ST-4SW2 2 circuit
NF400-CW, NF400-SW NV400-CW, NV400-SW ★Bar studs breakers.
ST-4SW3 3 NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NV400-SEW Insulating bases
NF400-REW NV400-HEW (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
ST-4SW4 4 NV400-REW Bar studs
sets (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
ST-6SW2 2 NF630-CW, NF630-SW —
Mounting screws, bolts and nuts
ST-6SW3 3 NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW NV630-CW, NV630-SW
ST-6SW4 4 NF630-REW NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
ST-8SW2 2 — ★Bar studs
NF800-SDW, NF800-CEW Insulating base (2 pcs)
ST-8SW3 3 NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW sets Bar studs
NF800-REW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
ST-8SW4 4 Mounting screws, bolts and nuts
Table 5-4 Plug-in type terminal blocks (PM)
5 Type name
Number
of poles
NF32-SV
Applicable models Set of
order
Major included parts
PMDN-05SV2L 2P
NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A)
PMDN-05SV3L 3P NF32-SV
NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A)
PMDN-05SV4L 4P NV32-SV Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc)

NV63-CV/SV/HV (5A-50A) sets
Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
PMDN-05SV2H 2P NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-05SV3H 3P NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-05SV4H 4P NV63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)
PMDN-1SV2 2P NF125-CV/SV
PMDN-1HV2 2P NF125-HV Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc)
sets Crip terminals
PMDN-1SV3 3P NF125-CV/SV/HV (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
PMDN-1SV4 4P NV125-CV/SV/HV
PMDN-1UV2 2P
Plug-in type terminal block (2 pc)
PMDN-1UV3 3P NF125-UV sets
Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs)
— 4P
PMDN-2SV2 2P NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
PMDN-2SV3 3P NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc)
NV125-SEV/HEV Plug-in type barriers
PMDN-2SV4 4P NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV sets ( 2-pole: 2 pcs, 3-pole: 4 pcs, 4-pole: 6 pcs)
Tulip terminals
PMDN-2SV2 2P (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)
NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV
PMDN-2SV3 3P
PMDN-2UV2 2P
Plug-in type terminal block (2 pc)
PMDN-2UV3 3P NF250-UV sets Plug-in type barriers (2-pole: 2 pcs, 3-pole: 4 pcs)
Tulip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs)
— 4P
PMDN-4SW2 2P NF400-CW/SW
NF400-CW/SW/SEW
3P
NV400-CW/SW/SEW
PMDN-4SW3 Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs)
NF400-HEW/REW
3P sets Plug-in type barriers (4 pcs)
NV400-HEW/REW
Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)
NF400-SW/SEW
4P
PMDN-4SW4 NV400-SEW
4P NF400-HEW
PMDN-8SW2 2P NF800-SDW
NF800-CEW/SEW
3P
NV800-SEW
PMDN-8SW3 Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs)
NF800-HEW/REW sets
3P Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)
NV800-HEW
4P NF800-SEW
PMDN-8SW4
4P NF800-HEW
Note In addition to the circuit breakers shown above, 4-pole and 2-pole circuit breakers are available. We are ready to manufacture such circuit breakers to order. Please consult us.
94
3. Standard Tightening Torque

Rear Screw A
Nut C
<Round stud> Round stud

Plug-in
<Screw terminal> <Bar stud>
Fig. 1 Connecting
Insulating Connecting Connecting conductor
tube busbar conductor
Circuit breaker
<Bar stud> Screw D Bar stud
Screw A
Screw E Connecting conductor Plug-in type
Screw A Screw E terminal block
Screw E
Fig. 4 Plug-in type stud
Plug-in type terminal block Fig. 5
Bar stud
Fig. 2 Insulating base Fig. 3
Table 5-5 Standard tightening torque (*1) Tightening torque N·m

Rear Plug-in
Model Connection type Round stud Bar stud Screw terminal Bar stud
Fig.1 Fig. 2, Fig.3 Fig.4 Fig.5
Screw A Nut C Screw A Screw E Screw D Screw E
MCCB ELCB
Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque
NF30-CS − M4×0.7 1 M6 2 − − − − − − − −
NF32-SV, NF63-CV NV32-SV, NV63-CV

M4×0.7 1 M6 2 − − − − M6 3 − −
NF63-SV, NF63-HV NV63-SV, NV63-HV
NF125-CV, NF125-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV
− − − − M6 4 M8 12 M8 6 − −
NF125-HV, NF125-UV NV125-HV
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV
NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV, NF250-UV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
NF250-LGV/HGV, NF250-RGV, NF125-SGV/HGV NV250-CV, NV250-SV
− − − − M6 10 M8 12 − − M8 12
NF125-LGV, NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV/HGV NV250-HV, NV250-SEV
NV250-HEV
5
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NV400-CW, NV400-SW
NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW − − − − M8 20 M12 45 − − M12 45

NF400-UEW (3P) NV400-REW
NF400-UEW (4P) − − − − − M10 30 M12 45 − − M12 45
NV630-CW, NV630-SW
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW
NV630-SEW − − − − M8 20 M12 45 − − M12 45
NV630-HEW
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW
NV800-SEW
NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW − − − − M10 30 2-M12 45 − − 2-M12 45
NV800-HEW
NF800-UEW (*2)
NF1000-SEW
− − − − − 4-M8 12 2-M12 45 − − 2-M12 45
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW − − − − − 4-M8 12 4-M10 25 − − − −
Notes *1 The appropriate range of tightening torque is ±20% of each value (standard tightening torque) shown in the above table. Please refer to the supplied assembly manual and
instruction manual for more information.
*2 The plug-in type is not available.
95
Installation
4. Crimp Terminal Type As the terminals in , commercially available crimp terminals can be used. Please
purchase the terminals at an electric material store.
For others, the crimp terminals for MCCB must be used. Place an order with us.
Table 5-6 List of applicable crimp terminals For the connection types shown in Fig. a and Fig. b, only crimp terminals will be delivered.
Nominal sectional area mm2 2 5.5 8 14 22

Allowable current 600 V, IV wire at 30°C, not (*4)
27A 49A 61A 88A 115A
in conduit
Frame (A)
Size of mm2 1.04 2.63 6.64 10.52 16.78

Model to to to to to
MCCB ELCB 2.63 6.64 10.52 16.78 26.66
BH-22
BH-P – R-2-5 R-5.5-5 R-8-5 R-14-5
30 (L330T459-23)
50
100 BH-P100 – R-8-8 R-14-8 R-22-8
NF30-CS, NF32-SV, NF63-CV*, NF63-SV* NV32-SV, NV63-CV*, NV63-SV* JST22-S5

30 R-2-5 R-5.5-5
NF63-HV* NV63-HV* R-8-5 R-14-5 BH-22
32 *(R-2-6) *(R-5.5-6)
*50A or below *50A or below (L330T459-23)
50
60 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV
R-2-8 R-5.5-8 R-8-8 R-14-8 R-22-8
63 60, 63A 60, 63A
R-2-5 R-5.5-5 JST22-S5

– – R-8-5 R-14-5
(R-2-6) (R-5.5-6) (L330T459-23)
125
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV, NF125-UV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV
R-2-8 R-5.5-8 R-8-8 R-14-8 R-22-8
60A or more 60A or more

NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-UV
125 NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
225 NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV R-14-8 R-22-8
250 NF125-LGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV
NF125-HGV, NF160-HGV, NF250-HGV
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
400 NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW
NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW
600 NV400-REW, NV630-CW
5
630 NV630-SW, NV630-SEW
NV630-HEW
800
NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW
1000
NF800-REW, NF800-UEW, NF800-SDW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
1200
1250
d Reference drawings of connection types

Method of connecting directly to Method of connecting to front bar
terminal(s) of body terminal
To connect
one terminal
To connect
two terminals
Carefully check the insulating distance between
Connect with the bolt the connecting bus bar, crimp terminal and
head downward. tightening bolt and the ground and the
phase-to-phase insulating distance.
(Fig. a) (Fig. b)
96
<Explanation of abbreviations> R····························Product specified by JIS

CB··························Product specified by JEM 1399
AMP·······················Product made by Nippon AMP
JST························Product made by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd.
NTK························Product made by Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd.
NTM·······················Product made by Nichifu Co., Ltd.
DST························Product made by Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co., Ltd.
38 60 100 150 200 325 Crimp terminal tightening screw
Reference drawing of
162A 217A 298A 395A 469A 650A
connection type
Tightening Remarks
Screw
26.66 42.42 96.3 117.2 192.6 242.27 torque Shape
size
to to to to to to N•m
42.42 60.57 117.2 152.05 242.27 325
When connecting two crimp
M5 2 to 3 terminals, set the terminals as
shown below if the
AMP #322870 1AF-60 *-marked terminals are used.
JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) M8 5 to 7
NTK R38-8S CB60-S8 M5 • M6 I
R - 2-5
R - 5.5-5
M5 2 to 3
AMP #322870 1AF-60

JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) M8 5 to 7 M8
NTK R38-8S CB60-S8 (Fig. a)
R -2-6
M5 2 to 3 R -5.5-6
AMP #322870 1AF-60 M5

JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) M8 5 to 7
NTK R38-8S CB60-S8 M8
2AF 2CR-150(*1)
When using 2AF, use a crimp tool
R-38-8 R-60-8 (LN300T920-20) (LN300T920-21) M8 8 to 13 having a nominal size of 100.
CB100-S8 (*1)CB150-S8
R-38-12 R-60-12 R-100-12 R-150-12 R-200-12 JST325-12
R-150-12 R-200-12 JST325-12

M12 40 to 50
Fit to a front type bar terminal.
Up to two pieces can be fitted to
one terminal.
(Fig. b)
5
R-38-12 R-60-12 R-100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 RD325-12
SD150-12 SD200-12 SD325-12

Notes *1 When using 2CR-150 or CB150-S8, insulate it from TC-S with insulating tube or tape. When using CB150-S8 for a 2- or 3-pole circuit breaker, TCL-2SV3L is applicable.
*2 On the power supply side, pan-head screws M5 are used.
*3 When tightening a terminal screw without connecting a wire, crimp terminal or bar, tighten the screw to 20 to 30% of the torque shown in the above table (to prevent damage to the
threads).
*4 The table shows not the allowable current values of circuit breakers, but those of wires applicable to crimp terminals.
Remark: 1. For the crimp terminals for UL listed circuit breakers, refer to the page of the characteristics and external dimensions of UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers.
d Dimensions of crimp terminals <extracted from catalog of JST>

Applicable External dimensions Applicable Applicable External dimensions Applicable
Part number Shape screw wire Part number Shape screw wire
size fd2 B L F E Thickness
mm2 size fd2 B L F E Thickness mm2
R2-5 M5 5.3 9.5 16.8 7.3 1.04 LN300T920-21 M8 8.4 22.5 70.0 33.0 117.2
B
R2-6 A M6 6.4 4.8 0.8 to L330T402-8 M8 8.4 25.3 61.5 23.0 27.0 3.2 to
12.0 21.8 11.0
R2-8 M8 8.4 2.63 R150-12 A M12 13.0 36.0 66.0 21.0 152.05
R5.5-5 M5 5.3 9.5 19.8 8.3 2.63 R200-12 A M12 13.0 44.0 78.0 24.5 31.5 4.0 192.6 to 242.27
R5.5-6 A M6 6.4 12.0 25.8 13.0 6.8 1.0 to 325-12 A M12 13.0 50.5 88.0 33.5 35.5 4.5 242.27 to 325
R5.5-8 M8 8.4 15.0 28.0 13.7 6.64 CB60-S8 8.4 16.0 46.7 20.7 18.0 2.0 42.42 to 60.57
R8-5 M5 5.3 12.0 23.8 CB100-S8 B M8 8.4 22.0 52.5 20.5 21.0 2.6 96.3 to 117.2
6.64
8-5NS M5 5.3 9.0 22.3 9.3 CB150-S8 8.4 22.0 61.0 23.0 27.0 3.2 117.2 to 152.05
A 8.5 1.2 to
R8-6 M6 6.4 12.0 23.8
10.52
R8-8 M8 8.4 15.0 29.8 13.8
Applicable External dimensions Applicable
8-5SC-9 M5 5.3 9 23.8 9.3 8.5 1.2 6.64 to 10.52 Part number Shape screw wire
R14-5 M5 5.3 12.0 29.8
10.52 size fd2 B L F E N Thickness mm2
14-5NS M5 5.3 9.0 28.3 13.3 RD60-12 14.0 22.0 89.0 20.0 18.0 2.0 42.42 to 60.57
A 10.5 1.5 to
R14-6 M6 6.4 12.0 29.8 RD100-12 14.0 28.5 95.5 20.3 21.0 2.6 96.3 to 117.2
16.78
R14-8 M8 8.4 16.0 32.8 14.5 RD150-12 C M12 14.0 36.0 106.0 21.0 27.0 40 3.2 117.2 to 152.05
L330T459-23 M5 5.3 12.0 30.0 RD200-12 14.0 44.0 116.5 23.0 31.5 4.0 192.6 to 242.27
22-5NS M5 5.3 9.5 28.7 12.0 16.78 RD325-12 14.0 50.5 123.8 23.0 35.5 4.5 242.27 to 325
22-S6 A M6 6.4 12.0 30.0 12.0 1.8 to SD150-12 36.0 107.0 29.0 28.0 3.2 117.2 to 152
R22-8 M8 8.4 16.5 33.7 13.5 26.66 SD200-12 C M12 14.0 44.0 108.0 36.0 32.0 32 4.0 192.6 to 242.2
R22-12 M12 13.0 22.0 42.5 19.5 SD325-12 50.5 125.0 38.0 37.0 4.5 242.2 to 325
38-S8 M8 8.4 15.5 38.0 16.0 26.66
R38-8 A M8 8.4 14.0 1.8 to
22.0 42.7 17.7 Shape A φd2 Shape B φd2 Shape C φd2
R38-12 M12 13.0 42.42
L330T459-12 M8 8.4 16.0 46.7 20.7 42.42
R60-8 A M8 8.4 18.0 2.0 to
B
22.0 49.7 20.7

R60-12 M12 13.0 60.57
F E F E N F E
LN300T920-20 B M8 8.4 22.5 51.0 20.0 96.3
21.0 2.6 L L L
R100-12 A M12 13.0 28.5 55.6 20.4 to 117.2
97
Installation
5. Busbar
The size of the conductor can be connected is shown on the outline drawing of each model. The following special
busbars are available. Use them as needed. When using any busbar, isolate it from the bare busbar on the circuit
breaker power supply side with an insulating barrier.
F Conductor 4 A
f 6.5 C A f 9 or f 8.5
F G thickness
Conductor
10
20
t = 10 max.
thickness
10
t = 4 max.
H
H
Nominal
Nominal
diameter of
diameter of
conductor
conductor
tightening
ON tightening
ON screw J
screw J
OFF OFF
H
H
C B D C B
D
E E
Fig. 1 Conductor Fig. 2

f9 thickness C A
F
t = 6 max.
15
H
Nominal
diameter of
conductor
ON tightening
screw J
OFF
5
H
D C B
E
Fig. 3
Table 5-7 Table of variable dimensions

Type Applicable models Busbar
Outline and dimentions
name MCCB ELCB Fig. A B C D E F G H J
11
NF32-SV NV32-SV 40.5 .5
NF63-CV (50A or below) NV63-CV (50A or below)
FB-05SV 1 24 24 2 50 75 11.5 − 25 M5×0.8
NF63-SV (50A or below) NV63-SV (50A or below)
2
f 6.5
NF63-HV (50A or below) NV63-HV (50A or below) f5.5
18
46
NV125-CV
NF125-CV, NF125-SV
FB-1SV NV125-SV 2 24 24 4 60 90 18 15 29 M8
4
NF125-HV, NF125-UV 15 f 8.5

NV125-HV
f 8.5
NF125-SEV
NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV
NV125-SEV
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 20
NV125-HEV 57.5
NF250-UV, NF250-SEV
FB-2SV NV250-CV, NV250-SV 3 24 24 6 70 105 20 − 37 M8
NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV
6
NV250-HV, NV250-SEV f9
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-HEV f9
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
98
6. Insulation Distance on Power Source Side

dBasic concept
Insulation distance (distance indicated in standards)
Be sure to at least secure the insulation distances (spatial distance and creeping distance) specified by the codes and standards of the relevant equipment and
facilities where the circuit breakers are installed.
It is recommended that insulation barriers and insulation tape be used to enhance the electrical insulation between bare-live parts and between bare-live parts and
ground to avoid accidents otherwise caused by a loose metal piece, conductive dust, abnormal surge voltage in the circuit or a similar event so as to improve the
reliability of panels.
Arc Space (insulation space)

At the exhaust outlet side of breaker, arc space is necessary. When the actual load circuit is opened, especially when a large current such as overload or short-
circuit is interrupted, ionized gas is emitted from the exhaust outlet. This gas can cause a short circuit between bare, live parts such as busbars, and also can cause
grounding faults between conductive installation metal panels.
Therefore, it is important to secure enough arc space at the exhaust outlet side of the breaker and to strengthen insulation of parts exposed to the gas. In addition,
securing enough space at the front of the exhaust outlet is necessary, because when the gas emission is blocked, failures such as deterioration of breaking
performance can be caused.
dInsulation required part

With regard to insulation of bear, live parts of the line side of the breaker, please make sure to insulate at least C part C indicated in the diagram above with
insulation tape, a tube or a terminal cover.
qA : Distance from the circuit breaker to the ceiling plate

wB1 : Distance from the circuit breaker to the uncovered conducting part of the upper circuit breaker terminal (front connection)
eB2 : Distance from the lower circuit breaker to the end face of the upper circuit breaker (rear connection)
rD1 : Distance from the side of the breaker to the side plate
tC : Insulated length of the power source terminal of the circuit breaker (front connection)
Please secure insulation using insulating tape, insulating tubing, insulation barrier, or a terminal cover, between bare charge parts within this size range. Please
refer to a table a necessary size must.
When using insulation tape and insulation tubing together with insulation barriers and terminal covers, make them overlap with the other by at least 10 mm.
For the models with insulation barriers supplied as standard, please make sure to use the barriers.
a : clearance specified in standard
yD2 : Side-to-side spacing of breakers
While the circuit breakers can basically be installed together without a clearance in between, be sure to observe the following instructions.
It is desirable to install an insulation barrier between the adjacent circuit breakers or insulate the bare-live parts considering the effect of cutoff gas.
Be sure to secure the insulation distance (dimension a) as the minimum, indispensable requirement.
With a leakage circuit breaker and a leakage alarm circuit breaker installed in close contact with the other, a current of 2,500A or higher flowing through one of the
circuit breakers could cause the other to operate falsely.
Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between.
A circuit breaker of 400-ampere frame or larger with an SHT or a UVT could operate falsely if a current of 50 kA or higher flows through the adjacent circuit breaker.
Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between.
Ceiling plate D2
A
C
5
B1
B2
B1
Side
plate
D1
a

Table 5-8 Insulation distance (mm) (440VAC or below) *Figures in parentheses are for 230VAC or below.
Horizontal
Model Ceiling plate Vertical spacing spacing
Class A B1, B2
Uncovered metal
• Insulated C
Plate Without With
Series MCCB ELCB plate, terminal terminal D1
Without With coated
terminal terminal cover cover
plate
cover cover
NF30-CS − 10 10 10 20 20 (*1) 20
NF32-SV, NF63-CV NV63-CV 5 5 5 20 20 (*1) 20
NF63-SV, NF63-HV NV32-SV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 10 10 10 30 30 30 25
NF125-CV NV125-CV 50(30) 40(30) 10 50 50 (*1) 25
NF125-SV NV125-SV 50(10) 30(10) 10 50 50 50 25
NF125-HV NV125-HV 50 40 40 80 80 80 40
C NF250-CV NV250-CV 40 40 40 50 50 50 50
• NF125-SEV, NF250-SV, NF250-SEV
NV125-SEV, NV250-SV, NV250-SEV 70(40) 40 40 70(50) 50 70(50) 50
S NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV
• NF125-HEV, NF250-HV, NF250-HEV
H NF125-LGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV NV125-HEV, NV250-HV, NV250-HEV 80 60 60 80 80 80 60
• NF125-HGV, NF160-HGV, NF250-HGV
R NF400-CW NV400-CW 60 60 60 60 60 60 40
• NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NV400-SW, NV400-SEW 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
MB NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NV400-HEW, NV400-REW 200 200 200 200 200 200 150
NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-CW NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV630-HEW 200 200 200 200 200 200 150
NF800-SEW, NF800-CEW NV800-SEW 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NV800-HEW 200 200 200 200 200 200 150
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW − 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
NF1600-SEW
NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV − 30 (*6) 30 (*6) 30 (*6) 50 (*9) 50 (*9) 50 5
R NF125-UV, NF250-UV − (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) 25
•
U NF400-UEW − 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
NF800-UEW − 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
BH BH-K, BH-K100 − (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) 20
NF225-CWU − (40) − (40) (50) − (50) (50)
NF50-SVFU − 10 (*6) 10 (*6) 10 (*6) 20 (*7) 20 (*7) 30 10
NF100-CVFU − 50(25) 40(25) 10 50 50 50 25(15)
NF125-SVU(*4) − 40(10) 30(10) 10 50 50 50 25(20)
UL NF125-HVU(*5) − 40 40 40 80 80 80 25(20)
NF250-SVU(*4) − 40 40 40 70(50) 50 70(50) 50(20)
NF250-HVU(*5) − 40 40 40 80 80 80 50(20)
NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU(*5) − 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU(*5) − 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Remark: 1. The table shows the dimensions in the case of the use of a large terminal cover (TC-L).
Notes *1 It is not necessary to provide an insulation distance (an arc space) on the power supply side. However, if a grounding metal piece or the like comes in close contact with the
terminal, be sure to completely insulate the terminals or the bare-live parts of the cable conductors.
*2 At more than 440 V AC, the distance shall be 10 mm.
*3 For 480Y/277V AC.
*4 For 480V AC.
*5 For 600Y/347V AC.
*6 An exhaust port is provided also on the circuit breaker load side. Secure the dimension A both on the power supply side and on the load side.
*7 When any of the circuit breakers NF125-RGB to NF250-RGV is used on the upstream side, an exhaust port is provided also on the circuit breaker load side. Secure the larger
distance of the dimension B1 of NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV or NF50-SVFU and the dimension B1 of the downstream circuit breaker.
99
Installation
7. Effect of Installation Orientation

Installation orientation does not affect the operating characteristics of circuit breakers of electronic or thermo-
magnetic operation types. However, the installation orientation affects the operating current of fully magnetic type
circuit breakers as the iron core in the oil dash pot is under gravitational force.
It is generally suggested they be installed vertically.
Hydraulic-magnetic (The same applies to other models of hydraulic-magnetic type.)

MCCB 100%
Class Model
107%
C NF30-CS 93%
ON ON
ON
ON
110% 90%
ON
ON
ON
ON
107% 93%
100%
Rate of change of rated

current by mounting angle
8. Connection of Line and Load

The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is as shown Line Load
in (a) normal connection on the right.

Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection. This may lead to a ON ON
5 decrease in breaking performance.

However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models Load Line
(a) Normal connection (b) Reserve connection
(excluding MDU breakers).
Connection methods
NF-C, NF-S, NF-H, NF-R and NF-U class

BH-P, CP30-BA, NV-C, S, H and R class of 400 to Reverse connection is allowed for the standard
800AF, NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU, models.
NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU
100
1 Internal Accessories
Accessories
1) Internal Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 102

6 102
2) Kinds of Internal Accessories ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 103

3) Operations and Ratings of Switches ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 103
4) Maximum Number of Internal Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 104
5) Cassette Type Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 109
6) Shunt Trip (SHT) … ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 111
7) Undervoltage Trip (UVT) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 112
8) Lead Wire Drawing … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 114
9) Lead Wire Terminal Block … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 114
10) Test Button Module (TBM) … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 115
11) Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 116
2 External Accessories 117

1) F-type Operating Handle (Breaker Mount Type)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 117
2) V-type Operating Handle (Door Mount Type)… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 119
3) Terminal Covers… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 121
4) Insulating Barriers………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 124
5) Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders………………………………………………………………………… 127
6) Mechanical Interlocks (MI)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 129
7) Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers………………………………………………………………………………………… 130
8) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical Operation Devices… …………………………………………………………………… 133
9) Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and Handle Caps… ………………………………………………………………………… 136
10) IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 137
101
6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories
1. Internal Accessories
The accessories to be installed in circuit breakers include the followings. For the numbers of the accessories which
can be installed, refer to the tables on pages 106 to 110. The standard internal accessories have lead wires (450
mm long) drawn out. (However, some of Models UVT and TBM have vertical lead wire terminal blocks as
standard.)
When circuit breakers are installed side by side, keep a space of 8 mm or more for lead wires between the circuit
breakers. (Models with lead wires drawn out toward load and models with lead wire grooves in the side faces can
be installed in close contact.)
SHT (Shunt trip) AL (Alarm switch) Power supply

ALc
Device to electrically trip a Switch to electrically
Control
circuit breaker from a display the tripping ALb ALa power
supply
distance. The allowable status of circuit PL
operating voltage range is 70 breaker Load
Small-size MCCB
or fuse
to 110% of the rated voltage. Connection diagram
(JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1, Ann.2)
AX (Auxiliary switch)
Power supply
S1
S2
Switch to electrically Power supply
AXc
display the ON-OFF AXa Control
Load status of circuit AXb

power
supply
Pushbutton switch
Connection diagram
breaker PL1
Load
PL2
Connection diagram
6
1 Accessories
TBM (Test button module)

Unit to perform test under
UVT (Undervoltage trip) SLT (Lead wire terminal block) voltage from a distance.
TBMs can be connected in
Device to automatically trip a circuit Terminals for connecting with
parallel. (The standard
breaker when the voltage drops. The internal accessories. The
TBMs are provided with
operating voltage is 70 to 35% of the terminal block will be
SLT. In the case of the flush
UVT rated voltage. (JIS C 8201-2-1 manufactured to order. For the
plate type, the external
Ann.1) detailed dimensions, refer to
dimensions are partially
When the voltage recovers at least to pages 116 and 117. (The
different from those of the
85% or more, the circuit breaker can dimensions of SLT slightly vary
standard type.)
be turned on after the device is depending on the number of
manually reset. installed accessories and the Circuit breaker
model.) TBM
Power supply
However, circuit breakers with TBM2 switch
Control
a frame size of 400A and power
UC1
above having an electrical TBM1 supply
operation device are normally
UC2 provided with SLT. TBM circuit diagram
Connection
diagram
Load
102
6 Accessories 1
Internal Accessories
2. Kinds of Internal Accessories

Table 6-1
Accessory name Nameplate (sample) Accessory name Nameplate (sample)
AL Alarm switch
Earth leakage trip
AX Auxiliary switch EAL alarm switch
SHT Shunt tripping device
Undervoltage tripping TBM Test button module

UVT device
3. Operations and Ratings of Switches

Table 6-2 Operations of AL switch Table 6-4 Ratings of AL and AX switches
Status of circuit breaker Contact status of AL switch AC DC
Applied Current A Current A
Voltage Voltage
98/ALa (open) switch Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive
V load load V load load
96/ALb (closed)
Off or On 95/ALc (250) (1) (0.5) (50) (1) (0.5)
A
125 3 (1) 30 (2) (1)
98/ALa (closed) 460 — — 250 0.2 0.2
96/ALb (open) S 250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4
Trip 95/ALc 125 5 3 30 4 3
460 5 2 250 0.3 0.3
* The terminal numbers 98/ALa, 96/ALb and 95/ALc may vary depending on the number of V 250 10 10 125 0.6 0.6
installed switches and the installation poles. 125 10 10 30 10 6
Remarks: 1. The ratings in parentheses do not conform to UL.
Table 6-3 Operations of AX switch 2. For the applied switches, refer to Tables 6-9-1 to 6-14-1.
Status of circuit breaker Contact status of AX switch
14/AXa (open)
12/AXb (closed)
Off or Trip 11/AXc
14/AXa (closed)
12/AXb (open)
On 11/AXc
* The terminal numbers 14/AXa, 12/AXb and 11/AXc may vary depending on the number of
6
installed switches and the installation poles.
1 Accessories
103
4. Maximum Number of Internal Accessories

AL AX SHT or UVT
JMCCB
J and Motor Protection Breakers Outgoing direction of
PAL
Table 6-5 Table of maximum number of Handle of circuit breaker lead wires
internal accessories Left pole Right pole are cassette type accessories. (Some of UVT are not provided with
cassettes. Refer to page XXX for details.)
NF63-CV NF400-CW
NF63-CV
C NF30-CS NF125-CV NF630-CW NF800-CEW
NF125-CV
NF250-CV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV NF400-SW
NF32-SV NF125-SV NF400-SEW NF1000-SEW
S NF125-SGV NF125-SEV NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW
NF63-SV NF630-SW
NF160-SGV NF250-SEV NF800-SDW NF1600-SEW
NF125-SV NF630-SEW
NF250-SV
NF250-SGV
Model
NF63-HV
NF125-HV
NF125-LGV
L NF125-HGV
NF125-RGV NF400-HEW
• NF125-HEV NF400-REW NF800-HEW
H NF63-HV NF160-LGV
NF250-HEV NF630-HEW NF800-REW
• NF160-HGV
R NF250-HV NF630-REW
NF250-LGV
NF250-HGV
NF250-RGV
Num U NF125-UV NF400-UEW(4P)
ber NF400-UEW(3P)
of p NF250-UV NF800-UEW
A L ole
(sta and s 2 or 3 poles 2 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 3, 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles 2, 3 or 4 poles
nda
rd) AX
swit
che S V
Accessory s
(*3) (*7)
AL 1 2 1 2
(*3) (*7)
1 1 1 1 3 1 5 3 1 3
AX 2 2 2 4
2 3 3 2 4 2 6 4 5 6
(*1) (*1)(*5) (*1)(*5) (*1)

(*1) (*1)
SHT (*6) (*6)
or
UVT
(*3) (*2) (*2) (*7) (*7)
6
1 2 1 2
AL + AX
1 2 1 2
3-pole product only
(*1) (*1) (*1)

(*1) (*1)
SHT (*6) (*6)
AL + or (*7) (*7)
UVT (*8) (*8)
1 Accessories
(*1) (*1) (*1)

(*1) 1 3 (*1)
SHT (*6) 5
(*6)
1 1 2 4
AX + or (*7) (*7)
UVT 2 2 3
1 (*8) 3 1 (*8)
2 4 2
(*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)

SHT (*6) (*6)
AL + AX + or (*7) (*7)
(*8) (*8)
UVT
(*4) (*9) (*9) (*9)
PAL
(contact output) Option for NF800-CEW, SEW, Option for NF1000-SEW and
Option for NF400-SEW, HEW, REW
and UEW and NF630-SEW, HEW and HEW and REW and NF1250-SEW and NF1600-SEW
REW NF800-UEW
Notes *1 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*2 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
*3 Although the lead wires are normally drawn out laterally, those with lead wires drawn out toward load are available. (Only for front connection type)
*4 PAL (contact output) can be installed together with AL and AX on the left pole side. (It cannot be installed together with SHT or UVT.)
The standard type is provided with SLT. PAL control voltage (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary.
*5 SHT and UVT can be installed on the left side.
*6 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on
the left pole side.)
*7 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order.
*8 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately.
*9 SLT is provided as standard. A control power supply (100 to 200 V AC) is required. (In this case, other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side.)
Remarks: 1. For electrically operated automatic reset type circuit breakers having a frame size of 400A or above, the numbers of AL switches which can be installed are smaller
by 1 than the values shown above.
2. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
104
6 Accessories 1
JELCB
J AL AX SHT or UVT
Table 6-6 Table of maximum number of Handle of circuit breaker TBM Outgoing direction of
lead wires
internal accessories Left pole Right pole are cassette type accessories.
NV63-CV
NV400-CW
C NV125-CV
NV630-CW
NV250-CV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV NV400-SW
NV125-SV NV400-SEW
S NV125-SEV NV630-SW NV800-SEW
Model
NV250-SV NV630-SEW
NV250-SEV
NV63-HV
H NV125-HV NV400-HEW
• NV125-HEV NV400-REW NV800-HEW
R NV250-HV NV630-HEW
NV250-HEV
U
Num
b er o
f po
Sw les
itch 2, 3, or 4 poles 3 poles
Accessory S
(*6)
AL
(*6)
1
AX 2
(*2) (*6) (*6)
AL + AX
(*3) (*5) (*5)

SHT
or
UVT
SHT (*4) (*4)

(*5) (*5)
AL + or (*6) (*6)
UVT
SHT (*4) (*4)

(*5) (*5)
AX + or (*6) (*6)
UVT
SHT (*4) (*4)
6
(*5) (*5)
AL + AX + or (*6) (*6)
UVT
(*1) (*1) (*1)

TBM
1 Accessories
Notes *1 The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage.
*2 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
*3 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*4 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVF voltage module must be separately installed.
*5 When the accessory is provided with UVT, the UVT voltage module has a vertical lead wire terminal block. The UVT is not provided with a cassette.
*6 SLT to be used when three or more accessories are installed on the left pole is manufactured to order.
Remarks: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
2. TBM can be installed regardless of the number of installed AL, AX, SHT and UVT.
105
J 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

JUL AL AX SHT or UVT Outgoing direction of
Handle of circuit breaker TBM
Table 6-7 Table of maximum number of lead wires
Left pole Right pole
internal accessories are cassette type accessories.
NF125-SVU
NF50-SVFU NF50-SVFU NF125-HVU NF400-SWU NF630-SWU
MCCB NF225-CWU
Model
NF100-CVFU NF100-CVFU NF250-SVU NF400-HWU NF630-HWU

NF250-HVU
NV125-SVU
NV50-SVFU NV125-HVU
Nu NV50-SVFU
mb ELCB NV100-CVFU NV250-SVU
er o NV250-HVU
fp
(sta AL an oles 2 poles 3 poles 2 or 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 3 poles 2 poles 3 poles 3 poles
nda d A
rd) X
swi
tche S
Accessory s
(*4)
AL 1 2 1 2 1 2
(*4)
1 1 1 1 3 1 5 3 1 1
AX 2 3
2
3
2 1 2
2 4 2 6 4 2 2
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*3) (*6) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*6) (*1)
SHT
or
UVT
(*2) (*2) (*6) (*6) (*2) (*2)
1 2 1 2 1 2
AL + AX 1 2 1 2 1 2
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*3)

(*4) (*5) (*4) (*5)
SHT
AL + or
UVT
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*3) (*1) (*3)

(*4) (*5) (*4) (*5)
SHT 1 1 1 3
AX + or 2 2 2 4
5
UVT 3
1 3 1
2 4 2
(*1) (*6) (*1) (*1) (*1)(*3) (*1)(*3)

(*4)(*5) (*4)(*5)
SHT
AL + AX + or
6
UVT
(*7) (*7) (*7)

TBM
1 Accessories
Notes *1 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*2 SHT cannot be installed.
*3 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so.
*4 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
*6 UVT of NF50-SVFU and NV50-SVFU are not provided with cassettes.
*7 The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage.
Remarks: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
2. AL and AX for minute load can be manufactured to order. (These switches have been certified only by UL and CSA. They have not been certified by TUV.)
106
6 Accessories 1
JMDU
J Breakers AL for
transmission
AX for
transmission
AL AX with MDU with MDU SHT or UVT TI
Table 6-8-1 Table of maximum number of
Outgoing direction of
internal accessories Handle of
circuit breaker
PAL
lead wires
Left pole Right pole are cassette type accessories.
NF600-SEP with MDU

Model NF400-SEP with MDU NF600-HEP with MDU
Num NF400-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU
ber NF800-HEP with MDU
o f po
swit les 3 or 4 poles
ch
Accessory S
(*1)
AL
1 3 15 3 (*1)
AX
2 4 26 4
(*2) (*2)
SHT
(*3) (*3)
UVT (*4) (*4)
(*1) (*1)
AL + AX
(*1) (*1)
(*2) (*2)
AL + SHT
13 5 (*1)
(*1)
24 (*2)
(*2)
AX + SHT 3 1
3 1
4 2
2
(*1)
(*1)
(*2)
(*2)
AL + AX + SHT
(*1) (*1)
(*3) (*3)
AL + UVT (*4) (*4)
(*5) (*5)
13 5 (*1)
(*1)
24 (*3)
(*3)
AX + UVT 3 1 (*4) 3 1 (*4)
4 2 (*5)
2 (*5)
(*1)
(*1)
(*3)
(*3)
AL + AX + UVT (*4)
(*4)
6
(*5)
(*5)
(*6) (*6)
PAL
EPAL
1 Accessories
(*6) (*6)
TI
With contact outputs for PAL and OAL With contact outputs for PAL and OAL
Notes *1 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is
*2 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on the left pole side.)
*3 The UVT voltage module is installed externally. UTV is not provided with a cassette.
*4 UVT is normally installed on the right pole. If you intend to install it on the left pole, specify so.
*6 The standard model has a terminal block. A 5-VA control power supply (compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC) is required. (In this case, another internal accessory
cannot be installed on the right pole.)
Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
107
JMDU
J Breakers AL AX
AL for
transmission
with MDU
AX for
transmission
with MDU SHT or UVT TI
Table 6-8-2 Table of maximum number of Handle of PAL Outgoing direction of
internal accessories circuit breaker lead wires
NF600-SEP with MDU

Num NF400-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU
ber NF800-HEP with MDU
o f po
swit les 3 or 4 poles
ch
Accessory S
AL for transmission
with MDU
(*1)
AX for transmission
with MDU
(*1)
AL + AX for
transmission with MDU
(*1)
AL + AX
+
AL for
(*1)
AL+AX
+
AX for
(*1)
AL + AX
+
AL + AX for
(*1)
Note *1 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or
AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block.
AL for AX for
AL AX transmission transmission
with MDU with MDU SHT or UVT
Handle of PAL Outgoing direction of

circuit breaker lead wires
Num Model NF250-SEV with MDU

ber NF250-HEV with MDU
o f po
switc les
h 3 or 4 poles
Accessory S
AL 1 2
1
AX 2
3
1 2 (*1)
AL + AX 1 2
6
SHT (*2)
or
UVT
(*2)
AL + SHT
(*2)
AX + SHT
1 Accessories
(*2)
AL + AX + SHT
(*2)
AL + UVT
(*2)
AX + UVT
(*2)
AL + AX + UVT
AL for transmission
with MDU
(*3)
AL for transmission
with MDU AX
(*3)
AL for transmission
with MDU AL + AX
(*3)
AL for transmission with
MDU AL + AX + AL
(*3)
MDU AL + AX + AX
(*3)
MDU AL + AX + AL + AX
(*3)
Notes *1 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body.
*2 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.)
*3 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or
AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block. In the case of 225A frame circuit
breakers, AL for transmission with the MDU must be installed for fault current measurement.
Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.
108
6 Accessories 1
5. Cassette Type Accessories

The internal accessories for major models having a frame size from 30 to 800 A come in cassettes, and they can be
installed to and removed from circuit breakers by the user.
Some cassette type accessories have lead wires drawn out, and others have vertical lead wire terminal blocks
(SLT). (These parts are supplied by 10 pieces for frame size from 30 to 250 A or by 1 piece for frame size from 400
to 800 A.)
JApplicable
J models and kinds of cassette type accessories
Model Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt tripping device (SHT) Undervoltage tripping device (UVT)
NF63-CV~NF250-CV, NF32-SV~NF250-SV
NF63-HV~NF250-HV
NF125-SGV~NF250-SGV, NF125-LGV~NF250-LGV
NF125-HGV~NF250-HGV
NF125-SEV, NF250-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF250-HEV
NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV, NF125-UV, NF250-UV
MCCB NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU
NF50-SVFU, NF400-CW, NF630-CW, NF800-CEW
NF400-SW, NF630-SW, NF400-SEW~NF800-SEW
NF800-SDW, NF400-HEW~NF800-HEW –
NF400-REW~NF800-REW, NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW
NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU
NV63-CV~NV250-CV, NV32-SV~NV250-SV
NV63-HV~HV250-HV

NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV, NV125-HEV, NV250-HEV
ELCB NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU
NV50-SVFU, NV400-CW, NV630-CW
NV400-SW, NV630-SW, NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW –
NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW, NV400-REW
JProcedure
J for installing cassette type accessories
1 Accessories
1. Press the trip button (PTT) 2. Loosen the cover screws. 3. Open the cover. 4. Install the cassette type 5. Close the cover, and tighten
to trip the circuit breaker. accessory. (*2) the screws.
(*1)
Notes *1. When installing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker to the tripped state.
*2. If the inner lid or another accessory has been installed, remove it before installing the accessory.
When any circuit breaker supplied with the inner lid is used without an accessory, fit the inner lid without fail.
Failure to do so may affect the short-circuiting performance.
Models with inner lid: NF125-SV, NF125-HV, NF125-UV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-UV
NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV250-HEV
NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV
NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU NF400-REW, NF400-UEW
NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU, NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU NF630-REW, NV400-REW
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW
NV800-HEW
Cautions when installing
Before installing or removing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker and accessories to the no-voltage state.
Never install a cassette type accessory while the handle is in the ON or OFF position. Doing so may damage the accessory.
When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out, apply the supplied nameplate to the circuit breaker side face.
When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out for a frame size of 400 to 800 A, secure the lead wires along the circuit
breaker side face with the supplied lead wire retainers.
109
JType
J name
Table 6-9-1
Model Installation
MCCB ELCB pole AL AX AL+AX SHT UVTN or UVTS
SHTA240-03SVUR
SHTA440-03SVUR
For right AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUR –
NF50-SVFU pole AL-03SVURS AX-03SVURS ALAX-03SVURS SHTA240-03SVURS
SHTA440-03SVURS
SHTD100-03SVURS
For left pole
SHTA240-03SVUL
SHTA440-03SVUL
AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUL –
For left AL-03SVULS AX-03SVULS ALAX-03SVULS SHTA240-03SVULS
NV50-SVFU pole SHTA440-03SVULS
SHTD100-03SVULS
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV

NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV SHTA240-05SVR UVTNAD130-05SVR UVTSAD130-05SVR
NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV SHTA550-05SVR UVTNA250-05SVR UVTSA250-05SVR
NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV AL-05SV AX-05SV ALAX-05SV SHTD125-05SVR UVTNA480-05SVR UVTSA480-05SVR
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV For right AL-05SVRS AX-05SVRS ALAX-05SVRS SHTA240-05SVRS UVTNAD130-05SVRS UVTSAD130-05SVRS
NF125-RGV, NF125-UV pole SHTA550-05SVRS UVTNA250-05SVRS UVTSA250-05SVRS
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV SHTD125-05SVRS UVTNA480-05SVRS UVTSA480-05SVRS
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV
NF250-RGV, NF250-UV For left pole
NV32-SV, NV63-CV SHTA240-05SVL UVTNAD130-05SVL UVTSAD130-05SVL
NV63-SV, NV63-HV SHTA550-05SVL UVTNA250-05SVL UVTSA250-05SVL
NV125-CV, NV125-SV AL-05SV AX-05SV ALAX-05SV SHTD125-05SVL UVTNA480-05SVL UVTSA480-05SVL
NV125-HV For left AL-05SVLS AX-05SVLS ALAX-05SVLS SHTA240-05SVLS UVTNAD130-05SVLS UVTSAD130-05SVLS
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV pole SHTA550-05SVLS UVTNA250-05SVLS UVTSA250-05SVLS
NV250-CV, NV250-SV SHTD125-05SVLS UVTNA480-05SVLS UVTSA480-05SVLS
NV250-HV
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV
SHTA240-05SVUR UVTNAD130-05SVUR UVTSAD130-05SVUR

SHTA550-05SVUR UVTNA250-05SVUR UVTSA250-05SVUR
NF100-CVFU For right AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU SHTD125-05SVUR UVTNA480-05SVUR UVTSA480-05SVUR
NF125-SVU/HVU pole AL-05SVURS AX-05SVURS ALAX-05SVURS SHTA240-05SVURS UVTNAD130-05SVURS UVTSAD130-05SVURS
NF250-SVU/HVU SHTA550-05SVURS UVTNA250-05SVURS UVTSA250-05SVURS
SHTD125-05SVURS UVTNA480-05SVURS UVTSA480-05SVURS
For left pole UVTNAD130-05SVUL UVTSAD130-05SVUL
SHTA240-05SVUL
SHTA550-05SVUL UVTNA250-05SVUL UVTSA250-05SVUL
NV100-CVFU AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU SHTD125-05SVUL UVTNA480-05SVUL UVTSA480-05SVUL
For left AL-05SVULS AX-05SVULS ALAX-05SVULS SHTA240-05SVULS UVTNAD130-05SVULS UVTSAD130-05SVULS
NV125-SVU/HVU pole
NV250-SVU/HVU SHTA550-05SVULS UVTNA250-05SVULS UVTSA250-05SVULS
SHTD125-05SVULS UVTNA480-05SVULS UVTSA480-05SVULS
For right pole AX-4SW SHT-4SW

NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW – AX-4SWRS – –
NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW (2, or 3 poles) SHT-4SWRS
AX2-4SWRS
NF630-HEW, NF630-REW For right pole SHT-4SWRFS –
(4 poles) – – – SHT-8SWRFS
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW For left pole
(2, 3 or 4 poles)
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW AL-4SWL AX-4SW ALAX-4SWL SHT-4SW
6
AL-4SWLS AX-4SWLS –
NV400-REW For left pole AL2-4SWLS AX2-4SWLS ALAX-4SWLS SHT-4SWLS
NV630-CW, NV630-SW (2, 3 or 4 poles)
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
AX-4SWU
AX-4SWURS SHT-4SWU
NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU For right pole – –
AX2-4SWURS SHT-4SWURS –
1 Accessories
For left pole AL-4SWUL AX-4SWUL ALAX-4SWUL SHT-4SWU

Remarks: 1. For the possibility of installation of accessories and the installation pole, refer to the tables of maximum numbers on pages 106 to 110.
2. AL and AX for minute load can be manufactured to order.
3. Corrosion-proof cassette type AL and AX are not available. When the circuit breaker body is exposed to class 1 tropicalization, class 2 tropicalization, reinforced corrosion resistance
treatment or class 2 heat resistance treatment, place an order for the circuit breaker including the accessories.
4. Cassette type accessories with SLT for right pole cannot be installed to 4-pole circuit breakers. Accessories with SLT for right pole to be used in 4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured to order.
5. Cassette type accessories with SLT cannot be installed to flush plate type circuit breakers.
6. Cassette type accessories (AL, AX and SHT) cannot be installed to circuit breakers with MG.
7. It is impossible to install a combination of a cassette type accessory with lead wires drawn out and that with SLT or a combination of cassette type accessories with SLT on the same pole.
8. It is impossible to install the cassette type AL or AX to the pole to which UVT has been installed.
9. AX and SHT with lead wires drawn out for frame size from 400 to 800 A can be installed to any of the right and left poles.
10. When installing more than one AL or AX with lead wires drawn out for frame size from 400 to 800 A to one side, install the necessary number of the accessories for one piece. The lead
wires from the circuit breaker vary in length depending on the installation position.
11. Install the cassette accessories for frame size from 400 to 800 A starting from the outside of the installation positions. For the installation positions, see the installation positions shown in
the following table.
12. When three pieces of more of AL and AX are installed on a circuit breaker with a frame size 400 to 800 A, the AL and AX with SLT are manufactured to order.
Installation positions of cassette type accessories for 400 to 800 A frames

Installation positions Table 6-9-2 Installation positions of cassette type accessories
Frame (A) 400 • 600 • 630 800
Installation positions
ON Accessory L1 L2 L3 R2 R1 L1 L2 L3 L4 R4 R3 R2 R1
AL – – – – – – – –
L1 L2 L3 L4 R4 R3 R2 R1
AX – – – (*1)
OFF
AL + AX – – – – – – – – –

SHT – – – (*1) – –
* Accessories only for Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (NV-C, S and H), Earth Leakage Alarm Breakers (NF-Z) and single-phase 3-wire circuits (NF-N and NV-N) cannot be
installed to R1, R2, R3 or R4.
Note *1 It is impossible to simultaneously install AX on R2 and SHT on R3 or R4.
110
6 Accessories 1
Interpretation of type name

(1) Alarm switch • Auxiliary switch
AL 2 4 SV (or SW) L S B
Kind of accessory Number of accessories to be installed Ampere frame Installation position Kind of switch
AL Alarm switch When installing more than one AL or 05 For 30 to 250A frames R Right pole, 2 or 3 poles Blank Standard
AX Auxiliary switch AX with SLT, specify the number. 4 For 400 to 800A frames RF Right pole, 4 poles B Minute load
L Left pole
Blank Right and left With SLT (vertical lead wire terminal block)
(with lead wires drawn out unless otherwise specified)
(2) Shunt tripping device
Undervoltage tripping device
SHT A1 1 SV (or SW) R S
Kind of accessory Voltage (SHT) Ampere frame Installation position With SLT (vertical lead wire terminal block)
SHT Shunt tripping device A240 AC100-240V 05 For 30 to 250A frames R Right pole, 2 or 3 poles (with lead wires drawn out unless otherwise specified)
UVTN (*1) Undervoltage A440 AC380-440V 4 For 400•600•630A frames RF Right pole, 4 poles
UVTS (*2) tripping device A480 AC380-480V For 800A frames (3P) L Left pole
A550 AC380-550V 8 For 800A frames (4P) Blank Right and left
D100 DC100V
D125 DC100-125V
Blank AC100-450/DC100-200V
Voltage (UVTN or UVTS)

AD130 Switching between 100 to 130 V AC and 100 to 130 V DC
A250 AC200-250V Notes *1 The circuit breaker cannot be reset if voltage is not applied to UVTN. (Non-reset type UVT)
A480 AC380-480V *2 The circuit breaker can be reset even if voltage is not applied to UVTS. (Reset type UVT)
6. Shunt Trip (SHT)

JCoil
J ratings (standard)
Table 6-10-1
Provision of coil burnout Input (VA) (*1) Operating time (*2)
Model preventing switch Voltage (V) (ms)
AC DC
AC100-240
NF50-SVFU 380-440
NV50-SVFU 60
DC100
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV, NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV AC100-240
380-550 50
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 120 15 or less
NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV DC100-125
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU
NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU
AC100-240
NF225-CWU Provided 380-480 60
DC100-125
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 100V 20
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 100V 10
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW Compatible with 200V 50
5-15
6
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 100 to 450 V AC and
100 to 200 V DC 380V 120
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 200V 35
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU 450V 170
AC100-120 200 70 7-15
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW 200-240
NF1600-SEW/SDW 380-450
DC100 300 100 15-25
1 Accessories
Notes *1 Ensure that the voltage of the operating power supply for SHT is not dropped below the allowable operating voltage (70% of the rated minimum voltage value) by the input power.
*2 The operating time is the time from when the rated voltage is applied to the shunt tripping device until the main contact of the circuit breaker starts opening.
Remark: 1. The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
JCoil
J ratings (list of available special voltage coils)
Table 6-10-2
Compatible
VAC VDC with AC/DC
Model
24 25-27 24-48 48 50-55 60 440- 380- 440- 500-
480 550 550 550 12 24 24-36 36 36-48 48 60 110 125 220 200- 220-
250 250 24-48
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, F160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV
NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NF225-CWU − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW − − − − − − − − − − − − −
111
7. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)

(1) Specifications for UVT and coil ratings
Table 6-11
Specification Coil ratings
Model Voltage (V) Input Operating time (*2)
Reset type Non-reset type (VA) (ms)
Standard voltage Special voltage (*1)
NF50-SVFU – AC/DC24V
NV50-SVFU AC/DC48V
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV/HRV
NF125-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV/UV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV AC/DC100-130V
NF250-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV/UV AC200-250V AC/DC24V 5 30 or less
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV AC380-480V AC/DC48V
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV AC500-600V
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (*3) (*3)
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW Switching between
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW 24/48 AC 5-30
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW (*4) (*5) Switching between
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW Switching between 500 to 550/600 AC
NV800-SEW/HEW 100 to 110 and 120 to 130 AC Switching between
Switching between 24/48DC
NF1600-SEW 200 to 220 and 230 to 250 AC Switching between 5 5-35
Switching between 110/125DC
NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU (*4) – 380 to 415 and 440 to 480 AC 5-30
Switching between
Switching between (*3)
100 and 110 DC
24/48 AC
NF225-CWU – Switching between
30 or less
24/48DC
Switching between
110/125DC
Notes *1 Some special voltage models vary in voltage range.
*2 The operating time is the time from when the undervoltage tripping device is set to the no-voltage state until the main contact starts opening.
*3 The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
*4 If UVT is turned on without excitation, the circuit breaker instantaneously opens and immediately trips.
*5 Only for installation on the left pole
(2) Reset type and non-reset type UVT

JReset
J type (Refer to Table 6-12.)
The reset type UVT has a structure which does not trip a circuit breaker even if the UVT coil is not excited when the
circuit breaker handle is in the OFF or reset position. Therefore, it keeps the circuit breaker in the reset state even if
the coil is not excited when the breaker is reset electrically.
6 When the coil in the unexcited state is turned on, the circuit breaker is normally tripped. However, the major
contacts of some models of circuit breakers may instantaneously close, or, on circuit breakers with AX, the AX
switches may instantaneously change over. For electrical interlock, use a non-reset type UVT.
JNon-reset
J type (Refer to Table 6-12.)
1 Accessories
When the UVT coil is not excited, the circuit breaker cannot be set to the off state even if the circuit breaker is tried
to be reset from the tripped state. When the coil exciting voltage restores to the reference voltage or more, the
circuit breaker can be reset to the off state.
(3) Time delay UVT

l This type of UVT has a time delay in operation.
l It can prevent operation upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure.
Table 6-12
UVT module Voltage (V)
Time delay
type name Standard voltage Special voltage
AC24/48
AC100−120/200−240/380−450 AC380−450/460−550/600−690
Switching among
U-05W AC220−250/380−450/460−550 (Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
0.1, 0.3 and 0.5 s DC24/48
(Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
DC100−110
AC100−120/200−240/380−450
Switching among
U-30W AC220−250/380−450/460−550 −
0.5, 1 and 3 s
(Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)
112
6 Accessories 1
(4) Structure of UVT

The UVT mechanical unit is installed in a circuit breaker, and the UVT voltage module is installed on the outside of
the circuit breaker. When the voltage drops, the UVT voltage module detects the voltage drop, and the UVT
mechanical unit trips the circuit breaker.
The UVT voltage module has a vertical lead wire terminal block and is normally installed on the body. The external
module will be manufactured to order.
lOutline drawing
D 56 24.5 Terminal cover fixing hole
7.5
7.5 44.5 44.5 11 5 3x10, tapping screw
Terminal screw M3.5
8.5 Tightening torque: 3.5 3.5 8.5 (to be prepared by user)
0.9 to 1.2 N·m Terminal cover f4.5
f4.5
C
3
4
2 1
84 (Terminal cover)
84 (Terminal cover)
90
100
100
90
57
80
80
57
1 2
4
3
7 11 Terminal cover Terminal screw M3.5 7.5

44.5 B 44.5
Terminal cover fixing hole Tightening torque: 7.5
24.5 56 56 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
3x10, tapping screw
(to be prepared by user) Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Terminal cover fixing hole
8 44.5 D 56 24.5 3x10, tapping screw
Terminal screw M3.5
8 Tightening torque: 29.5 44.5 10 5 (to be prepared by user)
8.5 0.9 to 1.2 N·m 3.5 3.5 Terminal cover 8.5
A
f4.5 f4.5
3
92.5 (Terminal cover)
12
92.5 (Terminal cover)

2 1 5 4
100
110
100
110
90
55
90
5 55
12 1
4 2
3
7 10 Terminal cover 8
44.5 29.5 Terminal screw M3.5 8
Terminal cover fixing hole 24.5 Tightening torque:
56 B
3x10, tapping screw 44.5 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
(to be prepared by user) Fig. 3 Fig. 4
lExamples of connection
Short-circuit protecting device, Short-circuit protecting device,
such as fuse such as fuse
Terminal symbols Terminal symbols
6
1 D1/P1 Control power supply terminal (COM) 1 D1/P1 Control power supply terminal (COM)
2 D2/P2 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage) 2 D2/P2 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Lo)
3 J1/UC1 UVT coil connecting terminal 3 D3/P3 Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Hi)
4 J2/UC2 UVT coil connecting terminal 4 J1/UC1 UVT coil connecting terminal
Remarks: 1 When the UVT voltage module is installed on the 5 J2/UC2 UVT coil connecting terminal
body (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1
and J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil. Remarks: 1 When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Lo,
connect the control voltage to D1/P1 and D2/P2
1 Accessories
2 When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the
UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the terminals.
power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Hi, connect
terminals. the control voltage to D1/P1 and D3/P3 terminals.
(Ex.) 100 to 110/120 to 130 V AC
(Rated voltage Lo/rated voltage Hi)
2 When the UVT voltage module is installed on the body
Examples of connection Examples of connection (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1 and
J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil.
3 When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the
power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the
terminals.
Table 6-13 Installation on right pole side Table 6-14 Installation on left pole side
Reference Variable dimensions Reference Variable dimensions
Model drawing Model drawing
A B C D
NF50-SVFU 11 7.5 NV125-CV/SV/HV Fig. 2 20.5 7.5
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 20.5 7.5 NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV Fig. 5 38 7.5
NF100-CVFU 20.5 7.5 NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF125-CV/SV/HV 20.5 7.5 NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF125-SVU/HVU 41.5 7.5 NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
Fig. 1 67.5 41.5
NF125-UV 81.5 7.5 NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
Fig. 5
NF125-SEV/HEV/RGV, NF250-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV NF400-ZCW/ZSW/ZEW Fig. 4
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV 38 7.5 NF400-SWU/HWU Fig. 6
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NF400-UEW(3P) 107.5 138.5
NF250-SVU/HVU 48 7.5 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW
76.5 41.5
NF250-UV 113 7.5 NV800-SEW/HEW, NF630-SWU/HWU
NF225-CWU 25.5 7.5 NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW 123.5 138.5
67.5 41.5
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-SWU/HWU
Fig. 3
NF400-UEW(3P) 107.5 138.5
Fig. 6
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-SWU/HWU 76.5 41.5
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW 123.5 138.5
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF-1600-SEW 161 63
113
8. Lead Wire Drawing

JLead
J wire lateral drawing … Available to all models
Note *1 Except for BH, BH-P, BH-S, BH-PS, Remark: 1. Although the following models are applicable to lead wires drawn
BH-D6, BH-D10, BH-DN, BV-D, laterally, they are normally applicable to installation in close
BV-DN and KB-D. contact with the circuit breaker side faces.
(The circuit breaker side faces have grooves.)
JLead
J wires drawing to load
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV~NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV
Table 6-15
NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV, NF125-RGV
Model applicable to lead
(only front connection type) NF250-RGV, NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV~NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
wire drawing to load NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV~NV250-CV/SV/HV
NF30-CS NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV
NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU,
JSpecifications
J for lead wires NF225-CWU
Table 6-16 NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU
NV250-SVU/HVU
Applicable model Kind of lead wire Lead wire thickness Lead wire length Example of ring mark
98/ALa (Red), 96/ALb (Blue) (When a 4-pole model among the above models has accessories installed on
NF30-CS 0.4mm2
95/ALc (Gray), 14/AXa (Brown) the right pole side, the lead wires are 400 mm long.)
12/AXb (Black), 11/AXc (White)
1000A frame or above Heat-resistant 0.75mm2 450mm C1/S1 (Red), C2/S2 (Red)
wire J1/UC1 (White), J2/UC2 (White)
A terminal symbol is
30 to 800A frames except indicated on each lead
0.5mm2
above models wire with a ring mark.
9. Lead Wire Terminal Block The lead wire terminal blocks for plug-in terminal blocks are available (P-LT).
The drilling size of these terminal blocks differs from the standard size.
Consult us for details.
(1) Vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT) For a flush plate type circuit breaker, a terminal block will be installed on
the circuit breaker rear face. (Specify as FP-LT.)
Note *1 When the circuit breaker body is equipped with internal
accessories and electrical operation device of motor-driven type
(2) or spring charge type (2), the circuit breaker is normally
provided with a lead wire terminal block.
JMCCB
J
Table 6-17-1 Table of variable dimensions
Terminal cover Model A B C D E F G H J
(transparent) 18
NF30-CS (*1) 4 4.5 44.5 86.5 4.5 7 10 22 34
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 7 26.5 54 86.5 26.5 7 14 26 38
6 NF125-CV/SV/HV 7 26.5 54 86.5 26.5 7 14 26 38

10.5
E
B
NF125-UV 7 87.5 54 86.5 87.5 7 14 26 38

NF250-UV 7 119 54 86.5 119 7 14 26 38
10.5
NF125-SEV/HEV/RGV, NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV 7 44 54 86.5 44 7 14 26 38
25
D
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF50-SVFU 7 27.5 54 86.5 27.5 7 14 26 38
1 Accessories
NF100-CVFU 7 28.5 54 86.5 28.5 7 14 26 38

NF125-SVU/HVU 7 47.5 54 86.5 47.5 7 14 26 38
NF225-CWU 7 37 54 86.5 37 7 14 26 38
F NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-SWU/HWU
A C 79.5 54 86.5 79.5 7 14 26 38
12.5 NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 41
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-SWU/HWU 88.5 54 86.5 88.5 7 14 26 38
Terminal screw M3.5 NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW 62.5 173 54 86.5 173 7 14 26 38
NF400-UEW(3P) (*1) 119.5 54 86.5 119.5 7 14 26 38
138
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW (*1) 135.5 54 86.5 135.5 7 14 26 38
J Note *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
Remark: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
H
G 8
13.5
114
6 Accessories 1
JELCB
J Table 6-17-2 Table of variable dimensions
Terminal cover 18 Model A B C D E F G H J K L M
(transparent) NV50-SVFU 16.5 17 54 86.5 16.5 17 54 86.5 6 10.5 22.5 34.5
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
10.5
F
B
NV100-CVFU 7 36.5 54 86.5 7 36.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38

NV125-CV/SV/HV 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 26.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
10.5
NV125-SVU/HVU 7 47.5 54 86.5 7 47.5 54 86.5 7 14 26 38

NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 7 44 54 86.5 7 44 54 86.5 7 14 26 38
25
H
D
NV250-SVU/HVU 7 54 54 86.5 7 54 54 86.5 7 14 26 38

NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
41 79.5 54 86.5 26.5 79.5 52 92 7 14 26 38
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW (*1) 41 88.5 54 86.5 26.5 88.5 52 92 7 14 26 38
Notes *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
J Remarks: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m
A C 2. The lead wire terminal block for TBL is provided on the right pole side. However, the lead wire terminal blocks for TBL
12.5
of NV30-FA and NV50-FA are provided on the left pole side.
Terminal screw M3.5
G
L
K 8
E
13.5
J14-terminal
J SLT
SLT for installing three or more
internal accessories on the left pole side Table 6-17-3
Terminal cover Model
25 A B
(transparent) MCCB ELCB
NF400-CW/SW/SEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW
B
NF400-HEW/REW
NV400-HEW/REW 20 60
9
NF630-CW/SW/SEW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
11
11
NF630-HEW/REW
NF400-UEW(3P) − 117 100
115
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW
11
41
NV800-SEW/HEW 20 69
NF800-HEW/REW
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW − 117 116
7 − 35 154
NF1600-SEW
Terminal 17 Remark: 1. The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.
screw M3.5
A 75
10. Test Button Module (TBM)

l The test button is kept pressed while control input voltage is applied to the button.
(When ELCB of time delay type is used, apply voltage for 2 seconds or more.)
l The test button module is supplied with voltage through a circuit isolated from the main circuit. It can share the control
sequence with SHT of a molded case circuit breaker. 6
l Unlike TBL, the test button modules can be connected in parallel.
l The module is normally provided with a vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT).
Table 6-18 1 Accessories

NV32-SV NV400-CW/SW
18 18
NV63-CV/SV/HV NV630-CW/SW
NV125-CV/SV/HV NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW
NV125-SEV/HEV NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW
Model NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV400-REW
NV50-SVFU TBM2
92 (Terminal cover)
TBM1
NV100-CVFU
TBM2
NV125-SVU/HVU
10.5
TBM1
(10.5)
86.5
NV250-SVU/HVU
(10.5)
Control input Compatible with 100 to 240 AC and 100 to 240 DC

10.5
Rated voltage (V) (DC24) (*1)

Control input (VA) 1.5 VA or less 1 VA or less
On a single-phase 3-wire
Reference drawing Fig. 1 Fig. 2 circuit breaker with neutral
pole protection, this
7
terminal is used as an
Note *1 Unless otherwise specified, the module will be manufactured for 100 to 240 V 6.5 On a single-phase 3-wire overvoltage detection
12.5
AC and 100 to 240 V DC. Fig. 1 12 circuit breaker with neutral Fig. 2 terminal.
In the case of 24 V DC, specify the voltage. pole protection, this
terminal is used as an
Remark: 1. The length of the lead wires to be connected to TBM1 and 2 shall be overvoltage detection
100 m or more. terminal.
For a flush plate type with 250A frame or below, the external dimensions
of the flush plate type differ from the standard dimensions.
115
11. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)

The pre-alarm is a function to output an alarm when the load current exceeds the preset current value. It is helpful in securing continuous power
supply and preventive maintenance.
It can be fitted to electronic circuit breakers with a frame size from 125 to 1600 A.
j 125 and 250A frames
d Pre-alarm module (PAL module)
The standard modules have SLT. Other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side.
A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 240 V AC and DC) is necessary. The control power supply voltage range is 85 to 246 V AC/DC,
and the required volt-ampere is 5 VA.
Table 6-19-1
Model Switching capacity Contact output (1a) Resetting method
NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV AC125V 2A DC 30V 2A Press the reset button, or turn off the control power
NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV AC250V 2A DC100V 0.3A supply.
Pre-alarm characteristics Dimensional drawing of pre-alarm module Terminal arrangement

4h
■ Applicable models ■ Applicable models NF125-SEV NF125-HEV
NF125-SEV, NF250-SEV NF125-HEV, NF250-HEV
2h
Pre-alarm operating
NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV NV125-HEV, NV250-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
1h characteristics NV125-SEV NV125-HEV
30min
20min 25
NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
14min 18
10min
6min Long time delay Control power supply
4min operating time, TL
P1
25
12-60-80-100s ±20% (at 200%)

Operating time
2min
P2
1min
30s
20s Pre-alarm setting Pre-alarm setting
knob knob
10s
Pre-alarm operation Pre-alarm operation
5s Pre-alarm current Ip indicating LED indicating LED
Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-
2s 0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% Reset button Reset button
1s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
0.5s TL
133
Tp= ±20%
2
0.2s (at200%) Pre-alarm output
0.1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 PALa
Current
(% to rated current In)
Terminal screw M3.5
PALc
d Pre-alarm LED indication

When the load current exceeds the preset current value, the LED lamp on the pre-alarm module front panel starts blinking. When the pre-alarm
output is given, the lamp stops blinking and turns on.
d Pre-alarm current setting (IP setting)
The pre-alarm current can be set to the rated current In × 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95 or 1.0 with the knob on the pre-alarm module front panel.
j 400 A frame or above
d Solid state relay (SSR) output (PAL lead)
The lead wires are drawn out. On the right pole side, only internal accessories with lead wires drawn out can be installed. A control power supply
is unnecessary.
Table 6-19-2
Switching capacity
Model Resetting method
Solid state relay (SSR) – Non-contact output
NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW When the load
NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW current becomes
AC/DC24 to 240V 20mA lower than the preset
current value, the
NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
alarm is reset.
6 d Pre-alarm module (PAL module)

The standard modules have SLT. Other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side.
A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary except for NF-ZEW. The control power supply voltage range is 80 to 242
V AC, and the required volt-ampere is 10 VA.
Table 6-19-3
1 Accessories
Model Switching capacity Contact output (1a) Resetting method
NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW Press the reset
100 V AC or 200 V AC, 2 A button, or turn off the
control power supply.
NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
Pre-alarm characteristics Detailed drawing of pre-alarm module Pre-alarm module output rating
10h
AC
Pre-alarm operating
5h
characteristics Voltage Current (A)
2h V Resistive load Inductive load
1h 200 3 2
30min
100 3 2
20min PALOUT LED A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC)
14min
Long time delay RESET is necessary. For the wiring method, see the following
Operating time
10min Reset switch

operating time, TL figure. (The control power supply voltage range is 80 to
6min
12-60-100-150s (at 200%) 242 V AC.) The required volt-ampere is 10 VA.
4min
150s
86.5
2min
100s
1min 60s PALa Vertical lead wire terminal block
Pre-alarm output
30s
20s P2
12s Control power supply PALa
10s Pre-alarm current Ip P1
Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-
5s 0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%
(PALc) Indicating lamp (example)
Pre-alarm operating time Tp 18
2s Tp=
TL
(at200%)
P2 Control power supply
2
1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 P1 PALc
Current
(% to rated current In)
d Pre-alarm LED display (standard device)

When the load current exceeds the preset current value, the LED lamp on the circuit breaker front panel starts blinking. When the pre-alarm
output is given, the lamp stops blinking and turns on.
d Pre-alarm current setting (IP setting)
The pre-alarm current can be set to the rated current In × 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95 or 1.0 with the knob on the circuit breaker front panel.
116
6 Accessories 2 External Accessories
1. F-Type Operating Handle Operating handle of breaker mount type to be installed to circuit breaker body
DAppearance
D (Color: Munsell N1.5)
DDThe handle provides an isolating function in combination with the circuit breaker body
Dust-proof packing (optional)
(except F10SW and above). Type
nema
Operating handle
type name
Delivery
category
DDIt has a safety device which prevents the circuit breaker turning on while the door is open.
DDIt can be locked in the OFF position. (Up to 3 commercially available padlocks (35 mm PFL F10SW~F120UR
and 40 mm) can be fitted. A type which can be locked in the ON or OFF position can 114
be manufactured. Specify the type if required.) On circuit breakers with a frame size 104
of 1000A or above, the handle can be locked in the ON or OFF position. (If it is
necessary to lock the handle only in the OFF position, specify so.)
DDIt is in protection class IP54 (IEC 60529). (For circuit breakers with a frame size of
11
1000A or above, the protection class (IEC 60529) is IP3X (IP5X when dust-proof
packing is provided).
drawings of
Operating handle Interlock engaging part
DOutline
D Center of
operating handle
Decorative
board
Packing DCenter
D F(N) Front plate
DDThe right drawing
shows the
hinge and
Release knob Packing
Front Front
K
plate plate
Handle
relationship
Trip
between the hinges
ON
breaker
ON
ED ED
IPP
P
H
IP
TR
button
TR
150
150
B
and circuit breaker

O FF
OFF
L Left hinge Right hinge

ET N
ES O P E
T
SE
R RE
Trip
G
button
N
Circuit breaker
viewed from the
M Thickness: 150
Trip B
Trip
button
1.2 to 3.2
83
Release Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2
f20
Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2
A 2
L load side of the
button knob Auxiliary handle (Note) 50
35 A±2
150 41 A±2 X1 X2 circuit breaker.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Note Auxiliary handles are provided with F10SW, F10SW4P and F120UR as standard. Center of hinge and circuit breaker
Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for F-4S ~ F-6SUL as option. Hinge on left side Hinge on right side
H X1 H X2
DDimensional
D drawings of front plate drilling For 30 to 250 A (5H+85)
Less than 10 170 or more
Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit Center of circuit
0 or more (5H+120)
breaker handle and
operating handle 4-f12
breaker handle and
breaker handle and
breaker handle and
operating handle
breaker handle and
operating handle frames or more 10 or more
Circuit breaker
4-f15 4-f15 or more
Circuit breaker
For 400 to 800 A (5H+85) (4H+120)
0 or more 0 or more
F
5
18
0
f6
0
frames
F
18
f9
f9
or more or more
f1
f1
112
62
78
78
112
Center of Center of Center of Center of
Center of
circuit circuit operating circuit
operating For 1000 to 1600 A (8H+150) (4H+120)
breaker breaker handle breaker
handle 0 or more 0 or more
and operating
handle
and operating
handle
and operating
handle
frames or more or more
62 78 78 112
112
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Remarks: 1. The handle is opened and closed in the projection area of the handle
and does not run over the projection area of the circuit breaker
(except when the auxiliary handle is provided.)
DDimensional
D drawings of circuit breaker mounting holes 2. When the operating handle is fitted to NV, the test button cannot be
pressed easily. If necessary, use a circuit breaker with TBL or TBM.
Center of circuit When using an Earth Leakage Alarm Breaker, use the externally
Center of circuit Center of Center of circuit Center of breaker handle
breaker handle circuit breaker breaker handle circuit breaker resetting type (ECA-SLT RST) or automatically resetting type (ARS).
Circuit
lock withstand load

(a) (b)
breaker
(b)
DDoor
D
J
(a) (b)
Center of
D
operating
D
handle F(N) L(mm)

F
(b) (a) (b) (a)

(b) F-05~F-2 50
500
C C C
F-4~F-8 68
E E E
(f) (g) (h)
Table 6-20 Summary of dimensions

Door opening Applicable model Reference drawing Dimensions (mm) Trip
position button
Type name Dimensional A Mounting
OFF Reset MCCB ELCB Drilling plan B C D E F G J position screw
position position Number of poles Number of poles drawing (*1) (*4)
F-05SV2 NF32-SV f N
– 2P – – 13 (a) Circuit
F-05SVE2 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV – breaker
105 –
F-05SV NF32-SV NV32-SV mounting
6
– 3P • 4P 2P • 3P g 25 L
F-05SVE (*2) NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV b 111 screw
F-1SV2, F-1SVE2 – NF125-CV, NF125-SV 2P – – f 15 N (2 pcs.)
F-1SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV 3P • 4P – – (b) Circuit
– NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 3P • 4P g 105 L breaker
F-1SVE NF125-HV 2P • 3P • 4P 30
handle
F-1UV, F-1UVE – NF125-UV 2P • 3P • 4P – – c h 172 31 86 L mounting
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RV 104 screw
NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV (2 pcs.)
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV M4
F-2SV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV
2 Accessories
– 2P • 3P • 4P NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 3P • 4P Fig. 1 b f 126 screw – – – K F-05SV2
F-2SVE NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV 107 35 or f5 F-05SVE2
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV F-1SV2
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RV F-1SVE2
F-05SRUL2
F-2UV, V-2UVE – NF250-UV 2P • 3P • 4P – – c h 201 38 100.5 K F-03SVUL2
F-1SVUL – NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU 3P NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU 3P c h 105 30 123 6 61.5 L F-05SVUL2
F-2SVUL – NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU 3P NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU 3P b g 107 35 126 K Only the
F-03SVUL2 – 2P 2P f 9 screws
NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU a 80 82.5 M (b) are
F-03SVUL – 3P 3P g 18 used for
105 – –
F-05SVUL2 – – 2P – f 13 N the
NF100-CVFU b 104 111
F-05SVUL – NV100-CVFU 3P 3P g 25 L following
F-2SUL – NF225-CWU – 3P – b g 107 104 35 126 – models.
F-4S NF400-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW NV400-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW
– 2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P d g 183 194 –
F-4SE NF630-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW NV630-CW, SW, SEW, HEW
44
F-4U h 234
– NF400-UEW 3P – – e 280 20
F-4UE
M6
F-8S NF800-CEW, SDW, SEW g – 243 screw – (a)(b)
– 2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW, HEW 3P Fig. 2 d 183 –
F-8SE NF800-HEW, REW or f7 Circuit
70
F-8U NF800-UEW h 290 – – breaker
– 3P, 4P – – e 280 23.5
F-8UE NF400-UEW(4P) mounting
F-4SUL – NF400-SWU/HWU 3P – 3P 44 194 screw
d g 183 – (4 pcs.)
F-6SUL – NF630-SWU/HWU 3P – – 70 243
NF1000-SEW M8
F10SW (*3) 2P, 3P –
– NF1250-SEW/SDW – – Fig. 3 d g 221 70 375 screw – 200
NF1600-SEW/SDW or f10
F10SW4P (*3) 4P
Notes *1 The dimensions for the front connection type are shown. On some models of the rear Remarks: 1. The handles with E in their model names are designed for emergency stop devices.
connection type and plug-in type, the reference surface for mounting the circuit breaker Their delivery category is .
may change. 2. The standard handles are Reset Open Type which can open the doors only when they
*2 For the 4-pole plug-in type, a special handle is required. Consult us for details. are reset to open. OFF Open type handles which can open the doors when they are in
*3 If a handle which can be locked only in the OFF position is required, specify so. the OFF position can be manufactured to order.
*4 The circuit breaker can be tripped by operating the trip button while the door is open. 3. A handle which can be operated and can indicate the ON and OFF positions in the same
*5 Do not remove the sponge packing used to secure the protection class IP51. Fit the manner as the standard models even if the circuit breaker is installed horizontally can be
supplied packing without fail. manufactured to order.
*6 The handle cannot be used when the circuit breaker is installed on IEC 35-mm rails. 4. F10SW and higher models do not conform to the isolation function.
5. Handles which are opened and closed in the OFF position can be opened also in the
reset position.
117
DInstallation
D procedure For details, please refer to Operating Handle Installation Manual supplied with the product.
q Installation to a breaker Install the operating handle to the circuit breaker in accordance with the following procedure.
250A frame and below 400 to 1600A frames
Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.) (Installation procedure)
Center of operating
Circuit breaker mounting handle and center q Remove the circuit breaker cover screws
screw (2 pcs.) (a) of circuit breaker in the same positions as the operating
Circuit breaker mounting screw handle mounting holes.
(supplied with body) (Power
w Install the circuit breaker with the four
supply circuit breaker mounting screws.
side) e Fit the spacer(s) for installation of
Spacer for installation of operating handle between the circuit
operating section (supplied) breaker and operating handle. (The
number of the spacers varies depending
Installation procedure
on the model.)
Handle r Install the operating handle with the
2 poles (Load supplied operating handle mounting
side) screws.
3 poles Center of operating
handle and center
4 poles of circuit breaker
Circuit breaker cover
Installation position of screws (Remove.)
operating handle with respect
to circuit breaker (Note 1)
Operating handle mounting screw (2 pcs.) (b)
In the case of F-05SV2, F-1SV2,
(Installation procedure) Handle Operating section
F-05SRUL2, F-05SUL2 and F-1SUL2
q Install the circuit breaker on the panel mounting screw 3 poles
with the two circuit breaker mounting Tighten the circuit breaker and operating handle (supplied)
4 poles
screws through the holes (a). together with the supplied two operating handle
w Install the operating handle with the
(In the case of F-4S to F-6SUL) Installation position of
mounting screws. The operating handle mounting screws are tapping screws
supplied two operating handle mounting operating handle with respect
screws through the holes (b).
without washers or spring washers. to circuit breaker
Note *1 In the case of F-05SRUL2, the center of the operating handle is the same as the center of the circuit breaker.
w Installation of decorative d Operation Lock Devices

board and retaining board (1) Padlock
Handle
B
Drill holes in the door according C Padlock Dimensions
to the drilling size shown on the Interlock lever
Use commercially available padlocks. (mm)
Applicable
previous page, and tighten the Interlock engaging
part model
A (Nominal size) B C
decorative board and retaining Retaining board

35 19 5
board with the supplied Packing
All models
40 22 or 23 5.5
countersunk screws. In the (for 800A frame or below)
A
case of 800A frame or below, fit Front plate (door)
Dimension C: Maximum 8mm.
the supplied packing to the

position shown right.
Decorative board
Countersunk screw
(2) Lockout Devices (Scissors Lock)
d Door locking mechanism

The panel door can be opened only when the operating handle
is operated to open (reset). (On F-4S to F10SW, the door lock is
held in the released state even if the handle is returned to OFF.)
The door can be opened when the handle is in the ON position
if the release knob is operated with a tool.
d Operation locking mechanism
Circuit breakers with a frame size of 800A or below can be locked by
setting the handle in the OFF position. (Operating handles which can
lock circuit breakers in the ON or OFF position can be manufactured.)
6 Operate the locking part, and lock the handle with padlocks. Up to
three padlocks can be fitted.
Lockout hasps (scissors locks) can be used. d How to order
If the circuit breaker trips even when the operating handle is locked in For 800A frame or below, specify the following specification
the ON position, also the operating handle indicates that it has tripped. symbols together with the model name.
F-2SUL or below: Only when one 35-mm padlock (weighing 70 g or less) is used · Operation lock: LF·················Lock in OFF position
2 Accessories
F-4S or above: Only when one 40-mm padlock (weighing 100 g or less) is used · Operation lock: LN·················Lock in ON or OFF position
To 800A frame or below, padlocks with dimension C of 3 mm to 8 mm · Door opening: DR··················Reset to open
can be applied. · Operation lock: DF·················Open in OFF position
For 1000A or above, padlocks with dimension of 3 mm to 6 mm can · Installation direction: Blank····Power supply upward
be applied. (When using padlocks of 3 mm or less, please consult · Installation direction: Y···········Power supply on left
us.) · Operation lock: Z···················Power supply on right
For a standard product with a frame size of 1000A or above,
d Circuit breaker installation direction (except UL 489 listed circuit breakers) specify the model name. When it is required to enable the
We can supply circuit breakers on which the handles and their ON and OFF positions operation lock only in the OFF position, specify the model
are in the same directions as on vertically Power
name and “only lock in OFF position.”
installed circuit breakers even when they supply
If you intend to seal the release knob, place an order for the
are installed horizontally. The door drilling release protection. (Lot: 10 pcs.)
size is identical. If you intend to install an Power
supply Lord Lord
Power
supply
operating handle on a horizontally installed d Interpretation of model name

circuit breaker, specify “Y” (horizontal Lord
(1) For 800A frame or below

installation with power supply on the left) or F – 1 SV UL E 2
“Z” (horizontal installation with power 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
supply on the right) at the end of the model 1) F: Operating handle type name
2) 1: Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8)
name. (Ex.: F-4S Y) 3) SV: Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV, SR or SG)
4) UL: Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product
d Sealing of release knob 5) E: Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop
The use of an optional part, 6) 2: Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P
Release Protection “F-RCS”, Release F-RCS
(2) For 1000A frame or above
can prevent the panel door knob F 10 SW 4P
1) 2) 3) 4)
being opened by operating the 1) F: Operating handle type name
release knob. (800A frame or When F-RCS is not used When F-RCS is used (sealed state) 2) 4: Circuit breaker A frame (10 or 120)
below) 3) SW: Series name
4) 4P: Number of poles (4P) * Not indicated for 3P
118
6 Accessories 2
External Accessories
2. V-Type Operating Handle Operating handle of door mount type consisting of operating section to
be mounted on circuit breaker body and operating handle on panel
door
DAppearance
D (Color: Munsell N1.5) d The handle provides an isolation function in combination with the circuit breaker
body.
d Conforming to the safety regulations of EN Standard (EN 60204-1)
d Protection class (IEC 60529) IP65 as standard
d The handle can be locked only in the OFF position with up to three commercially
available padlocks (35 mm or 40 mm).
d The panel door can be opened in the OFF position. In the ON and trip positions,
the panel door is locked and cannot be opened. However, the door can be opened
even in the ON and trip positions by operating the release part with a tool.
DOutline
D drawings DCenter
D of hinge and breaker
Front Front
plate plate
Front F(N)
plate
ON
ON
ED PP
ED
Front plate
I
TR
PP
TRI
140
H
H
90
70
OF F
OFF
ET
T
ES
SE
R RE
K
Trip
12 button Thickness:
Thickness: A B 90 1.2 to 3.2
67 1.2 to 3.2 Thickness: Right hinge
L A B 140 A B Left hinge
70 54 C±2 N 1.2 to 3.2
Trip M C (stationary type) ±2
button Trip Trip 54 62 C (stationary type) ±2 Circuit breaker
M N
button D (adjustable type) ±2 D (adjustable type) ±2
Trip Trip button
button button
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 X X
Note Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for V-4S ~ V-6SUL as option.
Relationship between hinges and
DDimensional
D drawings for front Center of circuit
breaker handle and
circuit breaker viewed from load
side of circuit breaker
plate drilling Center of circuit

breaker handle and
operating handle
Center of circuit
breaker handle and
operating handle
operating handle
4-ø10
H X
Center of ø9 Center of
ø9 circuit breaker circuit breaker For 30 to 250 A 5H+100
frames or more
0 or more
E
Center of Center of For 400 to 800 A 8H+150
E
operating
104
operating
40
54
handle handle frames or more

ø6
* The above figure shows the relationship viewed from
ø4
ø5
40 Center of 54 3 the load side.

0
operating
handle 104
(a) (b)
(c) DDoor
D lock withstand load
DDimensional
D drawings of circuit breaker mounting holes F(N)
Center of
circuit breaker and Center of
Center of Center of Center of circuit breaker
circuit breaker
Center of
circuit breaker and circuit breaker
Center of circuit
circuit
circuit breaker handle
handle
Center of
circuit breaker 4 poles
30 to 800A frames 200
Center of circuit breaker handle handle breaker Center of
handle circuit breaker breaker
Center of circuit 3 poles CL
circuit breaker C
L
Circuit breaker handle Circuit
breaker breaker
Center of Center of Center of
G
circuit breaker circuit breaker circuit breaker

E
and operating and operating and operating C

L
G
handle handle handle J
F J F J F/2
J Center of Center of F/2
F F F Center of F
operating operating
handle J handle F F J circuit breaker
and operating
handle
(d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (j)
Table 6-21 Summary of dimension

Type name Applicable model Reference drawing Dimensions (mm)
6
Stationary Adjustable Trip button
Dimensional
drawing
Stationary Drilling type type(*2) position

Adjustable type MCCB ELCB A B E F G J
type Number Number plan D D (*5)
C
of poles of poles (min) (max)
V-05SV2 NF32-SV
2P − − d − − 12.5 N
V-05SVE2 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV
NV32-SV −
V-05SV NF32-SV 3P 2P, 3P
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV e 162 300 25 L
2 Accessories
V-05SVE NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV
4P − −
V-1SV2, V-1SVE2 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 2P − − d 39 − − 15 111 N
3P NV125-CV, NV125-SV, 3P e
NF125-CV, NF125-SV
V-1SV 4P NV125-HV 4P f −
V-1SVE (*1) 2P, 3P e
Adjusting unit NF125-HV − − 30 M4 L
4P Fig. f
V-AD3S is b 61 125 screw
V-1UV 2P, 3P 2 g
mounted on NF125-UV − − 39 30.5 172 or f5
V-1UVE stationary type. 4P h
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-SGV 162 300
NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV, NF125-RGV 2P, 3P 3P e
V-2SV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV − 126
V-2SVE NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 41 35 K
NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV 4P 4P f
V-2UV 2P, 3P g
NF250-UV − − 37.5 201
V-2UVE 4P h
V-03SVUL2 2P 2P Fig. d 9 M
− NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU a 39 61 125 − − − 82.5
V-03SVUL 3P 3P 1 e 18 N
V-05SVUL2 (*1) 2P − − Fig. d − − 12.5 M4 N
NF100-CVFU b 39 61 125 − 111
V-05SVUL Adjusting unit 3P NV100-CVFU 3P 2 e 162 300 25 screw L
V-1SVUL V-AD3S is NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU 3P NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU 3P g 39 6 30 123 or f5 L
Fig. 61 125 162 300
V-2SVUL mounted on NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU 3P NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU 3P b 35 126 K
stationary type. NF225-CWU 2 e 41 −
V-2SUL 3P − 3P 61 125 162 300 35 126 −
V-4S NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P j 97 191 233 300 − 194
V-4SE NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
(*1) 44
V-4U
Adjusting unit NF400-UEW 3P − − h 194 288 330 397 20 234 M6
V-4UE Fig.
V-8S V-AD3L is c 76 screw −
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW/HEW 3P 3 70 243 or f7
V-8SE mounted on
stationary type. NF400-SWU/HWU j 97 191 233 300 −
V-4SUL 3P − 3P 44 194
V-6SUL NF630-SWU/HWU 3P − − 70 243
Notes *1 For the adjustable type, purchase the optional adjusting unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L. Remarks 1. The products whose model names contain E are designed for
*2 The dimensions of the adjustable type models provided with the adjusting unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L are shown. emergency stop. The delivery category is d. That of V-05SVE is d.
*3 When using the operating handle for a plug-in type model with a frame size of 250A or below, specify so. 2. When the operating handle is fitted to NV, the test button cannot be
*4 The dimensions on the front connection type are shown. For the rear connection and plug-in pressed easily. If necessary, use a circuit breaker with TBL or TBM.
types, separately consult us. When using an Earth Leakage Alarm Breaker, use the externally
*5 The circuit breaker can be tripped by operating the trip button while the door is open. resetting type (ECA-SLT) or automatically resetting type (ARS).
(The trip button position varies depending on the model.)
*6 The handle cannot be used when the circuit breaker is installed on IEC 35-mm rails. 119
DInstallation
D procedure For details, please refer to Operating Handle Installation Manual supplied with the product.
q Installation to a breaker Install the operating handle to the circuit breaker in accordance with the following procedure.
250A frame and below 400 to 800A frames
(Installation procedure) (Installation procedure)
q Operating handle for 3- or 4-pole circuit breaker q Remove the circuit breaker cover screws (4 pcs.) in the same positions as the operating handle
Set the rotary plate of the operating section to the OFF (symbol O) position, and fit the mounting holes.
plate to the circuit breaker with the supplied operating section mounting screws and nuts. w Install the circuit breaker with the circuit breaker mounting screws (4 pcs.).
Install the circuit breaker to the panel with the circuit breaker mounting screws (2 pcs.). e Fit the supplied operating section mounting spacers (4 pcs.) between the circuit breaker and operating handle.
w Operating handle for 2-pole circuit breaker r Set the rotary plate to the OFF (symbol O) position, and install the operating section to the circuit
Install the operating section together with the circuit breaker to the panel with the supplied breaker with the supplied operating section mounting screws.
operating section mounting screws (2 pcs.) Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)
Installation procedure
Nut M4 (2 pcs.): Except for

2-pole circuit breaker Circuit breaker mounting
Operating screw (M6, 4 pcs.) (Power supply side)
section (supplied with body)
Spacer for installation of

operating section (supplied)
Rotary plate
Projection (Load side)
Projection
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)
Operating sectiuon mounting Rotary plate pin Rotary plate

screw (2 pcs.)
Rotary plate pin
Operating section
Circuit breaker mounting
screw (2 pcs.) Operating section mounting screw (supplied) (4 pcs.)
w Installation of operating handle section Note The adjusting unit is

Drill a hole in the door according not applicable to
Operating handle section mounting screw
to the dimensional drawing for (250A frame or below: 2 pcs. 2-pole external type Operating
section
front plate drilling given on the 400A frame or above: 4 pcs.) circuit breakers. If it Joints
previous page, and install the Operating is used on a 2-pole

handle section
operating handle section in external type circuit
accordance with the following Washer (2 pcs.)
breaker, the
procedure. positions may not be
· Tighten the operating handle section correctly displayed. Shaft Warning mark Joint clamp screw
from the back of the front plate.
Temporarily tighten the screws to Make adjustments with the adjusting unit as stated below.
center the section in the hole.
· Set the handle of the operating qExternal dimension drawing wCalculation of shaft cutting allowance
handle section to the OFF state, Handle Front plate Front
plate
Front
plate
tighten the front plate, and make sure
that the handle can be smoothly turned to the ON and OFF positions.
Turn the handle to the right and left in the OFF state, and make sure that
OFF is displayed. If OFF is not displayed, move the operating handle
section up and down and to the right and left for adjustment. (Take care Thickness:
that the operating handle section is in parallel with the circuit breaker.) 1.2 to 3.2
Min
Then, open the front plate, and finally tighten the screws. Max
P
6
d Door locking mechanism Type name
Dimensions (mm)
Cutting allowance Calculation
The operating handle is provided with an Min Max
V-05SV
interlock mechanism to prevent the door V-05SVUL
opening in the ON and TRIP positions. In the Shaft
8
V-1SV
OFF position, the door can be opened. V-1SVUL
V-1SUL 162 300
However, the door can be opened in the ON X
2 Accessories
V-2SV
or TRIP position by pressing the release Release knob V-2SVUL 175
Cutting allowance
(Cutting allowance)(P max)(panel size)
knob in the arrow direction with a tool (3 mm V-2SUL
X = 300 mm - P
wide and 1.8 mm thick). V-2SGUL 180 318
10
V-4S Shaft
d Operation locking mechanism
V-8S 233 300
q Operating handle section X
V-4SUL
Operation lock can be set only in the OFF Position. Up to V-6SUL
109 Cutting allowance
three commercially available padlocks (A = 35 or 40 mm) can Note The unit is applicable to operating handles for emergency stop (E).
be fitted. Lockout hasps (scissors locks) can be used. When
the operating handle section is locked with padlocks, also the d Padlocks
door is locked. The user must prepare padlocks.
The dimensions of the padlocks are the same as those shown
w Operating section on page 129.
The operating section can be locked Locking hole
so that the circuit breaker will not be Operating d How to order
turned on carelessly when the inside
section
Padlock
Specify the model name of the operating handle.
of the panel is inspected with the For adjustable type, place an order for the adjustment unit.
panel door open. Fit a padlock (One lot includes 1 pc.)
through the hole in the operating 250A frame or below: V-AD3S
section of the operating handle. 400 to 800A frames: V-AD3L
d Interpretation of model name
d Adjusting unit
The height from the circuit breaker mounting surface to the (1) For 800A frame or below
V – 1 S UL E 2
panel door can be adjusted by fitting the optional adjusting 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L. Cut the shaft of the adjusting unit 1) V: Operating handle type name
according to the height. 2) 1: Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8)
3) S: Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV)
4) UL: Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product
5) E: Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop
6)
120 2: Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P
6 Accessories 2
3. Terminal Covers A C
The terminal covers are used to avoid exposure of live parts. Many kinds of terminal
covers, including large terminal covers (TC-L), small terminal covers (TC-S), transparent
terminal covers (TTC), rear terminal covers (BTC) and plug-in terminal covers (PTC), for
B
various models and applications are available, and they are helpful. (The terminal covers
cannot be fitted to electrically operated circuit breakers of spring charged type (2) and
motor-drive type (2). The standard terminal covers can be used for the spring charged
type (1). For the motor-drive type, special terminal covers can be manufactured. Consult
us for details.) ON
d Quick terminal covers

These covers are very convenient because they can be fitted only by inserting them into the
mounting holes in the circuit breaker body. To remove the terminal cover, shift the projections
TC-L TC-S TTC
of the terminal cover with the tip of a slotted screwdriver or finger, and draw it out.
DTable
D of variable dimensions
Table 6-22 Large terminal covers (TC-L)
Number Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Contents
Color
of poles Cover Sealing

Type name Number mounting Appearance Remarks
of circuit MCCB ELCB A B C
breaker of covers screw plate
TCL-03CS2W White 2 − (*1) 43.5 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF30-CS
TCL-03CS3W White 3 − 67 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF32-SV
TCL-05SV2 (*2)(*8) White 2 − 50 25 65.5 2 − 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV
TCL-05SV2L NF32-SV
White 2 − 50 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)(*9) NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF32-SV
TCL-05SV3 White 3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
NF63-CV/SV/HV 75 25 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*8)
White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
TCL-05SV3L White 3 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV
75 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*9) White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
TCL-05SV4 (*3) White 4 NF63-SV/HV − 100 25 65.5 2 − 2
TCL-1SV2 (*2) White 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 40 65.5 2 − 2
White 3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV
TCL-1SV3 (*3) 90 40 65.5 2 − 2
White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV −
TCL-1SV4 (*3) White 4 NF125-SV/HV/UV NV125-SV/HV 120 40 65.5 2 − 2
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV
TCL-2SV3 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV 105 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*10)
NF125-SEV/HEV
White 3 (*6)
TCL-2SV3L
White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 50 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*11)
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF250-SV/HV/UV
NV250-SV/HV
TCL-2SV4 NF250-SEV/HEV
White 4 NV250-SEV/HEV 140 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*3)(*5) NF125-SEV/HEV
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF225-SWM (*6) Quick type
NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW The cover can be sealed with the
White 2, 3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW 171 110 99.5 2 − sealing plate.
TCL-4SW3 (*3) NF400-SEP with MDU (*7) − 2
White 3
NF400-UEW (*4) − 171 110 132.5/196.5 2 −
6
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW
NV400-SEW/HEW
TCL-4SW4 (*3) White 4 NF630-SW/SEW 240 110 105 2 6 −
NV630-SEW
NF400-SEP with MDU (*7)
White 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
TCL-8SW3 (*3) NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) 224 155 103.5 2 4 −
White 3 −
NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7)
Use in
TCL-8UW3 Transparent 3 NF800-UEW (*4) − 220 155 146/194.5 2 4 −
combination
NF800-SEW/HEW
2 Accessories
with insulating
TCL-8SW4 (*3) White 4 NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) − 294 155 103.5 2 6 − barrier.
TCL-8UW4 Transparent 4 NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW (*4) − 290 155 146/194.5 2 6 −
NF1000-SEW
TCL-10SW3 Transparent 3 − 220 150 139 2 4 −
NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1000-SEW Screw type
TCL-10SW4 Transparent 4 − 290 150 139 2 4 −
NF1250-SEW/SDW
TCL-03SVU2 (*3) White 2 NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU 36 30 65.5 2 − − Quick type
TCL-03SVU3 (*3) White 3 NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU 54 30 65.5 2 − − (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-05SVU2 (*2)(*8) White 2 NF100-CVFU − 50 25 65.5 2 2 −
TCL-05SU2L (*2)(*9) White 2 NF100-CVFU − 50 40 65.5 2 2 −
Screw type
TCL-05SVU3 (*3)(*8) White 3 NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU 75 25 65.5 2 2 −
TCL-05SVU3L (*3)(*9) White 3 NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU 75 40 65.5 2 2 −
2, 3 NF125-SVU − Screw type
TCL-1SVU3 (*3) White 90 40 65.5 2 2 −
3 NF125-HVU NV125-SVU/HVU (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-2SVU3 Screw type
White 3 NF250-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU 105 40 65.5 2 2 −
(*3)(*10) (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-2SVU3L Screw type
White 3 NF250-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU 105 50 65.5 2 2 −
Quick type
TCL-2SWU3 (*10) White 3 NF225-CWU − 105 40 65.5 2 − −
(Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)
TCL-2SWU3L Quick type
White 3 NF225-CWU − 105 50 65.5 2 − −
TCL-4SWU White 3 NF400-SWU/HWU − 171 110 99.5 2 − 2 Quick type
Use in
combination
TCL-6SWU Transparent 3 NF630-SWU/HWU − 224 155 103.5 2 4 − Screw type
with insulating
barrier.
Notes *1 For 2-pole NV, use TC-L for 3-pole circuit breaker. *8 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2)
*2 For a circuit breaker with F or V type operating handle, specify the model name with *9 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 125A or less (max. wire size 60 mm2)
F at the end. *10 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2)
(F or V type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) *11 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 250A or less (max. wire size 150 mm2)
*3 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating Handles. (Applicable to UL wire 300MCM)
*4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side. Remarks 1. The wire sizes shown in the above notes *10 to *13 are those of the 600-V
*5 When a crimp terminal applicable to wires with a size of 117.2 to 152.05 mm2 (Model vinyl insulated wires.
2CR-150 or CB150-S8) is used, TC-L cannot be fitted. Insulate the terminal from 2. Insulate the exposed live parts of crimp terminals with insulating tape or the
TC-S with insulating tube or taping. like.
*6 In the case of installation on the body, specify the model name with-MDU at the end. 3. When protection from the power supply and load sides is necessary,
*7 It cannot be installed in the case of installation on the body. separately consult us. 121
Table 6-23 Small terminal covers (TC-S)

Color

TCS-03CS2W White 2 − 43.5 5 30.5 2 − 2

NF30-CS
TCS-03CS3W White 3 − 67 5 30.5 2 − 2
TCS-05SV2 (*1) White 2 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV − 50 5 65.5 2 − 2
White 3 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV

TCS-05SV3
75 5 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)
TCS-1SV2 (*2) White 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 6.5 65.5 2 − 2
White 3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV

TCS-1SV3 (*3) 90 6.5 65.5 2 − 2
White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV −
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV Quick type
TCS-2SV3
White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 6.5 65.5 2 − 2 The cover can be sealed with the
(*2)
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV sealing plate.
NF125-SEV/HEV
Notes *1 For a circuit breaker with F type operating handle, specify the model name with F at Remarks 1. Small terminal covers for 4-pole circuit breakers are available.
the end. 2. Insulate the exposed live parts of crimp terminals with insulating tape or the
(F type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) like.
*2 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating
Handles.
Table 6-24 Transparent terminal covers (TTC)

TTC-03CS2 2 − 43.5 25 30.5 2 − 2

NF30-CS
TTC-03CS3 3 − 67 25 30.5 2 − 2
NF32-SV
TTC-05SV2 (*1) 2 − 50 25 65.5 2 − 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV Transparent
NF32-SV
3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
TTC-05SV3 NF63-CV/SV/HV
75 25 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)
2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV
TTC-1SV2 (*1) 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 40 65.5 2 − 2
3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV
TTC-1SV3 (*2) 90 40 65.5 2 − 2
2, 3 NF125-HV/UV −
TTC-2SV3 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV 105 40 65.5 2 − 2
(*2)(*3)(*5)
NF125-SEV/HEV
3 − −
6 TTC-4SW3
2, 3
NF400-CW/SW/SEW
NF400-HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW
NF630-HEW/REW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW
NV400-HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW
NV630-HEW
171 110 104.5 2 4 −
Quick type
The cover can be sealed with the
sealing plate.
3 NF400-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) −
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW
NV400-SEW/HEW Transparent
TTC-4SW4 4 NF630-SW/SEW/HEW 240 110 104.5 2 6 −
NV630-SEW
2 Accessories

NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW Use in
2, 3 NV800-SEW/HEW
NF800-HEW/REW combination
TTC-8SW3 224 155 103.5 2 4 −
NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) with insulating
3 −
NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) barrier.
NF800-SEW/HEW
TTC-8SW4 4 NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) − 294 155 103.5 2 6 − Screw type
Notes *1 For a circuit breaker with F type operating handle, specify the model name *3 When a crimp terminal applicable to wires with a size of 117.2 to 152.05 mm2 (Model 2CR-150
with F at the end. or CB150-S8) is used, TTC cannot be fitted.
(F type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) Use TCL-2SV3L. Or insulate the terminal from TC-S with insulating tube or taping.
*2 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type *4 In the case of installation on the body, specify the model name with • MDU at the end.
Operating Handles. *5 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2)
122
6 Accessories 2
<BTC> <PTC>
D
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 C
A B C A C A
B
B
ON ON
Table 6-25 Rear terminal cover (BTC)

Color

Cover for
connection block
BTC-03CS2W White 2 − 43.5 6.5 30.5 2 − 2 in the case of
simple rear
NF30-CS connection
BTC-03CS3W White 3 − 67 6.5 30.5 2 − 2

NF32-SV
BTC-05SV2 White 2 − (*1) 50 5 65.5 2 − 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF32-SV
White 3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
BTC-05SV3 NF63-CV/SV/HV 75 5 65.5 2 − 2
Cover
BTC-1SV2 White 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 6.5 65.5 2 − 2 for stud
connection
White 3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV block on
BTC-1SV3 90 6.5 65.5 2 − 2
White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV − back in the
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV case of rear
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV connection
BTC-2SV3 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 6.5 65.5 2 − 2 type
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW
White 2, 3 Quick type
NF630-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW 140 42 (*2) 99.5 2 −
NF400-SEP with MDU (*5) (*5) The cover can be
BTC-4SW3 2
sealed with the
White 3 132.5/
NF400-UEW (*4) − 140 42 (*2) 2 − sealing plate.
196.5
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW
NV400-SEW/HEW
BTC-4SW4 (*3) Transparent 4 NF630-SW/SEW/HEW 185 42 (*2) 97.5 2 6 −
NV630-SEW
Transparent 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) 210 32 (*2) 97.5 2 8 −
−
BTC-8SW3 (*3) NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5)
Transparent 3
146/
NF800-UEW (*4) − 210 32 (*2) 2 4 −
194.5
NF800-SEW/HEW
NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) (*5) 280 32 (*2) 97.5 2 10 −
BTC-8SW4 (*3) Transparent 4 NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5)
146/ Screw type
NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW (*4) − 280 32 (*2) 2 6 −
194.5
Notes *1 For 2-pole ELCB, use BTC for 3-pole circuit breaker. Remarks 1. PTC-4SW3 can be used as the back terminal covers for NF400-HEW/REW,
*2 Dimension B in Fig. 2 NF630-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW and NV630-HEW.
*3 The covers can be used for plug-in type circuit breakers. Other models are 2. For terminal covers for 4-pole circuit breakers not listed above, consult us.
designed only for rear connection type.
*4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side.
*5 In the case of installation on the body, it can be fitted only on the power
supply side.
6
Table 6-26 Plug-in terminal covers (PTC)
Color

2 Accessories
of circuit MCCB ELCB A B C D
NF32-SV
PTC-05SV2 White 2 − 50 6.5 65.5 72 2 2 −
NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF32-SV
White 3 NV32-SV, NV63-HV
NF63-CV/SV/HV
PTC-05SV3 75 6.5 65.5 72 2 2 −
PTC-1SV2 White 2 NF125-CV/SV − 60 6.5 65.5 − 2 4 −

Cover
White 3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV for stud
PTC-1SV3 90 6.5 65.5 − 2 4 − connection
White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV − block in
the case of
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV plug-in type
PTC-2SV3 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV 105 6.5 65.5 78.5 2 4 − Screw type
NF125-SEV/HEV
PTC-4SW3 (*2) Transparent 2, 3 140 42 97.5 − 2 4 − Same as screw type of BTC
NF400-HEW/REW (*1) NV400-HEW/REW (*1)
NF630-HEW/REW (*1) NV630-HEW (*1)
Notes *1 The covers can be used as back terminal covers.
*2 See Fig. 2 of BTC.
123
Table 6-27 List of terminal covers applicable to F and V Type Operating Handles
Type name Number of Applicable model
Applicable operating
Large terminal covers Small terminal covers Transparent terminal poles of
handles MCCB ELCB
(TC-L) (TC-S) covers (TTC) circuit breaker
TCL-05SV2F (*2)(*3)
TCS-05SV2F (*2) TTC-05SV2F (*2) F-05SV2, V-05SV2 2 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV – (*1)
TCL-05SV2LF (*2)(*4)
TCL-05SV3 (*3) 3 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV
TCS-05SV3 TTC-05SV3
TCL-05SV3L (*4) F-05SV, V-05SV 2, 3 – NV63-CV/SV
TCL-05SV4 – – 4 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV –
TCL-1SV2F (*2) TCS-1SV2F (*2) TTC-1SV2F (*2) F-1SV2, V-1SV2 2 NF125-CV/SV –
3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV
TCL-1SV3 TCS-1SV3 TTC-1SV3
F-1SV, V-1SV 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV –
TCL-1SV4 – – 4 NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV NV125-CV/SV/HV
TCL-2SV3 (*5) NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV
TCS-2SV3 TTC-2SV3 2, 3
TCL-2SV3L (*6) NF125-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
F-2SV, V-2SV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV
TCL-2SV4 – – 4
NF125-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
TCL-4SW3 NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
– TTC-4SW3 2, 3
TCL-4SP3W F-4S NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
V-4S NF400-SW/SEW/HEW NV400-SEW/HEW
TCL-4SW4 – TTC-4SW4 4
NF630-SW/SEW/HEW NV630-SEW
TCL-8SW3 – TTC-8SW3 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW

F-8S
V-8S
TCL-8SW4 – TTC-8SW4 4 NF800-SEW/HEW –
Notes *1 For 2-pole NV, use a terminal cover for 3-pole circuit breaker. Remark: 1. The terminal covers for UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers can be normally combined with
*2 Only for F and V Type Operating Handles (screw type) F Type Operating Handles.
*3 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2)
4. Insulating Barriers
The insulating barrier enhances the insulation between the
phases of circuit breaker terminals. It also prevents accidents
due to conductive foreign matter and dust, and secondary
accidents when isolating a fault current.
insulating barrier is available for the models listed in the table below.
6 DThe
D
Table 6-28
Applicable model
(“” denotes optional)
Connecting method
MCCB ELCB Front Rear Flush plate Plug-in
NF32-SV, NF63-CV NV32-SV, NV63-CV
– – –
2 Accessories
NF125-CV, NF100-CVFU NV125-CV, NV100-CVFU

NF63-SV/HV NV63-SV/HV Standard
attachment – – –
NF125-SV/HV NV125-SV/HV
NF125-SEV/HEV, NF125-ZEV
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV Standard Standard
NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV attachment – – attachment
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU
NF125-SVU NV125-SVU
NF125-HVU NV125-HVU
Standard
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU attachment – – –
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU
NF225-CWU NV100-SWU
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW Standard Standard
attachment attachment
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF400-UEW(4P) Standard
NV800-SEW/HEW attachment
NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/SDW
NF800-UEW Standard
– attachment –
NF400-SWU/HWU Standard
– attachment – – –
NF630-SWU/HWU
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW Standard Standard
– attachment – – attachment
NF1600-SEW/SDW Standard
– attachment – – –
Always mount the insulating barrier when it comes with the circuit breaker.
124
6 Accessories 2
DInsulating
D Barrier-Front (BA-F)
Applicable model Dimensions (mm) Quantity per breaker
Type name Reference diagram
MCCB ELCB A B 2P 3P 4P
NF32-SV NV32-SV
NF63-CV NV63-CV
NF125-CV NV125-CV 1
BAF-05SV 50 59.5 2 3
(*2)
NF63-SV/HV NV63-SV/HV
NF125-SV/HV/UV NV125-SV/HV
NF125-SEV/HEV A
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
BAF-2SV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 100 59.5 2 4 6
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV
NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU
B
NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU
BAF-05SVU 50 59.5 2 4 −
NF125-SVU NV125-SVU
NF125-HVU NV125-HVU
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU
BAF-2SVU 100 59.5 − 4 −
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU
BAF-2SWU NF225-CWU − 100 59.5 − 4 −
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
BAF-4SW 110 98.5 2 4 6
132/
BAF-4UW (*1) NF400-UEW(3P) − 110 − 4 −
98.5
BAF-8SW NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 110 98.5 1 2 3
NF400-UEW(4P)
BAF-10SW NF800-UEW, NF1000-SEW − 110 132 1 2 3
NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF400-SWU/HWU − 110 98.5 − 4 −
BAF-4SWU
NF630-SWU/HWU(less than 600A) − 110 98.5 − 2 −
BAF-6SWU NF630-SWU/HWU(630A) − 150 98.5 − 4 −
BAF-16SW NF1600-SEW/SDW − 185 132 1 2 3
Notes *1 The barriers BAF-4UW for the power supply and load sides vary in the dimension B.
*2 Not supplied with ELCB.
DInsulating
D Barrier-Rear (BA-B)
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW Mounting
BAB-4SW NF400-UEW(3P) 140 74.5 − 4 6 panel
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW
A
BAB-8SW NF400-UEW(4P) NV800-SEW/HEW 140 74.5 − 4 6
NF800-UEW B
Drilling size for use of BA-B (in the case of 3-pole circuit breaker)
6
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW
NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW
2 Accessories
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
Power supply side Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF400-UEW. Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF800-UEW.
6-f48
6-f35
5
24 24
24 24
8
10
4 screws M6 or f7
4 screws M6 or f7
225[265]
194[234]
243[290]
24 24
24 24
11 11
11 11
44 8 screws M4 70 8 screws M4
Make these eight threaded holes 140
87 Make these eight threaded holes
in addition to the standard holes.
in addition to the standard holes.
Load side
The drilling size drawings show the dimensions viewed from the rear side.
125
DInsulating
D Barrier-Plug-in (BA-P)
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV125-SEV/HEV
BAP-2SV 172 74.5 4
NF250-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV
NF250-SEV/HEV
A
NF400-CW/SW NV400-CW/SW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
BAP-4SW 178 74.5 B
NF630-CW/SW NV630-CW/SW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NV630-SEW/HEW 4 6
NF800-CEW/SEW
NV800-SEW/HEW 172 74.5 −
NF800-HEW/REW
BAP-8SW
A
NF1000-SEW
− 215 74.5
NF1250-SEW B
DEarth
D fault preventing barriers (BA-G)
MCCB ELCB A B 3P
NF32-SV NV32-SV
BAG-05SV3 30 75
NF63-CV/SV/HV NV63-CV/SV/HV
BAG-1SV3 NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV 40 90
B
NF125-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV
BAG-2SV3 NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 63 105
NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU
A
BAG-4SW3 63 164
BAG-4UW3 NF400-UEW − 63 164 1
BAG-8SW3 NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 110 210
BAG-8UW3 NF800-UEW − 110 210

NF1000-SEW
BAG-10SW3 − 98 210 Earth fault preventing barrier (3 poles)
NF1250-SEW/SDW
BAG-16SW3 NF1600-SEW/SDW − 150 300
Also the earth fault preventing barriers for 2- and 4-pole circuit breakers are available.
6
2 Accessories
126
6 Accessories 2
5. Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders

(1) Handle Lock Devices (HL and HL-S) Padlock size (mm)
These devices are used to lock the circuit breakers in the ON or OFF position. If overcurrent flows A
while the circuit breaker is locked, it will trip. Model HL (red resin moldings) to be fitted to handles Application
(Nominal size)
B C
and Model HL-S to be secured on circuit breaker covers are available. (Use a commercially available a 25 11 4
padlock having the nominal size shown in the right table. If a padlock in another size is used, the
b 35 19 5
device may not lock correctly.)
c 40 22 or 23 5.5
Table 6-33 HL
Applicable model Reference
Type name Padlock
MCCB ELCB diagram
C B
HL-05FH NF30-CS − Fig. 4
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV
NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF125-SEV/HEV
HLN-05SV NV125-CV/SV/HV, NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV A
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV Padlock Fig. 1

NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF125-SEV/HEV a
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV Fig. 1
HLF-05SV NV125-CV/SV/HV, NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV
NF125-SVU/HVU NV125-SVU/HVU
HLF-05SVU
NF250-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU
−
HLF-2SWU NF225-CWU −
HL-4CW (*1) NF400-CW NV400-CW
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW Fig. 2 Fig. 3
HL-4SW (*1) NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW Fig. 2
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV800-SEW/HEW c
HL-4SWU NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU −
HL (*2) NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW, NF1600-SEW/SDW − Fig. 3
Notes *1 When a padlock is not used, the device can be used as a Remarks 1. One lot of HL-4CW and HL-4SW contains one piece, and one
lock cover (LC). lot of others contains 10 pieces.
*2 Place an order for a circuit breaker body combined with the 2. HLF types are used for OFF lock, and HLN types for ON lock.
device.
Table 6-34 HL-S Fig. 4
Applicable model Dimensions (mm)

Reference Padlock
Type name Number of Number of
MCCB ELCB A B C D E F diagram
poles poles
2P − − 50
HLS-05SV2 (*1) NF63-HV
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 2P − − 57 −
3P NV32-SV, NV63-HV 3P
NF63-HV 75
NF63-SV,NF63-HV 4P − − 32 23 32
6
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, 75
NF125-CV, NF125-SV 3P 3P
NV125-HV −
HLS-05SV (*1)
NF125-HV 2P, 3P − −
86
NF125-SV, NF125-HV 4P NV125-SV, NV125-HV 4P 28
2P, 3P − − −
NF125-UV 62.5 1.5
4P − − 28
2 Accessories
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV Fig. 5
2P
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV,
3P −
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-HV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 63
3P
NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 32 32
HLS-2SV (*1) NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 84 100
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV b
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV 4P NV250-SV, NV250-SEV, 4P 33
NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NV250-HEV
2P, 3P − − −
NF250-UV 69.5 -5.5
4P − − 33
HLS-03SVU (*1) NF50-SVFU 2P, 3P NV50-SVFU 2P, 3P − − − − Fig. 9
HLS-05SVU2 (*1) NF100-CVFU 2P − − 50
32
HLS-05SVU (*1) NF100-CVFU 3P NV100-CVFU 3P 32 75 75 − Fig. 5
NF125-SVU/HVU 2P, 3P NV125-SVU/HVU 3P 86
HLS-05SVU (*2) NF125-SVU/HVU 2P, 3P NV125-SVU/HVU 3P 75 86
− 32 Fig. 5
HLS-2SVU (*1) NF250-SVU/HVU 3P NV250-SVU/HVU 3P 32 84 100
HLS-2SWU (*1) NF225-CWU 3P − 3P 84 100 − 32 Fig. 6
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW HEW/REW
HLS-4SW (*3) 2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P − − − − − −
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/ Fig. 7
HEW
HLS-4UW (*3) NF400-UEW 3P − − − − − − − −
HLS-8SW (*3) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW/HEW 3P, 4P − − − − − −
NF400-UEW 4P Fig. 8
HLS-8UW (*3) − − − − − − − −
NF800-UEW 3P, 4P
Notes *1 For locking in OFF position
*2 A, B, C and D in Figs. 5 and 6 are drilling sizes in front plate.
*3 Terminal covers cannot be fitted. 127
C C C Circuit breaker
cL cL cL D Padlock
36 Circuit
Pan head Pan head breaker
R1 tapping screw Line side cL cL cL tapping screw

R1 R1 32
1
1
R
R1
F
B
B
cL cL cL
E
A
A
F
B
B f5.5
B
cL
E
D
C C C
A
A
A
Load side
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
86 Circuit breaker
72 Circuit breaker
cL cL
Spacer 36
20 Circuit breaker
20
cL cL Pan head screw
116.5
115.5
73.5
71
Line side
109.5
109.5
cL cL
40
48
F
103
cL
128.5
E
22.5 Load side
22.5
138 43.5
210 43.5
N
O
(2) Lock Covers (LC) (3) Auxiliary Handles (HT)
Lock Cover is a plug-in lock for indicating These handles facilitate opening and closing circuit
easily without using padlocks that it is breakers.
prohibited to operate the circuit breaker. Table 6-36 HT Auxiliary Handles
A “Caution” tag can be hung on it. Dimensions Outline dimension
The covers are red resin moldings. LC-05SW to LC-2SW
Type name Applicable model
A B C D E drawing
HT-4CW
6
NF400-CW, NV400-CW 77.5
(*1)
Table 6-35 LC NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
fD
Applicable model HT-4SW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW 59 81 32 38 M4
Type name
MCCB ELCB (*1) NF800-REW/UEW
B
LCBH1 (*2) NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW

LC03CS NF30-CS −
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF32-SV
2 Accessories
NV800-SEW/HEW A C E
NF63-CV/SV/HV screw
NV32-SV NF1000-SEW
NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV
NV63-CV/SV/HV HT-10SW NF1250-SEW/SDW 62 118 34 45 M4
NF125-SEV/HEV
NV125-CV/SV/HV NF1600-SEW/SDW
LC-05SV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV LCBH2, 3
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV Notes *1 HT can be supplied separately. The user can fit it to the circuit breaker. (One lot contains 1 piece.)
NV250-CV/SV/HV *2 1-pole circuit breakers with 800A frame and 4-pole NF400-UEW come with auxiliary handles as
NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV
NV250-SEV/HEV standard accessories.
NF250-SEV/HEV
LCBH1R (red)
BH-P(1P) −
LCBH1Y (yellow)
LCBH2R (red)
BH-P(2P) −
LCBH2Y (yellow)
LCBH3R (red)
(4) Card Holders (CH)
BH-P(3P) −
LCBH3Y (yellow) Cards showing the circuit breaker name and
Remark: 1. One lot of LCBH, LCBL and LCNVL contains 50 pieces,
circuit number can be inserted to the card
and one lot of other models contains 10 pieces. holder.
Fit the card holder to the circuit breaker body
or the flush plate in the flush frame. (Although
a card holder is supplied with each circuit
breaker body, the card holder is available as
an optional part.)
A Table 6-37 Card holder size (mm)
Applicable model Type name A B C Card size
NF250-SV or below
CH-P No.5 44 12 5 39×9
B
NV250-SV or below
NF400-SW or above
C
CH-P No.3 38 22 5 33×20

NV400-SW or above
128
6 Accessories 2
6. Mechanical Interlocks (MI) This mechanical interlock device is used to enable one of two circuit breakers to turn
on. Install the device on the panel.
Mechanical interlocks to be installed directly to circuit breaker bodies can be
manufactured.
Consult us for details.
DFront,
D rear and plug-in types
Front, rear and plug-in types Front, rear and plug-in types Breaker mountiong (front) Terminal covers cannot be fitted.
(Panel mounting) (Panel mounting) Type name J Type name F G H Type name F G P
MI-05SVFB2 47.5 MI-05SVFB3 25 111 61 MI-4SWFB3 44 194 190
These interlocks can be locked with padlocks. MI-05SWHFB3 25 111 75
MI-1SVFB2 45 MI-1SVFB3 30 111 61 MI-8SWFB3 70 243 260
MI-2SVFB3 35 126 61
44(55)
22(30)
Center of
mechanical interlock
Mechanical
44
22
Center of Center of
mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock
Mechanical
E
circuit breaker interlock

70(100) interlock
70
Circuit Circuit
Center of breaker breaker
circuit breaker
A Panel plate thickness
Stroke (t1.6 to 3.2)
Panel plate
1.5
B
A thickness
Stroke (t1 to 3.2) (*1) (Gap between circuit
breaker and panel)
B
Mechanical interlock Mechanical interlock

Mechanical interlock mounting plate
J mounting plate 120 P mounting plate
1.5
(Gap between circuit Outside Dimension Diagram 120

breaker and panel) 15 Stroke 15 Stroke 47.5 Stroke
Outside Dimension Diagram 4f (f5.5 and f7.5 Machine this part according to the
43.5
43.5
countersunk (rear) front plate drilling dimensions
45
use M50.8 flat of the main breaker
countersunk head screws (*2)
94.5
H
61
4f (f5.5 and f7.5 countersunk (rear)
15.5 (20)
use M50.8 flat countersunk head screws Machine this part according to the
(*2) front plate drilling dimensions
of the main breaker
Center of
mechanical
Outside Dimension Diagram
31(40)
interlock Circuit breaker CL CL

CL CL CL CL Circuit breaker
15.5
Center of circuit
31
Center of mechanical
breaker
interlock
50
C
50(80)
CL CL CL
111
G
Center of circuit
breaker
P
D
P
The values in parentheses apply to NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW F F F F
Center of mechanical 120 M40.7 or M40.7 or M6 or
interlock f5 screw 120 f5 screw P f7 screw
Drilling Dimension Diagram Drilling Dimension Diagram Drilling Dimension Diagram (breaker mount)
Notes *1 For 400A frame or above, use a panel 1.6 to 3.2 thick.
*2 When the panel is 2.3 or more thick, countersink the panel (rear side) in f9.5 for the four f5.5 holes.
Table 6-38 Table of variable dimensions
Breaker mount
diagram (3P)
Reference
Reference
Applicable model Pitch (P) (*1) Dimensions (mm)
diagram
(*3)
Standard Semi-standard Standard Type name
MCCB ELCB (*6) t A B C D E
Type name 2P 3P 3P Type name 4P 2P•3P
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV − 120 − − − − − 15 33 63 47.5 58 MI-05SVFB2
MI-05SV3 120
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV − 120 − 130 MI-05SV4 15 33 63 − 58 MI-05SVFB3
(*4) (Fig. 3)
NF125-CV/SV − 120 − − − − − 15 33 63 45 58 MI-1SVFB2
NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV MI-05SV3 130 15 33 63 58 MI-1SVFB3
− 120 130 150 MI-1SV4 −
NF125-UV − (*4) 15 33 32.5 58 − −
NF125-SEV/HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-CV/SV/HV,
NV125-SEV/HEV
NV250-CV/SV/HV
MI-05SV3
120
150 180 MI-2SV4
150
(*2)
−
15 33
63
− 58
MI-2SVFB3 (Fig. 3)
6
NV250-SEV/HEV (*4) (*4)
NF250-SEV/HEV (Fig. 1)
NF250-UV − 25.5 − −
2 Accessories
120
NF225-CWU − MI-05SWU3 − − − − − 15 33 63 − 58 − −
(*4)
190 MI-4SW4 250 83.5 MI-4SWFB3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW MI-4SW3 − 210 47.5 33 − 74
NF400-UEW (3P) − − 190 − − (*2) 83.5 −
(Fig. 3)
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW 220 − 83.5 MI-8SWFB3
NF400-UEW (4P) MI-8SW3 − 240 MI-8SW4 290 47.5 33 − 74
− − 220 60 −
NF800-UEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW − MI-10SW3 220 − − MI-10SW4 290 2.3 47.5 47 37.5 − − −
(Fig. 2) −
NF1600-SEW/SDW − MI-16SW3 315 − − MI-16SW4 426 (*5) 65 54.5 39 − − −
Notes *1 Specify the circuit breaker mounting pitch (P).
*2 No need to specify the panel thickness (t). (Usable panel thickness range: t = 1~3.2mm. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t = 1.6~3.2mm)
*3 Terminal covers cannot be fitted. (However, TCL-4SW3 can be fitted.)
*4 When UVT is provided, separately install the module.
*5 If the thickness is not 2.3, specify the panel thickness (t).
*6 For NV with TBL, use a circuit breaker with MG.
Remarks 1. When a mechanical interlock is installed on the panel, screw type terminal covers cannot be installed.
2. These devices do not provide an isolation function. However, 400, 600, 630 and 800A frame circuit breakers can be made conforming to it. (See Note 3.)
3. On a 2-pole circuit breaker obtained by removing the neutral pole conductor from a 3-pole circuit breaker, the mechanical interlock can be installed in the same manner as on a
3-pole circuit breaker.
129
7. Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers

(1) Kinds and specifications
Table 6-39
Closed type (S) Dust-proof type (I) Water-proof type (W)
Appearance
(*1) (*1)
NF30-CS 2, 3P NFS-03CS – – –
2P NFS-05SV2 (*5) –
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV – NFI-05SV
3P NFS-05SV NFW-05SV
2P NFS-1SV2 (*5) –
NF125-CV/SV
3P – NFI-1SV NFW-1SV
NFS-1SV
NF125-HV 2, 3P NFW-1HV
NF125-SGV/LGV
MCCB (*2)
NF160-SGV/LGV
NF250-SGV/LGV NFS-2SV
– NFI-2SV NFW-2SV
NF250-CV/SV, NF125/250-SEV
NF125/160/250-HGV
2, 3P –
NF250-HV, NF125/250-HEV
NF400-CW – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW
NF400-SW/SEW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW
2P NFS-05SV –
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV – NFI-05SV
3P NFS-05SV NFW-05SV
NV125-CV/SV NFS-1SV NFW-1SV
– NFI-1SV
NV125-HV NFS-1SV NFW-1HV
ELCB (*2)
NV250-CV/SV, NV125/250-SEV NFS-2SV

– NFI-2SV NFW-2SV
NV250-HV, NV125/250-HEV –
3P
NV400-CW – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW
NV400-SW/SEW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW
NV800-SEW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW
Operating method Direct operation of circuit breaker handle Operation through operating handle mechanism
Standard paint color Box: Munsell 5Y7/1 Operating handle: Munsell N1.5
Protection class (IEC 60529) IP3X IP4X (*3) IP65 (*4)
Notes *1 The window frame varies depending on the model.
*2 For 1-pole circuit breakers, boxes are not manufactured.
*3 The protection class of NFI-1SV and NFI-2SV is IP3X.
*4 The protection class of NFW-4CW, NFW-4SW, NFW-6SW and NFW-8SW is IP54.
*5 The circuit breaker body is a 2-pole external type.
Remarks: 1. Only internal accessories with lead wires drawn out can be fitted. (However, LT and SLT can be fitted on the right
pole side.)
6
2. The dust-proof type (I) models do not provide an isolation function.
d Selection of rated current d Interlock (only for Dust-proof type)

When selecting the rated current of circuit breaker, it is The cover cannot be opened while the circuit breaker is in the
necessary to consider the temperature in the box. When the ON state. However, if the interlock release screw is turned,
2 Accessories
rated current is carried, the temperature in the box increases the cover is released from the locked state and can be
by 10 to 20K. Correct the rated current with the temperature opened even in the ON state.
correction curve.
d Handle operation and display
Determine the maximum working current to be 80% or less of
The ON, OFF or trip state of the body is displayed on each
the rated current.
position on the decorative board.
d Locking
Type I and W boxed circuit breakers can be provided with
locks in the following parts. Locking can prevent unnecessary
operation.
qCover and case
wON or OFF position of operating handle
Padlocks must be prepared by the user.
The dimensions of the padlocks are shown
on page 116.
Example of Type I operating handle block
130
6 Accessories 2
(2) External dimensions

JMCCB
J 4 mounting holes fG (key slot) 4 mounting holes fG
E
A
E
A
F D
Screw M6 B C
Earth terminal
F D
Earth terminal
B C NFI-05SV
··············································2 pcs. on bottom
K, hole NFI-1SV,NFI-2SV
630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom
K, hole ···2 pcs. on bottom NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······ 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom
H
J
H
J
Fig. 1 Type S Fig. 3 Type I
4 mounting holes fG
3 mounting holes fG (key slot) 4 mounting holes fG
A
E
A
E
A
Screw M6
Earth terminal F D
F D F D
B C B C
B C
K, hole ···2 pcs. on bottom K socket

630A or below: 1 pc. on each of top and bottom
800A: 2 pc. on each of top and bottom
H
H
J
J
H
K socket, 1 pc. on each of top and bottom Earth terminal

Fig. 2 Type S Fig. 4 Type W Fig. 5 Type W
Table 6-40 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.
Box Variable dimensions

Type name Applicable Model
type Fig. A B C D E F G H J K
NFS-03CS NF30-CS 2 188 158 69 58 150 78 6 25 100 20, 28
NFS-05SV2
NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 1 260 178 98 78 202 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
NFS-05SV
NFS-1SV2 NF125-CV/SV
1 310 178 98 78 252 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
S NFS-1SV NF125-CV/SV/HV
NF250-CV/SV, NF125/250-SEV
NF125-SGV/LGV
NFS-2SV 1 440 247 137 116 373 170 9 52 120 50, 62, 78
NF160-SGV/LGV
NF250-SGV/LGV
6
NFI-05SV NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 3 350 186 155.5 117 286 120 7 42 100 28, 35, 44
NFI-1SV NF125-CV/SV/HV 3 352 188 155.5 118 286 120 7 42 100 28, 35, 44
NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF125/250-SEV/HEV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NFI-2SV 3 442 248 162 124 373 170 9 54 120 50, 62, 78
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
I
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
2 Accessories
NFI-4CW NF400-CW 3 730 320 244 191 650 240 11 87 120 50, 62, 78
NFI-4SW NF400-SW/SEW 3 730 320 244 191 650 240 11 65 120 50, 62, 78
NFI-6SW NF630-CW/SW/SEW 3 940 433 260 207 856 350 15 90 150 92
NFI-8SW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW 3 1353 543 304 251 1270 460 15 90 320 104
NFW-05SV NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV 4 390 265 214 160 350 225 9.5 45 – 28
NFW-1SV NF125-CV/SV 4 390 265 214 160 350 225 9.5 50 – 36
NFW-1HV NF125-HV 4 480 265 239 186 440 225 9.5 60 – 36
NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF125/250-SEV/HEV
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NFW-2SV 4 550 355 264 210 510 315 11 75 – 54
W NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
NFW-4CW NF400-CW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 – 70
NFW-4SW NF400-SW/SEW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 – 70
NFW-6SW NF630-CW/SW/SEW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 – 82
NFW-8SW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW 5 1435 550 339 265 1395 515 15 100 180 104
131
JELCB
J 3 mounting holes fG
4 mounting holes fG
4 mounting holes fG
E
A
E
A
E
A
D
F Earth terminal
C
B F D
F D K, hole
B C
B C Earth terminal NFI-05SV
NFI-1SV ········2 pcs. on bottom
NFI-2SV K socket
630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom 630A or below: 1 pc. on each of
NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······· 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom top and bottom
H
800A: 2 pc. on each of top and
J bottom
H
H
J
J Earth terminal
K, hole: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom
Fig. 1 Type S Fig. 3 Type I Fig. 5 Type W

3 mounting holes fG (key slot)
(NVS-03CS) 4 mounting holes fG
4 mounting holes fG (key slot)
E
A
Screw M6
Earth terminal
F D
B C
F D
B C
K, hole: 2 pcs. on bottom
H
Fig. 2 Type S Fig. 4 Type W

H
K socket, 1 pc. on each of top and bottom
Table 6-41 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.
Box Variable dimensions

Type name Applicable Model
type Fig. A B C D E F G H J K
NFS-05SV2
NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 2 260 178 98 78 202 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
NFS-05SV
S NFS-1SV2 NV125-CV/SV
2 310 178 98 78 252 100 7 34 100 28, 35, 44
NFS-1SV NV125-CV/SV/HV
NFS-2SV NV250-CV/SV, NV125/250-SEV 2 440 247 137 116 373 170 9 52 120 50, 62, 78
NFI-05SV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 3 350 186 155.5 117 286 120 7 42 100 28, 35, 44
NFI-1SV NV125-CV/SV/HV 3 352 188 155.5 118 286 120 7 42 100 28, 35, 44
NFI-2SV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV125/250-SEV/HEV 3 442 248 162 124 373 170 9 54 120 50, 62, 78
I NFI-4CW NV400-CW 3 730 320 244 191 650 240 11 87 120 50, 62, 78
6 NFI-4SW
NFI-6SW
NFI-8SW
NV400-SW/SEW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW
NV800-SEW
3
2
3
730
940
1353
320
433
543
244
260
304
191
207
251
650
856
1270
240
350
460
11
15
15
65
90
90
120
150
320
50, 62, 78
92
104
NFW-05SV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV 4 390 265 214 160 350 225 9.5 45 − 28
NFW-1SV NV125-CV/SV 4 390 265 214 160 350 225 9.5 50 − 36
NFW-1HV NV125-HV 4 480 265 239 186 440 225 9.5 60 − 36
2 Accessories
NFW-2SV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV125/250-SEV/HEV 4 550 355 264 210 510 315 11 75 − 54

W
NFW-4CW NV400-CW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 − 70
NFW-4SW NV400-SW/SEW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 − 70
NFW-6SW NV630-CW/SW/SEW 5 800 355 257 220 760 315 11 85 − 82
NFW-8SW NV800-SEW 5 1435 550 339 265 1395 515 15 100 180 104
132
6 Accessories 2
8. Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical

Operation Devices
Spring charge type (1) Spring charge type (2) Motor-drive type (2)
Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1 Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1
(1) Specifications
DElectrically
D operated circuit breakers
Table 6-42 Specify the electrical operation device together with the circuit breaker body.
Electrically operating method Spring charge type (1) Spring charge type (2) Motor-drive type (2)
NF125-SV, NF125-HV
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-SW, NF400-SEW
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-SW, NF630-SEW
Class S, H and R NF1250-SDW NF1250-SDW
NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW
MCCB NF125-RV, NF250-RV
NF400-CW NF400-CW
NF125-CV
Class C NF630-CW − NF630-CW −
NF250-CV
NF800-CEW NF800-CEW
NF125-UV NF400-UEW NF400-UEW
Class U − −
NF250-UV NF800-UEW NF800-UEW
Motor breakers NF125-SV, NF250-SV − − − −
NV400-SW, NV400-SEW
NV400-SW, NV400-SEW
NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV400-HEW, NV400-REW
NV400-HEW, NV400-REW
NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV630-SW, NV630-SEW
Class S, H and R NV630-SW, NV630-SEW − −
NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV630-HEW, NF800-SEW
NV630-HEW, NF800-SEW
ELCB NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV800-HEW
NV800-HEW
(*3)
NV125-CV NV400-CW NV400-CW(*3)
Class C − −
Motor breakers NV125-SV, NV250-SV − − − −
Rated operating voltage (V) Compatible with 100 to 240 V
DC100-110, AC100-110 DC100-110, AC100-110, AC200-220
(Allowable operating voltage range: AC and 100 to 250 V DC
AC200-220(DC125, AC240) (DC125, AC240)
85 to 110%) 24 V DC, 48 to 60 V DC (*1)
ON 8 10
Operating DC 100/110V 0.5 (1.5) 3.0(8.0) 5.0(13.5)
OFF 1.0 (3.0) 1.0 (4.0)
current
(Ams) ON 10 10
100/110V 0.6 (3.0) 4.0(8.0) 5.0(10.0)
Values in OFF 1.0 (3.0) 1.0 (3.0)
6
( ): Starting AC
current ON 8 8
200/220V 0.5 (2.5) 2.0(4.5) 3.5(7.0)
OFF 0.5 (1.5) 0.5 (1.5)
ON 0.05~0.1(*2) 0.05 0.07 0.3 or less
Operating (self-holding type)
s OFF 0.6 or less (self-holding type)
time 3 or less (self-holding type)
Charge 1.2 or less (self-holding type) − −
2 Accessories
Required transformer capacity VA 150 700 400 700
Endurance voltage 1500V 1500V
Notes *1 When the rated operating voltage is 24 V DC or 48 to 60 V DC, specify the voltage. If the voltage is not specified, the circuit breaker will be manufactured for 100 to 240 V AC and 100 to 250 V DC.
*2 For 24-V DC circuit breakers, the operating time at a voltage of 100% or more is shown.
*3 Models for special voltage (125 V DC or 240 V AC) are not provided with the test button.
Remarks 1. Flush plate type circuit breakers can be manufactured to order.
2. The models with voltage in parentheses are special voltage products.
3. For the spring charge type (1), use an ON-OFF operating switch for minute load.
4. For the spring charge type (1) The circuit breaker of 3 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC.
In case of 125A frame 4 pole can be used only TC-L.
In case of 250A frame 4 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC.
5. When the body of the spring charge type (1) breaker is an earth leakage alarm breaker, the reset button cannot be pressed. Provide such a circuit breaker with an external reset
or automatic reset system (except for the electronic type).
6. When the body of the motor-drive type (2) or spring charge type (2) has internal accessories, they are normally provided with lead wire terminal blocks.
7. The types other than the spring charge type (1) do not provide an isolation function.
8. When placing an order for a CE marked product of the spring charge type (1) or spring charge type (2), specify the model name with CE.
9. The switching durability of electrically operated circuit breakers conforms to JIS.
DElectrical
D operation The following models of Electrical Operation Devices are supplied also as separate devices. The user can install them to
the circuit breaker body.
devices (Front connection, rear connection and plug-in types)
(When requiring a motor breaker or a CE marked product, place an order for it together with the circuit breaker body.)
Table 6-43
Electrically operating method Spring charge type (1)
Applicable NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV
models NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV125-SEV/HEV
NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV
Rated NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV
operating voltage NF250-UV
Compactible to
MDSAD240-NF1SVE MDSAD240-NV1SVE MDSAD240-NF2SVE MDSAD240-NV2SVE MDSAD240-NVE2SVE
100-240VAC/100-250VDC
24VDC MDSD024-NF1SVE MDSD024-NV1SVE MDSD024-NF2SVE MDSD024-NV2SVE MDSD024-NVE2SVE
48-60VDC MDSD060-NF1SVE MDSD060-NV1SVE MDSD060-NF2SVE MDSD060-NV2SVE MDSD060-NVE2SVE
133
DCautions
D times. Then, the circuit breaker will be turned off (reset),
DDAll electrical operations are based on intermittent rating. and, at the same time, the closing spring will be charged.
Avoid operating any device continuously 10 times or more Although the circuit breaker can be turned off even if the
(ON and OFF operations are counted as one time). switch is not turned to MANUAL, the selection switch
DDOperate any device at 85 to 110% of the rated operating should be set to MANUAL because remote operation may
voltage. be accepted.
DDThe dielectric strength of electrical operation circuits is · After turning the changeover switch to MANUAL, draw out
1500 V. When performing dielectric strength test of any of the OFF lock plate, and lock the circuit breaker in the OFF
these devices and other devices, if the test voltage state with padlocks (to be prepared by the user). Up to
exceeds the rated value (1500 V), disconnect the three padlocks can be fitted.
operation power supply terminal. f5 to f8 padlocks can be fitted.
DDWhen collectively operating more than one electrical Note: After the completion of manual operation (on-site
operation device, isolate the devices connecting a relay to operation), return the selection switch to AUTO without
each device. fail. If it is not returned, electrical operation (remote
If the control terminals are directly connected in parallel, a operation) cannot be performed.
circuit will be formed, and the devices may not normally DDDisplay of tripping state
function. When the circuit breaker trips in the ON state, the tripping
state is displayed. When it trips in the OFF state, the OFF
DAutomatic
D reset (optional)
The automatic reset type has a built-in alarm switch in the state is kept displayed.
circuit breaker and is connected in such a way that the OFF Note: When it trips in the OFF state, signals from AL will not
operation circuit is closed when the circuit breaker trips. be output.
Therefore, when the circuit breaker trips, it is automatically DDCautions for use
reset. q To the ON or OFF operation switch (to be prepared by the
However, when the circuit breaker thermally trips, it may not user), current only of 24 V DC and 15 to 30 mA flows. Use
be automatically reset. a switch for minute load.
If an automatic reset spring charge type (1) is required, the w Operate the operation switch for 0.1 s or more to turn on
user must wire the device in accordance with the external and for 20 ms or more to turn off. If it is operated for less
connection diagram shown in Fig. 1 in (3). than the time, it may not function.
The wire to the operation switch shall be less than 100 m.
(2) Installation and connection e The power supply module has a built-in switching power
(List of manufacturable) supply. Therefore, it may interfere with communication
Table 6-44 devices near the module. In such a case, install a noise
Installation and connection Front Rear Plug-in type filter on the input side.
method connection connection
Frame (A) type type (*1)
r For the automatic reset type, purchase a circuit breaker
50~250 (*2)
400~800
with alarm switch (for minute load), and connect the signal
1000, 1250 circuit (among the terminal numbers S1, S2 and S4) as
1600 − shown in Fig. 1.
Notes *1 For ELCB, only 3-pole circuit breakers with a frame size of 125 to 400 A can be
manufactured. If the circuit breaker in the OFF state is P1
6
*2 In the case of 4-pole 125 A frame circuit breakers and U class, the circuit breakers are Fig. 1 Uc
supplied as special models. Consult us for details. tripped by UVT-N or the like, it cannot be P2
Power
Remarks: 1. All models of the front connection type are provided with bar terminals (except the spring automatically reset. To reset it, it is S1 supply
charge type (1)). necessary to turn it on under no current. ON module
S2
2. 2-pole circuit breakers of all models are obtained by removing the neutral pole conductors
from 3-pole circuit breakers.
After this operation, it will be automatically OFF
S4
reset.
(3) Structure and operation AL (for minute load)

2 Accessories
AL “a” (alarm switch for minute load)
JSpring
J charge type (1)
DDElectrical operation Operation circuit
· When the ON operation switch is closed, the relay will Electrical
Power supply module operation base
operate, the motor will be driven, the latch mechanism will SW1
be released, and the closing spring force will Operating P1 Power MANUAL/AUTO
selection switch
power Uc supply M
instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. supply P2 circuit SW2
Charge/Discharge
· When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will Control SW1 detecting switch
S1 circuit
operate, the motor will be driven, the circuit breaker will be M Motor
S2
turned off (reset), and, at the same time, the closing spring ON
SW2
S4
will be charged. OFF
(RESET)
Note: The charge may not be completed because the circuit The circuit breaker is off, and the electrical operation device is in the charged state.
protective function operates.
Symbol Interpretation of symbol
DDManual operation SW1 MANUAL/AUTO selection switch
Limit switch
· After turning the MANUAL/AUTO selection switch on the SW2
(For spring condition detection charge/discharge)
cover upper surface to MANUAL, press the ON button, and M Motor
the latch mechanism will be released, and the closing
Note *1 When power is applied, inrush current (capacitor charging current)
spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. of 60 A flows to the breaker and fuse installed on the power supply
· After turning the MANUAL/AUTO selection switch on the circuit for 1 ms or so. When selecting the breaker and fuse, make
cover upper surface to MANUAL, draw out the manual sure that they will not cause problems, such as blowout and
malfunction.
handle, and move it upward and downward about 10 to 14
134
6 Accessories 2
JMotor-drive
J type (2) Therefore, configure the circuit in such a way that power is
DDElectrical operation disconnected from the electrical operation device before
Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw the circuit breaker is tripped by the non-reset type UVT.
to switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset). w Current of about 0.2 A will flow to the ON-OFF switch. Use
DDManual operation an appropriate switch.
The manual operation handle can be used to switch the e Do not apply ON and OFF operation signals continuously.
breaker ON and OFF directly. An interval of 0.5 sec or more is necessary between ON
DDCautions for use and OFF signals.
q In the case of a circuit breaker with UVT, if the circuit r In the case of the automatic reset type device, it will
breaker trips owing to the operation of UVT, the procedure perform the reset operation with an interval of 0.5 sec after
for re-closing the circuit breaker varies depending on the NFB performs the tripping action.
condition of the electrical operation device before the circuit t The electrical operation device has a built-in pumping
breaker trips. preventing circuit. Therefore, it can operate to turn off the
• Tripping in ON state: Reset (OFF). → Turn on. circuit breaker while the ON operation switch is held in the
• Tripping in OFF state: Turn on (idle tripping). → closing state, but it cannot turn on continuously after
Reset (OFF). → Turn on. turning off. To turn on, once turn off the ON operation
(If the circuit breaker cannot be turned on (idle tripping), switch, and turn on the switch. Do not apply the ON
reset (OFF) it, and turn on.) operation signal continuously.
• When an automatic reset system is configured on a non- y The manual operating handle moves at a high speed
reset type circuit breaker with UVT, if UVT is set to the during electrical operation. Pay attention to the handle.
no-voltage state, the operations to turn off (reset), trip, Keep the operation circuit power supply off during manual
turn off (reset) and trip are repeated. operation.
u In the manual operation, surely turn the manual operating
handle to the position indicated on the nameplate.
DDOperation circuit ···· For the automatic reset type, the connections indicated with the dashed lines are added.
Operation circuit 1 Operation circuit 2
NF400-CW~NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW
NV400-CW~NV800-HEW
Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off) Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off)
G (Earth terminal) G X2
Z2 (Earth terminal)
(DC-) A1 R3 R4 (DC-) A1
M
Operating R1 R2
Z1 Operating
power power T1
supply LS
supply
A2 Z A2 X4 Y2
X X1 Y1 X1
T1 Y
Z4a Z4b Y1 Y4
ON B T1b
X3 Z1 Z2
T2 M
Z3 R Y2a T2 ON B Y3
OFF
Reset C
Z
OFF X
ALa D Reset C T1b LS
Y
D T2a
Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
T2
ALa Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
M : Motor Z, K: Exciting coil of keep relay : Motor field coil

X : Relay for ON operation (Operation circuit 3) : Surge absorbing circuit
LS, LS1, LS2: Limit switches
Y : Relay for OFF operation : Surge absorber
X1~X4, Y1~Y4, Y2a, Z4a, Z4b, Z1,
R : Motor driving relay
Z2, Z3, K1, T1b, T2a: Relay switches
Z : Polarity switching relay T1 : Pumping preventing timer
(Operation circuit 1 or 2) T2 : Timer for automatic reset
6
(R1)~(R4): Relay switches
JSpring
J charge type (2)
DDElectrical operation
When the ON operation switch is closed, the closing coil will
be excited to release the latch mechanism, and the closing
2 Accessories
spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker.
When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will
operate to start the motor, turn off (reset) the circuit breaker
and, at the same time, charge the closing spring.
DDManual operation
• Press the ON button, and the latch mechanism will be Internal structure of
released, and the closing spring force will instantaneously spring charge type Internal structure of motor-drive type
turn on the circuit breaker.
• Turning off (resetting) DDOperation circuit
Push the leaf spring, bring out the manual handle, and For the automatic reset type, the connections indicated with
move the handle upward and downward more than ten the dashed lines are added.
times. Then, the circuit breaker will be turned off (reset),
and, at the same time, the closing spring will be charged. Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off)
DDCautions for use LS3 LS2

CC : Coil for making
q In Before installing or removing the electrical operation Y CC Y : Relay for pumping prevention
device to or from the circuit breaker, trip the circuit breaker, M X Y

X : Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side
LS1 : Limit switch interlocking with cam
and discharge the electrical operation device. After the LS1 LS2 : Limit switch interlocking with cam
device is installed to the circuit breaker, the device will not X X Y LS3 : Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate
trip the circuit breaker in the OFF state even if the trip M : Motor
button is pressed. This is not a trouble. G P2 P1 S2 S4

The electrical operation device takes 3 seconds to turn off Operating ON OFF
RESET
Alarm switch for automatic
power resetting (contact a)
the circuit breaker. To open the circuit immediately by supply
remote operation, use a circuit breaker with SHT or UVT. (DC-)
• The device has a built-in pumping preventing relay.

w Current of about 9 A and 0.2 A will flow to the ON and OFF
switches, respectively. Use appropriate switches.
135
9. Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and

Handle Caps
DBPA-type
D mounting base (for BH-P)
Three-phase-type
Single-phase-type 34
Note: Single-phase tvpes have
no central pole.
Solderless
terminal for
wire size :
25 25
125A 14~50mm2
75
87
250A 22~125mm2
25
25
A
75
A
Mtg. holes 4.5 dia.
75
4.5
75
37.5
Solderless
terminal for 86.5
wire size
22~60mm2
21
154
21
164
1ph, 2w 1ph, 3w 3ph, 4w

Max. no. of ways Neutral terminal
Main : 125A Main : 125A Main : 250A Main : 125A Main : 250A
6 BPA-1106 BPA-2106 – BPA-3106 – NT-06
9 BPA-1109 – – – – –
12 BPA-1112 BPA-2112 – BPA-3112 – NT-12
15 BPA-1115 – – – – –
18 BPA-1118 BPA-2118 BPA-2218 BPA-3118 BPA-3218 NT-18
24 – BPA-2124 BPA-2224 BPA-3124 BPA-3224 NT-24
30 – – BPA-2230 – BPA-3230 NT-30
36 – – BPA-2236 – BPA-3236 NT-36
42 BPA-3242 NT-42
6
2 Accessories
136
6 Accessories 2
DMounting
D plate (for BH)
5.5ø mtg. holes BH MCB (mm) 14
Breakoff undercut 13.5 16 38.5 11
Line side
(63.3) 11 36
13
9.5
22.5
11
33
34
Mounting pitch 102
( ) : 3P 10
86
57
116
102
a) Lock cover for b) Lock cover for c) Handle cap d) Handle cap for
1-pole units 2-pole, 3-pole for 1-pole 2-pole units
22.5
Line side units units

Spring clip
25 0.8
5.6 Outlines and dimensions (mm)
25 5-6 wide mtg. slot
25 × 32 = 800 ± 1 59
One mounting plate has 32 circuits. Colors available

One package includes 10 mounting plates (320 circuits). Colors
Fig. ref. Item Poles
Red Yellow Green
a) 1 LCBH1R LCVH1Y –
DLock
D covers and handle caps b)
Lock
cover
2 LCBH2R LCBH2Y –
(for 1-pole, 2-pole and 3-pole types) b)

c)
3
1
LCBH3R
HC1R
LCBH3Y
HC1Y
–
HC1G
Cap
Many panelboards include some restricted-operation circuits, d) 2 HC2R HC2Y HC2G
which must either normally remain on, such as all-night

lighting or alarms, or must remain off, such as spare circuits,
or circuits used in repair or construction work. Breakers for
ON OFF ON OFF
such circuits can be locked by simply installing a lock cover
on the handle. Lock cover in place Lock cover in place
(1-pole unit) (2-pole unit)
10. IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters

Table 6-45 DExternal
D dimension
Number of poles Applicable model
Type name Fig. IEC 35-mm rail
of circuit breaker MCCB ELCB mounting adapter
DIN-03CS 2, 3 NF30-CS – Fig. 1
(Note1)
NF32-SV NV32-SV
3
6
100
35
35
DIN-05SV 2, 3 Fig. 2
NF63-CV/SV/HV NV63-CV/SV/HV
3.5
Remark: 1. Place an order in units of 10 pieces.
2 Accessories
8 1
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Mounting hook for
IEC 35mm rail
[DIN-05SV]
137
6
2 Accessories
138
MEMO
Characteristics and Dimensions
1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 140
• NF30-CS…………………………………………………………… 140
• NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV……………………………………… 142
• NF125-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 144
7
3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers 198
• NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU… …………………………………… 198
• NF100-CVFU, NV100-CVFU… ………………………………… 200
• NF125-SVU/HVU, NV125-SVU/HVU…………………………… 202
• NF125-UV… ……………………………………………………… 146 • NF225-CWU… …………………………………………………… 204
• NF250-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 148 • NF250-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU…………………………… 206
• NF250-UV… ……………………………………………………… 150 • NF400-SWU/HWU………………………………………………… 208
• NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, • NF630-SWU/HWU………………………………………………… 210
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV… ………………………………… 152
• NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV… ………………………… 154 4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers 212
• NF400-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 156
• NF400-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 158 • NF250-SEV/HEV with MDU……………………………………… 212
• NF400-UEW… …………………………………………………… 160 • NF400-SEP/HEP with MDU……………………………………… 214
• NF630-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 162 • NF630-SEP/HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP/HEP with MDU… … 216
• NF630-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 164
• NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW…………………………………… 166 5 Miniature Circuit Breakers,
• NF800-SDW… …………………………………………………… 168 Residual Current Circuit Breakers,
• NF800-UEW… …………………………………………………… 170
Residual Current Circuit Breakers
• NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW… ………………………………… 172
• NF1250-SDW……………………………………………………… 174
with Overcurrent Protection and
• NF1600-SEW……………………………………………………… 176
Isolating Switch 218
• NF1600-SDW……………………………………………………… 178 • BH,BH-P…………………………………………………………… 218
• BH-D6, BH-D10…………………………………………………… 219
2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers 180 • BH-DN……………………………………………………………… 220
• BV-D………………………………………………………………… 221
• NV32-SV, NV-63CV/SV/HV……………………………………… 180 • BV-DN……………………………………………………………… 222
• NV125-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 182 • KB-D………………………………………………………………… 223
• NV250-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 184
• NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV… ………………………… 186
6 Circuit Protectors 224
• NV400-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 188
• NV400-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 190 • CP30-BA…………………………………………………………… 224
• NV630-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 192
• NV630-SEW/HEW………………………………………………… 194 7 Electrical Operated Cicuit Breakers 225
• NV800-SEW/HEW………………………………………………… 196
139
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
NF30-CS
Model NF30-CS
Rated current In (A) 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
Number of poles 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500
breaking capacity (kA)

690V −
Rated short-circuit
500V −
IEC 60947-2
AC 415V 1.5/1.5
(Icu/Ics)
380V 1.5/1.5
240V 2.5/2
Standard Attached Parts
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)
(Front connection)
NF30-CS
Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
1h Types
NF30-CS
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s
30s Max.
20s
Operating time
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s Min.
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
Internal Accessories Temperature Characteristics Curve

Operating handle
7
Left-side Right-side Lead wire
AL AX
mounting mounting direction
Rated ambient
300
temperature
change rate (%)
250
Operating time
2-pole 200
150
100
1 Characteristics and Dimensions
3-pole 80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remarks: 1. Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be
Ambient temperature (°C)
produced upon request.
2. Refer to page 106.
Accessories Type name Reference page
Terminal cover
Small (TC-S) TCS-03CS3W (*1)

Large (TC-L) TCL-03CS3W (*1)
121
Rear (BTC) BTC-03CS3W (*1)
Skeleton (TTC) TTC-03CS (*1)
Handle lock (HL) HL-05FH 127
Lock cover (LC) LC03CS 128
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapter (DIN) DIN-03CS 137
Note *1 The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
140
7 Characteristics and Dimensions 1
NF30-CS
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Mtg. hole M5 screw M40.7 taps or f5

14.5 Applicable Breaker
wire size: f1.6mm
to 14mm2
76.5
84
64
54
96
f8.5
f5.5
f5
6
10
23.5 47 23.5
12.5 (max.)
28
45 67.5
49 2-pole 3-pole
Conductor thickness t=3 max.
2-pole 3-pole 3 52 Drilling plan
Busbar drilling for
67 direct connection
Rear connection
3-pole
M40.7 taps 2-pole
or f5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max. =3.2 Breaker
R2
20
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
5
18
38.5
58.5
23.5 23.5 20
ø14
55 47
Mounting base Front-plate cutout
8
Breaker mtg
M6 screw
M40.7 screw 2-pole 3-pole 1mm clearance on
each side of handle
2-pole 3-pole
Drilling plan
IEC Rail Mounting Adapter

35mm IEC-rail adapter
for installation
5
100
35
31
4
52
Installation utensil
for 35mm IEC-rail 55
2-pole 3-pole 58
70
7
141
Characteristics
NF32-SV
Model NF32-SV NF63-CV NF63-SV NF63-HV
3 4 (5) 6 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 10 (15) 16 20 25
Rated current In (A) (15) 16 20 25 16 20 25 (30) 32 16 20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50
NF63-CV
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 40 50 (60) 63 (60) 63
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
NF63-SV 690V
500V
–
2.5/2.5
–
2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5
– 2.5/2.5
7.5/7.5
NF63-HV
Rated 440V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8
short-circuit AC 415V 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 10/8
capacity
(kA) 380V 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 10/8
230V 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
DC 250V (*1) 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) (*2)
Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown at the bottom of page 14.
*2 Supplied with NF63-SV and NF63-HV.
NF63-SV
4h 4h 4h
2h Operating characteristics 2h 2h
NF32-SV 3A-6A
1h 1h NF32-SV 10A-32A 1h Operating characteristics
NF63-CV 3A-6A
NF63-CV 10A-32A NF63-CV 40A-63A
NF63-SV 3A-6A 30min
30min NF63-SV 10A-32A 30min NF63-SV 40A-63A
20min 20min NF63-HV 10A-32A 20min NF63-HV 40A-63A
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A-63A)
2min 2min Instantaneous trip current is 2min
Max. fixed to AC600±A120A Max. (40A-50A)
1min 1min and DC850±A170A. 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
Max. total breaking time Max. total breaking time
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min.
Min. Min.
2s 2s 2s
Max. total breaking time
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
AC
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
AC DC
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
DC AC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
DC
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of rated current × 100% of rated current × 100% of rated current
Internal Accessories Temperature Compensation Curve

Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT
direction
130
Rated ambient
temperature
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting

Current rating (%)
120
2-pole 110
7 3, 4-pole
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
temperature 40°C)

Accessories Type name Reference page Accessories Type name Reference page
2P F-05SV2 2, 3P MI-05SV3
F 117 Mechanical interlock MI 129
3, 4P F-05SV 4P MI-05SV4
Operating handle
2P V-05SV2 2P TCS-05SV2
V 119 Small TC-S
3, 4P V-05SV 3P TCS-05SV3
LC LC-05SV TCL-05SV2
2P
HLF-05SV TCL-05SV2L
Handle lock device HL(*1) 127
HLN-05SV Large TC-L TCL-05SV3
3P
HL-S HLS-05SV TCL-05SV3L
Terminal
Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. 4P TCL-05SV4 121
cover
2P TTC-05SV2
Skeleton TTC
3P TTC-05SV3
2P BTC-05SV2
Rear BTC
3P BTC-05SV3
2P PTC-05SV2
Plug-in PTC
3P PTC-05SV3
142 IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters DIN-05SV 137
NF32-SV · NF63-CV · NF63-SV · NF63-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) M50.8 screw
(M8 for 60A and 63A) M40.7 taps
or f5
Mounting hole
24 Breaker
50
Applicable wire size:
2
f1.6 to 22mm
(for M50.8 screw)
111
130
112
84
50
f4.5
f5.5
Trip button (f8.5 for 60A and 63A)
22 25 45
8
25
f8.5
Neutral pole 25
25 50 75 61
12.5 max.
50 75 100 68
(16 max. for 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
(Conductor
4 72 60A and 63A) thickness
90 t=4 max.)
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling Drilling plan
for direct connection
Rear connection
2-pole 4-pole
Mounting plate M40.7 taps 3-pole

Mounting base or f5
t = 3.2 max.
43 (44 for 60A and 63A) Breaker Breaker
27 min.
8
112
112
111
R1
52
8
M6 screw 50 M40.7 breaker

mounting screw 25 22.5
27 min. f14
25 25 50 70
68 42 25 50 75
(46 for 60A and 63A) 1.0mm clearance on each side
72 of the handle frame
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
Mounting
7
plate 80 105
M50.8 Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in
Terminal block mounting screw 50 75
terminal block
25
54
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
5.5 16.5 max.

85
54
7
25
M6 screw
25 50
21 55 f6.5 f6 hole
57 82 107
89 30 or M50.8 taps
Details of
terminal Conductor drilling
2-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF32-SV and NF63-CV.
143
Characteristics
NF125-CV
Model NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-HV
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 (15) 16 20 (30) 32
50 (60) 63 (75) 80
Rated current In (A) 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 40 50 (60) 63 (75)
NF125-SV
100 125
80 100 125 80 100 125
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690
NF125-HV 690V
500V
440V
7.5/4
10/5
–
18/18
25/25
8/8 10/8
30/23
50/38
Rated
short-circuit AC 415V 10/5 30/30 50/38
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 10/5 30/30 50/38
capacity
(kA) 380V 10/5 30/30 50/38
230V 30/15 50/50 100/75
DC 250V (*1) 7.5/4 40/40 –
(front connection) (*2) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products.
If wired as shown at the bottom on page 14, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively.
*2 Supplied with NF125-SV and NF125-HV.
NF125-SV
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Operating characteristics Operating characteristics Operating characteristics
1h NF125-SV 15A-32A 1h 1h NF125-CV 125A
NF125-CV 50A-100A
30min NF125-HV 15A-32A 30min NF125-SV 40A-100A 30min NF125-SV 125A
20min 20min NF125-HV 40A-100A 20min NF125-HV 125A
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A-100A) Max.
2min Instantaneous trip current is 2min 2min
fixed to AC600±A120A Max. (40A-50A)
1min and DC850±A170A. 1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s Min.
2s 2s
Max. total breaking time
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
AC AC
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s
DC DC
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
DC
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 6070 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40

Lead-wire
direction
130
Rated ambient
temperature

Current rating (%)
120
2-pole 110
7 3, 4-pole
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
temperature 40°C)

2P F-1SV2 2, 3P MI-05SV3
F 117 Mechanical interlock MI 129
3, 4P F-1SV 4P MI-05SV4
Operating handle
2P V-1SV2 2P TCS-1SV2
V 119 Small TC-S
3, 4P V-1SV 3P TCS-1SV3
LC LC-05SV 2P TCL-1SV2
HLF-05SV Large TC-L 3P TCL-1SV3
Handle lock device HL(*1) 127
HLN-05SV 4P TCL-1SV4
Terminal
HL-S HLS-05SV 2P TTC-1SV2 121
cover Skeleton TTC
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. 3P TTC-1SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name. 2P BTC-1SV2
Rear BTC
3P BTC-1SV3
2P PTC-1SV2
Plug-in PTC
3P PTC-1SV3
Electrical operation device (*2) 133
144
NF125-CV · NF125-SV · NF125-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulation barrier
Mounting hole (removable) Solderless terminal
M8 screw for wire size
24 Breaker
14 to 2/0AWG CU/AL
50
Wire connection
111
130
112
84
50
f4.5
f8.5
8
Trip
button 30 30
f8.5
30 22 30 45
61 M40.7 taps
60 60 90
Neutral pole 68 or f5
19 max.
90 120 4 72 Comb conductor 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
16.5 max.
90
(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Mounting base 3-pole 2-pole 3-pole

Breaker Breaker
102 Stud can be 2-pole
Mounting plate
52 rotated 90°
t = 3.2 max.
R1
R1
112
111
52
8
112
15 connection
allowance
16
30 28
30 30 f18 30 57 86
8.5
5 60 90
2.5 M8 bolt M40.7 breaker
mounting screw
60 M40.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side
15 2.5 or f5
Insulation of the handle frame
90
68 54.5 15 tube 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
72 104.5
Plug-in
7
3-pole 4-pole
Mounting M50.8 95 125
plate Terminal block mounting nut Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in 60 90
or screw mounted directly
terminal block
30
56
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
20 max.
5.5
85
12
56
30 30 60
M8 screw
21 f8.5
65 67 97 127
89 30 f6 hole
Details of or M50.8 taps
Conductor drilling
terminal
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. The 2-pole models of NF125-HV are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2-and 3-pole models are available for NF125-CV.
145
Characteristics
NF125-UV
Model NF125-UV
15 20 30 40 50
60 75 100 125
Number of poles 2 3 4
690V 10/10

500V 200/200
Rated short-circuit
440V 200/200
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 400V 200/200
380V 200/200
230V 200/200
DC 250V −
(front connection) M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs)
NF125-UV
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
1h Operating characteristics 1h 1h Operating characteristics
NF125-UV 15A-30A Operating characteristics
30min 30min 30min NF125-UV 125A
NF125-UV 40A-100A
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min
Instantaneous trip current Max. (40A-50A)
1min 1min 1min
Max. is fixed to 600A ± 120A.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
Max. total
0.2s breaking time 0.2s 0.2s
Max. total Max. total
0.1s 0.1s breaking time 0.1s breaking time
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG
direction
130
Rated ambient
temperature
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting EAL TBL TBM

Current rating (%)
120
110
7 100
90
(Rated ambient 80
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F F-1UV 117 2, 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle Mechanical interlock MI
V V-1UV 119 4P MI-05SV4 129
Lock cover LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 3P TCS-1SV3
HLF-05SV 3P TCL-1SV3
HL (*1) 127 Large TC-L
Handle lock device HLN-05SV Terminal 4P TCL-1SV4
HL-S HLS-05SV cover Skeleton TTC 3P TTC-1SV3 121
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Rear BTC 3P BTC-1SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.
Plug-in PTC 3P PTC-1SV3
146
NF125-UV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Breaker
Mounting hole M8 screw
24
61
f8.5
173
191
172
84
50
130
8
Trip 22 30 45 19 max. (Comb conductor 30 30
f4.5
f8.5
button 16.5 max.)
60 90 61 (Conductor thickness t=4 max.)
M40.7 taps
90 120 Neutral pole or f5
68
Conductor drilling
4 72 for direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 4-pole
90 Drilling plan
Rear connection
4-pole
Breaker
102 3-pole
Mounting plate 4-pole
t = 3.2 max. 52 Stud can be
rotated 90° Breaker
3-pole
4.5
173
172
Mounting base
173
52
R1
8
15Connection
allowance
16
30 30 28
f18
86
8.5
5 60 30
2.5 M8 bolt
60 M40.7 breaker 90
15 2.5 mounting screw M40.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side
90 or f5 of the handle frame
68 54.5 15
Insulation tube 3-pole 4-pole
72 104.5
Plug-in
M50.8 Breaker (Plug-in terminal block)

Mounting plate Terminal block mounting nut
7
or screw mounted directly
Plug-in terminal block
56
11
16.5 max.
144.5
231
141
115
177

12
56
5.5
21 60 30
f8.5 f6 hole
M8 screw
95 97 or M50.8 taps
89 30
Conductor drilling
Drilling plan
Details of
terminal
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
147
Characteristics
NF250-CV
Model NF250-CV NF250-SV NF250-HV
(*1) (100) (*1) (100)
125 150 160 175
Rated current In (A) 125 150 175 200 125 150 160 175
NF250-SV
200 225 250
225 250 200 225 250
NF250-HV 690V
500V
440V
–
10/8
15/12
8/8
30/30
36/36
10/8
50/38
65/65
Rated
short-circuit AC 415V 25/19 36/36 70/70
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 25/19 36/36 75/75
capacity
(kA) 380V 25/19 36/36 75/75
230V 36/27 85/85 100/100
DC (*1) 250V 15/12 20/20 (300V) 40/40 (300V)
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Note *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products.
If wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, three-pole NF250-CV can be used for up to 400VDC, three-pole NF250-SV
and NF250-HV up to 500VDC and four-pole products up to 600VDC.
NF250-SV
4h 4h
2h Operating characteristics 2h
1h NF250-CV 100A-225A 1h NF250-CV 250A
NF250-SV 100A-225A NF250-SV 250A
30min NF250-HV 125A-225A 30min NF250-HV 250A
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
Max. Max.
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
AC
0.2s 0.2s
AC
0.1s 0.1s
DC DC
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of rated current × 100% of rated current

Lead-wire
Rated ambient
direction 130
temperature
Current rating (%)
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting 120
110
7 (Rated ambient 80
100
90
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

F F-2SV 117 2, 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle Mechanical interlock MI 129
V V-2SV 119 4P MI-2SV4
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 2, 3P TCS-2SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Handle lock device HL(*1) 127 2, 3P
HLN-05SV Large TC-L TCL-2SV3L
Terminal
HL-S HLS-2SV 4P TCL-2SV4 121
cover
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Skeleton TTC 2, 3P TTC-2SV3
Rear BTC 2, 3P BTC-2SV3
Plug-in PTC 2, 3P PTC-2SV3
148
NF250-CV · NF250-SV · NF250-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
30
M8 bolt
Insulation barrier (hex-socket) 24
(removable) Breaker
Mounting hole
Solderless terminal
100
for wire size
125-175A 14-95mm2
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
144
165
102
126
.5
50
f8
f4.5
10
1
C
C
1
Trip button 25 max.
f8.5
100
45 Or 35 35
22 35 .5
61 f8
M40.7 taps
Neutral pole or f5
70 105 68
9
4 72 25 max. 3-pole 4-pole
105 140
92 (Conductor thickness
3-pole 4-pole t=7 max.)

Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting base
4-pole 3-pole
Mounting plate Stud can be
rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
t = 3.2 max. 3-pole
8
144
144
126
52
R
Connection
22 allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
mounting screw 32.5
6 f24 35
15
35 35 100
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps
Insulation
M8 bolt tube or f5
105 70 105
68 71 1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame
72 106 3-pole 4-pole
Plug-in
4-pole 145
7
3-pole 110
Plug-in
Mounting terminal block
34.5
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

plate
Connection
56.5
allowance
24
190
165
80
144
54
11
70
6
151
56.5
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105 f6 hole
terminal block 3-pole 70
31 107 142 or M50.8 taps
mounting screw Insulation
4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30 barrier direction only
112 3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF250-CV.
149
Characteristics
NF250-UV
Model NF250-UV
125 150 175
200 225 250
690V 15/15

500V 200/200
Rated short-circuit
440V 200/200
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 400V 200/200
380V 200/200
230V 200/200
DC 250V −
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs)
(front connection)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NF250-UV
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Operating characteristics 1h Operating characteristics
NF250-UV 125A-225A NF250-UV 250A
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
Max. Max.
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s breaking time 0.1s breaking time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of rated current × 100% of rated current
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG
direction 130
Rated ambient
temperature
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting EAL TBL TBM

Current rating (%)
120
7
110
100
90
(Rated ambient 80
temperature 40°C) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F F-2UV 117 2, 3P MI-05SV3
V V-2UV 119 4P MI-2SV4
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Terminal
cover
Rear BTC 2, 3P BTC-2SV3
150
NF250-UV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
M8 bolt
Insulation barrier
(hex-socket)
Mounting hole (removable) 24 Breaker
28
100
75
75
219
240
201
f8.5
102
50
165
165
f4.5
10
100
f8.5
45
Trip button 35 35
23 max. M40.7 taps
22 35 61
or f5
Neutral pole (Conductor thickness t=7 max.)
70 105 68
3-pole 4-pole
4 72 Conductor drilling
105 140
for direct connection Drilling plan
92
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate Mounting 3-pole

Stud can be
t = 3.2 max. base Breaker Breaker
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
73
11.5
108
219
201
219
8
Connection
R1
52
allowance
20
22
15 6 M40.7 breaker f24 35 32.5

mounting screw
15 f9 70 100
35 35
M8 bolt
68 71 Insulation tube M40.7 taps
105 70 105 1.0mm clearance on each side
or f5
72 106 of the handle frame
3-pole 4-pole
Plug-in
Connection allowance
34.5

Mounting plate 110
Breaker (Plug-in terminal block)
7
56.5
M5
24
terminal block
219
155
129
265
mounting screw
11
70
151
6
56.5
20
15
21 f9
f6 hole or M5 taps
28
70 M8 bolt 70
31 Insulation
89 30 barrier 105 Stud attachable in this 107
direction only
Drilling plan
151
Characteristics
NF125-SGV NF160-SGV Model NF125-SGV

16-20, 20-25, 25-32
NF160-SGV NF250-SGV
125-160
NF125-LGV
16-20, 20-25, 25-32
NF160-LGV NF250-LGV
125-160
NF250-SGV NF125-LGV Rated current In (A) 32-40, 35-50, 45-63
56-80, 70-100, 90-125
125-160 140-200
175-250
32-40, 35-50, 45-63
56-80, 70-100, 90-125
125-160 140-200
175-250
NF160-LGV NF250-LGV Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
2 3
690
4 2 3
690
4 2 3
690
4 2 3
690
4 2 3
690
4 2 3
690
4
NF125-HGV NF160-HGV 690V 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

500V 30/30 30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36
NF250-HGV NF125-RGV 440V 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50
IEC 415V 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50
NF250-RGV 60947-2
AC
400V 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50
(Icu/Ics) 380V 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50
230V 85/85 85/85 85/85 90/90 90/90 90/90
200V 85/85 85/85 85/85 90/90 90/90 90/90
DC (*1) 300V 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20
Model NF125-HGV NF160-HGV NF250-HGV NF125-RGV NF250-RGV
16-20, 20-25, 25-32 125-160 16-20, 20-25, 25-32 125-160
Rated current In (A) 32-40, 35-50, 45-63 125-160 140-200 32-40, 40-50, 50-63 160-200
56-80, 70-100, 90-125 175-250 63-80, 80-100, 100-125 200-250
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 2 3
690V 10/8 10/8 10/8 – –
500V 50/38 50/38 50/38 – –

440V 65/65 65/65 65/65 125/125 125/125
IEC 415V 70/70 70/70 70/70 150/150 150/150
AC
60947-2 400V 75/75 75/75 75/75 150/150 150/150
(Icu/Ics) 380V 75/75 75/75 75/75 150/150 150/150
230V 100/100 100/100 100/100 150/150 150/150
NF250-SGV 200V 100/100 100/100 100/100 150/150 150/150
DC (*1) 300V 40/40 40/40 40/40 – –
Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, three-pole models can be used for up to 500VDC, and four-pole models
for up to 600VDC.
4h 4h 4h 4h
Operating Characteristic Curves
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristic Curves
2h 2h 2h 2h Thermal-Adjustable types
Thermal-Adjustable types Thermal-Adjustable types Thermal-Adjustable types NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV
Current setting Ir = 70-100A(Rated current In=100A)
1h 1h 1h 1h Current setting Ir = 80-125A(Rated current In=125A)
NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-RGV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV Current setting Ir = 90-125A(Rated current In=125A)
30min Current setting Ir = 16-20A(Rated current In=20A) 30min Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) 30min Current setting Ir = 40- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 30min NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV
Current setting Ir = 35-50A(Rated current In=50A) Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
20min Current setting Ir = 20-25A(Rated current In=25A) 20min 20min Current setting Ir = 45- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 20min NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV
NF125-RGV 14min
14min Current setting Ir = 25-32A(Rated current In=32A) 14min Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) Current setting Ir = 56- 80A(Rated current In= 80A) 14min Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
10min 10min Current setting Ir = 40-50A(Rated current In=50A)
10min Current setting Ir = 63-100A(Rated current In=100A) 10min Current setting Ir = 140-200A(Rated current In=200A)
lnstantaneous trip NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 175-250A(Rated current In=250A)
6min current 6min 6min Current setting Ir = 50- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) 6min NF125-RGV
4min AC DC 4min lnstantaneous trip
current 4min Current setting Ir = 63- 80A(Rated current In= 80A) 4min Current setting Ir = 80-100A(Rated current In=100A)
600A±120A 850A±170A NF250-RGV
2min 2min AC DC
2min 2min Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A)
Max. 600A±120A 850A±170A
Max. lnstantaneous trip Current setting Ir = 160-200A(Rated current In=200A)
1min 1min 1min current ratio
1min
AC DC
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
lnstantaneous trip
xln(%) xln(%)
30s 30s 30s 1000±200 1300±260 30s current ratio
AC DC
20s 20s 20s 20s xln(%) xln(%)
Max. 1000±200 1300±260
10s 10s 10s 10s
Min. Min. Min.
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Max. total
breaking time
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s Max. total 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
breaking time
AC AC Max. total AC Max. total
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking
AC DC DC time DC time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
DC
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 6070 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
7
Current( × 100% of Ir) Current( × 100% of Ir) Current( × 100% of Ir) Current( × 100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In) Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In) Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In) Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In)

Lead-wire 130
Rated ambient

direction
temperature
Current rating (%)
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting 120
110
100
90
80
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(rated ambient temperature 40°C)
F F-2SV 117 2, 3P MI-05SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Terminal
cover
*2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name. Rear BTC 2, 3P BTC-2SV3
152 Electrical operation device (*2) 133
NF125-SGV · NF160-SGV · NF250-SGV · NF125-LGV · NF160-LGV · NF250-LGV · NF125-HGV · NF160-HGV · NF250-HGV · NF125-RGV · NF250-RGV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
30
Insulating barrier 24
M8 bolt
(removable) Breaker
(hex-socket)
Mounting hole
100
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125-175A 14-95mm2
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
144
165
102
126
50
.5
f8
f4.5
10
1
C
Thermal
C
1
Trip button Adj
f8.5
25 max.
100
Button 45 35
Or
35
22 35 61 .5 M40.7 taps
f8
70 Neutral pole 68 or f5
105
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
9
105 140 25 max.
92
(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting 4-pole 3-pole

Stud can be
base Breaker Breaker
Mounting plate rotated 90°
3-pole
t max. = 3.2
8
144
144
126
52
R
Connection
22 allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
mounting screw
f24 32.5
6 35
15
f9 35 35
15 70 Insulating tube 100
M8 bolt M40.7 taps
or f5
105 70 105
68 71 1mm clearance on each side
4-pole of the handle frame
72 106 3-pole
Plug-in
4-pole 145
24 connection allowance
7
Plug-in 3-pole 110
terminal block
34.5
Mounting plate
56.5

190
165
80
144
54
11
70
6
151
56.5
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105 f6mm hole
terminal block 3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
31 mounting screw 107 142
Insulating 4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30
barrier direction only
112 3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
153
Characteristics
NF125-SEV
Model NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV
Rated current In (A) 32 63 125 32 63 125 160 250 160 250
NF125-HEV
16-32 32-63 16-32 32-63 80-160 80-160
Current setting Ir (A)
63-125 63-125 125-250 125-250
NF250-SEV Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

690V
690
8/8
690
10/8
690
8/8
690
10/8
NF250-HEV
500V 30/30 50/38 30/30 50/38
Rated 440V 36/36 65/65 36/36 65/65

short-circuit AC 415V 36/36 70/70 36/36 70/70
IEC 60947-2
breaking
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75
capacity
(kA) 380V 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75
230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
DC 250V – – – –
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NF125-SEV
10h 10h
2h NF125-SEV NF125-HEV 2h NF250-SEV NF250-HEV

1h Current setting Ir Rated current In 1h Current setting Ir Rated current In
16-32 32A 80-160 160A
30min 6
LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 32-63 63A 30min LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON)
6
125-250 250A
20min 63-125 125A 20min 670s (TL = 100s set)
14min 670s (TL = 100s set) 14min
10min 540s (TL = 80s set) 10min 540s (TL = 80s set)
2min 2min
1min LTD operating time TL 1min LTD operating time TL
Operating time
Operating time
6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20%
30s (at 200%) 30s (at 200%)
20s 20s
6 6
I t OFF I t OFF
10s 10s
STD pickup current Is STD pickup current Is
5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4
–5–6–7–8–10) ±15% –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s STD operating time Ts
0.3±0.06s 0.3±0.06s
0.2s 0.2±0.04s 0.2s 0.2±0.04s
0.1s 2 0.1±0.03s 0.1s 2 0.1±0.03s
I t ON I t ON
0.05s 0.05s
2 2
I t OFF I t OFF
0.02s INST pickup current Ii 0.02s INST pickup current Ii
In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15% Max. total breaking time In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15% Max. total breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
0.6 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 0.6 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.7 0.7
× 100% of current setting Ir × 100% of current setting Ir
Instantaneous tripping current Instantaneous tripping current
(% of rated current or % of current setting Ir) (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)
Internal Accessories Current Reducing Curve

Rated ambient
Derating of load current (%)
130
temperature
7
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT 120
direction
Left-side mounting Right-side mounting PAL 110
100
90 The rated current does not have thermal

characteristics. Reduce the current as shown
80
in the curve on the left chart if the ambient
70 temperature exceeds 40 °C.

(Note) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F F-2SV 117 3P MI-05SV3
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 3P TCS-2SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Handle lock device HL(*1) 127 3P
Terminal
cover
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Skeleton TTC 3P TTC-2SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name. Rear BTC 3P BTC-2SV3
154
NF125-SEV · NF125-HEV · NF250-SEV · NF250-HEV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
30
Insulation barrier M8 bolt
(removable) (hex-socket) 24 Solderless terminal
for wire size Breaker
Mounting hole
125-175A 14-95mm2
100
200-250A 70-125mm2
Wire connection
Trip button
.5
f8
10
144
165
102
126
50
1
C
f4.5
C
1
25 max.
Trip characteristics
100
Or
45
f8.5
selector f8.5 35 35
22 35
9
61
Neutral pole M40.7 taps
70 105 68 or f5
4 72 25 max.
105 140 3-pole 4-pole
92 (Conductor thickness
t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate Mounting Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole

t=3.2 max. base rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
3-pole
8
144
126
144
52
R
22 connection
allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
15 6 f24
35 35
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps 100
Insulation
M8 bolt 70 or f5
68 71 tube 105
105 1.0mm clearance on each side
72 106 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame
Plug-in
4-pole 145
Plug-in 3-pole 110
7
34.5

plate
56.5

190
165
54
80
11
144
70
6
151
56.5
15
20
28
21 M5 f9 70 105
M8 bolt f6 hole
terminal block 3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
Insulation 4-pole 105
89 30 barrier Stud attachable in this
3-pole 105 4-pole
112 direction only 3-pole
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
155
Characteristics
NF400-CW
Model NF400-CW NF400-SW
Rated current In (A) 250 300 350 400
NF400-SW
690V − 10/10

Rated short-circuit
500V 15/8 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 25/13 42/42

(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 45/45
230V 50/25 85/85
DC (*1) 250V 20/10 40/40
Front Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection
Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, 3-pole models can be used for up
to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
NF400-SW
4h 4h
2h 2h

NF400-CW NF400-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Max. Max.
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current % of rated current

Operating handle
7
Left-side Right-side Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT 130
Current rating (%)
Rated ambient
temperature
120
110
(*1) 100
90
80
(*1) (*1) (*1) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.
F F-4S 117 2, 3P TCL-4SW3
Operating handle Large TC-L
Terminal cover
V V-4S 119 4P TCL-4SW4

2, 3P MI-4SW3 2, 3P TTC-4SW3
Mechanical interlock MI 129 Skeleton TTC 121
4P MI-4SW4 4P TTC-4SW4
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4CW, HT-4SW 128 2, 3P BTC-4SW3
Rear BTC
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with 4P BTC-4SW4
the breaker unit. HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
Handle lock device 127
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
Electrical operation device NFM (*1) 133
4P
156
NF400-CW · NF400-SW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28
Conductor thickness 8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
47
92
f12.5
Trip button
f7
25
39
f10.5
44 M6 tap or f7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
f14 97 Conductor drilling
56
M12 bolt 103 for direct connection
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
112 185 3-pole 4-pole handle frame.
140 196 155 (NF400-SW) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134 (NF400-CW)
3-pole 4-pole
Boring dimensions for rear connection type

Rear connection barriers (3-pole)
Stud can be rotated 90° 4-pole Line side

Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate
3-pole heat by overcurrent 6-f35
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or f7
allowance 4-M6 tap or f7
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker f35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped holes in
113 M12 bolt 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Note The bore dimensional drawing shows

the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block 3-pole
Breaker
35
55
M8 terminal block Connection

allowance
7
280
225
135
163
mounting screw
24
24
8
79
55
160
f10
15
28
28
Stud attachable in this

18 44 87
direction only
121 136 181
87
f13 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
157
Characteristics
NF400-SEW
Model NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW
200-400
adjustable
NF400-HEW Number of poles

3
690
4 3
690
4
690
3
NF400-REW

690V 10/10 35/18 −
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rear
connection
NF400-SEW
Operating Characteristics Internal Accessories

Operating handle
10h Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
AX SHT or UVT PAL
5h Operating characteristics
NF400-SEW
2h NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
1h
Current setting
(*1)
Rated Current
LTD operating time Ir: 200-400A In: 400A
30min
at 125% (Adjustable)
20min
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
10min 670s(TL=100s set) (*1) (*1) (*1)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min 80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side
2min
(at 200%) mounting.
1min Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
2s
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
Current Reducing Curve
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
Continuous load current (%)
Rated ambient
130
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
temperature
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s

0.2s 2 120
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s 110
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
100
0.02s INST pickup current II Max. total 90

x4-x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In) breaking time
0.01s 80
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
70
Current (% of Ir) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) Ambient temperature (°C)
7 External Accessories
F F-4S 117 3P TCL-4SW3 (*2)

Terminal cover
V V-4S 119 4P TCL-4SW4 (*3)

Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 3P BTC-4SW3 (*2)
Rear BTC
4P BTC-4SW4 (*3)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
4P
Notes *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.
*2 This is for NF400-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF400-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3.
*3 This is for NF400-SEW/HEW.
158
NF400-SEW · NF400-HEW · NF400-REW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5
44
28 Conductor thickness
8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
59
92
f12.5
f7
Trip button
25
39
f10.5
44 M6 tap or f7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
M12 bolt 56 103 for direct connection
51 168 5 107
3-pole 4-pole 1.0mm clearance on each side of
112 185 155 the handle frame.
140 196
3-pole 4-pole
Boring dimensions for rear connection

Rear connection type barriers (3-pole)
4-pole Groove for reducing Line side

Stud can be Breaker heat by overcurrent
Mounting plate rotated 90° 3-pole 6-f35
24 24
8
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker f35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
113 M12 bolt 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan

Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole Breaker
7
35
55
M8 terminal block Connection

allowance
280
225
135
163
mounting screw
24
24
8
79
55

160
f10
15
28
28
18 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181
87
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
159
Characteristics
NF400-UEW
Model NF400-UEW
200-400
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4

690V −
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Front Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs)
Standard attached parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)
connection
NF400-UEW

Operating handle
AX SHT or UVT PAL
5h mounting mounting direction
NF400-UEW
2h
1h Current setting Rated Current

LTD operating time Ir: 200-400A In: 400A (*1)
30min (Adjustable)
at 125%
20min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min 80s(TL= 12s set) (*1) (*1) (*1)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side
30s mounting.
20s Remarks: 1. Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW.
10s 2. Refer to page 106.
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
2s
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
1s
Pre-alarm
STD operating time Ts 130
Rated ambient
0.5s
operating time Tp
temperature
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s

Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s 120
0.2s 2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 110
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
100
0.02s INST pickup current II

x4-x16 ±15% Max. total 90
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 80
Current (% of Ir) 70
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
7 External Accessories Accessories

F F-4U
Type name Reference page
117 Large
Accessories
TC-L 3P TCL-4SW3
Terminal
Operating handle
cover
V V-4U 119 Skeleton TTC 3P − 121

Mechanical interlock MI MI-4SW3 129 Rear BTC 3P BTC-4SW3
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 HL HL-4SW

HL-S HLS-4UW
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.
Remark *1 Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW.
160
NF400-UEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulating barrier (removable) 127.5
Conductor thickness 78 Breaker

110
t=8 max. 8
Breaker
43
f7
26
Mounting hole
f12.5
R6
47
31
297
11.5
234
257
102
92
156
f12.5
f7
Trip button
25
39 f10.5
43
44 M6 tap or f7
141 118
16
191.5
f14 Conductor drilling
51 194
M12 bolt for direct connection 1.0mm clearance on each side
28 200
of the handle frame.
112 5 204 3-pole
140 3-pole 252 Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan

Groove for reducing Line side

Mounting plate Breaker heat by overcurrent
Stud can be rotated 90° 6-f35
8
24 24
8
M6 screw or f7
Connection 4-M6 tap or f7
234
265
allowance
305
265
234
265
25 20 20
14
24 24
26
83
128
11 11
8-M4 screw
M6 screw for f35 Add these tapped holes in
10 44
f13 mounting breaker 44 8 positions to standard boring.
210 8
M12 bolt 87
87
87 Insulation tube
Load side
3-pole Drilling plan

Plug-in

Breaker
Mounting angle
7
35
Mounting angle
max. 203
Connection
320
297
265
175
M8 terminal block allowance

24 mounting screw
24
79

8
160
28
f10
15
28 Stud attachable
18 in this direction only
44
218 f13 87 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 3-pole
161
Characteristics
NF630-CW
Model NF630-CW NF630-SW
Rated current In (A) 500 600 630
NF630-SW
690V − 10/10

Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 36/18 42/42

(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 50/50
230V 50/25 85/85
DC (*1) 250V 20/10 40/40
connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rear
connection
Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, 3-pole models can be used for up
to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
NF630-SW
4h 4h
2h 2h

NF630-CW NF630-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Max. Max.
30s 30s
Operating time
Operating time
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max.total 0.1s Max.total
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000

Operating handle
7
Left-side Right-side Lead wire 130
AL AX SHT or UVT
Rated ambient

temperature
Current rating (%)
120
110
(*1) 100
90
(*1) (*1) (*1) 80

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
F F-4S 117 2, 3P TCL-4SW3
Terminal cover

2, 3P MI-4SW3 2, 3P TTC-4SW3
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 2, 3P BTC-4SW3
Rear BTC
Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with 4P BTC-4SW4
the breaker unit. HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
4P
162
NF630-CW · NF630-SW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL Conductor 4-pole
thickness 44
28
t=10 max. 8 30 3-pole
f10.5
CL
110
Breaker
16
Conductor thickness t=10 max. CL
Conductor drilling
43
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
CL CL
102
92
59
f12.5
Trip button
f7
39
CL
194
Neutral pole 44 118
97
f14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or f7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan

4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-f35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or f7 4-M6 tap
or f7
225
265
CL
194
225
225
194
CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center and
neutral poles
3-pole 4-pole Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance 7
225
280
CL M8 terminal block CL
163
135
25
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
f10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181

110
M12 bolt 165.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
163
Characteristics
NF630-SEW
Model NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW
300-630
adjustable
NF630-HEW Number of poles

3
690
4 3
690
4 3
690
NF630-REW

690V 10/10 35/18 −
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Rear
connection
NF630-SEW

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
10h AX SHT or UVT PAL
NF630-SEW
2h NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
1h
Current setting Rated Current (*1)
LTD operating time
30min Ir: 300-630A In: 630A
at 125%
20min (Adjustable)
1000s(TL=150s set)
14min
670s(TL=100s set)
10min
6min
400s(TL= 60s set) (*1) (*1) (*1)
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

20s
10s

5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Rated ambient
Pre-alarm 130
temperature
operating time Tp
TL 0.3 ± 0.06s 120
Tp= ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s 2
(at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 110
0.1s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 100
INST pickup current II 90

0.02s x4-x15 ±15% Max. total
0.01s 80
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
70
Current (% of Ir) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

F F-4S
117
Accessories
3P
Type name
TCL-4SW3 (*2)
Reference page

Terminal cover
V V-4S 119 4P TCL-4SW4 (*3)

Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 3P BTC-4SW3 (*2)
Rear BTC
4P BTC-4SW4 (*3)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
3P
4P
Notes *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.
*2 This is for NF630-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF630-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3.
*3 This is for NF630-SEW/HEW.
164
NF630-SEW · NF630-HEW · NF630-REW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL Conductor 4-pole
thickness 44
28
t=10 max. 8 30 3-pole
f10.5
CL
110
Breaker
16
Conductor thickness t=10 max. CL
Conductor drilling
43
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
CL CL
102
92
59
f12.5
Trip button
f7
39
CL
194
Neutral pole 44 118
97
f14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or f7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196

4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-f35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or f7 4-M6 tap
or f7
225
265
CL
194
225
225
194
CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center and
neutral poles
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance 7
225
280
CL M8 terminal block CL
163
135
25
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
f10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181

110
M12 bolt 165.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
165
Characteristics
NF800-CEW
Model NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW
400-800
adjustable
NF800-SEW Number of poles

3 3
690
4 3
690
4 3
690
NF800-HEW

690V − 10/10 15/15 −
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30 50/50 70/35
NF800-REW
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 36/18 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 36/18 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85 100/100 150/75
Standard attached parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
NF800-SEW

Operating handle
10h
Operating characteristics AX SHT or UVT PAL
5h
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
2h NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
1h
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current (*1) (*1)
30min
at 125% Ir: 400-800A In: 800A
20min
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set) (*1) (*1)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
20s
10s

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
Working current correcting ratio (%)
1s
Pre-alarm 130
operating time Tp
temperature
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s

Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s 120
0.2s
ambient
2
Rated
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 110

0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 100

0.02s x4-x12 ±15% Max. total
0.01s 80
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
70
Current (% of Ir) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
7
F F-8S 117 3P TCL-8SW3

Terminal cover

Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 3P BTC-8SW3
Rear BTC
4P BTC-8SW4
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-8SW
3P
4P
166
NF800-CEW · NF800-SEW · NF800-HEW · NF800-REW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
t=12 max. 46
4-pole
8 Breaker 3-pole
110
87
Breaker
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting
243
102
275
conductor
15
92
32
f8
f8.5
8
f14
8
87
14
32
51
12
46 70 M6 tap 70
22 or f7 172
Trip button
15
51 70 97
40
40 210 103
Neutral pole 1.0mm clearance on each
140
280 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.) 3-pole 4-pole side of the handle frame.
210 f14
M12 bolt 155 Conductor drilling Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole 217 for direct connection

Stud can be rotated 90° M6 tap or f7

25 Breaker Groove for reducing
Mounting plate heat by overcurrent 6-f48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or f7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10
8 70
8 32 15 70
140 11 11 8-M4 screw
70 Add these tapped holes in
113 110 f13 M6 screw for 140 f48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90

Breaker
7
56
20
155
187
243
301
13
10
112
56

32
25
15
40 70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw f10
140 f13 208 278
126
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
167
Characteristics
NF800-SDW
Model NF800-SDW
Rated current In (A) (700), 800
Number of poles 2

Rated short-circuit
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant DC 250V 40/40
not larger than
10ms

Standard attached parts connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
NF800-SDW

Operating handle
4h Lead wire
Left-side Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT
2h mounting mounting direction
1h NF800-SDW
30min 700A,800A
20min DC
14min (*1) (*1)
10min
6min
Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
(*1) (*1)
2min Control Inst trip
setting current (A)
Max.
1min. Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Operating time
Lo 2600±520
2 3900±780 Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.
30s 3 5200±1040
20s Hi 6500±1300
10s
Min.
Temperature Compensation Curve

5s
2s
Adjustment
range
1s 700A
Rated ambient
0.5s 130
temperature
Adjustment
Current rating (%)
0.2s range
800A 120
0.1s
Max. total 110
interrupting time
0.05s
100
0.02s
Time-delay trip Inst trip
0.01s 90
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
% of rated current

F F-8S
117
Accessories
2, 3P TCL-8SW3

Terminal cover

2, 3P MI-8SW3 2, 3P TTC-8SW3
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 2, 3P BTC-8SW3
Rear BTC
4P BTC-8SW4
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-8SW
2, 3P
4P
168
NF800-SDW
Outline Drawing
Front connection Breaker
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
46 4-pole
t=12 max.
3-pole
8 Breaker
110
87
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable) Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting 70 M6 tap or f7
conductor
3-pole
102
275
92
15 f8.5
12
N
f8
8
22
f14
8
32
87
14 32 51
40 172
46
243
15
Trip button 51 70 97
1.0mm clearance on each
Neutral pole side of the handle frame.
140
280 5 107 Conductor drilling
210 f14 Front-panel cutout
M12 bolt 155 for direct connection 70
3-pole 4-pole 217
4-pole
Drilling plan

M6 tap or f7
Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 90°
25 Breaker Groove for reducing heat
Mounting plate by overcurrent 6-f48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or f7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10 8
70
70
8 32 15 140 11 11 8-M4 screw
f13 M6 screw for 140 f48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
113 110 M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90°
Plug-in terminal block Breaker
7
56
20
13
155
187
243
301
112
56
32
25

15
40
70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw f10
140 f13 208 278
M12 bolt
126
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
169
Characteristics
NF800-UEW
Model NF800-UEW
400-800
adjustable
Number of poles 3 4

690V 35/35
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each)
Front
Standard attached parts 4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs)
connection
(4-pole models are provided Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
with auxiliary handle.) Rear Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each)
connection 4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs)
NF800-UEW

Operating handle
AX SHT or UVT PAL
NF800-UEW
2h
1h Current setting
LTD operating time Ir: 400-800A Rated Current
(*1) (*1)
30min
at-125%
20min (Adjustable) In: 800A
400s(TL= 60s set) (*1) (*1)
4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time

20s
10s

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm 130
Rated ambient

operating time Tp
temperature
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s

Tp= 120
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%) 110
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 100
0.02s INST pickup current II 90

x4-x12 ±15% Max. total
0.01s 80
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
70
Current (% of Ir) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

F F-8U
117
Accessories
3P TCL-8UW3

Terminal cover
V − 119 4P TCL-8UW4
3P MI-8SW3 3P −
4P MI-8SW4 4P −
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 3P BTC-8SW3
Rear BTC
4P BTC-8SW4
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-8UW
170
NF800-UEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection

143 44 (ON side)
Mounting hole
123.5 (OFF side)
Conductor thickness 64
t=12 max.
110
87
Auxiliary handle
f14
(removable)
f7
27.5
15 Terminal dimension for
322
directly connecting
275
102
112 conductor
f8.5
f7
N
12
8
f14
8
14 22
87
32
143 4-pole
40
Trip button 51 194 3-pole
70
15
200 Breaker
40 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
210 Neutral pole 5 204
140
210 280 252 Conductor drilling
f14
22.5
M12 bolt 314 R6
3-pole 4-pole
143
92
Conductor
Insulating barrier (removable) thickness 97
Mounting hole t=8 max.
6.5
70
Auxiliary handle
110
f14
Breaker (removable) 51
f7
48
172
27.5
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
15
322
290
Front-panel cutout
275
102
112
f7
N
16
48
f14
70 70 Trip button
6.5
M6 screw or f7 51 35
3-pole 4-pole 141
Neutral pole
Drilling plan 70
f14 194
210 M12 bolt
200
280
5 204
252
NF400-UEW 4-pole
314

M6 tap or f7
Standard direction of stud is horizontal Groove for reducing
Connection on power side, and vertical on load side. Breaker heat by overcurrent Connection
Mounting plate allowance Otherwise, specify the direction. allowance Stud can be
Mounting plate 6-f48
25 25 rotated 90°
5
24 24
10
8
10
4-M6 tap or f7
290
290
290
342
290
342
12.5
7
13
26
45
24 24
11 11 8-M4 screw
8 32 15 70 20
10 10 10 70
70 8 positions to standard boring.
f13 M6 screw for f48 f13
210 110 140 140 210 83 140
M12 bolt mounting 210 M12 bolt
breaker
3-pole 4-pole NF400-UEW 4-pole

Drilling plan
171
Characteristics
NF1000-SEW
Model NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW
500−1000 600−1250
Adjustable Adjustable
NF1250-SEW Number of poles

3
690
4 3
690
4

690V 25/13 25/13
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43 85/43
230V 125/63 125/63
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Rear
connection
NF1250-SEW
10h 10h
5h 5h
Operating characteristics Operating characteristics
2h 2h
Current setting Rated Current Current setting Rated Current
1h 1h LTD operating time
LTD operating time at-125% Ir:500-1000A In:1000A Ir:600-1250A In:1250A
1000s(TL=150s set) at-125%
30min (Adjustable) 30min (Adjustable)
670s(TL=100s set) 1000s(TL=150s set)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set) 20min 670s(TL=100s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set) 14min 400s(TL= 60s set)
10min 10min 80s(TL= 12s set)
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min LTD operating time TL 2min LTD operating time TL

12-60-100-150s ±20% 12-60-100-150s ±20%
1min (at 200%) 1min (at 200%)
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s Pre-alarm 10s Pre-alarm

pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is
5s In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 5s In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% -0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts

Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
operating time Tp 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s TL ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s TL ±20% 0.2s Tp=
Tp= 2
2
(at 200%)
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s 0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s 0.05s
INST pickup current II INST pickup current II
0.02s x (4-x12) ±15% 0.02s x (4-x12) ±15%
(Magnification to In) Max. total (Magnification to In) Max. total
breaking time breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of Ir) Current (% of Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)
7
Operating handle 130

Rated ambient
temperature

AX SHT or UVT direction PAL 120
mounting mounting
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW 128
Operating handle F 117
4P F10SW4P Handle lock device HL HL () 127
3P MI-10SW3 3P TCL-10SW3
Mechanical interlock MI 129 Large terminal cover TC-L 121
3P
4P
172
NF1000-SEW · NF1250-SEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Conductor thickness 15 40
t=82pcs max.
Bolt M1250
110
Mounting Breaker
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
346
406
375
f9.5
13
15 32 8
f17.5
80
18.5
Neutral pole 70 M8 tap or f10 70
15 44
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
3-pole 4-pole
f13 M12 bolt 210 280 190
280 Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
3-pole Breaker
M8 screw for mounting breaker Breaker
35.5
Stud can be rotated 90°
86
R11.5
109
269
97
18 Connection
273
39.5
81.5
allowance
f13
22
Conductor thickness
13
86
45
t=62pcs max.
Bolt M1245 70 70 80
12
8 32 15 140 230 300 1.0mm clearance on each
Insulation cover side of the handle frame.
140 97 M8 tap or f10
(removable)
3-pole 4-pole Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block Breaker
M10 terminal block mounting screw
28.5
136
269
105
100.5
25.5
269
13
28.5
225
30
15 32 8
104
136
Connection
12
allowance f12
f13
Insulating 70 140
t=62pcs max. 140
barrier 204 274
68
Bolt M1245
208 134
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
7
173
Characteristics
NF1250-SDW
Model NF1250-SDW
Rated current In (Amp.) 1000, 1250
Number of poles 2

Rated short-circuit
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
not large than
10ms

Front
Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Standard Attached parts
Rear
connection
NF1250-SDW
3h 3h
2h 2h
1h 1h
40min Operating characteristics 40min Operating characteristics
20min 1000A 20min 1250A
Max.
10min 10min
Max.
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
40s 40s Adjustable range of
30s Adjustable range of 30s standard instantaneous
Operating time
Operating time
20s standard instantaneous 20s tripping current (4 stages)

Min. tripping current (4 stages) Min. Position of Standard value of
10s Position of Standard value of 10s adjusting instantaneous
adjusting instantaneous knob tripping current (A)
6s 6s
knob tripping current (A) L0 2800±700
4s 4s
L0 2800±700 2 4200±700
2s 2 4200±700 2s 3 5600±700
3 5600±700 Hi 7000±700
1s 1s
Hi 7000±700
0.6s 0.6s
0.4s 0.4s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.06s 0.06s
0.04s 0.04s
Time-delay Time-delay
0.02s 0.02s
trip trip
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
4000 4000
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)

7
130
1000A
Rated ambient
Lead wire
AL AX MG
temperature
Operating handle SHT or UVT

direction
120
Left-side Right-side EAL TBL TBM PAL ATU
mounting mounting
110
1200A, 1250A
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
2, 3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW 128
2, 3P MI-10SW3 2, 3P TCL-10SW3
Mechanical interlock MI 129 Large terminal cover TC-L 121
2, 3P
4P
174
NF1250-SDW
Outline Drawing
Same dimensions as NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Front connection 15 40
Insulation barrier Conductor thickness
(removable) t=82 pcs. max.
Bolt M1250 Breaker
110
Mounting
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
406
375
346
Trip
f9.5
button 13
15 32 8
f17.5
80 18.5 70 M8 screw 70
15 44 or f10
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
f13 M12 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
210 280 190
280
Differing in external dimensions from NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Rear connection
Breaker 3-pole Breaker
M8 screw for breaker mounting
35.5
18 Stud can be turned 90°.
86
187.5
R11.5
109
375
97
233
22 f13
13
Conductor thickness
86
45
t=62 pcs. max.

Bolt M1245
70 70
20.5
18 12 80
140 230 300
8 32 15 Insulation cover
M8 screw or f10 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame
140 97 (removable)
3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Differing in external dimensions from NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Plug-in
Breaker
M10terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be turned 90°.
248
318
375
48
13
74.5
30
104
8
30
32
12
Conductor thickness
15
43 70
68 25.5 t=62 pcs. max. f13 140 204
208 146.5 f12
Bolt M1245 Insulation barrier
3-pole
Drilling plan
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed. 7
175
Characteristics
NF1600-SEW
Model NF1600-SEW
Adjustable
800−1600
Number of poles 3 4

690V 25/13
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43
230V 125/63
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Front
connection
Standard attached parts Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Rear Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
connection Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
NF1600-SEW

10h
5h
Operating handle
2h NF1600-SEW AX SHT or UVT direction PAL
mounting mounting
Current setting Rated Current
1h LTD operating time at-125% Ir:800-1600A In:1600A
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
10min
6min
4min
2min
12-60-100-150s ±20% Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is
5s
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%
In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s
1s
130
Rated ambient
0.5s Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts

temperature
operating time Tp 120

0.3 ± 0.06s
TL ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s Tp=
2
110
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s 100
0.05s
0.02s x (4-12) ±15%
(Magnification to In) Max. total
breaking time 80
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Current (% of Ir)
7 (An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW 128
3P MI-16SW3 3P
Mechanical interlock MI 129 Electrical operation device NFM (*1) 133

4P MI-16SW4 4P
176
NF1600-SEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Conductor thickness t=6W75 max.

Insulating barrier 60 20 35
(removable) f11 4-pole
38
Bolt M1065 3-pole Breaker
38 15
(185.5)
(185.5)
Auxiliary handle Breaker
(removable)
Mounting hole 18.5

210 280
R11.5
406
97
346
375
f17.5
f9.5
N
115
80
130
M8 tap or f10
20 49.5 70 70
203 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
101.5
263 304.5
Neutral pole
17 140 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
364.5 190
280
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
Connection 15 38 15
allowance
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
Stud can be rotated 90° Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker Mounting angle
Mounting angle Conductor thickness Mounting angle Conductor thickness
t=6W75 max. t=6W75 max.
160 min.
20
20
269
100 max.
109
109
273
273
15 Connection
81.5
allowance
18
38
70 M8 tap or f10 70
60
36
54
15
140
38 38 f11 70 f11 3-pole 4-pole
125 15 BM1050 bolt 210 140 125 M1050 bolt
3-pole 140 200 4-pole Drilling plan
7
177
Characteristics
NF1600-SDW
Model NF1600-SDW
Rated current In (Amp.) 1600
Number of poles 2

Rated short-circuit
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
not large than
10msec

Front
Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Standard Attached parts Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Rear Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
connection Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
NF1600-SDW
3h
2h
1h
40min
of NF1600-SDW,
magnetic trip only,
20min 1600 A
Max. allowable current carrying time
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s
30s Adjustable range of
Operating time
20s instantaneous tripping

current (4 stages)
10s Position of Instantaneous
adjusting tripping
6s
knob current (A)
4s
L0 3200±800
2s 2 4800±800
1s
3
Hi
6400±800
8000±800
0.6s
0.4s
0.2s Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG

Lead wire
direction
0.1s Left-side Right-side EAL TBL TBM PAL ATU
Max. total breaking time mounting mounting
0.06s
7
0.04s
0.02s
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100125 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
4000
Current (% of rated current)
2, 3P F10SW Auxiliary handle HT HT-10SW 128
2, 3P MI-16SW3 2, 3P
Mechanical interlock MI 129 Electrical operation device NFM (*1) 133
4P MI-16SW4 4P
178
NF1600-SDW
Outline Drawing
Same dimensions as NF1600-SEW.

Front connection Conductor thickness
60 t=6width 75 max. 20 35
Insulation barrier (removable) 38 φ11 4-pole
Bolt
3-pole
38 15
M1065 Breaker
(185.5)
(185.5) Auxiliary handle Breaker
(removable)
Mounting
hole
210 280 18.5
R11.5
406
346
375
97
f17.5
Trip
f9.5
button
115
80
130
M8 screw
20 49.5 70 70
or f10
203 101.5 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
263 304.5 17 140 handle frame
364.5 190 3-pole 4-pole
280 Front-panel cutout
Differing in external dimensions from NF1600-SEW.

Rear connection Connection allowance 15 38 15
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
Breaker Mounting angle
Mounting angle Conductor thickness Mounting angle f11

t=6width 75 max. Bolt M1050
Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max.
175 or more 160 or more

20
20
109
109
375
233
233
15
36
60
38
140 f11 70 70
38 15 Bolt M1050 M8 screw
38 15
Stud can be turned 90°. Stud in horizontal direction. or f10
125 140 125
140 200
It cannot be turned 90°. 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
7
179
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV32-SV
Model NV32-SV NV63-CV NV63-SV NV63-HV
(5) 6 10 (15) 16 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (15) 16 20 25 (30)
20 25 (30) 32 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63
NV63-CV Number of poles
Phase line
3
3f3W,
1f2W
2 3
3f3W,
1f2W
2
3f3W,
3
3f3W,
3
NV63-SV
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) AC 100-440 100-240 100-440 100-240 100-440 100-440
(15) 30 15 30 (15) 30 (15) 30
NV63-HV
(15)
Rated current sensitivity (mA) 100/200/500 30 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500
30
selectable selectable selectable selectable
High-speed type
at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Max operating time (s)
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) − − − −
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) − − − −
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) − − − −
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 5/5 − 2.5/2.5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
415V 5/5 − 2.5/2.5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 5/5 − 5/5 − 7.5/7.5 10/8
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
capacity (kA)
200V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
100V 10/10 7.5/7.5 15/15 25/19
Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (2pcs) (*1) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs)
NV63-SV
Note *1 Attached to NV63-SV and NV63-HV.
4h 4h 4h
2h Operating Characteristics 2h 2h
NV32-SV 6A
1h 1h NV32-SV 10A-32A 1h Operating Characteristics
NV63-CV 16A-32A NV63-CV 40A-63A
30min 30min NV63-SV 16A-32A 30min NV63-SV 40A-63A
20min 20min NV63-HV 16A-32A 20min NV63-HV 40A-63A
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
Instantaneous trip current is fixed Max. (60A-63A)
2min 2min 2min
Max. to 600A120A. Max. (40A-50A)
1min 1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min.
Min. Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.05s breaking time 0.05s breaking time 0.05s breaking time
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
100% of rated current 100% of rated current 100% of rated current
Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics Internal Accessories

4h
Max. total Operating handle AL AX
2h High-speed type
breaking time
1h
SHT or UVT
30min
TBM
10min
Lead-wire
4min direction
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
2min
1min
30s
Temperature Compensation Curve Internal Wiring Diagram
Operating time
7
10s
5s
Test button
2s
130
Rated ambient
temperature
1s
Current rating (%)
0.5s 120
Load side
ZCT
Line side
0.2s 110
0.1s
0.05s 100
0.04s
0.02s 90 Magnetic Senstivity
0.01s device selector
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Leakage indication button
( 100% of rated current sensitivity)
F F-05SV 117 Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SV3 129
Operating handle
V V-05SV 119 Small TC-S TCS-05SV3
LC LC-05SV TCL-05SV3
Large TC-L
HLF-05SV Terminal TCL-05SV3L
Handle lock device HL (*1) 127 121
HLN-05SV cover Skeleton TTC TTC-05SV3
HL-S HLS-05SV Rear BTC BTC-05SV3
Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Plug-in PTC PTC-05SV3
IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters DIN-05SV 137
180
NV32-SV · NV63-CV · NV63-SV · NV63-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) M50.8 screw
Mounting hole (M8 for 60 and 63A) M40.7 taps
Applicable wire size: or f5
f1.6 to 22mm2
(for M50.8 screw) Breaker
24
50
Sensitivity current
selector
f5.5
111
130
112
84
50
Leakage (f8.5 for 60 and 63A)
f4.5
indication button
8
Test button
45
f8.5
22 12.5 max.
Trip button 61 25
(16 max. for
50 68 60A and 63A)
90 Conductor drilling
Rear connection
M40.7 taps
Mounting plate
or f5
t = 3.2 max.
Mounting base Breaker
43 (44 for 60A and 63A) Breaker
8
R1
112
111
112
52
8
50 M40.7 breaker
mounting screw
M6 screw f14
27 min.
25 70
68 42 50 1.0mm clearance on each side

of the handle frame
72 (46 for 60A and 63A)
Plug-in
M50.8
Plug-in
Mounting
plate
terminal block mounting screw
80
Breaker (plug-in terminal block) 7
50
terminal block
54
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
85
5.5
16.5 max.
54
7
21 25
M6 screw
89 30 82 f6 hole
f6.5 or M50.8 taps
Details of Conductor drilling Drilling plan

terminal
181
Characteristics
NV125-CV
Model NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV
(15) 16 20 30 32 40 50 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
Rated current In (A) (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 (*2) (60) 63 75 80 100 125 (*2)
NV125-SV Number of poles
Phase line
3f3W,
3 3
3f3W,
4
3f4W
3f3W,
3
3f4W
4
NV125-HV
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) AC 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440
(15) 30
30 (30)
Rated current sensitivity (mA) 100/200/500
100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable
selectable
High-speed type
at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 10/5 25/25 50/38
415V 10/5 30/30 50/38
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5 30/30 50/38
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 30/15 50/50 100/75
capacity (kA)
200V 30/15 50/50 100/75
NV125-SV 100V 30/15 50/50 − 100/75 −
Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) (*1) Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Note *1 Attached to NV125-SV and NV125-HV.
*2 In case of time delay type, rated current is prodused with 20 amp. or more.
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics
1h 1h Operating Characteristics 1h
NV125-SV 15A-30A NV125-CV 125A
NV125-CV 60A-100A
NV125-HV 15A-30A 30min 30min NV125-SV 125A
30min NV125-SV 40A-100A
20min 20min 20min NV125-HV 125A
NV125-HV 40A-100A
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
2min Instantaneous trip current 2min 2min
is fixed to 600A120A. Max.(40A-50A)
1min 1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.05s breaking time 0.05s breaking time 0.05s breaking time
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
100% of rated current 100% of rated current 100% of rated current
Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics Internal Accessories

Operating handle AL AX
4h
SHT or UVT
2h High-speed type Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type Left-side Right-side
1h 0.45s (Max) 1s (Max) 2s (Max) mounting mounting
TBM
30min
Lead-wire
direction
10min
4min
2min

1min
30s
Operating time
7
10s
5s
Test button
2s
130
Rated ambient
1s
temperature
Inertial
Load side
Current rating (%)
0.5s
Line side
nonoperating time 120 ZCT

Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time
110
0.1s
0.05s Inertial
nonoperating time 100
0.04s
0.02s
Magnetic
90 Senstivity
0.01s
device selector
80
50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
Leakage indication button
F F-1SV 117 3P MI-05SV3
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S TCS-1SV3
HLF-05SV 3P TCL-1SV3
Handle lock device HL (*1) 127 Large TC-L
HLN-05SV Terminal 4P TCL-1SV4
121
HL-S HLS-05SV cover Skeleton TTC TTC-1SV3
Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Rear BTC BTC-1SV3
*2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name. Plug-in PTC PTC-1SV3
182
NV125-CV · NV125-SV · NV125-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Solderless terminal
Insulation barrier for wire size
Mounting hole (removable) 14-2/0AWG CU/AL
M8 screw
Operating time 24 Breaker
50
50
selector
(for time-delay type)
Sensitivity current Wire connection

selector
130
112
130
112
111
84
50
Leakage f8.5
f4.5
indication button
8
Test button
30 30
f8.5
61 19 max. M40.7 taps
60 90
Neutral pole 68 Comb conductor or f5
120 4 16.5 max. 3-pole 4-pole
90 72
(Conductor thickness
90
t=4 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
3-pole 3-pole
Mounting base
Breaker Breaker
102 Stud can be
Mounting plate
t = 3.2 max. 52 rotated 90° 111
112
R1
52
8
112
15 connection
allowance
16
30 28
30 f18 30
M40.7 breaker 86
8.5
M8 bolt 5 mounting screw 60 90

2.5
60 M40.7 taps 1.0mm clearance on each side
15 2.5 or f5 of the handle frame
Insulating 90
68 54.5 15 tube 3-pole 4-pole
72 104.5 Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Mounting
plate
M50.8
terminal block mounting nut
3-pole
95
4-pole
125
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
7
Plug-in or screw mounted directly 60 90
terminal block
30
54
11
83.5
170
116
54
80
20 max.
5.5
85
12
54
M8 screw 30 60
21 f8.5
97 127 f6 hole
89 30 Conductor drilling or M50.8 taps
Details of
terminal 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for NV125-CV.
183
Characteristics
NV250-CV
Model NV250-CV NV250-SV NV250-HV
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 250
NV250-SV Number of poles
Phase line
3f3W,
3
3f3W,
3
3f4W
4
3f3W,
3
3f4W
4
NV250-HV
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) AC 100-440 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440
30 (30) (30)
100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable
High-speed type at IΔn 0.1 0.1 0.1
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 15/12 36/36 65/65
415V 25/19 36/36 70/70
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 25/19 36/36 75/75
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 36/27 85/85 100/100
capacity (kA)
200V 36/27 85/85 100/100
100V 36/27 85/85 − 100/100
NV250-CV Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Operating Characteristics Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

4h 4h
2h 2h
1h NV250-CV 125A-225A 1h NV250-CV 250A
NV250-SV 125A-225A NV250-SV 250A
30min NV250-HV 125A-225A 30min NV250-HV 250A
20min 20min
14min 14min 4h
10min 10min
2h High-speed type Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
6min 6min 1h 0.45s (Max) 1s (Max) 2s (Max)
4min 4min 30min
2min 2min

10min
Max. Max.


4min
1min 1min

2min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 1min
20s 20s 30s

Operating time
10s
10s 10s
5s
5s 5s 2s
1s
Min. Min. Inertial
2s 2s 0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
1s 1s 0.1s
0.05s Inertial
0.5s 0.5s 0.04s nonoperating time
0.02s
0.01s
0.2s 0.2s
50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
100% of rated current 100% of rated current
Internal Accessories Temperature Compensation Curve Internal Wiring Diagram

130 Test button
Rated ambient
temperature
Operating handle Lead-wire

AL AX SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)
direction 120
Load side
Line side
Left-side Right-side ZCT

TBM
mounting mounting 110
7 100
90
80
Magnetic
device
Senstivity
selector
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

F F-2SV 117 3P MI-05SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Handle lock device HL (*1) 127 3P
Terminal
cover
184
NV250-CV · NV250-SV · NV250-HV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
30
Insulation barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole M8 bolt 24 Solderless terminal
(hex-socket) for wire size Breaker
Operating time 125-175A 14-95mm2
100
100
selector 200-250A 70-125mm2

(for time-delay type) Wire connection
Sensitivity current
.5
f8
selector
10
102
126
144
165
50
165
144
1
Leakage
C
f4.5
indication button
C
1
Test button 25 max.
Or
100
45 .5
f8.5
f8 35 35
Trip button
22 35 61
M40.7 taps
Neutral pole 68 or f5
70
9
105
25 max.
4 72
105 140 (Conductor thickness 3-pole 4-pole
92
t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole Conductor drilling

Rear connection
Mounting 4-pole
base
3-pole
Mounting plate Stud can be 4-pole
Breaker
rotated 90° Breaker
t = 3.2 max. 3-pole
8
1
144
126
144
52
22 connection
20
allowance
M40.7 breaker
6 f24
15
35 35 100
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps
Insulation or f5
M8 bolt 70
68 71 tube 105 1.0mm clearance on each side
105
of the handle frame
72 106
3-pole 4-pole
Plug-in
4-pole 145
Mounting
Plug-in
terminal block
3-pole 110
7
34.5
plate
56.5

190
165
144
54
80
11
70
6
151
56.5
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105
terminal block f6 hole
3-pole 70
31 mounting screw 107 142 or M50.8 taps
Insulation Stud attachable in this
4-pole 105
89 30 barrier direction only
3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
112
4-pole 140 Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-CV.
185
Characteristics
NV125-SEV
Model NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
Current setting Ir (A) 63-125 63-125 125-250 125-250
NV125-HEV Number of poles
Phase line type

3f3W,
3
3f4W
4 3
3f3W,
3f4W
4
3f3W, 1f2W
3
3f3W, 1f2W
3
NV250-SEV
1f2W 1f2W
Rated operational voltage Ui V 440 440 440 440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) AC 100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
NV250-HEV High-speed type


at IΔn
(30)
0.1
(30) (30)
0.1
(30)
100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable
0.1 0.1
at 5IΔn 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Rated current sensitivity (mA) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)
Time-delay type Max operating time (s) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)
Inertial operating time (s) (or more) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)
440V 36/36 65/65 36/36 65/65
415V 36/36 70/70 36/36 70/70
Rated
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 400V 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75
AC
breaking (Icu/Ics) 230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
capacity (kA)
200V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
100V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NV250-SEV
Operating Characteristics Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

10h 10h
5h 5h Operating Characteristics
NV250-SEV NV250-HEV
2h NV125-SEV NV125-HEV 2h
Current setting Ir Rated current In
1h Current setting Ir Rated current In 1h 125-250 250A
63-125 125A
6
30min 6
LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 30min LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON)
20min 670s (TL = 100s set) 20min 670s (TL = 100s set) 4h
14min 14min 2h High-speed type
10min 540s (TL = 80s set) 10min 540s (TL = 80s set) Time-delay type
0.45s (Max)
Time-delay type
1s (Max)
Time-delay type
2s (Max)
1h
6min 400s (TL = 60s set) 6min 400s (TL = 60s set) 30min

10min
2min 2min


4min

LTD operating time TL LTD operating time TL
1min 1min 2min

Operating time
Operating time
6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 1min
30s (at 200%) 30s (at 200%) 30s
20s 20s
Operating time
6 6
I t OFF I t OFF 10s
10s 10s 5s
5s Ir (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 5s Ir(2–2.5–3–3.5–4 2s
–5–6–7–8–10) ±15% –5–6–7–8–10)±15% 1s

Inertial
2s 2s 0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
1s 1s
0.1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.05s Inertial
nonoperating time
0.04s
0.3±0.06s 0.3±0.06s 0.02s
0.2s 0.2±0.04s 0.2s 0.2±0.04s 0.01s
0.1s 2 0.1±0.03s 0.1s 2 0.1±0.03s

I t ON I t ON 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s 0.05s
2 2 Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)
I t OFF I t OFF
0.02s INST pickup current Ii 0.02s INST pickup current Ii
In2-14 ±15%, Ir14 ±15% Max. total breaking time In2-14 ±15%, Ir14 ±15% Max. total breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
0.6 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 0.6 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.7 0.7
100% of current setting Ir 100% of current setting Ir
Instantaneous tripping current Instantaneous tripping current
(% of rated current or % of current setting Ir) (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)
Internal Accessories Current Reducing Curve Internal Wiring Diagram

130
Rated ambient
temperature
Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT Test button
direction
120
Current rating (%)
7
Left-side Right-side TBM PAL Characteristic
mounting mounting 110 setting part
Magnetic
100 device
90 ZCT
Load side
Line side
80 CT
CT
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(Note *1) (Note *2) Magnetic
CT
Senstivity
Ambient temperature (°C) device selector

Notes *1 For the 24VDC TBM only instruct us of a control voltage.
(The standard shared voltage is 100-240VAC/100-240VDC.) The rated current does not have thermal
*2 SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (100-200VAC) characteristics. Reduce the current as shown Leakage indication button
is necessary. in the curve on the left chart if the ambient
temperature exceeds 40°C.
F F-2SV 117 3P MI-05SV3
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3
Terminal
cover
186
NV125-SEV · NV125-HEV · NV250-SEV · NV250-HEV
Outline Drawing
Front connection
30
Insulation barrier Solderless terminal
for wire size
(removable) M8 bolt
Mounting hole 24 125-175A 14-95mm2
(hex-socket)
200-250A 70-125mm2 Breaker
Operating time
selector Wire connection
100
100
.5
f8
10
Sensitivity current
1
C
selector
126
165
144
102
144
165
50
C
Leakage
f4.5
1
indication button 25 max.
Test button
Or
Trip characteristics .5
f8
100
45
f8.5
selector 35 35
M40.7 taps
9
70 Neutral pole 68 or f5
105 25 max.
4 72
105 140 (Conductor thickness 3-pole 4-pole
92 t=7 max.)
3-pole 4-pole
Conductor drilling
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate Mounting Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole

t = 3.2 max. base rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
3-pole
8
144
126
144
52
R
22 connection
allowance
20
M40.7 breaker
15 6 f24
35 35
15 f9 70 M40.7 taps 100
Insulation
M8 bolt
tube 70 or f5
68 71 105
105 1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame
72 106 3-pole 4-pole
Plug-in
7
4-pole 145
Plug-in 3-pole 110
34.5
plate
56.5

144
190
165
54
80
11
70
6
151
56.5
15
20
28
f9
21 M5 M8 bolt 70 105
terminal block f6 hole
3-pole 70 or M50.8 taps
Insulation 4-pole 105 Stud attachable in this
89 30
barrier direction only
3-pole 105 3-pole 4-pole
112
4-pole 140
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-SEV and NV250-HEV.
187
Characteristics
NV400-CW
Model NV400-CW NV400-SW
Number of poles 3
NV400-SW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay Max. operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
type
Inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
Rated short-circuit 440V 25/13 42/42

AC 400V 36/18 45/45
IEC 60947-2 (lcu/lcs)
EN 60947-2 230V 50/25 85/85
Standard attached parts Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (4pcs)
Note *1 Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
NV400-SW
Operating Characteristics Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

4h
2h
1h NV400-CW
NV400-SW
30min 4h
20min High-
2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
14min speed
10min 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
type
30min
6min
Rate nonoperating current

Rate current sensitivity

4min 10min
2min 4min
2min
1min
Operating time
1min
Max.
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
NV400-CW
5s 2s
Min. 1s
2s Inertial
0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
1s 0.2s
nonoperating time
NV400-SW 0.1s
0.5s Inertial
0.02s
0.2s
0.01s
0.1s
Max. total breaking time 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of rated current)

Operating handle
Lead wire
Left-side Right-side AL AX SHT or UVT TBM 130
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
120 temperature
7 110
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

External Accessories Internal Wiring Diagram

Reference Reference
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name Test button
page page
F F-4S 117 Auxiliary handle HT HT-4CW, HT-4SW 128
Operating handle
Terminal cover
V V-4S 119 Large TC-L TCL-4SW3 ZCT

Line side
Mechanical interlock MI MI-4SW3 129 Skeleton TTC TTC-4SW3 121

Load side
Rear BTC BTC-4SW3

HL HL-4CW, HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
Magnetic Sensitivity
Electrical operation device (*1) 133 device selector
188
NV400-CW · NV400-SW
Outline Drawing
Front connection

28 44 Breaker
8 CL
Conductor thickness
16
110
t=8 max.
CL Breaker
43
39
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
R6
Mounting hole (Time-delay type) CL
92
102
257
CL CL
194
12
Leakage indication button 47
f12.5
f7
Trip button Test button
25
39
f10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44 M6 tap or f7 118
44
M12 bolt 103 for direct connection 1.0mm clearance on each
51 5 107 side of the handle frame.
112
140
155(NV400-SP) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134(NV400-CP)

Line side
Breaker
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90° Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent 6-f35
C
L
8
24 24
8
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 f35 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
f13 M12 bolt Add these tapped holes in
113 87 87 44
Insulation tube 8 positions to standard boring.
87
Drilling plan Load side

7
189
Characteristics
NV400-SEW Model
Number of poles
NV400-SEW
3 4
NV400-HEW
3 4
NV400-REW
3
NV400-HEW
Rated current In (A) 200-400 adjustable
NV400-REW
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Rated short-circuit 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63

AC 400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
EN 60947-2 230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NV400-SEW

10h
NV400-SEW
2h NV400-HEW
NV400-REW
1h 4h
LTD operating time Current setting Rated current High-
30min 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
at 125% Ir: 200-400A In: 400A speed
20min 1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
14min
1000s (TL=150s set) (Adjustable) type
30min
670s (TL=100s set)


10min

6min 400s (TL= 60s set) 10min
4min 80s (TL= 12s set)
LTD operating time TL 4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% 2min
(at 200%)
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s
30s
20s 10s
5s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is 2s
Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- 1s
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15% Inertial
2s 0.85-0.9-0.95 0.5s
-1.0) ±10% Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
1s nonoperating time
0.1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts Inertial
operating time Tp 0.04s
TL 0.3 ± 0.06 s nonoperating time
Tp= ±20% 0.02s
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04 s
(at 200%) 0.01s
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
INST pickup current II

0.02s x 4 - x16 ±15% Max. total
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current setting (% of Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Operating handle Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT TBM
Left-side Right-side direction 130
Rated ambient
mounting mounting PAL

temperature
120
7 110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. Ambient temperature (°C)

Reference Reference
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name Characteristic
page page Test button
setting part
F F-4S 117 Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128
Operating handle
V V-4S 119 3P TCL-4SW3 (*1) Magnetic
Large TC-L device
Terminal cover
3P MI-4SW3 4P TCL-4SW4 (*1)

Mechanical interlock MI 129
4P MI-4SW4 3P TTC-4SW3 ZCT In case of 4P
Skeleton TTC 121 N
Notes *1 This is for NV400-SEW. 4P TTC-4SW4
*2 This is for NV400-SEW. For rear terminal cover of 3P BTC-4SW3 (*2) CT
NV400-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3. Rear BTC
Line side
Load side
*3 Specify the operation method and voltage. 4P BTC-4SW4

CT
*3 Order in combination with the breaker unit. HL HL-4SW
Handle lock device 127 CT
HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation 3P device selector
NVM (*3) 133
device 4P
190 Leakage indication button

NV400-SEW · NV400-HEW · NV400-REW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5 4-pole
CL 3-pole
28 44
t=8 max. Breaker
CL
16
110
CL Breaker CL
43
Sensitivity current
selector
39
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
R6
257
CL CL CL
102
194
92
12
Leakage indication
59
f12.5
button
f7
Trip button Test button
25
39
f10.5
Neutral pole 44 M6 tap or f7 44
44
97
Conductor drilling 118
f14 for direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each
112 185 side of the handle frame.
155
140 196 3-pole 4-pole
3-pole Front-panel cutout

4-pole Line side

Stud can be Breaker Groove for reducing
rotated 90° C heat by overcurrent C 6-f35
L L
24 24
8
194
225
225
265
CL 194
225
C
L
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 11 11
44 f35
10 8 8-M4 screw
113 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
M12 bolt 8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 87
130.5
Drilling plan

7
191
Characteristics
NV630-CW
Model NV630-CW NV630-SW
Number of poles 3
NV630-SW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) −
High-speed
type Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) −
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0

AC 400V 36/18 50/50
EN 60947-2 230V 50/25 85/85
NV630-SW

4h
2h
NV630-CW NV630-SW
30min
20min 4h
14min 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
10min
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
6min 30min


4min
10min
2min
4min
1min 2min
Max.
1min
30s
Operating time
30s
20s
Operating time
10s 10s
5s
5s
2s
Min.
1s
2s Inertial
0.5s
1s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
nonoperating time
0.5s 0.1s
Inertial
0.2s 0.02s
0.01s
0.1s
Max. total breaking time 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s

0.02s
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current

Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire 130

AX SHT or UVT TBM direction
mounting mounting
Current rating (%)
120 Rated ambient
7
temperature
110
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60


Reference Reference
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name Test button
page page
Operating handle
Terminal cover
V V-4S 119 Large TC-L TCL-4SW3 ZCT

Line side

Load side
Rear BTC BTC-4SW3

HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device (*1) 133 device selector

192
NV630-CW · NV630-SW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5
Conductor
28 thickness 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
t=10 max. 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
Sensitivity
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
f10.5
R6
Leakage-indicator 59
92
button
Trip 30
f7
button Test button
39
f12.5
Conductor drilling 44 M6 screw 44
or f7
Neutral
44
Pole
97 118
f14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole

Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current Line side

plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
6-f35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or f7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan

7
193
Characteristics
NV630-SEW
Model NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
NV630-HEW
High-speed
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)

AC 400V 50/50 70/70
EN 60947-2 230V 85/85 100/100
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
NV630-SEW

10h
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
2h
Current setting Rated Current
1h Ir:300-630A In:630A
LTD operating time (Adjustable) 4h
30min at-125%
20min
1000s(TL=150s set) 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
14min 1h
570s(TL=100s set)
10min 30min


400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set) 10min
4min
LTD operating time TL 4min
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%) 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Isd 2s
1s
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% Inertial
2s -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10% 0.5s
0.2s
Pre-alarm 0.1s
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts Inertial
TL 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.02s
Tp= ±20%
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%) 0.01s
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
INST pickup current II Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s In x(4-15) ±15%
Max.total
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)

Operating handle Lead wire 130
Rated ambient

temperature
Left-side Right-side direction

120
110
7 100
90
80
70
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Reference Reference
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
page page
Characteristic Test button
F F-4S 117 Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW 128 setting part
Operating handle
V V-4S 119 3P TCL-4SW3 (*1)
Large TC-L
Terminal cover
Magnetic
3P MI-4SW3 4P TCL-4SW4 (*1)
Mechanical interlock MI 129 device
Skeleton TTC 121 ZCT In case of 4P
Notes *1 This is for NV630-SEW. 4P TTC-4SW4 N
*2 This is for NV630-SEW. For rear terminal cover of 3P BTC-4SW3 (*2)
NV630-HEW, use PTC-4SW3. Rear BTC
4P BTC-4SW4 CT
Load side
Line side
*3 Specify the operation method and voltage.

*3 Order in combination with the breaker unit. HL HL-4SW CT
HL-S HLS-4SW
CT
Electrical operation 3P
NVM (*3) 133 Magnetic Sensitivity
device 4P device selector

194
NV630-SEW · NV630-HEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
94.5
Conductor
28 thickness 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
t=10 max. 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
Breaker
43
Sensitivity
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
f10.5
R6
Leakage-indicator 59
92
button
Trip 30
f7
button Test button
39
f12.5
Conductor drilling 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral or f7
Pole 44 for direct connection
97 118
f14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole

Mounting Stud can be 4-pole Eddy-current Line side

plate rotated 90° Breaker heat-reducing slit
3-pole
6-f35
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or f7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 f35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
f13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan

7
195
Characteristics
NV800-SEW
Model NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
Number of poles 3
NV800-HEW
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) 100-440 Multi-voltage type
High-speed
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
Time-delay Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
type
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s) 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0

AC 400V 50/50 70/70
EN 60947-2 230V 85/85 100/100
NV800-SEW

10h
5h
2h NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
1h Current setting Rated Current

LTD operating time Ir:400-800A In:800A
30min 4h
(Adjustable)
20min at-125%
14min 1000s(TL=150s set) 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
1h
400s(TL= 60s set) 30min


6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min 10min
2min 12 – 60 – 100 – 150s ±20% 4min
(at 200%) 2min
1min
Operating time
1min
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
STD pickup current Isd
5s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip 2s
Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4
Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15% 1s
2s
Inertial
– 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10% 0.5s
0.2s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp 0.1s
0.5s TL STD operating time Ts Inertial
Tp= ±20%
2 0.04s nonoperating time
(at 200%) 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.02s
0.2s 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.01s
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
INST Pickup current Ii Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s In x(4-10) ±15% Max.total
(Magnification to In)
breaking time
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)

Working current correcting ratio (%)
Operating handle Lead wire

Left-side Right-side direction 130
7
120
110 Rated ambient temperature

100
90
80
70
Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Reference Reference
Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
page page
Test button
Operating handle Characteristic
Terminal cover
V V-8S 119 Large TC-L TCL-8SW3 setting part

Magnetic
Rear BTC BTC-8SW3 device
HL HL-4SW
Handle lock device 127 ZCT
HL-S HLS-8SW
Line side
Load side
CT
CT
CT
device selector
196 Leakage indication button

NV800-SEW · NV800-HEW
Outline Drawing
Front connection
26
Mounting hole 46 Breaker
Breaker
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
110
87
8 R6
32
Sensitivity current selector Terminal dimension for directly

connecting conductor
92
243
(Time-delay type)
275
102
15
Leakage indication button f8.5
32
f8
12
172
M6 tap or f7
32 8
f14
8 70
87
46 22
Test button
15
51
97 40
14 1.0mm clearance on each
103 side of the handle frame.
40
Trip button 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
140
210
155 Conductor drilling

Connection
allowance 6-f48
M6 tap or f7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
5
25
24 24
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
10
5
4-M6 tap or f7
243
10
243
243
295
12.5
24 24
13
45
11 11 8-M4 screw
10 8 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 70
8 32 15 f48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
140 mounting breaker
f13 140
113 110 M12 bolt 140
Drilling plan

7
197
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers
NF50-SVFU
Model NF50-SVFU Model NV50-SVFU
(5) (10)
(3) 5 10 15 20 30
NV50-SVFU
Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C
15 20 30 40 50
Rated ambient
temperature 40°C 40 50 Number of poles 2 3
3f3W
Phase line 1f2W
Number of poles 2 3 1f2W
Rated voltage VAC 240 UL 489 120-240
Rated voltage
600Y/347V − IEC 60947-2

VAC 100-240 100-440
UL 489 480V − EN 60947-2
CSA C22.2
AC 480Y/277V − Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA 30 50 30 50 100
High-speed
No.5-02
type
240V 14 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn
120V − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 440 Earth-leakage indication system Indicator window
690V − 480V −
Rated short-circuit breaking

UL 489
500V − CSA C22.2 AC 240V 14
IEC 60947-2 No.5-02
capacity (kA)
440V 7.5/4 120V 14
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 10/5 440V − 7.5/4
400V 10/5 IEC 60947-2 400V − 10/5
EN 60947-2 AC
NV50-SVFU 380V 10/5 (Icu/Ics) 230V 15/8 15/8
230V 15/8 100V 15/8 15/8
IEC35 rail mounting claws
(Front connection)
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Remark: 1. The mounting screws must be prepared by the user. (Recommended size: M430.7365 (2 pcs).)

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
4h
NV50-SVFU 2h High-
4h speed
(UL 1053) 1h type
2h Operating Characteristics
Rated non-operating current

30min
1h (UL 489)
NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU

30min
10min
20min
14min
10min 4min
Max. (3A-30A)
6min
4min 2min
Max. (40A-50A)
2min 1min
Operating time
1min 30s
Operating time
30s
20s 10s
10s 5s
5s
2s
Min.
2s
1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s 0.04s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
25 100 500
Current (% of Ir)
63.8 75 86.2
Ground fault current
(100% of rated current sensitivity)

7
Rated current compensation rate %
130
Rated ambient
Outgoing direction of Test button

Handle of circuit breaker AL AX SHT or UVT
temperature
lead wires
120
Left pole Right pole TBM
ZCT
Load side
Line side
NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU 110
100
2-pole 2-pole
90 device selector
3-pole
3-pole 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Leakage indication
Ambient temperature °C
2P F-03SVUL2 2P TCL-03SVU2
F 117 Terminal cover Large TC-L 121
3P F-03SVUL 3P TCL-03SVU3
Operating handle
2P V-03SVUL2
V 119
3P V-03SVUL
HL HLF-03SVU
HL-S HLS-03SVU
198
NF50-SVFU · NV50-SVFU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Mounting hole Mounting hole Leakage current M50.8 screw

indicator window 24
Leakage current
indicator window
36
26
50
87.5
87.5
120
120
35
16.5
37
3.5
f8
Test
Trip button button
Trip button
f4.2
Trip button Trip button
56
18 18 Test 65
button
18 36 18 36 68
36 54 36 54 3 76
90
(NF50-SVFU) (NV50-SVFU)
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 22lb-in (2.5N·m)

Applicable wire range (*1) Crimp terminal type (*2)
AWG (#)
mm2 (60°C/75°C) JST NTM
f5.5 R2-5 R2-5
2-M5
1.04-2.63 16-14 R2-5M
V2-5
V2-M5
6
2.63-4.6 12 - R3.5-5S
11.5 max. R3.5-5L
R5.5-5 R5.5-5
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-5S
(Conductor thickness t=4 max.) R5.5-5N
V5.5-5
Conductor drilling for R8-5 R8-5
direct connection 6.64-10.52 8
R8-5S
R14-5 R14-5
10.52-16.78 6 R14-5S
14-NK5
Remarks: 1. The mounting screws are not enclosed with the breaker. 22-S5
16.78-26.66 4 22-S6
2. The wires cannot be connected directly. R22-5S
JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Notes *1 14AWG or lager to comply with UL Standards.
*2 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
terminal combination shown above.
Breaker
M40.7screw
CL or f5 CL CL CL Breaker
R1
27
82.5
CL CL
52
7
18 37 55
The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on

each side of breaker window frame.
Drilling plan Front panel drilling plan
199
Characteristics
NF100-CVFU
Model NF100-CVFU Model NV100-CVFU
Rated current In (A) 60 (70) 75
Rated ambient temperature 40°C (80) (90) 100
NV100-CVFU
60 (70) 75 Number of poles 3
Rated ambient
(80) (90) 100
temperature 40°C 3f3W
Phase line
1f2W
Number of poles 2 3 UL 489 120-240
Rated
Rated voltage VAC 240 IEC 60947-2
voltage VAC 100-440
600Y/347V − EN 60947-2

UL 489 480V −
High-speed type
30/50/
CSA C22.2 Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA
AC 480Y/277V − 100/200/500 selectable
No.5-02
240V 14 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn
120V − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button
690V − 480V −

UL 489
500V 7.5/4 CSA C22.2 AC 240V 14
IEC 60947-2 No.5-02
capacity (kA)
440V 10/5 120V 14
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 10/5 440V 10/5
400V 10/5 IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5
NF100-CVFU 380V 10/5
EN 60947-2 AC
230V 15/8
(Icu/Ics)
230V 15/8 100V 15/8
Standard attached parts IEC35 rail mounting claws, Insulating barrier
(Front connection) (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminal) Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws)
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
4h NV100-CVFU 4h
2h High-
2h
(UL 1053) speed
Operating Characteristics 1h type
1h
(UL 489) 30min

30min NF100-CVFU
20min

14min NV100-CVFU 10min
10min
6min 4min
4min
Max. 2min
2min
1min
Operating time
1min
Operating time
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s
5s
5s
Min. 2s
2s
1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s 0.04s
0.02s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip 0.01s
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
25 100 500
Current (% of Ir) 63.8 75 86.2

7 Handle of circuit breaker AL AX SHT or UVT
lead wires
Test button
Rated ambient
Left pole Right pole TBM 130

temperature
120
NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU ZCT
Load side
Line side
110
2-pole 3-pole
100
90 Magnetic Sensitivity
3-pole
device selector
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature °C Leakage indication
2P F-05SVUL2 TCL-05SVU2
F 117 2P
3P F-05SVUL TCL-05SVU2L
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L 121
2P V-05SVUL2 TCL-05SVU3
V 119 3P
3P V-05SVUL TCL-05SVU3L
HL HLF-05SVU
Handle lock device 2P HLS-05SVU2 127
HL-S
3P HLS-05SVU
200
NF100-CVFU · NV100-CVFU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
M8 screw
24
Mounting hole Mounting hole
Leakage current
112
150
112
150
84
50
indicator button
f4.5
Test button
Trip button
f8.5
f8.5
22 22 45
8
25 50 50 65
Trip button
68
50 75 75 16 max. 4 72
2-pole 3-pole (Conductor thickness t=4 max.) 90
(NF100-CVFU) (NV100-CVFU) Conductor drilling for

direct connection
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 54lb-in (6N·m)

Applicable wire range Crimp terminal type (*1)
mm2 AWG (#) JST NTM
(60°C/75°C)
2.5-2.63 14 R2-8 R2-8
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-8 R5.5-8
6.64-10.52 8 R8-8 R8-8
R14-8
10.52-16.78 6 R14-8
R14-8S
16.78-26.66 4 R22-8 R22-8S
26.66-42.42 2 38-S8 R38-8S
60-2BA
42.42-60.57 1/0 CB60-8
60-S8
Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
Size of screwdriver with bolting

Front connection(solderless terminal) Please bolt with flat head screwdriver.
Solderless terminal The length of X : 6mm-7mm
CL Terminal CL Mounting hole CL Terminal The length of Y q 9.5mm
Mounting hole cover cover
Y
X
Flat head screwdriver
Wire size
60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands
210
210
CL CL 14AWG 7
84
50
12-10AWG 7
8AWG 7
6-4AWG 7
2AWG 7
1-1/0AWG 19
The tightening torque is different according to
connected wire.
7
68 Refer to instruction manual for details.
50 75 75 Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating
90 Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress
2-pole 3-pole Remark: of heating and cooling.
2-pole 3-pole
M40.7screw
Breaker
or f5
CL CL CL CL Breaker
R1
111
CL CL
52
50 70
25
The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on
2-pole 3-pole each side of breaker window frame.
201
Characteristics
NF125-SVU
Model NF125-SVU NF125-HVU Model NV125-SVU NV125-HVU
Rated current In (A) 15 20 30 15 20 30
Rated ambient (40) 50 60 125 (40) 50 60 125
NF125-HVU 15 20 30 15 20 30 temperature 40°C 75 100 75 100

40 50 60 40 50 60 Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Rated ambient 125 125
(70) 75 (80) (70) 75 (80) 3f3W 3f3W 3f3W
temperature 40°C 3f3W
NV125-SVU
(90) 100 (90) 100 Phase line
1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W
Rated UL 489 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480
NV125-HVU
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 3 3 voltage IEC 60947-2
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
Rated voltage VAC 480 480 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC EN 60947-2

600Y/347V − − 18 18 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/
High-speed type
UL 489 Rated current sensitivity
100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500
CSA C22.2 480V 30 30 50 50 IΔn mA selectable selectable selectable selectable
No.5-02 AC
240V 50 50 100 100 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn
120V − − − − Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button
690V 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 480V 30 30 50 50

UL 489
500V 18/9 18/9 25/13 25/13 CSA C22.2 AC 240V 50 50 100 100
IEC 60947-2 No.5-02
capacity (kA)
440V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 120V 50 50 100 100
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 440V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
400V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 IEC 60947-2 400V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2 AC
380V 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 (Icu/Ics) 230V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
230V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 100V 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50
Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)
NF125-HVU (Front connection)
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
4h 4h 4h
2h Operating Characteristics 2h Operating Characteristics 2h Operating Characteristics
1h (UL 489) 1h (UL 489) 1h (UL 489)
NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-SVU NV125-SVU
30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU 30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU 30min NF125-HVU NV125-HVU
20min 20min 20min
14min 15A-30A 14min 40A-100A 14min 125A
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A-50A)
1min 1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 10000 100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% of Ir) Current (% of Ir) Current (% of Ir)
Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics Internal Accessories

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) Outgoing direction of
Handle of circuit breaker AL AX SHT or UVT
lead wires
4h
NV125-SVU 2h
1h
High-
speed
type
NF125-SVU
NF125-HVU
NV125-SVU
NV125-HVU
NV125-HVU 30min
(UL 1053) 2-pole 3-pole

10min
4min
2min
7
1min 3-pole
Operating time
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s Test button
Rated ambient
0.5s 130
temperature
0.2s 120 ZCT

Load side
Line side
0.1s 110
0.04s 100
0.02s 90 Magnetic Sensitivity

0.01s device selector
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
25 100 500 Ambient temperature °C

63.8 75 86.2
Leakage indication
F F-1SVUL 117
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-1SVU3 121
V V-1SVUL 119
HL HLF-05SVU
HL-S HLS-05SVU
202
NF125-SVU · NF125-HVU · NV125-SVU · NV125-HVU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulation barrier (removable) Mounting hole Insulation barrier (removable)
Mounting hole M8 screw
24
50
50
124
160
160
124
84
50
Leakage current indicator button
f4.5
Test button
Trip button f8
.5
f8.5
8
45
50
50
61
22 22
65
Trip button 19 max.
60 60 68
90 90 (Conductor thickness t=4 max.) 4 72
Conductor drilling for 90

direct connection
(NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU) (NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU)
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 54lb-in (6N·m)
mm2 AWG (#)
(60°C/75°C) JST NTM
2.5-2.63 14 R2-8 R2-8
2.63-6.64 12-10 R5.5-8 R5.5-8
6.64-10.52 8 R8-8 R8-8
R14-8
10.52-16.78 6 R14-8
R14-8S
16.78-26.66 4 R22-8 R22-8S
26.66-42.42 2 38-S8 R38-8S
60-2BA
42.42-60.57 1/0 CB60-8
60-S8
Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp
Front connection (solderless terminal) Hexagon socket set screw

Mounting hole Mounting hole
Insulation barrier Insulation barrier
(removable) (removable) Solderless terminal
50
50
5.03
Wire size
Number of strands
60°C/75°C CU ONLY
a
14AWG 7
a
12-10AWG 7
6
8AWG 7
160
160
6AWG 7
84
50
4-2AWG 7
1AWG 19
connected wire.
7
Refer to instruction manual for details.
a:Solid copper wire is usable.
68
Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating
50
50
Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress

90
90 90 Remark: of heating and cooling.
Breaker
Breaker
6
123
R1
52
86
30
M40.7 screw The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on

or f5 each side of breaker window frame.
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
203
Characteristics
NF225-CWU
Model NF225-CWU
at ambient temperature 40˚C (IEC30˚C) 200 225
Number of poles 3

UL 489
AC 240V 35
capacities (kA)
500V 10/5
IEC 60947-2 440V 15/8
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9
230V 35/18
DC 250V 10/5 (*1)
Mounting screw: M430.7×55 (2pcs),
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Terminal cover: (1 set) (*2)
Notes *1 Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 32, the models
can be used for up to 400 V DC.
*2 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
NF225-CWU protection) structure.
4h
2h
1h Type
30min NF225-CWU
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
Max. total
0.2s breaking
time
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
100% of Rated current
130
Rated ambient
Operating handle
temperature
Current rating (%)
Left-side Right-side Lead wire 120

AL AX SHT or UVT
7
110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
F F-2SUL 117 Mechanical interlock Ml MI-05SWU3 129
Operating handle
V V-2SUL 119
TCL-2SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-2SWU 127 Terminal cover Large TC-L 121
TCL-2SWU3L
204
NF225-CWU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulating barrier
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 90lb-in (10N.m)
24
C
L
M8 bolt AWG (#)
(Hex-soket)
Mounting hole
R22-8
100
R22-8 R22-8S
16.78-26.66 4 22-S8 CB22-8S
26.66-42.42 2 R38-8 R38-8
38-S8 R38-8S
R60-8 R60-8
42.42-60.57 1/0 60-2BA CB60-8
CB60-S8 CB60-8S
C
L
102
60.57-76.28 2/0 70-8 R70-8
144
165
50
f8.5 80-3BA
f8.5
76.28-96.3 3/0 CB80-S8
f4.5
10
100-3BA
96.3-117.2 4/0 CB100-S8
Trip button 22 max. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Notes *1 When using with a wire connection, use the
crimp terminal combination shown above.
100
22 45 Conductor drilling for

70 61 direct connection
105 68
4 72
92
C
L Breaker C
L Breaker
1
C C
R
L L
126
52
35 M40.7 screw 100

or f5
Drilling plan Front cover cutout

1mm clearance on
each side of handle
7
205
Characteristics
NF250-SVU
Model NF250-SVU NF250-HVU Model NV250-SVU NV250-HVU
Rated ambient 175 200 250 175 200 250
NF250-HVU
temperature 40°C 225 225
Rated ambient 175 200 250 175 200 250 Number of poles 3 3 3 3
temperature 40°C 225 225 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W
NV250-SVU
Phase line
1ø2W 1ø2W 1ø2W 1ø2W
Rated UL 489 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480
NV250-HVU
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 voltage IEC 60947-2
100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440
Rated voltage VAC 480 480 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC EN 60947-2

600Y/347V − − 18 18 Rated current sensitivity 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/
UL 489
High-speed
100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500
CSA C22.2 480V 35 35 50 50 IΔn mA selectable selectable selectable selectable
type
No.5-02 AC
240V 65 65 100 100 Pick-up current UL 1053 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn
120V − − − − Operating time s within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button
690V 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 480V 35 35 50 50

UL 489
500V 25/13 25/13 36/18 36/18 CSA C22.2 AC 240V 65 65 100 100
IEC 60947-2 No.5-02
capacity (kA)
440V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 120V 65 65 100 100
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 415V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 440V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
400V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 IEC 60947-2 400V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25
EN 60947-2 AC
380V 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 (Icu/Ics) 230V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
230V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50 100V 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50
Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (4pcs)
(Front connection)
NF250-HVU
Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.
Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics
(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)
4h 4h
2h
(UL 489)
2h
(UL 489) NV250-SVU
1h NF250-SVU NV250-SVU 1h 4h
30min NF250-HVU NV250-HVU 30min

NF250-SVU NV250-SVU
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU NV250-HVU 2h High-
speed
20min
125-225A
20min
14min
(UL 1053) 1h type
14min 250A
10min 10min 30min

6min 6min 10min
4min 4min
2min 2min 4min
Max. Max. 2min
1min 1min
1min
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s

20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. 2s
2s 2s
1s
1s 1s 0.5s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.2s Max. total 0.2s Max. total
0.1s 0.1s 0.04s
0.02s
0.05s 0.05s
0.01s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip 25 100 500
0.01s 0.01s 63.8 75 86.2
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 Ground fault current
7 Internal Accessories Handle of circuit breaker AL AX SHT or UVT

lead wires 130 Test button

Rated ambient
temperature

120
ZCT
NF250-SVU NV250-SVU
Load side
Line side
110
NF250-HVU NV250-HVU
100
90 selector
device
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Leakage indication
Ambient temperature °C
F F-2SVUL 117 TCL-2SVU3
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L 121
V V-2SVUL 119 TCL-2SVU3L
HL HLF-05SVU
HL-S HLS-2SVU
206
NF250-SVU · NF250-HVU · NV250-SVU · NV250-HVU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Compatible crimp terminals Tightening torque 90lb-in (10N.m)
AWG (#)
Insulation barrier R22-8
(removable) R22-8 R22-8S
16.78-26.66 4 22-S8
Mounting hole Hexagon socket 24 CB22-8S
Insulation barrier
(removable) M8 bolt R38-8 R38-8
26.66-42.42 2
Mounting hole
100 38-S8 R38-8S
100
R60-8 R60-8
42.42-60.57 1/0 60-2BA CB60-8
CB60-S8 CB60-8S
60.57-76.28 2/0 70-8 R70-8
Sensitivity 80-3BA
76.28-96.3 3/0 CB80-S8
current selector
102
144
185
100-3BA
185
144
50
Leakage current 96.3-117.2 4/0 CB100-S8
indicator button
f4.5
117.2-152.05 250/300MCM CB150-S8 (*1)
Trip
button JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co.
Test button NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Notes *1 TCL-2SVU3L can be mounted when using
CB150-S8.
f8.5
*2 When using with a wire connection, use the
100
100
45 crimp terminal combination shown above.
61
Trip button .5 .5
22 22 65 f8 f8
10
9
68
1
C
70 70
or
4 72
C
105 105
1
92 Max. 25 (Conductor thickness Max. 25
t=7 max.)
Conductor drilling for
(NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU) (NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU)
direct connection
Front connection (solderless terminal)
Mounting hole Terminal cover Mounting hole Solderless terminal

Hexagon socket set screw
Terminal cover
6.1
Wire size
60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands
265
265
102
50
4-2AWG 7
1-1/0AWG 19
3/0-4/0AWG 19
250-350MCM 37
connected wire.
Refer to instruction manual for details.
Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating

Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress
68 Remark: of heating and cooling.
105 105
92
Breaker
CL Breaker
CL
7
R1
CL CL
126
52
35 100
M40.7screw
or f5 The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on
each side of breaker window frame.
207
Characteristics
NF400-SWU
Model NF400-SWU NF400-HWU
at ambient temperature 40˚C 350 400 350 400
NF400-HWU Number of poles
UL 489
Rated voltage (VAC)
600Y/347V
3
600Y/347
3
600Y/347
20 25

CSA C22 2 AC 480V 35 65
No.5-02
capacities (kA)
240V 65 100
690V 10/10(5/5) (*1) 15/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30(25/25) (*1) 42/42
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42(36/36) (*1) 65/65
400V 45/45(36/36) (*1) 70/70
230V 85/85(65/65) (*1) 100/100
Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws) Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws)
Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating plate (1pce)
Insulating barrier (4pcs) Insulating barrier (4pcs)
(Only for type with bar terminals) (Only for type with bar terminals)
Note *1 In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
*2 0.1 for UL1053.
NF400-SWU
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Operating Characteristics
1h
(UL 489) Operating Characteristics
30min NF400-SWU 30min (IEC 60947-2)
20min NF400-HWU 20min (EN 60947-2)
14min 14min NF400-SWU
10min 10min NF400-HWU
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
Max.
1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s Max.total 0.2s

interrupting time
0.1s 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000

Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG direction
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting EAL TBL TBM PAL ATU
Rated ambient
130
temperature
Current rating (%)
120
7
110
(*1) 100
90
80
(*1) −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1) (*1)
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
F F-4SUL 117
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-4SWU 121
V V-4SUL 119
Handle lock device HL HL-4SWU 127
208
NF400-SWU · NF400-HWU
Outline Drawing
Front connection (Solderless terminal)

Solderless terminal Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
8
Mounting
hole UL
Ampere ratings Wire size Number of strands
225
257
102
250A, 300A 250-350kcmil CU
47 37
250A 350kcmil AL
f12.5
350A, 400A (2) 3/0AWG CU 19
f7
Trip
button IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
Ampere ratings
87 97 Class 2 Class 5
140 103 250A, 300A 70-185mm2 95-185mm2
(max. 141) 5 107 350A, 400A 150-240mm2 150-185mm2

(NF400-SWU) 3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current.
155
4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage
and pinching, etc., while tightening.
5. The NF400-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.
Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections and
tightening as the wires may wear down over use.
Front connection (Busbar terminal)

Insulating barrier
(removable)
46
26 Conductor thickness 10
t=10 max.
13
110
44
Mounting
hole
102
257
47
f12.5
f7
Trip
button
f13 10
M12 bolt 46
97
112
103
140
(max.141) 5 107
(NF400-SWU) 155
(NF400-HWU)
Remark: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
7
Breaker Breaker CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
from each side of breaker.
R6

194
92
97
30
58
44 f7 holes 118 1mm clearance on

or M6 taps each side of handle. Insulating plate
(Line)
209
Characteristics
NF630-SWU
Model NF630-SWU NF630-HWU
500 600 630 500 600 630
NF630-HWU Number of poles
UL 489
Rated voltage (VAC)
600Y/347V
3
600Y/347
20
3
600Y/347
25

CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480V 35 65
capacities (kA)
240V 85 100
690V 10/10 15/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 42/42
EN 60947-2
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42 65/65
400V 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100
Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs) Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs)
Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating plate (1pce)
Standard attached parts Insulating barrier Insulating barrier
(500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs) (500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs)
(Only for type with bar terminals) (Only for type with bar terminals)
NF630-SWU
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h (UL 489) 1h (IEC 60947-2)
NF630-SWU NF630-SWU
30min NF630-HWU 30min NF630-HWU
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min Inst. trip adjustment 6min Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps) 4min range (4 steps)
Control Inst. trip Max. Control Inst. trip
2min setting current (%) 2min setting current (%)
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
1min Lo 400±80 1min Lo 400±80

2 600±120 2 600±120
30s 30s
3 800±160 3 800±160
20s 20s
Hi 1000±200 Hi 1000±200
10s 10s
Min.
5s 5s
Adjustable range Min. Adjustable range
2s of inst. pick up 2s of inst. pick up
current current
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max. total
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 130 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000

Lead-wire
Operating handle AL AX SHT or UVT MG direction 130
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
temperature
mounting mounting EAL TBL TBM PAL ATU 120
110
7 (*1) (*1)
100
90
80
−10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(*1) (*1)
Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
F F-6SUL 117
Operating handle Terminal cover Large TC-L TCL-6SWU 121
V V-6SUL 119
Handle lock device HL HL-4SWU 127
210
NF630-SWU · NF630-HWU
Outline Drawing
Front connection (Solderless terminal)

Solderless terminal
Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
Mounting
hole
243
275
102
8
UL
15
Ampere ratings Wire size Number of strands
Trip
f14
f8
button 500A, 600A (2) 250-350kcmil CU ONLY 37
IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
140 97 Ampere ratings
Class 2 Class 5
210 103 500A, 600A (2) 95-185mm2 (2) 120-185mm2
5 107 3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current.
4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage and
Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. pinching, etc., while tightening.
155
2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections 5. The 630A and NF630-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.
and tightening as the wires may wear down over use.
Front connection (Busbar terminal) Insulating barrier

(removable) 46
Conductor thickness
t=12 max. 10
500A, 600A:110
630A:150
Mounting
hole
102
275
15
Trip
f14
f8
button
8
630A:150
14
87
32
10
15
40 46
140 97
f14
210 103
M12 bolt
5 107
155
Remark: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
7
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
R6
from each side of breaker.

243
97
92
30
58
Insulating plate
70 f7 holes 172 1mm clearance on
or M6 taps each side of handle. (Line)
Drialling plan Front-panel cutout
211
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers
NF250-SEV with MDU

Model NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU
250 250
Rated ambient temperature 40°C
NF250-HEV with MDU

Current setting Ir (A) 125-250 125-250
690V 8/8 10/8

500V 18/18 30/23
Rated short-circuit
440V 36/36 50/50
IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 36/36 70/70
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/36 75/75
380V 36/36 75/75
230V 85/85 100/100
DC 250V − −
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M4  0.7  55 (3P: 2psc, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Breaker mounting MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting)
MDU accessories Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting screw,
mounting Connection cable (for panel mounting)
NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-SEV with MDU

(Breaker mounting) (Panel mounting)
10h 10h
NF250-SEV with MDU NV250-SEV with MDU
2h NF250-HEV with MDU 2h NV250-HEV with MDU
1h Note) 1h Note)
LTD operating time Current setting Ir Rated current In LTD operating time Current setting Ir Rated current In
30min 6
at 125%(I t ON) 125-250 250A 30min 6
at 125%(I t ON) 125-250 250A
20min 670s (TL = 100s set) (Adjustable) 20min 670s (TL = 100s set) (Adjustable)
14min 14min
2min 2min
Operating time
Operating time
1min LTD operating time TL 1min

6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20% 6
I t ON 12–60–80–100s ±20%
30s (at 200%) 30s (at 200%)
20s 20s
6 6
I t OFF I t OFF
10s 10s
5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 5s Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4
–5–6–7–8–10) ±15% –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s STD operating time Ts 0.5s STD operating time Ts
0.3±0.06s 0.3±0.06s
0.2s 0.2±0.04s 0.2s 0.2±0.04s
0.1s 2
I t ON 0.1±0.03s 0.1s 2
I t ON 0.1±0.03s
0.05s 0.05s
2 2
I t OFF I t OFF
INST pickup current Ii Max. total 0.02s INST pickup current Ii Max. total
0.02s In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15%
In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15% breaking time breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000
500 700 2000 4000 500 700 2000 4000
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir)

Lead-wire
7
Rated ambient
Derating of Load current (%)
direction 130
temperature
Left-side Right-side PAL AL for MDU AX for MDU

mounting mounting transmission transmission 120
110
100

characteristics. Reduce the current as
80 shown in the curve on the left chart if the

(*1)
70 ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Note *1 SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (100-240VAC/100-240VDC) is necessary.
F F-2SV 117 3P MI-05SV3
Operating handle (*1) Mechanical interlock MI (*3) 129
LC LC-05SV Small TC-S 3P TCS-2SV3 (*5)
HLF-05SV TCL-2SV3 (*5)
HLN-05SV Terminal Large TC-L TCL-2SV3L (*5)
121
HL-S (*1) HLS-2SV cover 4P TCL-2SV4
Notes *1 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type. Skeleton TTC 3P TTC-2SV3 (*5)
*2 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. Rear BTC 3P BTC-2SV3 (*5)
*3 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel
mounting can be manufactured. Electrical operation device (*1) (*4) 133
*4 Specify the working voltage.
*5 In the case of the MDU breaker mounting type, specify the model
212 name with MP at the end.
NF250-SEV with MDU · NF250-HEV with MDU
Outline Drawing
Front connection
Insulation barrier M8 bolt
(removable) A (Hex-soket) (65) 3
Insulation barrier
.5
Mtg hole 24 (removable) M8 bolt
f8
100
25
(Hex-soket)
10
38.5
24 Breaker
1
Mtg hole
C
100
Trip button
C
1
Trip button 25 max.
144
165
102
86.5
133
f4.5
102
144
165
50
126
or
f4.5
.5
f8
45
f8.5
100
61 45
100
f8.5
9
22 35 68 35 35
70 105 22 35 61 25 max.
Neutral pole 77 M4 × 0.7 taps or f5
105 140 70 105 Neutral pole 68
92 4 (Bus t max.=7)
MDU unit 105 140
72 3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 4-pole MDU specification A
3-pole 4-pole 92
No transmission, pulse output 25
MDU breaker mounting CC-Link 32 Bus drilling for
MDU panel mounting direct connection Drilling plan
Rear mounting
Mtg plate Stud can be Mtg plate Stud can be
t max.=3.2 rotated 90° 4-pole t max.=3.2 rotated 90° 4-pole
Insulation 3-pole 3-pole
Insulation 4-pole Breaker
tube 4-pole Breaker tube Breaker
3-pole 3-pole
39.5
8
Connection Connection
R1
144
1
144
88.5
126
144
52
R
allowance allowance
22 22
20
20
M4 × 0.7
M4 × 0.7 breaker
breaker 32.5 mtg screw
15 6 mtg screw 100 15 6 32.5 f24 35
15
70 60 B 15 Insulation 100 35 35
68 71 70
Insulation 77.5 B tube M4 × 0.7
105 tube 68 71 105 70 taps or f5 105
77 106 1mm clearance on
MDU specification B 72 106 each side of handle
MDU unit f9 M8 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
f9 M8 bolt No transmission, pulse output 16
CC-Link 23 Front-plate cut out
MDU breaker mounting Front-plate cut out MDU panel mounting Drilling plan
MDU unit terminal for breaker mounting MDU panel mounting MDU terminal for panel mounting
This figure is without terminal cover.

Please bind wires. 90 This figure is without terminal cover.
Panel note: Operation and Please bind wires.
14.5
Control power 70 Panel t 1.0mm - 3.2mm indication side

Control power
FG 90
MB
Control power Terminal block

MA
90
Panel holder plate

MA, MB,FG MDU connector
M3 screw
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAMB
Control power
70
90
1 2 3 4 5 6 R2 72
Removable connector
82.5
MDU specification 1 2 3 4 5 6 MDU specification 1 2 3 4 5 6
72
No transmission − − − − − − No transmission − − − − FG −
57.5
− − − − − − −
7
Pulse output Cb Ca Pulse output Ca Cb FG
50
CC-Link − SLD − DG DB DA CC-Link DA DB DG SLD FG −
Front-panel cut out

213
Characteristics
NF400-SEP with MDU

200 225 250 300 350 400 Adjustable
Rated ambient temperature 40°C
NF400-HEP with MDU

Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690
690V 10/10 10/10

500V 30/30 50/50
440V 42/42 65/65
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 415V 45/45 70/70
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45 70/70
380V 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100
200V 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M6  60 (4pcs)
Breaker
(Front connection) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Breaker mounting MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting)
MDU accessories Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel
mounting mounting screw, Connection cable (for panel mounting)
NF400-SEP with MDU

(Breaker mounting)

Operating handle
10h mounting mounting
5h NF400-SEP with MDU (*1) AL AX
NF400-HEP with MDU AL for MDU transmission
2h (Magnification to In) AX for MDU transmission
1h Note)
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current (*1) SHT or UVT
30min at 130%
20min Ir: 200-400A In: 400A MG EAL TBL
790s (TL = 150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
10min 530s (TL = 100s set) TBM PAL ATU
6min 315s (TL = 60s set) (*1) (*1)
65s (TL = 12s set) TI EPAL
4min
LTD operating time TL Lead-wire
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% direction
(at 200%)
Operating time
1min
30s
20s Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.
10s
Ir x(0.70-0.75
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15% Current Reducing Curve
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
Rated ambient
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 130

temperature
TL ±20% 0.3±0.06s
0.2s Tp= 120
2 0.2±0.04s
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1±0.03s 110
0.06±0.02s
0.05s
0.02s x4-x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time 90 The rated current does not have thermal
0.01s characteristics. Reduce the current as
60 70 100 130 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000 80 shown in the curve on the left chart if the
500 700 2000 4000 ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
70
Current (% of Ir) –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
F − F-4S 117 3P − TCL-4SW3 (*1)
V − V-4S 119 4P − TCL-4SW4 (*1)
Terminal cover
HL HL-4SW HL-4SW 3P TTC-4SW3-MDU TTC-4SW3

Handle lock device 127 Skeleton TTC
HL-S − HLS-4SW 4P TTC-4SW4-MDU TTC-4SW4
121
MI 3P MI-4SW3 MI-4SW3 BTC-4SW3 (*1)
Mechanical interlock 129 3P BTC-4SW3 (*4)
(*2) 4P MI-4SW4 MI-4SW4 Only line side
Rear BTC
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW HT-4SW 128 BTC-4SW4
4P BTC-4SW4
Notes *1 For NF400SEP with MDU. Only line side
*2 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel mounting can be 3P
Electrical operation
manufactured. NFM − (*3) 133
*3 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the device 4P
breaker unit.
*4 This is for NF400-SEP with MDU. For rear terminal cover of NF400-HEP with
MDU, use PTC-4SW3.
214
NF400-SEP with MDU · NF400-HEP with MDU
Outline Drawing
Insulating barrier 94.5

Front connection 112
(removable)
28 44
Conductor
Mounting hole 56 t max.=8 8
16
51 22
110
Breaker
43
39
Trip
97
button
103
194
102
257
47
f12.5
51
f7
75
39
PE
12
Current M6 taps
Neutral 44 44
f14 indication LED 30 44 or f7
pole
M12 bolt OVER
MDU 58 PAL 36
25
3-pole 4-pole
5 107 f10.5
terminal MDU 70%
168
cover 90 131
Conductor t max.=8 Drilling plan
185
Conductor drilling
140 196 155
3-pole 4-pole
1mm clearance on each side of handle.

Rear connection Front-plate cutout (Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
4-pole Eddy-current Breaker
Stud can be Breaker 4-pole 4-pole
Mounting plate heat-reducing slit
rotated 90° 3-pole MDU
8
3-pole 3-pole
Connection M6 taps
allowance or f7
194
R6 R6
14
225
265
225
20
46
25 20
92
26
83
63
128
M6 breaker
mounting screw
138
44 f35 44
10 8
f13 33
87 Insulating 87 43.5
113 M12 bolt 37 37
tube (59)
130.5 130.5
118 118
3-pole 4-pole
<Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.
Drilling plan
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU (No transmission, pulse output)

MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. Figure of the breaker mounting is
MDU panel mounting MDU terminal removed the terminal cover.
Space greater than the value shown
Panel in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
thickness 4
and must be separate 10cm or more 3
1-3.2mm
Operation/display from the distribution line. 2
side 75 75 R2 72 40 1
L2
70
12
Panel L1
86.5
90
Control power
28.5
1 2 3 4
M4 screw
40
Panel holder plate

A
MDU display For the set No transmission

Terminal PE screw (M4) part installation Pulse output 113 114
M3 nut
Upper Terminal block MDU connector
40 <Breaker mounting>
side
Front panel cutout
B
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
M3.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
screw
8.5
58.5 Control power

30 Terminal cover
Type A B In case of front connection,
M4 screw M3 nut keep space between MDU
NF400-SEP 244 205 and conductor or insulation
54
NF400-HEP 374 205 barrier. 1 2 3 4 5 6

No transmission FG
7
Pulse output FG 113 114
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)

in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
Operation/display 8
side 6
75 Panel Panel from the distribution line. 5
70 thickness 4
12
3
1-3.2mm 2
1
28.5
Panel holder
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw L2 Control power
38 L1
MDU
86.5
Terminal
90
Upper M3 nut
A
connector 1 2 3 4
side PE screw(M4)
SLD DG DB DA
40
MDU display
For the set 5 6 7 8
part
48
M3 installation SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
screw
104.5
<Breaker mounting>
B
Front panel cutout

67.5
43.1 Terminal block

Terminal
Terminal cover
block
58.5 M3 nut Type A B In case of front connection,
23 NF400-SEP 263 205 keep space between MDU
M3 screw and conductor or insulation
NF400-HEP 393 205 barrier. L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
55
Control power
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
215
Characteristics
NF630-SEP with MDU Model

NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU
300 350 400 500 600 630 400 450 500 600 700 800
NF630-HEP with MDU

Rated ambient temperature 40°C Adjustable Adjustable
NF800-SEP with MDU

Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690 690 690
690V 10/10 15/15 10/10 15/15

NF800-HEP with MDU
500V 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50
440V 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 415V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
380V 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70
230V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
200V 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100
Standard attached parts Mounting screw M6  35 (4pcs)
Breaker
(Front connection) (*1) Insulation barrier (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Breaker MDU, Breaker mounting plate, Mounting screw for breaker mounting plate,
mounting Connection cable (for breaker mounting), MDU Mounting screw
MDU accessories
Panel MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting nut, Connection cable (for
mounting panel mounting), MDU Mounting screw
Note *1 4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.
NF630-SEP with MDU

(Breaker mounting)
10h 10h
Operating characteristics Operating characteristics
5h NF630-SEP with MDU 5h NF800-SEP with MDU
NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU
2h (Magnification to In)
2h (Magnification to In)
1h Note) 1h Note)
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current
30min at 130%
30min at 130%
20min Ir: 300-630A In: 630A 20min Ir: 400-800A In: 800A
790s (TL = 150s set) 790s (TL = 150s set) (Adjustable)
14min (Adjustable) 14min
LTD operating time TL LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% 2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%) (at 200%)
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 5s pickup current Ip Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0) -0.95-1.0)
1s 1s
Pre-alarm Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts
T 0.3±0.06s TL ±20% 0.3±0.06s
0.2s Tp= L ±20% 0.2s Tp=
0.2±0.04s
2 0.2±0.04s 2
(at 200%) 0.1s (at 200%) 0.1±0.03s
0.1s 0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s 0.06±0.02s
0.05s 0.05s
INST pickup current II INST pickup current II
0.02s x4-x15 ±15% 0.02s x4-x12 ±15%
(Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time (Magnification to In) Max. total breaking time
0.01s 0.01s
60 70 100 130 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000 60 70 100 130 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 3000
500 700 2000 4000 500 700 2000 4000
Instantaneous tripping current (% of In) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Operating handle
Rated ambient
130
temperature
7
mounting mounting
120
(*1) AL AX
AL for MDU transmission 110
AX for MDU transmission 100
(*1) (*1) (*1) SHT or UVT
MG EAL TBL characteristics. Reduce the current as
80 shown in the curve on the left chart if the
TBM PAL ATU

ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
70
TI EPAL –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Lead-wire
direction Ambient temperature (°C)
Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.
Type name Reference Type name Reference
Accessories Accessories
Breaker mounting Panel mounting page Breaker mounting Panel mounting page
F − F-8S 117 3P − TCL-8SW3
V − V-8S 119 4P − TCL-8SW4
Terminal cover
HL HL-4SW HL-4SW 3P TTC-8SW3-MDU TTC-8SW3

Handle lock device 127 Skeleton TTC
HL-S − HLS-8SW 4P TTC-8SW4-MDU TTC-8SW4
121
MI 3P MI-8SW3 MI-8SW3 BTC-8SW3
Mechanical interlock 129 3P BTC-8SW3
(*1) 4P MI-8SW4 MI-8SW4 Only line side
Rear BTC
Auxiliary handle HT HT-4SW HT-4SW 128 BTC-8SW4
4P BTC-8SW4
Notes *1 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel mounting can be Only line side
manufactured. 3P
Electrical operation
*2 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the NFM − (*2) 133
breaker unit. device 4P
216
NF630-SEP with MDU · NF630-HEP with MDU · NF800-SEP with MDU · NF800-HEP with MDU
Outline Drawing
Front connection Insulating barrier 70 Conductor t max. 94.5 600AF 44 600AF 24

51 (removable)
35 600AF t8 800AF 46 800AF 26
800AF t12
Mounting hole
8 Breaker
110
87
97 Dimension of terminal
directly connected to
32
103
243
conductor
275
102
15
51
f14
f8
Trip f8.5
75
button
8
Current 8
indication LED
87
600AF 44
12
OVER 70 M6 taps 70
800AF 46 22
85 PAL or f7
32
15
PE 50 30
MDU 40
90
70%
14 210 5 107
Neutral
MDU pole
Conductor t max. 3-pole 4-pole
40 280 131
terminal 600AF t8
f14 800AF t10
140 cover
M12 bolt 155 Drilling plan
210
Conductor drilling
4-pole for direct connection
3-pole
1mm clearance on each side of handle.

Rear connection Front-plate cutout (Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
Connection M6 taps
allowance Stud can be Eddy-current 4-pole 4-pole
rotated 90° or ø7 heat-reducing slit
Mounting 25 Breaker
MDU
plate 3-pole 3-pole
5
Breaker Breaker
15
10
R6 R6
8
12.5
243
295
243
46 46
40
92
13
138
10
70
8 70 51
32 51
6
M6 breaker ø48 70
ø13 140 172
113 110 140 mounting (86)
M12 bolt 210
screw
172
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan <Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)
Panel in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
thickness 4
1-3.2mm
Operation/display from the distribution line. 2
side 75 75 R2 72 40 1
L2
70
12
Panel L1
86.5
90
Control power
28.5
1 2 3 4
M4 screw
40
Panel holder plate

A
MDU display For the set No transmission

Terminal PE screw (M4) part installation Pulse output 113 114
M3 nut
Upper Terminal block MDU connector
40 <Breaker mounting>
side
Front panel cutout
B
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
M3.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
screw
8.5
58.5 Type A B Control power

30 Terminal cover NF630-SEP 253 221
In case of front connection,
M4 screw M3 nut NF800-SEP 263 221 keep space between MDU
and conductor or insulation
54
NF630-HEP
383 221 barrier. 1 2 3 4 5 6
NF800-HEP
No transmission FG
7
Pulse output FG 113 114
NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)

in the figure below must be secured, <Panel mounting>
Operation/display 8
side 6
75 Panel Panel from the distribution line. 5
70 thickness 4
12
3
1-3.2mm 2
1
28.5
Panel holder
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw L2 Control power
38 L1
MDU
86.5
Terminal
90
Upper M3 nut
A
connector 1 2 3 4
side PE screw(M4)
SLD DG DB DA
40
MDU display
For the set 5 6 7 8
part
48
M3 installation SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
screw
104.5
<Breaker mounting>
B
Front panel cutout

67.5
43.1 Terminal block

Terminal
Terminal cover
block
58.5 M3 nut Type A B
23 NF630-SEP 272 221
M3 screw
NF800-SEP 282 221 In case of front connection, L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
55
NF630-HEP keep space between MDU

402 221 and conductor or insulation Control power
NF800-HEP barrier.
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
217
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 5 Miniature Circuit Breakers
BH
Model BH BH-P
BH-P
Rated current (A)
70 70, 100 70, 100 70 70, 100 70, 100
at ambient temperature 40˚C
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
Rated short IEC 60898-1 AC230/400V 3 − 3 −
circuit AC400V − 3 − 3
capacity (kA) − DC125V 1 1
BH BH-P
Operating Characteristics Temperature Compensation Curve

4h 140
Rated ambient temperature

135
2h Type:BH, BH-P
Rated Current:70, 100A 130
1h
Amb. temp.:40°C
125
Current rating (%)
30min
20min 120
14min 115
10min 70, 100A
110
6min
4min 105
2min 100
95
1min
90
30s
85
Operating time
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Max.
10s Ambient temperature (°C)
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
100% of rated current
Outline Drawing
7
Plug-in terminal
•BH Mtg bracket
M5 0.8 screw 32 •BH-P (line side)
7.5
(line side and load side)

57.5
71.5
74
M5 0.8
100
113
screw
73
95
57
95
Breaker
center
25 25 25 60.5
Mtg slot
25 50 57.5
25 50 75 65.5
25 50 75 Mtg hole f4.5
63.5
77.5
22 47 47 20.5 45.5 70.5 79

.5
f5
6
5.5
12
4.5
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 13.5

Conductor drilling
14
Note Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for 2-pole and 3-pole breakers.
218
BH · BH-P · BH-D6 · BH-D10
BH-D6
BH-D10
Model BH-D6 BH-D10
(For DC)
Number of poles (P) 4(3+N) 2(1+N) 4(3+N)

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
BH-D10
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Instantaneous tripping Type B, C, D Type B, C Type B, C, D Type B, C
0.5, 1,
1.6, 2, 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4,
Rated current In (A) 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 6, 10, 13,
3, 4, 6, 10,
at ambient temperature 30°C 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,
13, 16, 20, 50, 63
25, 32, 40
AC 230V 6 − 6 10 − 6 −
IEC60898-1
Rated GB10963.1 230/400V 6 − − 10 − 6 −
short- (Icn)
circuit 400V − 6 − − 10 − 6
capacity IEC60898-2 DC 125V − − 10 −
(kA) GB10963.2
(Icn) 250V − − − 10
Note *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).
BH-D6
4h
4h 4h
2h
Operating Characteristics 2h
2h Operating Characteristics Operating Characteristics
1h Type : BH-D6,BH-10(Type B,C)
1h Type : BH-D6,BH-D10(Type D) 1h Type : BH-D10(Type B,C)
30min Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A
Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A Rated current : DC 0.5A-63A
20min Amb.temp. : 30°C 30min 30min
20min Amb.temp. : 30°C 20min Amb.temp. : 30°C
10min
10min 10min
5min
5min 5min
2min
2min 2min
1min Max.
Max.
Operating time
30s
1min (0.5A-4A) 1min
Operating time
Max.(13A-63A)
Operating time
20s 30s 30s

20s 20s
10s
10s Max.(6A-10A) 10s
5s
5s 5s
2s
2s 2s
1s Min. Min.
1s Min. 1s
0.5s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s B C 0.2s 0.2s B C
0.1s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.01s 0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
100% of rated current 100% of rated current

Outline Drawing Temperature Compensation Curve

M5 screw Neutral pole Neutral pole
(1+N only)
Ambient compensation
44.5
130
7
Rated ambient temp.
45
87
120
Current ratings (%)
110
18 18 36 18 17 44 6
36 54 54 70 max.
100
72
90
80
Solderless terminal –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
1P 2P 3P 4P
219
Characteristics Miniature Circuit Breakers
7 and Dimensions 5 Residual Current Circuit Breakers
BH-DN
Model BH-DN
Number of poles (P) 2 (1+N) (*1)
Instantaneous tripping Type C
6, 10, 16, 20
Rated
short- IEC60898-1
circuit GB10963.1 AC 230V 4.5
capacity (Icn)
(kA)
BH-DN
4h
2h
Type : BH-DN
1h Rated current : 6A-20A
30min Amb.temp.:30°C
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
Max.
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30

M4 screw
Ambient compensation
8.4
18
130
7
N
Rated ambient temp.
120
Current ratings (%)
45
110
100
17
70 max.
90
44
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50

6
45 Solderless
88 terminal
220
Miniature Circuit Breakers · Residual Current Circuit Breakers
BH-DN · BV-D
BV-D
Model BV-D
Number of poles (P) 2 (1+N) (*1) 4 (3+N) (*1) (*2)
Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC) 230 230/400
25, 40, 63
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 30, 300
Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Residual operation Dependent on line voltage
500 (In 25, 40A)
Rated making and breaking capacity Im (A)
630 (In63A)
Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc (kA) 6
500 (In 25, 40A)
Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm (A)
630 (In63A)
Rated conditional residual short-circuit current IΔc (kA) 6
Notes *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).
*2 For use to three phase 4-wire type. When using, it be sure to connect the neutral wire to the
neutral phase. Not available for use to three phase 3-wire type.
BV-D
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
Operating time
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
25 50 100 500
Ground-fault current
(% of rated current sensitivity)
Outline Drawing
Residual
M5 screw Test button indicator
7
42.5
45
85
18
17 44 6
18 54
36 70 max.
72
Solderless terminal
2P 4P
221
Characteristics Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection
7 and Dimensions 5 Isolating Switches
BV-DN
Model BV-DN
Number of poles (P) 2 (1+N) (*1)
Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC) 230
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Instantaneous tripping Type C
Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA) 30, 100, 300
Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Residual operation Dependent on line voltage
Rated IEC61009-1
short-circuit GB16917.1 AC 230V 4.5
capacity (kA) (Icn)
BV-DN
4h 4h
2h Operating Characteristics 2h
Type : BV-DN 1h
1h
Rated current : 6A-40A
30min Amb.temp.:30°C 30min
20min
10min 10min
6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.04s
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 25 50 100 500
Ground-fault current
(% of rated current sensitivity)

Test button
M4 screw Residual indicator
130
Rated ambient temp.
7
36
8.4
120
N
Current ratings (%)
110
45
100
17
90
70 max.
80
44
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50

6
45 Solderless
88 terminal
222
Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection · Isolating Switches
BV-DN · KB-D
KB-D
Model KB-D
Number of poles (P) 1 2 3 4 (3+N) (*1)
Utilization category AC22A class
Rated voltage Ue (VAC) 230 400
32, 63, 80
Short-time withstand current (A) 203In , 1sec
Short-time making current (A) 203In
KB-D
Outline Drawing
M5 screw Neutral pole
44.5
87
45
18 18 36 18 17 44 6
36 54 54 70 max.
72
Solderless terminal
1P 2P 3P 4P
7
223
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 6 Circuit Protectors
CP30-BA Number of poles

Frame (A)
Model
1
30
CP30-BA
2 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,
Rated current (A)
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
AC (V) 250
UL 1077 Rated voltage (V)
DC (V) 65 125 −
CSA C22.2
No.235 AC 2.5kA at 250V
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V −
Rated short- Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250
circuit IEC 60934
capacity (kA) EN 60934 AC 2.5kA at 230V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V −
EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250

IEC 60947-2 AC 2.5/2.5kA at 230V
(Icu/Ics) DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V −
AC-DC common use −
CP30-BA 
Instantaneous type (I)
Operating characteristics Medium type (M),(MD)
Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only
Mode of tripping
Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F):hydraulic-magnetic
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S)
2h 2h 2h 2h
1h DC 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min DC 40min DC 40min DC
20min 20min AC 20min AC 20min AC

AC
10min 10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min 2min
1min 1min 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s 0.2s 0.2s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s 0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
100 150 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 135 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
125 180 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700 125 400 700
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
Medium type with inertial delay (MD) Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
Outline Drawing 1h
2h
1h
2h
40min 40min
20min 20min
•CP30-BA 10min 10min
6min 6min
12 29.5 47 35 4min 4min
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal cover 22.5 IEC 35mm 2min 2min
cover cover cover rail 1min 1min

Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
22.5
ON ON ON 2s 2s
1s 1s
39
54
73
67
56
63
0.5s 0.5s
7
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
9.5
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
5.5
(3)
0.01s 0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
19 125 400 700 125 400 700
Mounting hole
9.5 9.5 9.5 ø4.5 31.5
63 Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
17.5 17.5 17.5
65 3
17.5 35 52.5
Terminal block of internal accessaries (AL, AX, SHT)
17.5 17.5
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5
(Plus minus self-up screw)
AXc
AXb
12
AXc
AXb
12
AXc
AXb
12
(The figure shows auxiliary switch.
Example: Auxiliary switch)
Temperature Characteristics Curve
11 11 11
AXa
14
AXa
14
AXa
14 Main terminal
(Plus minus self-up screw)
M4·····20A max. 300
Operating time variation (%)
M5·····20A over
250
200
5

150
Mounting dimension Rated ambient
temperature
100
90
80
70
54
60
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
12 29.5 47
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 2-M4 tap
2-M tap 2-M tap Tightening torque 1-1.4 (N·m)
224
Characteristics
7 and Dimensions 7 Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers
(1) Dimensions of electrical operated circuit breakers

The following concept is applied for the dimensions of the electrical operated circuit breaker. Please understand this before
using this type of breaker.
Connection method Outline dimensions listing method
Model Listed page Model Listed page

NF125-CV/SV/HV NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
229
NV125-CV/SV/HV NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF125-UV (*1) NF400-UEW (3P)
230
NF125-SEV/HEV/RV/ZEV NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF400-UEW (4P)
Front connection
NF250-RV NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
(Rear connection)
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/SDW
230
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF800-UEW 231
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV800-SEW/HEW
NV125-SEV/HEV
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV 232
NF1600-SEW/SDW
NF250-UV (*1)
Rear connection The drilling dimensions and connection related dimensions are the same as the dimensions for the breaker body. Refer to the dimension drawings of
Plug-in each model. Note that for the rear connection type, four mounting holes are required even for the 2-pole or 3-pole types.
(2) Front connection (Rear connection)

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV
Front connection
Operation circuit terminal Center line of electrical operation device
Insulation barrier cover mounting screw
(removable) Operation circuit terminal board Operation circuit terminal cover (Standard supply)
(M3 tapping)
(M3.5 screw) Power supply module Center line of electrical
Breaker operation device
Manual handle M8 screw 24
OFF
50
lock plate
25
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ON button A B A B
R1
112
130
111
78
86
80
39
41
Manual/automatic B A B A
selection switch Electrically
operated base 61
30 Neutral pole 158
60 Front plate 30 30 88
86 86 164 M4 0.7 screw
OPEN (TRIP)
button 90 90 Display hole or f5
90 (ON (green), OFF (red), TRIP (yellow)) 3-pole 4-pole
120 Front plate cut out
3-pole 4-pole Test button Drilling plan
Remarks: 1. This cannot be mounted on the 2-pole breaker.

2. The test button is equipped only on the earth leakage circuit breaker.
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RV

NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RV
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
Front connection
7
Center line of electrical operation device Operation circuit terminal Operation circuit terminal cover
Display hole cover mounting screw (Standard supply)
(ON (green), OFF (red), TRIP (yellow)) (M3 tapping)
Operation circuit terminal board Power supply Hexagon socket M8 bolt

Insulation barrier
(M3.5 screw) module
(removable) Center line of electrical operation device
24
15.5
Breaker
100
OFF
lock plate
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ON button A B A B
R1
86
80
78
144
165
126
31
32
33
Manual/automatic B A B A
Manual handle
selection switch
Electrically 44
operated base
61 35 35
100
OPEN (TRIP) M4 0.7 screw 88

158
button Front plate or f5
70 35 164
86 Neutral pole 3-pole 4-pole
86 Front plate cut out
90
105 90 Drilling plan
105 Test button
140 Remarks: 1. The test button is equipped only on the earth leakage circuit breaker.
3-pole
2. For details of external dimensions of breakers, please refer external
4-pole dimension drawing of each model.
225
Characteristics
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW,

NF630-REW Motor drive type
Front connection Center line of electrical operation device Center line of breaker Max. conductor thickness
Insulating barrier 231 400A frame: t=8
Center line of electrical operation 600/630A frame: t=10 44
device and breaker 8
Breaker Operation circuit Breaker
110
terminal block (M3.5 screw)
70
194
120
257
277
44
44 44
44
M6 or f7
43
16
94.5
112 22 28
195
2- and 3-pole 4-pole
f14 M12 bolt
140 56
255
Trip button 231 168
185 Drilling plan
196
2- and 3-pole
4-pole Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.
NF400-UEW (3-pole) Motor drive type

Insulating barrier
Front connection Center line of electrical operation Breaker
Conductor thickness 127.5
device and breaker Operation circuit t=8 max. 78
terminal block 8
Center of breaker M3.5 screw
110
Breaker
f12.5
Center line of electrical
f7
43
operation device
47
70
234
297
120
277
257
144
20
ø12.5
ø7
44
44 M6 screw
110
or f7
16
43
141
191.5
28 292
112 f14 M12 bolt 352 Drilling plan
Trip button 140
231
NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW, NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW,

NV630-HEW Motor drive type
Front connection Max. conductor thickness
Center line of electrical operation device Center line of breaker
231 400A frame: t=8
Center line of electrical Insulating barrier
operation device and breaker 600A frame: t=10 44
Operation circuit 8
Breaker terminal block Breaker
110
M3.5 screw
70
194
120
257
277
44 Test button
44 M6 screw 44
44
43
or f7
16
94.5
112 22 28
7
f14 M12 bolt 195 3-pole 4-pole
140 56 255
Trip button 231 168
185
3-pole 196 Drilling plan
4-pole
NF400-UEW (4-pole) Motor drive type

Front connection Center line of electrical

Center line of breaker
operation device 143

f14 M12 bolt 97
Conductor thickness
35 t=8 max. 6.5
Breaker
16
110
f14
f7
48
15
290
322
275
112
f14
ø7
48
140
M6 screw
35 Neutral pole 6.5 or f7
70 141
210 191.5 Drilling plan
Operation circuit
280 terminal block 292
231 M3.5 screw 352
226
Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW Motor drive type

Front connection
Center line of electrical Center line of breaker

operation device Operation circuit
operation device and breaker Insulating barrier terminal block 46
M3.5 screw 8
Conductor
thickness
Breaker
110
Breaker t=12 max.
70
275
243
120
277
44
Neutral
pole
15 32 8
70 70
87
M6 screw
46 or f7
Trip button
140
35 40 2- and 3-pole 4-pole
210 70 94.5
231 210 f14 M12 bolt 195
280 255 Drilling plan
2- and 3-pole 231
4-pole
NF800-UEW Motor drive type

Front connection
Center line of electrical Center line of electrical Center line of breaker

operation device and breaker operation device 143
40 Conductor 64
Insulating barrier 14 thickness
Center line of breaker 8
t=8 max.
15
Breaker
Center line of Breaker
110
8 32
87
f14
electrical
f7
operation device
15
322
70
290
290
120
277
275
112
f14
44
f7
23.5
87
70 M6 screw 140
Trip button 35 8 or f7
140 143 3-pole 4-pole
70 Neutral pole
210 191.5
231 210 Operation circuit
280 terminal block
292 Drilling plan
M3.5 screw 352
3-pole f14 M12 bolt 231
4-pole
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Motor drive type

Front connection

Insulating barrier
Conductor
46
7
operation device and breaker 14 Breaker 8
thickness
t=12 max. Breaker
110
87

70
243
120
277
275
Operation circuit
44 terminal block
M3.5 screw
8
70 M6 screw or f7
87
32
46
Trip button 94.5
15
40
Test button 195 Drilling plan
140
210 255
231
f14 M12 bolt
227
Characteristics
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1250-SDW Motor drive type

Front connection
280 (4-pole)
Center line of
210 (4-pole) Conductor thickness
4-pole breaker 55
70 t=82 max.
Insulating barrier 15
Bolt max.
Breaker
M1250
110
Operation circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
61
406
120
375
44
13
8
Neutral pole
70 70
80
15 32
59 M8 screw
43 or f10
Center line of electrical 140
140 operation device and 3-pole 4-pole
f13 M12 bolt 231
210 (3 -pole) 3-pole breaker 290
Drilling plan
NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW Motor drive type

Front connection
60
ø 11 t=6 width 75 max. 20
38
Bolt max. M1065
15
(185.5)
(185.5)
Breaker
38
Operation circuit
terminal block
61
375
120
M3.5 screw
406
35
44 Center line of electrical 210
210
130
115
70 70 M8 screw
69.5 or f10
101.5 140
203
304.5 231 3-pole 4-pole
263
364.5 290
Neutral pole Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
7
228
Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers
NF1600-SEW (3-pole) Motor drive type

Rear connection Mounting angle
Operation circuit
terminal block Connection Mounting angle Breaker
M3.5 screw allowance
15 Conductor thickness t=6 width 75 max.
18.5
160 or more
20
109
269
61
406
120
or less
f17.5
81.5
f9.5
273
100
38 15
44
38
60
36
M8 screw
or f10
f11 70
140 231 125 38 15 212
Bolt M1050
210 290 200
Bottom view Drilling plan
NF1600-SEW (4-pole) Motor drive type

Rear connection Operation circuit Mounting angle
210 terminal block Stud can be
M3.5 screw Connection rotated 90°
35 Mounting angle Breaker
allowance
Conductor thickness
15 t=6 width 75 max.
18.5
160 or more
20
109
269
61
406
120
273
ø17.5
ø9.5
100 or less
81.5
44
18
38
54
15
38 18
231 60
70 20 f11 106 106 M8 screw
290 125 70 or f10
Center line of electrical 210 Bolt M1050 318
NF1600-SDW (3-pole) Motor-drive type

Operation circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be turned 90º. Mounting angle Breaker
Rear connection M3.5 screw Connection
allowance Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max.
15
18.5
160 or more
20
109
61
375
406
120
233
175 or more
38 15
36
44
f17.5
38
60
f11
f9.5
Bolt M1050 70 M8 screw

140 231 125 38 15 212
or f10
7
210 290 200
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
NF1600-SDW (4-pole) Motor-drive type

Rear connection
Operation circuit
210 terminal block Mounting angle
M3.5 screw Stud in horizontal direction.
35 Connection
It cannot be turned 90°. Mounting angle Breaker
allowance
15 Conductor thickness
18.5 t=6width 75 max.
175 or more 160 or more
20
109
61
406
120
233
375
44
f17.5
f9.5
38
38
15
18
231 60
70 f11 106 106
Center of electrical 290 125 Bolt M1050 70 M8 screw
210 318 or f10
operation device
280
229
7
230
MEMO
Handling and Maintenance
8
1) Storage and Transportation… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
2) Standard Working Conditions… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
3) Mounting and Connections … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
4) Maintenance and Inspections… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
232
232
232
234
5) Troubleshooting… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 236
231
8 Handling and Maintenance
1. Storage and Transportation

(1) Precautions for storage
Avoid corrosive gases Store in the OFF or tripped state Avoid moisture
H 2S Ammonia
Do not store the product in an atmosphere

containing acidic gas or ammonia gas.
H2S 0.01ppm or less SO2 0.05ppm or less Store the breaker in the OFF state or tripped Do not leave the breaker in a humid place for long
NH3 0.25ppm or less state. periods of time.
(2) Precautions for transportation

Carefully pack and transport Do not carry by holding the Do not carry by the lead wires Do not transport upside down
front and back of the flush plate (when mounted on IEC 35mm rail)
Do not drop the package during

transportation. When shipping the Do not carry the embedded type breaker by Do not carry the accessories by the Do not transport a panel containing
breaker, make sure to package it holding the front and back of the flush plate. lead wires. Excessive force will be parts mounted on an IEC 35mm rail in
carefully. The breaker could drop during transportation. applied on the accessories. an upside down state.
2. Standard Working Conditions

Working ambient temperature … -10°C to 40°C Relative humidity … 85% or less with no dew condensation.
(Note that the 24-hour average value must not exceed 35°C) Altitude … 2000m or less
working current reduction rate in ambient temperature exceeding 40°C. Atmosphere … Free of excessive moisture, oil vapors,
50°C… 0.9 fold smoke, dust, salt, corrosive substances,
60°C… 0.7 fold vibration or impact, etc.
3. Mounting and Connections

(1) Precautions for mounting
Attention to dust and cutting chips! Do not block ventilation ports Avoid direct sunlight Do not remove the rear cover
Make sure that the breaker does not Do not block the ventilation ports. The Make sure that the breaker is not subject to
come in contact with rain water, oil, dust breaker performance could drop. direct sunlight during use. An increase in
or cutting chips. Special attention must Ensure the insulation distance for temperature could cause malfunctions.
be taken to conductive materials such as breaker mounting indicated on page Sunlight could also discolor the nameplate Do not remove the rear cover from the
scraps from drilling steel plates. 101. and molded case, etc. back of the base.
Mounting style Do not wipe with thinner,

8 Pay attention to the mounting angle of the following
models as the overcurrent tripping characteristics may
107%
100%
93%
detergent or chemical cloth
vary according to the mounting stye. Use in a vertical ON

ON
direction is recommended. ON
ON
• NF30-CS 110% 90%
• CP30-BA ON
ON
ON ON
107% 93%
100%
Do not use thinner, etc., to clean the
Rate of change of rated current by mounting angle surface of the breaker.
Use compressed air or a dry cloth to clean.
232
(2) Precautions for Connections

Oiling of threads prohibited Connect conductors parallel to each pole Do not deform studs
 Do not apply lubricant to the threads. Oil will decrease the

friction at threads and cause the screws to loosen easily,  Connect each connection conductor so it is parallel  When connecting the conductors on the
and the unit to overheat. Excessive stress will be applied to each pole. rear connection type, take care not to
on the threads even with the standard tightening torque deform the studs when tightening.
and can cause the screws to break.
Do not connect in reverse

Securely fix conductors Electromagnetic force applied per 1m conductor
d A large electromagnetic force is
(During 3-phase short-circuit)
applied on the connected Distance between conductors
Current 10 20
conductor according to the target value kA(Pf) cm
accident current. Use the
10 (0.4) 490 245
conditions on the right as guide
and securely fix (tighten) the 18 (0.3) 1860 930
conductors. 25 (0.2) 4410 2205
35 (0.2) 8720 4360
Set power to ON side ···

42 (0.2) 12545 6270
50 (0.2) 17835 8920
d As a rule, do not connect the power and load
in reverse. If necessary, refer to the 65 (0.2) 30185 15090
specifications and select a model which can Insulating support
85 (0.2) 51550 25775
be connected in reverse.
100 (0.2) 71540 35770
d An insulating barrier should be provided on
both the power and load sides of the 125 (0.2) 111720 55860
breakers when using a high voltage circuit
where dew condenses easily or in a circuit
which has a reverse connection in the
circuit.
Bar Connection ELCB (NV) connection

100V
d When directly connecting the conductor, d When using a single-phase 3-wire method, connect 200V
100V
refer to the outline drawings and drill the the neutral pole to the NC’s center pole.
conductor. NV
d When connecting the conductors to a bar terminal,
pay attention to the insulating distance with the Connection
band
ground. A ground fault prevention barrier is

available as an option.
d When using a 3-pole ELCB with a single-phase 1φ2W
Wire retention type connection 2-wire, connect to the left and right poles (poles at
both sides) of ELCB.
NV
d When directly connecting to the terminal,

insert the single strand or stranded wires in
straight and then tighten.
A commercially-available crimp terminal or
bar can be connected directly. d Never connect the ELCB units in parallel as it will create
d When using stranded wires, split them and then a loop circuit, and could burn the magnetic device.
tighten.
d Never connect the MCCB and ELCB in parallel.
Solderless terminal connection

d Untwist the connection wires, align the core wires and then tighten.
The wires will loosen up during use, and must be tightened during periodic maintenance.
d Do not solder or bind the end of the strands.
8
d Make sure not to catch the insulating sheath of the wire when tightening.
233
4. Maintenance and Inspections

(1) Initial inspections
After installing the MCCB and ELCB, inspect the following matters before powering the units.
Model Inspection items Criterion Remarks

1. Are there any excessive screws, drilling scraps, wire scraps
All conductive material must be removed.
or any other conductive materials around the terminals?
2. Are there any cracks or damage on the cover or base? No cracks or breaks allowed.
Common
3. Is there any dew condensation on the cover, base or terminals? No dew condensation allowed.
4. Measure the insulation resistance with a 500V insulation resistance tester. 5MΩ or more Refer to Precautions w for the ELCB.
5. Are the connector connections tightened securely? Must be specified tightening torque.
6. Are the ELCB rated voltage and circuit voltage the same? Voltages must be the same.
ELCB
7. Apply voltage, press the test button and check the operation. Must trip with an earth leak.
Precautions
qWithstand voltage test wInsulation resistance measurement and withstand voltage test
A guide for the test is given on the following. Do not perform The restrictions a and b apply to the following models.
a withstand voltage test exceeding these levels. (Note) Test Applicable models: Earth leakage circuit breaker, Measuring display unit
the operating circuit between the live section and ground. breaker.
(Application time: one minute) (Unit: V) Test Insulation resistance Withstand
Main circuit Auxiliary circuit or control circuit Measurement position measurement voltage test
Test voltage Rated insulation Test voltage State of handle ON OFF ON OFF
Rated insulation (effective value voltage of (effective value Between live section of main circuit and ground
voltage for alternating operating for alternating Between left - middle, middle - right,
current) circuit current) left - right poles
Line side
Between different poles
Between left - neutral pole, (*1) (*1)

middle - neutral poles
right - neutral poles
(min. 1500) Between left - middle, middle - right,
Load side
left - right poles

Between left - neutral poles, (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
middle - neutral poles
right - neutral poles
Between power - load side terminals
Between main circuit live sections - operating circuit live sections
Between operating circuit live section - ground
Note *1 Values in parentheses apply for measuring display unit breaker.
(2) Periodic inspections Inspection Interval Guide

1 Clean and dry environment Once every 2 to 3 years
To prevent trouble and ensure the breaker operates safely for a

Environment with low levels of dust,
long time, inspect the breaker one month after starting use and 2 Once a year
corrosive gas, vapors, salt, etc.
periodically thereafter according to the environmental conditions. 3 Places other than 1 or 2 Once every six months
Model Inspection items Criterion Remarks

1. Are any of the conductors loose? If any conductor is loose, tighten again with the appropriate
No conductor must be loose.
torque given in Tables 5-5 and 5-6 on pages 97 to 98.
2. Is any cover or base cracked? Is any handle
There must be no cracks, damage or breaks.
damaged?
3. Has the breaker been submerged and If water has infiltrated the breaker, it must be
There must be no infiltration of water,
infiltrated with water? Is the breaker heavily replaced with a new part or overhauled by the
heavy mud or dust.
dirtied by mud or dust? Mitsubishi Service Center.
(1) Visually inspect that none of the studs on the
Common backs of the terminals, or the breaker’s tightened There may be a light temperature difference
or molded sections are discolored from burning. between the following terminals.
8 4. Has the temperature risen abnormally?

(2) There must be no especially high temperature rise when
the current at each phase is balanced. (Tolerable
Between the power side terminal and load
side terminal
Between the center pole terminal and left
maximum value for terminal temperature rise: 60K)
(3) There should be no difference on the left and right side and right pole terminals.
of the base sides if the load current is balanced.
5. Can the handle be turned ON and OFF smoothly? Should operate smoothly. Open and close a normally closed breaker periodically.
6. Does pressing the TRIP button result in a trip? Must be resettable after tripping. This will clean the contact and prevent abnormal heating.
NV 7. Test by pressing the TEST button. Must operate properly and close again. Test the operation once a month.
234
(3) Inspection after Tripping

Whether the circuit breaker can be reused or must be replaced after switching off a fault current depends on the intensity of
the current which was switched off.
Intensity of trip current, degree of MCCB and ELCB damage, and countermeasures
Intensity of trip current Degree of MCCB and ELCB damage Countermeasures
When it is clear that the circuit breaker operated Reusable
No abnormality such as contamination
within the time-delay trip range (The circuit breaker can function 50 times (100A or less) at
around vent observed
(Overcurrent up to 10 times of rated current) overload current which is 6 times higher than rated current)
Relatively low short-circuit current which causes Soot and dust found near vent Reusable
instantaneous tripping
Soot and dust found near handle, remarkable

Large short-circuit current close to rated contamination found near vent Replace with a new part
breaking capacity Molten metal found in circuit breaker
Box of box type circuit breaker is severely deformed
If the intensity of the fault current cannot be estimated, remove the MCCB and ELCB, and measure the insulation resistance. If the specified value (5MΩ) has
not been reached, perform a withstand voltage test. If the withstand voltage is within the specified value, the circuit breaker can be used temporarily but it
should be replaced with a new part as soon as possible. If both the insulation resistance and withstand voltage are sufficient, the circuit breaker may be
judged as reusable. However, it should be checked for abnormalities, such as an abnormal rise in temperature for a set period.
d Measure the insulation resistance and perform the withstand voltage test with the procedures given in section 1 and 2 on page 238.
d Check that the ELCB operates when the test button is pressed.
(4) Guide to service life

Maintenance and inspection must be conducted according to the environment in which the circuit breaker is installed.
The service life of the circuit breaker cannot be determined just by the number of service years.
A reference to the service life is given below, but the circuit breaker must be diagnosed by a specialist for an accurate reading.
Guide to service life
Guide for Number of operating Number of tripping times by
Size of circuit
Degree Environment Example replacement cycles (times) shunt tripping device or
Standard breaker frame
(years) No undervoltage tripping device,
(A) Energization energization Total
or by trip button
Dust-proof and
Place where air is JIS C 8201-2-1 100 or less 1500 8500 10000
1 air-conditioned Approx. 10 to 20
Standard usage
always clean and dry Ann.2

electrical room JIS C 8201-2-2 More than 100, 315 or less 1000 7000 8000
Ann.2
JIS C 8201-2-1 10% of total
state
Circuit-breakers housed in
Ann.1 More than 315, 630 or less 1000 4000 5000
operating cycles
Indoors, where there distribution panels or boxes JIS C 8201-2-2
2 is little dust and no within an individual electric Ann.1 More than 630, 2500 or less 500 2500 3000
Approx. 7 to 15 IEC 60947-2
corrosive gas room having no dust-proofing
(*1) More than 2500 500 1500 2000

or air-conditioning
Note *1 The number of trips by the ELCB test button is one-third the number of energizations.
Place with gases such Geothermal power
as sulfuric acid, hydrogen house, sewage treatment
Poor environment
1 sulfide, salt and high plans, iron and steel Approx. 3 to 7

levels of moisture, works, paper and pulp
but low levels of dust plants, etc.
Place with high levels
of gas and dust which Chemical plants,
2 Approx. 1 to 3
humans cannot endure quarries, mines, etc.
for long periods of time
The operating life shortens as the circuit breaker frame size increases. (Refer to above tables.)
These values may seem low, but since this circuit breaker is a protective device, it basically differs from a switch intended for
frequent opening and closing.
For tripping by a shunt tripping device, the life is especially short and special consideration should be taken.
WARNING Continuing user of a circuit breaker which has reached its service life can result in the following
8
problems. Always update the circuit breakers accordingly.
q Insulation fault: Risk of burning, internal short-circuit, and electric shock.

w Energizing fault: Burning or unnecessary operations caused by overheating of the internal parts, etc.
e Operation fault: ON and OFF operation of the circuit may be disabled.
r Tripping fault: Protection of the load device or wiring, etc., may be disabled.
CAUTION When the operating endurance exceeds the specified value, the above faults could occur or the internal
conductor could break, overheat or burn. 235
5. Troubleshooting
(1) Troubleshooting for breaker unit (MCCB, ELCB)
Fault state Cause Countermeasures and Actions
Foreign matter in switching mechanism Remove the foreign matter
Can’t close Breaker hasn’t been reset Reset again
Breaker can’t be reset See below(*) See below
Operation errors
Excessive use of shunt trip operation Replace with new part. Change shunt trip to electric operation
Wear due to tripping endurance
End of service life Replace with new part
Reset mechanism is faulty Improper adjustment Return for repairs
(*)
Undervoltage coil is not excited Careless operation Excite the coil
Can’t reset
Resetting time has not elapsed Wait for bimetal to cool down
Can’t trip
Switching spring is broken or Breakage caused by initial trouble Return for repairs
Can’t turn OFF
fatigued End of service life Replace with new part
Contact has fused because of excessive interruptive current Replace with large capacity breaker
Insufficient lubricant (grease) Return for repairs
Excessive power during operation Replace handle
Broken handle Positional relation of external operation handle and Replace handle
breaker is poor Correct positional relation
Remove foreign matter (if cover is removable)
Foreign matter caught between contacts
Return for repairs (if cover is not removable)
Poor energizing
Fusion at conductive section Excessive interrupting current Replace with new part having large interruptive capacity
Excessive wear of contacts Short-circuit current cut off End of service life Replace with new part
Broken rated changeover screw Excessive tightening torque (Tighten with 0.3 to 0.45N·m) Return for repairs
Incorrect selection
Change the selection
Ambient temperature is high (temperature compensation)
Operates under Panel is sealed Ventilate
normal load Excessive temperature rise Loosening at terminal connections Tighten
Load current contains high levels of high-frequency distortion Insert a reactor and decrease distortion factor
Measuring instrument is reading small measurement values because of distorted current Correctly specify the rated values by using real meters with effective value
Overcurrent Rated current setting value is too low Correct the rated current setting
Electronic
indicator Rated current changeover screw was not tightened Correctly tighten the rated current changeover screw Tightening torque 0.3 to 0.45N·m
type
Annoying operation
LED is ON Failure of rated current changeover section Return for repairs

Heating caused by repeated starting current Incorrect selection Replace with breaker having higher rating
Malfunctions when starting
Long starting time Incorrect selection Replace with breaker having higher rating
Starting current is too high Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating
Starting rush current is too high Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating
Excessive current during delta-star starting changeover Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker
Momentarily functions Excessive current due to reversible operation having higher rating
when starting Rush current during instantaneous restart Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating
Rare short-circuit of motor Repair the motor

Bimetal reset incomplete after instantaneous tripping Allow to properly reset
Abnormal current passed simultaneously with closing (short-circuit closing) Inspect the circuit and remove the cause
Antenna for transceiver (5W or higher) was seated against
Operates during use Use the transformer at least 1m away from the electronic type MCCB
electronic type MCCB body during transmission
Dust is accumulated Remove the cause or replace with new part
Short-circuit on power side
Conductive matter has dropped into power side Remove the cause or replace with new part
Terminal temperature is high Improper tightening Improper maintenance Tighten
Complete electromagnetic type being used at a high frequency (400Hz, etc.) Replace with breaker having suitable frequency
Temperature rise
Mold side temperature is

Load current contains high levels of high-frequency distortion Insert a reactor and decrease distortion factor
high
Incorrect measurement resulting from touch Measure with a measuring instrument
Studs are loose Tighten
Heating at stud tightening Contact fault between stud conductor and body terminal Reassemble the stud
section Groove to reduce overcurrent heating not grooved on rear connection
Machine grooves to reduce overcurrent heating
type’s steel mounting plate (400A frame and larger)
8
Selected rated current is too high Replace with a breaker having a lower current
operate No operation
Applied frequency is incorrect Replace with breaker having suitable frequency

No tripping at overcurrent
Backup breaker’s instantaneous Lower the instantaneous electromagnetic setting
Backup breaker has tripped
tripping current is too low Raise the electromagnetic setting for the backup breaker, or change the rating
with tester
Overcurrent indication LED does

Does not
not turn ON, or turns ON and then Breaker tester’s battery is spent Replace the breaker tester’s battery
OFF before specified time
type MCCB
electronic
Overcurrent indication LED turns

ON and then OFF after specified Tripping mechanism is faulty Return for repairs
time, but does not trip
236
(2) Troubleshooting for leakage operation section

Operates simultaneously with closing

The wiring is long creating a large ground electrostatic capacity, Change the rated sensitivity current or install
The leakage mechanism
Annoying operation
and causes a leakage current flow the ELCB near the load
operates, such as the
leakage indication button ELCB units are being used in parallel, or is incorrectly connected with
pops out a neutral wire, etc. Use the correct wiring
An excessive surge, such as inducted lightning, has infiltrated the unit Install a surge absorber, etc., near the circuit
Operates during use
Induction noise from a nearby large current bus, etc., has infiltrated the unit Avoid sources of noise
Operation
Leakage operation occurs when LED is faulty or is at end of service life Replace with new part
errors
the test button is pressed, etc.,

but there is not indication The indicator button is improperly adjusted and does not protrude Return for repairs
Electronic circuit section is faulty Replace with new part

No operation
No operation takes place

when the test button is pressed Voltage is not applied Apply the specified voltage
Contact continuity is faulty Remove the foreign matter from the contact
Remarks: 1. When using a transceiver, use at least 1m away from the electronic MCCB and ELCB.
(3) Troubleshooting for accessories

Operation circuit wire capacity

Use a larger operation circuit wire
Operation power voltage is insufficient
has dropped Operation power capacity is
Improve the operation power
insufficient
Operation disabled Resistor or motor is burned Excessive continuous operation Return for repairs (motor replacement)
Connection is incorrect Use the correct wiring

NFM
NVM Applied voltage is incorrect Apply the correct operation voltage
(Electric operation device)
ON and OFF circuits are operating simultaneously,
Provide an interlock at the pushbutton
operation is mistaken
Continuous idling
For the self-holding type, the auxiliary switch contact is used for Use the alarm switch contact for the
automatic reset automatic reset contact
Voltage ripping in the OFF state, or tripping caused by undervoltage

One idle run when Turn OFF once to reset, and then
closing turn ON again
Breaker itself has automatically cut-off and tripped

Applied frequency or voltage is incorrect Improve the power
Closing disabled
UVT
(Undervoltage tripping device) Doesn’t attract voltage drop is large Improve the voltage
Doesn’t trip even when

voltage is absent Breaker’s tripping mechanism is faulty Return for repairs
Operation voltage has dropped Improve the power

Insufficient voltage
Applied voltage is incorrect Improve the power
Return for repairs (coil replacement,

Coil is continuously excited installation of burn prevention
SHT auxiliary coil)
(Shunt tripping device) Doesn’t trip
Operation voltage has dropped Return for repairs
Coil is burnt causing continuous excitation (coil replacement), improve power
Burn preventing auxiliary Return for repairs
contact is faulty (coil replacement, contact repair)
Abnormal voltage is applied

Return for repairs
(coil replacement) 8
Contact fault caused by overcurrent Return for repairs
AL (Alarm switch)
AX (Auxiliary switch) Connection mistaken during Refer to nameplate and
Incorrect connection correct the wiring
installation
EAL (Earth leakage alarm contact) Malfunction
Return for repairs
TBM (Test button module) Microload Incorrect selection (replacement with type for microloads)
PAL (Pre-alarm) Insufficient tightening Return for repairs
Loose mounting screws
Vibration during transportation (readjustment)
237
(4) Cases of unnecessary ELCB operation
Even if the ELCB is not faulty, there may be a problem in the circuit which causes frequent operation or instantaneous
operation at closing. Refer to the following section and incorporate it as part of the circuit inspection and troubleshooting.
Tr
The following five conditions are the most
High voltage
M conceivable causes of trips in cases such as
1 2 3
when the breaker trips immediately after the
5
Induced lightning Effect of Occurrence ELCB is closed, or when the breaker trips
external of switching Large current
magnetic surge at starting suddenly during use but inspection of circuit
field shows no ground fault accidents. Check each
4
Ground item and if any problems are found, correct
electrostatic them accordingly.
Grounding Grounding
capacity
ig
Cause Countermeasures
All models incorporate a non-operating shock structure and should sufficiently withstand 7kV (JIS Standards), so
1 Induction lightning
unnecessary operation should not occur.
The ZCT is equipped with a magnetic shield, and is not affected easily. However, the breaker could operate if there are
2 External magnetic field large current buses reaching several thousand amperes near the ELCB, or if there is a short-circuit fault in nearby circuit.
Separate the ELCB from the large current bus wires by at least 10cm.
All models incorporate a non-operating shock structure and should not operate unnecessarily. However if there is a
3 Switching surge time lag in the closing time of each pole in the magnetic switch, unnecessary operation could occur due to the
relation of the ground electrostatic capacity.

If the wires are stored in a metal conduit or metal duct wiring, the ground electrostatic capacity will increase
compared to other wiring methods. This may cause the leakage current to constantly increase. If the magnetic
switch chatters, etc., the leakage current may become temporarily unbalanced thus reaching a leakage current
equivalent to the sensitivity current and causing unnecessary operation.
4 Effect of ground Review the following matters in this case.
electrostatic capacity 1) Shorten the load circuit line, or install the ELCB near the load (device) being used.
(Install in a branch circuit.)
2) Lead the control circuit for the control device, etc., from the power on the ELCB side.
3) If the above measures are difficult or if they cause further unnecessary operation, reconsider the selected
ELCB rated sensitivity current.
8 The ZCT is made of high-grade permalloy, a material with Ni as its main element and which has outstanding
residual magnetic characteristics. The periphery of the ZCT is covered with material having outstanding magnetic
characteristics, creating a complete magnetic shield. This suppresses the effect of residual currents to the
5 Equilibrium properties
minimum, and prevents the breaker from unnecessarily operating even near a current of several thousand
caused by large current
amperes.
at starting
In the relay, the characteristics change if the primary conductor is bent immediately after it is passed through the
ZCT. Thus, when passing a primary conductor with current of 300A or more through the ZCT, keep the conductor
straight for at least 30cm on either side.
238
Appendix
1) Handle Operation Angle Dimensions… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………
3) ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4) List of Product Weights… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
9
2) MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions…………………………
240
241
242
243
5) Switching the Adjustable Items………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 244
6) Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 247
7) List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values… …………………………………………………………………………………………… 248
8) Ordering Information… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 249
9) Melshort 2………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 251
10) Low-Voltage Products Website… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 252
239
9 Appendix
1. Handle Operation Angle Dimensions

(Line side) (Line side)
ON
Trip Center of handle

a
c
C
H
D
cL cL
F
G
b
d
OFF Center of handle
E
Reset
Table of dimension variations

Operation angle (° )
Model Dimensions (mm)
Class
ON OFF Trip Reset

MCCB, MCB ELCB, RCCB, RCBO a b c d A B C D E F G H
NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU 12 20 4 27 55 90 13 – 8 5 5 14
NF32-SV NV32-SV
NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV
15 19 5 21 40 90 2 – 12 7 7 17
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV
NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 15 19 5 21 40 92 2 – 12 7 7 19
C•S•H
NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU

NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU
NF30-CS – 21 29 1 31 47 67 10 – 8.5 4.5 6 13
NF225-CWU – 12 18 2 21.5 38 92 7.5 – 13.5 7 8 18.5
NF400-CW NV400-CW 16.5 10 6.5 14.5 49 134 6.5 – 32.5 14.5 15.5 25
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 16.5 10 6.5 14.5 49 155 6.5 – 32.5 13.5 15.5 46
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF400-SWU/HWU
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV800-SEW/HEW 16.5 10 6.5 14.5 49 155 6.5 – 32.5 13.5 15.5 46
NF630-SWU/HWU
– 18 12 6 17 84 190 – 4 41.5 13.5 15 36.5
NF1600-SEW
NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV – 15 19 5 21 40 92 2 – 12 7 7 19
R•U
NF125-UV – 15 19 5 21 40 92 – 29 12 7 7 17
NF250-UV – 15 19 5 21 40 92 – 35 12 7 7 19
NF400-UEW – 16.5 10 6.5 14.5 146 252 – 13.5 32.5 13.5 15.5 46
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW – 16.5 10 6.5 14.5 146 252 – 17 32.5 13.5 15.5 46
BH – 19 18 5 21 56 77.5 5 – 9.5 9.5 9.5 13
BH-P – 19 18 5 21 57.5 79 12 – 9.5 9.5 9.5 13
BH-D6, BH-D10*1 – 41 36 – – 63 76 9 – – – – –
BH BH-DN*1 – 42 48 – – 63 76 10 – 17 4 9.5 12
Appendix
KB-D*1 – 41 48 – – 63 76 9 – – – – –
– BV-D*1 42 40 – – 61 76 10 – 14 4 – –
– BV-DN*1 42 48 – – 63 76 10 – 17 4 – –
Note *1 Trip is the same as the OFF position. Resetting is not required.
240
9 Appendix
2. MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions
fM
4-pole Prepared hole for
terminal cover K fM
3-pole 4-pole
mounting tapping cL Prepared hole for
K 3-pole terminal cover
screw Rated current
switch mounting tapping
Rated current screw
L
switch
fD
L
cL fD
cL G cL G Trip
B
button Trip
C
C
B
B
A
F
A
button
F
fE 3-fE
fD H J Instantaneous N H H
Instantaneous
Trip adjustment dial P J adjustment dial
button
Fig. c
Fig. a Fig. b
4-pole
3-pole
K fM 3-pole
Prepared hole for 2-pole
terminal cover cL
mounting tapping
screw
L
cL cL
B
B
Q
A
fD
Trip H
T
button Rated current switch
S
Tripping characteristics switch Fig. e
J
H
fE Fig. d
Instantaneous
adjustment dial
Table of dimension variations (mm)

Number
Model of poles Fig. A B C fD fE F G H J K L fM N P Q R S T
NF50-SVFU 2, 3 e – 14 – 6.5 – – – 4 – – – – – – – – – –
NF32-SV, NF63-CV 2 c – 20 – 6.5 – – – 21 – – – – – – – – – –
NF63-SV, NF63-HV 3, 4 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 29 – – – – – – – – – –
NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 2 c – 20 – 6.5 – – – 21 – – – – – – – – – –
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU 3, 4 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 37 – – – – – – – – – –
NF125-UV 2, 3, 4 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 37 – – – – – – – – – –
NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV
NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV 2, 3, 4 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 44 – – – – – – – – – –
NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU, NF250-UV
NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 3, 4 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 44 – – – – – – – – – –
NF125-RGV 2, 3 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 44 – – – – – – – – – –
NF250-RGV 2, 3 a – 20 – 6.5 – – – 44 – – – – – – – – – –
2 – 14.5 – 4 – – – 16 – – – – – – – – – –
NF30-CS b
3 – 14.5 – 4 – – – 27.5 – – – – – – – – – –
NF225-CWU 2, 3 a – 15.5 – 6.5 – – – 43 – – – – – – – – – –
NF400-CW 2, 3 d – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
2, 3 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
NF400-SW, NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU d
4 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
3 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – 53 30 74 63.5
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW d
4 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – 53 30 74 63.5
3 – 50.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 130.5 3.5 – – 53 30 74 63.5
NF400-UEW d
4 – 54 – 6.5 – – – 78.5 – 156 152 3.5 – – 76.5 30 74 98.5
NF630-CW 2, 3 d – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
2, 3 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
NF630-SW d
4 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – – – – –
3 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – 53 30 74 98.5
NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW d
4 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 51.5 – 125 110.5 3.5 – – 53 30 74 98.5
Appendix
3 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 78.5 – 86 128.5 3.4 – – 53 30 74 98.5

NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW d
4 – 30.5 – 6.5 – – – 78.5 – 156 128.5 3.4 – – 53 30 74 98.5
2, 3 74 30.5 – 6.5 10 – – 78.5 57 86 128.5 3.4 – – – – – –
NF800-SDW, NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU d
4 74 30.5 – 6.5 10 – – 78.5 57 156 128.5 3.4 – – – – – –
3 – 54 – 6.5 – – – 78.5 – 86 152 3.4 – – 76.5 30 74 98.5
NF800-UEW d
4 – 54 – 6.5 – – – 78.5 – 156 152 3.4 – – 76.5 30 74 98.5
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW 3 – 70 – 6 – – – 56.5 – 199 178.5 3.4 – – 130 30 74 89
d
9
NF1600-SEW 4 – 70 – 6 – – – 56.5 – 269 178.5 3.4 – – 130 30 74 89
Remarks: 1. The 4-pole part is available for the S and H Series 50A frame to 1600A frame (excluding NF400-REW, NF630-REW and NF800-REW).
2. The 2-pole part for NF250-CV and larger is the same as the 3-pole part. (Including NF125-HV.)
3. The terminal cover mounting hole shows the case for the screwed type. The breaker mounting hole is used to mount the one-touch terminal cover. Refer to the respective
dimension drawings.
4. The K dimensions are divided down the breaker center.
241
9 Appendix
3. ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions

Center of breaker handle fU Sensitivity current selector
T Center of breaker handle
Center of breaker L Operation time selector fV Operation time selector
handle (time-delay type) (time-delay type)
V X L
Sensitivity current fH Test button fJ Leakage
U selector Center of breaker Center of breaker indicator button
M
Center of
K
breaker
F
EK
Y
Y
M
F
E
fH Test button X G F
D fH Test button
fW trip fJ Leakage D D
fW trip fJ Leakage
button indicator button
N button indicator button N
X G Fig. a Fig. b fW trip button Fig. c
G
fJ Leakage
indicator button Center of breaker handle
fJ Leakage
indicator button D fH Test fH Test button
fJ Leakage button
F
indicator button
E
E
G
F D
E
K
fH Test button D
G M
N
F Selector Selector
(time-delay type) L L (sensitivity)
Fig. d Fig. e
Fig. f
Center of breaker handle Center of breaker handle
fH Test button fJ Leakage fU Sensitivity current selector
fJ Leakage indicator button fH Test button
Center of breaker handle X G X
indicator button
fJ Leakage indicator button M
Center of breaker Center of breaker
E
K
fH Test
button
E
F
Y
Y
E
F
D D
F D fW trip button M
G
fW trip button G
Fig. g Fig. h Fig. i
Table of dimension variations

Variable dimensions (mm)
Reference
D
drawing
Model
Test Indicator E F G H J K L M N T U V W X Y
button button
NV32-SV Fixed type – – – – – –
a 13 8 26.5 9.5 4 16 6 29 20
NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV Selector type 16 – 7 23.5 3 –
Fixed type – – – – – –
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV Selector type a 3 4 13 8 26.5 9.5 4 16 – 7 16 24 3 – 6 37 20
Time-delay type 16 17 7 24 3 3
Fixed type – – – – – –
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV Selector type a 13 8 34 9.5 4 16 – 7 23.5 31 3 – 6 44 20
Time-delay type 16 24 7 31 3 3
NV400-CW (note2) Fixed type – – – –
NV400-SW Selector type c 3 3 (2.3) 14.6 43.5 9.5 5 30.6 43.5 – 43.5 – 5.5 – 6.5 51.5 30.5
NV630-CW, NV630-SW Time-delay type 30.6 22.6 5.5 5.5
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW Fixed type – – – –
NV400-REW (note2) Selector type c 3 3 (2.3) 14.6 43.5 9.5 5 30.6 43.5 – 43.5 – 5.5 – 6.5 51.5 30.5
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW Time-delay type 30.6 22.6 5.5 5.5
Selector type 30.6 – 5.5 –
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW c 3 3 (2.3) 14.6 54.1 9.5 5 54.1 54.1 – 6.5 78.5 30.5
Time-delay type 30.6 22.6 5.5 5.5
Note *1 Dimensions shown in parentheses apply to minus direction.
Appendix
242
9 Appendix
4. List of Product Weights

MCCB (kg)
Item Breaker body Accessories (weight of only accessories)
Front connection type Rear connection type Plug-in type (including plug-in frame) Electric Boxed type Operation handle Mechanical
operated interlock
Model 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P type S I W F type V type S type (MI)
NF32-SV – 0.45 0.65 – – 0.55 0.8 – 0.8 1.2 – – 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NF63-CV –
– 0.45 0.65 – 0.55 0.8 – 0.8 1.2 – – 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 50A or less) –
NF63-CV –
– 0.5 0.7 – 0.6 0.85 – 0.85 1.25 – – 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 60A, 63A) –
NF63-SV, NF63-HV –
– 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.85 1.1 0.85 1.25 1.5 – 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 50A or less) –
NF63-SV, NF63-HV –
– 0.55 0.75 1.0 0.65 0.9 1.2 0.9 1.3 1.6 – 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 60A, 63A) –
NF125-CV – 0.6 1.0 – – 1.0 1.5 – 1.2 1.9 – 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NF125-SV – 0.7 0.95 1.3 – 1.1 1.5 2.0 1.3 1.9 2.4 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NF125-HV – 0.6 1.0 1.2 – 1.0 1.5 1.9 1.2 1.9 2.3 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.5 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NF125-SEV – – 1.7 2.2 – – 2.2 2.9 – 2.6 3.3 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF125-HEV – – 1.7 2.2 – – 2.2 2.9 – 2.6 3.3 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-CV – 1.3 1.5 – – 1.7 2.2 – 3.1 3.4 – 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-SV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-HV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-SEV – – 1.7 2.2 – – 2.4 3.2 – 3.6 4.7 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-HEV – – 1.7 2.2 – – 2.4 3.2 – 3.6 4.7 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
C•S•H•
NF125-SGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF125-LGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF125-HGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF160-SGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF160-LGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
MB NF160-HGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-SGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-LGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-HGV – 1.4 1.6 2.0 – 1.8 2.3 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.5 1.3 – 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF30-CS – 0.25 0.35 – – 0.35 0.5 – – – – – 1.1 – – – – – –
NF400-CW – 4.4 5.0 – – 5.7 7.0 – 7.0 8.3 – –
NF400-SW – 4.6 5.2 6.8 – 5.9 7.3 9.7 7.2 8.5 11.3 – 19 30
NF400-SEW/HEW – – 6.0 7.6 – – 8.1 10.5 – 9.3 12.0 –
NF400-REW – – 6.0 – – – 8.5 – – 9.3 – – – –
2.0 –
NF630-CW – 5.2 6.0 – – 6.5 7.9 – 7.6 9.1 – –
NF630-SW – 5.4 6.2 8.0 – 6.7 8.1 10.6 7.8 9.3 12.0 – 33 30
9.0 1.9
NF630-SEW/HEW – – 6.5 8.3 – – 8.4 10.9 – 9.6 12.3 – 0.45
NF630-REW – – 6.5 – – – 8.4 – – 9.6 – – – –
NF800-CEW – – 10.9 – – – 12.1 – – 16.3 – –
NF800-SDW – 9 – – – 10 – – – – – – 48 70
2.4 –
NF800-SEW/HEW – – 10.9 14.2 – – 12.1 15.8 – 16.3 21.4 –
NF800-REW – – 10.9 – – – 12.1 – – 16.3 – – – –
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW – – 23.5 30.7 – – 23 30.8 – 26.6 35.5 10 – 48 70 3.4 –
2.0
NF1600-SEW – – 34.5 41.2 – – 30 40.7 – – – 10 – – – 3.4 – 0.55
NF125-RGV – 1.5 1.8 – – – – – 2.35 2.7 – 1.3 – – – 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
R•U
NF250-RGV – 1.5 1.8 – – – – – 3.2 3.6 – 1.3 – – –

NF125-UV – 1.35 1.5 1.9 – – – – 2.2 2.4 – 1.3 – – – 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF250-UV – 2.5 2.7 3.7 – – – – 4.2 4.5 – 1.3 – – – 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
NF400-UEW – – 16.2 25.4 – – 18.6 30.7 – 19.8 – – – – 2.2 –
9.0 1.9 0.45
NF800-UEW – – 27.6 33.7 – – 31.2 38.4 – – – – – – 2.7 –
BH 0.15 0.31 0.47 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
BH-P 0.13 0.26 0.38 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
BH BH-D6, BH-D10 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.55 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
BH-DN – 0.12 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
KB-D 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
NF50-SVFU – 0.3 0.45 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.3 0.35 – –
NF100-CVFU – 0.6 0.85 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.4 0.45 – –
NF125-SVU – 0.7 0.95 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.4 0.5 – 0.17
NF125-HVU – – 1.0 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.4 0.5 – 0.17
UL NF250-SVU – – 1.7 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.5 0.55 – 0.17
NF250-HVU – – 1.7 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.5 0.55 – 0.17
NF225-CWU – – 1.5 – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.5 – 0.6 0.17
NF400-SWU/HWU – – 5.7 – – – – – – – – – – – – 2.0 – 1.9 0.45
NF630-SWU/HWU – – 9.6 – – – – – – – – – – – – 2.4 – 1.9 0.45
ELCB (kg)
Item Breaker body Accessories (weight of only accessories)
Front connection type Rear connection type Plug-in type (including plug-in frame) Electric Boxed type Operation handle Mechanical
operated interlock
Model 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P type S I W F type V type S type (MI)
NV32-SV − 0.75 − − 0.95 − − 1.35 − − 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NV63-CV, NV63-SV
0.7 0.75 − 0.8 0.95 − 1.1 1.35 − − 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 50A or less)
NV63-CV, NV63-SV
0.75 0.8 − 0.85 1.0 − 1.15 1.4 − − 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 60A, 63A)
NV63-HV
− 0.75 − − 0.95 − − 1.35 − − 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 50A or less)
NV63-HV
− 0.8 − − 1.0 − − 1.4 − − 1.5 5.0 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
(rated current 60A, 63A)
NV125-CV − 1.0 − − 1.5 − − 1.9 − 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NV125-SV − 1.1 1.4 − 1.6 2.1 − 2.0 2.5 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.2 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NV125-HV − 1.1 1.4 − 1.6 2.1 − 2.0 2.5 1.3 1.8 5.1 10.5 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.17
NV125-SEV − 1.9 2.5 − 2.4 3.2 − 2.8 3.6 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
C NV125-HEV − 1.9 2.5 − 2.4 3.2 − 2.8 3.6 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
Appendix
• NV250-CV − 1.7 − − 2.4 − − 3.6 − 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
S NV250-SV − 1.9 2.5 − 2.6 3.5 − 3.8 5.0 1.3 6.8 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
• NV250-HV − 1.8 − − 2.5 − − 3.7 − 1.3 − 8.7 13.5 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.17
H
• NV50-SVFU 0.4 0.5 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.3 0.35 − −
U NV100-CVFU − 0.95 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.4 0.45 − −
• NV125-SVU − 1.1 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.4 0.5 − 0.17
UL NV125-HVU − 1.1 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.4 0.5 − 0.17
NV250-SVU − 1.9 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.5 0.55 − 0.17
NV250-HVU − 1.9 − − − − − − − − − − − 0.5 0.55 − 0.17
NV400-CW − 5.6 − − 7.7 − − 8.9 − − −
NV400-SW − 5.9 − − 8 − − 9.2 − − 19 30 2.0 −
9
NV400-SEW/HEW − 6.6 8.2 − 8.7 11.4 − 9.9 12.5 − −
NV400-REW − 6.6 − − 8.7 − − 9.9 − − − − 2.0 −
9.0
NV630-CW − 6.9 − − 8.8 − − 10.0 − − 1.9 0.45
−
NV630-SW − 6.9 − − 8.8 − − 10.0 −
− 33 30
NV630-SEW − 7.1 8.9 − 9.0 11.5 − 10.2 12.9 2.4 −
NV630-HEW − 7.1 − − 9.0 − − 10.2 − − −
NV800-SEW/HEW − 15.3 − − 16.5 − − 20.7 − − − 48 70 −
BV-D 0.2 − 0.35 − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
BV-DN 0.19 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
243
9 Appendix
5. Switching the Adjustable Items

(1) Adjustable rated current and tripping characteristics items

Adjustable item
Rated sensitivity
Operating time
characteristics
characteristics
characteristics
Instantaneous
Rated voltage
Rated current
STD tripping
LTD tripping
PAL
tripping
Rated
Applicable model
NF125-SEV/HEV (*2) (*2) (*1)
NF250-SEV/HEV (*2) (*2) (*1)
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW

NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
MCCB
NF800-SDW, NF630-SWU/HWU
NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV
NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV
NV125-SEV/HEV (*2) (*2) (*1)
NV250-SEV/HEV (*2) (*2) (*1)
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-SEW/HEW
ELCB NV800-SEW/HEW
NV125-CV/SV/HV
NV250-CV/SV/HV
NV400-CW/SW, NV630-CW
Notes *1 Available only for models with pre-alarm module.
*2 Use the OPERATION CHECK & SETUP UNIT Y-350. Consult Mitsubishi for details.
Remarks: Unless otherwise specified, the electronic breaker is adjusted to the following settings as a default.
(1) Rated current: maximum value
(2) LTD tripping characteristics:maximum value
(3) STD tripping characteristics (current, operating time):maximum value
(4) Instantaneous tripping characteristics:maximum value
(5) PAL:minimum value
(6) Rated sensitivity current:maximum value
(7) Leakage operation time (for time-delay type):maximum value
Appendix
244
9 Appendix
(2) Adjusting the rated current and tripping characteristics

Item Electronic type
Application 125 to 250A frame 400 to 1600A frame
Rated current label

Trip
(PTT) button
OVER LED (red)
Trip
(PTT) button PAL LED (yellow)
Replacement label
70% LED (green)
Example of selector layout
OVER LED (red) Replacement label

70% LED (green) Current setting label
Clear cover Trip characteristics
Trip characteristics selector
selector
Overcurrent operation test/
Characteristics setting
connector
Rated current Variable current setting STD tripping current
(step type) (Co variable type)
250 300 .7 .8 4 56 8 10 Instantaneous

175 187.5
200 212.5 8 10 12 225 350 3 76 12
162.5
225
237.5 5
6 14
8 14 tripping current
150 250 4
14 .5 12 4 16
137.5 3 (xIr) 200 Ir(×400A) 10
125
(A) Ir 2
(x250A) Ii In(A) Is(×In, Ir) Ii(×400A)
60 100 .1 .2 .8 .9
Pre-alarm current
TEST 150
Current setting Instantaneous tripping .3
12 .7 1.0
(step type) current (step type) TL(s) .06 Ts(s) IP(×In, Ir)
LTD STD
operating time operating time
Turn the handle to OFF before starting the settings. Turn the handle to OFF before starting the settings.
Example of making a selection
q Set the arrow of each characteristic’s setting dial to the required scale q Open the clear cover.
position. Always set the dial arrow within the bold lines of the setting value. w Set the arrow of each characteristic’s setting dial to the required scale
If stopped at the middle, the adjacent setting value may be applied. position. For values other than instantaneous tripping current and adjustable
Use a 0.5mm thick flat-tip screwdriver with a 3mm or less tip width. Turn the current settings, which can be adjusted at any time, always set the dial
screwdriver at 0.05N·m or less. arrow within the bold lines of the setting value. If stopped at the middle, the
w From the replacement labels, select the rated current label with the same adjacent setting value may be applied.
value as the setting value. Use a 0.6mm thick flat-tip screwdriver with a 4.5mm or less tip width. Turn
e Replace the rated current label. the screwdriver at 0.05N·m or less.
r Close the cover and tighten the screw. e From the replacement labels, select the rated current label with the same
value as the setting value.
r Replace the rated current label.
t Close the clear cover.
In case of 125 to 250A frame In case of 400 to 1600A frame

(Application: Electronic (effective value detection) (Application: Electronic (effective value detection)
breaker) breaker)
The following items can be set and tested using the The following items can be tested using the tester Y-250.
breaker test and setter Y-350.
Setter and tester
¡Long-term operation test (variable signal)

¡LTD and STD characteristics settings ¡Short-term operation test (fixed signal)
¡Long-term operation test (variable signal) ¡Instantaneous operation test
¡Short-term operation test (fixed signal) *1 (fixed signal)
¡Instantaneous operation test (fixed signal) ¡Pre-alarm operation test
¡Pre-alarm operation test (variable signal) *2 (variable signal)
Appendix
*1. Fixed signal which is 1.5 times the STD trip current.
*2. Only for models with pre-alarm module. Y-250
245
9 Appendix
(3) Selecting the rated voltage, rated sensitivity and operating time
Model Selector layout Voltage selection Sensitivity and operation time selection
Operating
time selector
(time-delay type)
Sensitivity
selector Use for the circuit voltage within Turn the handle to OFF before
the rated voltage. changing the selection.
3-step
sensitivity
ELCB selector
type
Sensitivity
selector
Use for the circuit voltage within Turn the handle to OFF before
Operating
the rated voltage. changing the selection.
time selector
(time-delay type)
View of selection
operation
Appendix
246
9 Appendix
6. Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions

j MCCB • MCB
Hole Wood screw Front Rear connection Required quantity per unit
Class Model depth (round wood screw) Plug-in type
A for front connection connection type type 1P 2P 3P 4P
NF50-SVFU 56 – M4×0.7×65 (note) – – – 2 2 –
NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV
45 4.1×58 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 – 2 2 4
NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU
NF125-HVU
M4×0.7×55 – 2
NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU 45 4.1×58 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 2 4
M4×0.7×73 For plug-in
type 4
C•S•H

NF30-CS 10 4.1×25 M4×0.7×20 M4×0.7×20 – – 2 2 –
2
NF225-CWU 45 4.1×58 M4×0.7×55 – – – For plug-in 2 4
type 4
NF400-CW, NF400-SW
47 – M6×60 M6×72 M6×72 – 4 4 4
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW 59 – M6×72 M6×85 M6×85 – 4 4 4
NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW, NF800-REW 15 – M6×35 M6×40 M6×35 – 4 4 4
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW 18.5 – M8×40 M8×40 M8×40 – 4 4 4
NF1600-SEW 18.5 – M8×40 M8×40 – – 4 4 4
NF125-RGV
45 – M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 – 2 2 –
R•U
NF250-RGV
NF125-UV, NF250-UV 45/61 – M4×0.7×55/73 M4×0.7×55/73 M4×0.7×55/73 – 4 4 –
NF125-UV (4P), NF250-UV (4P) 45 – M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 – 2 2 4
NF400-UEW (3P) 47/156 – M6×65/174 M6×72/181 M6×72/181 – – 4 –
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW 15/112 – M6×35/132 M6×40/137 M6×35/132 – – 4 6
BH – – – – – – – – –
BH-P – – – – – – – – –
BH-D6 – – – – – – – – –
BH
BH-DN – – – – – – – – –
KB-D – – – – – – – – –
BH-D10 – – – – – – – – –
Remarks: 1. The mounting shown in the sections are enclosed with the MCCB. The mounting screws for the plug-in connection are enclosed with the plug-in terminal block.
All other mounting screws must be prepared by the user.
2. All mounting screws other than the hexagon socket bolts and hexagon bolts are P-type panhead screws.
3. For models with two types of mounting screws, the screw length differs on the supply side and load side.
Hole depth
4. The plug-in type is not available for NF800-UEW. A
Note For the P-type panhead screw, use a type with a spring washer and flat washer (small round) combination, or
a P-type panhead screw with spring washer and flat washer.
j ELCB • RCCB • RCBO

Hole Wood screw Required
Screw for steel plates (P-type panhead screw) quantity per unit
Class Model depth (round wood screw)
A for front connection Front connection type Rear connection type Plug-in type 2, 3P 4P
NV50-SVFU 56 – M4×0.7×65 (note) – – 2 –
NV32-SV, NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV
NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 45 4.1×58 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 2 4
NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU
M4×0.7×55 2
NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 45 4.1×58 M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×55 For plug-in 4
NV M4×0.7×73 type 4
NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV, NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU
NV400-CW, NV400-SW 47 – M6×60 M6×72 M6×72 4 4
Appendix
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW

NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW 59 – M6×72 M6×85 M6×85 4 4
NV630-HEW
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 15 – M6×35 M6×40 M6×35 4 4
BV-D – – – – – – –
BV
BV-DN – – – – – – –
Remarks: 1. The mounting shown in the sections are enclosed with the ELCB.
Note For the P-type panhead screw, use a type with a spring washer and flat washer (small round) combination, or
a P-type panhead screw with spring washer and flat washer.
9
247
9 Appendix
7. List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values

C
B
A
j MCCB (K) (K)
Measurement point Measurement point

Conducting Conducting
Model current Cover surface Base side Handle Line Load Model current Cover surface Base side Handle Line Load
(A) (B) (C) terminal terminal (A) (B) (C) terminal terminal
NF32-SV 32A 14 38 12 36 37 NF400-CW 400A 16 25 16 47 37
NF63-CV 63A 15 42 14 39 44 NF400-SW 400A 20 27 10 46 37
NF63-SV 63A 15 39 12 41 44 NF400-SEW 400A 14 22 9 35 31
NF63-HV 63A 15 42 12 41 49 NF400-HEW 400A 14 23 8 34 32
NF125-CV 125A 13 29 9 43 42 NF400-REW 400A 15 23 9 35 32
NF125-SV 125A 14 32 10 44 40 NF400-UEW 400A 19 28 13 42 33
NF125-HV 125A 16 33 11 49 42 NF630-CW 630A 23 32 15 52 52
NF250-CV 250A 19 35 13 46 45 NF630-SW 630A 23 33 16 54 52
NF250-SV 250A 20 36 13 47 45 NF630-SEW 630A 22 31 14 51 45
NF250-HV 250A 20 36 13 49 46 NF630-HEW 630A 20 31 13 50 44
NF30-CS 30A 18 15 5 23 33 NF630-REW 630A 21 31 13 51 44
NF125-SGV 125A 20 35 13 42 49 NF800-CEW 800A 21 30 13 45 40
NF250-SGV 250A 20 36 13 49 50 NF800-SDW 800A 18 28 12 46 44
NF160-SGV 160A 20 35 13 40 44 NF800-SEW 800A 21 30 12 45 41
NF800-HEW 800A 22 31 12 47 42
NF800-REW 800A 21 30 13 46 42
NF800-UEW 800A 25 35 16 51 46
j ELCB (K) (K)
Measurement point Measurement point

Conducting Conducting
Model current Cover surface Base side Handle Line Load Model current Cover surface Base side Handle Line Load
(A) (B) (C) terminal terminal (A) (B) (C) terminal terminal
NV32-SV 32A 15 35 11 36 41 NV400-CW 400A 22 32 11 46 41
NV63-CV 63A 17 32 13 43 41 NV400-SW 400A 23 32 12 47 42
NV63-SV 63A 17 37 13 45 47 NV400-SEW 400A 16 23 10 36 34
NV63-HV 63A 17 35 13 43 43 NV400-HEW 400A 15 22 11 35 35
NV125-CV 125A 13 30 13 47 43 NV400-REW 400A 15 22 10 36 35
NV125-SV 125A 14 30 15 45 43 NV630-CW 630A 24 34 17 54 52
NV125-HV 125A 14 32 14 42 43 NV630-SW 630A 23 33 16 53 53
NV250-CV 250A 21 37 14 43 44 NV630-SEW 630A 23 34 17 54 53
NV250-SV 250A 21 39 18 47 43 NV630-HEW 630A 22 33 17 54 52
NV250-HV 250A 23 38 17 48 43 NV800-SEW 800A 29 40 13 53 46
Notes *1 The connected wire size follows JIS C 8201 Ann.2 Standards. The temperature rise value will vary according to the size of the connected wire.
*2 This table shows the temperature-rise values. The ambient temperature must be added for the actual measurement value.
Appendix
*3 These are examples of the measurement values, and are not guaranteed values. Use these as reference data.
248
9 Appendix
8. Ordering Information
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
C Economy class C Economy class
Model Model
S Standard class S Standard class
NF NV
H High-performance class H High-performance class
NF250-SV NV250-SV
U Ultra current-limiting class U Ultra current-limiting class
DSN DSN-type switches
Number of poles Number of poles

2P NV 1ø2W
2P, 3P, 4P
1ø2W
3P 3P 3P NV 1ø3W
3ø3W
4P NV 3ø4W
Rated current Rated current
Please specify the rated current even
for rated current adjustable types
200A 200A Please specify the rated current even
for rated current adjustable types
Motor protection Motor protection

Please specify MB Please specify MB
for Motor Protection Breakers for Motor Protection Breakers
MB MB
Rated voltage Rated voltage

Please specify DC voltage for use in
DC circuit AC
AC 100-440V
200-440V
Standard Rated sensitivity

Please specify applicable marine current 30mA
standard
100 / 200 / 500mA
100 / 200 / 500mA
Connection F Front connection

method SL Solderless (box) terminal Connection F Front connection
Rear connection
method SL Solderless (box) terminal
B
B Plug-in B Rear connection
PM B Plug-in
PM
Built-in
accessories Type of residual Blank High-speed type
PAL Pre-alarm (contact output)
current protection Specify Time-delay type
PAL
Built-in MG Insulation switch

Internal AL Alarm switch accessories EAL Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch
accessories AX Auxiliary switch
TBM Test button module
Shunt trip MG
AL, SHT (110VAC) SHT
(specify rated coil voltage)
PAL Pre-alarm module
Undervoltage trip
UVT Internal AL Alarm switch
External (specify rated coil voltage)
accessories accessories AX Auxiliary switch
SLT Lead-wire terminal block
Undervoltage trip
AX, SLT, TBM UVT
(specify rated coil voltage)
MD Electrical operation device
F/S/ V Operating handle SLT Lead-wire terminal block
Special-purpose S/I/ W Enclosure box External

breakers MI Mechanical interlock accessories
MD Electrical operation device
Terminal cover
TC F/S/ V Operating handle
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
Appendix
MI Mechanical interlock
LC / HL
Handle lock device Terminal cover
HL-S TC
Quantity Quantity (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
CH Card holder
LC / HL
Handle lock device
10 Mag Only 10 HL-S
Mag Only (specify AC or DC and CH Card holder
rated current)
9
DC use
DC400V (specify 400, 440, 500, 550
or 600VDC)
400Hz 400Hz use
Low-inst
Low-inst
(specify AC or DC and Inst. %)
249
9 Appendix
d Circuit Protector (CP30-BA)

Model Number of poles Internal circuit Operating characteristics Rated current or rated operational voltage Connection method
CP30-BA 1P 1 M 3A
1P 1 Inline type I Instantaneous type No symbol Screw terminal

Inline type with auxiliary M Medium-speed type 0.1A 0.25A 0.3A 0.5A
2P 2 switch (general load) T Metal tab terminal
MD Medium-speed type with inertial delay (Note 1) 1A 2A 3A 5A
3P (Note 1) 21 * Inline type with auxiliary
switch (microload) (Note 2) S Low-speed type 7A 10A 15A 20A
6 Relay type shunt tripping SD Low-speed type with inertial delay (Note 1)
30A
9 Inline type with alarm F High-speed type
switch (general load)
* Inline type with auxiliary
91 switch (microload) (Note 2) Shaded parts are
Rated operational voltage (for shunt tripping) standard inventory.
100-200V 100-200VAC and 100VDC common
24-48V 24-48VDC common
Notes *1 3-pole and inertial delay models are dedicated for AC.
*2 If an auxiliary switch (AX) or alarm switch (AL) used for a 125VAC 0.5A or less circuit is required, select the microload type indicated with an asterisk*.
*3 The relay type shunt trip is subject to CCC. This is a UL (cURus) and CE Marking
compliant product. As a standard, this product is a UL (cURus),
Example 1. CP30-BA 1P 1-M 3A (example of inline type, medium-speed, 1-pole part, 3A, screw CCC, CE Marking compliant product.
terminal specifications)
Mandatory items are indicated with a bold box. Always specify these items.
Unless specified, all other items will be manufactured with standard Mitsubishi specifications.
d UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Number of Rated Connection Number External
Model poles current method Internal accessories of units accessories
NF250-SVU 3P 200A F AL, SHT(AC100-240V) 10 units
2P F Crimp terminal AL Alarm switch F•V•S•C Operation handle

3P SL Solderless terminal AX Auxiliary switch MI Mechanical interlock
BAR Bar terminal Shunt tripping device Terminal cover
SHT (Designate rated TC (TC-L(*),
voltage for coil) TC-S)
Undervoltage tripping device HL•HL-S Handle lock
UVT (Designate rated * For the 30 to 250A
voltage for coil) frame 2-pole or
Vertical lead-wire 3-pole TC-L, the
SLT specifications will
terminal block be set according to
* When ordering two, the rated current.
designate as AL2 or AX2.
For the microload type,
designate AL-B or AX-B.
d UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

Number of Rated Rated Rated sensitivity Connection Internal Number External
Model poles current voltage current method accessories of units accessories
NV250-SVU 3P 200A AC120-480V 100 • 300 • 500mA F AX, SLT 10 units
2P AC240V 30 F Crimp terminal AL Alarm switch F•V•S•C Operation handle

3P AC120-240V 50 SL Solderless terminal AX Auxiliary switch MI Mechanical interlock
AC120-480V 100 BAR Bar terminal Shunt tripping device Terminal cover
TC
100 • 200 • 500mA SHT (Designate rated (TC-L (*), TC-S)
100 • 300 • 500mA voltage for coil) HL•HL-S Handle lock
Undervoltage tripping device * For the 30 to
UVT (Designate rated 250A frame
Appendix
voltage for coil) 2-pole or 3-pole

TC-L, the
Vertical lead-wire specifications
SLT
terminal block will be set
* When ordering two, according to
designate as AL2 or AX2. the rated
current.
For the microload type,
designate AL-B or AX-B.
250
9 Appendix
9. Melshort 2
A Smarter, Easier Way to Select Breakers
This software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage Calculation and selection software
circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity for low-voltage circuit breakers
and related equipment.
Preparation of single-line diagram
Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments
Short-circuit current calculation
Examination of cascade interruption combination Examination of selective interraption
Advantages
●Contents ●Selection Efficiency Improved
The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current Simple, accurate and fast operation is ensured as a result
calculations, but also the examination of various of being able to examine the coordination between
protection coordination. various protection systems, and being able to select
breakers interactively on the screen.
●Preparation of single-line connection diagrams.
●Short-circuit calculations.
●Automatic selection of breaker type.
●Software Updates
●Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination. Users can download the latest software updates by
●Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination. accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page.
Appendix
●Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection

http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs
equipment.
●Protectioncoordination with motor start current.
■Products Menu ■Computer Requirements
Low-voltage circuit breakers: Operating system: Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000/XP
MCCBs, ELCBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors, CPU : 166 MHz or faster
9
Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs RAM memory size: min 32 MB
Free hard disk capacity: min 50 MB
Display resolution: min 640 x 480 dots
CD-ROM Drive:2x or higher
251
9 Appendix
10. Low Voltage Products Website
WS-V Series Next-generation MCCB and ELCB, AE-SW Series ACB, DIN Series MCB
Appendix
252
9 Appendix
Molded Case
Earth Leakage
Appendix
253
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
Country / Region Corporation Name Address Telephone

Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. 348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia +61-2-9684-7777
PROGRESSIVE TRADING CORPORATION Haque Tower, 2nd floor, 610/11,Jubilee Road, Chittagong, Bangladesh +880-31-624-307
Bangladesh
ELECTRO MECH AUTOMATION& ENGINEERING LTD. Purana Paltan Lane, (VIP Road), Rokeya Mansion(6th floor), Room#702,Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh +880-28-321-791
Belarus Tehnikon Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705, BY-220030 Minsk, Belarus +375(0)17/210 46 26
Belgium Koning & Hartman B.V. Woluwelaan 31, BE-1800 Vilvoorde, Belgium +32(0)2/2570240
Cambodia DHINIMEX CO.,LTD #245, St. Tep Phan, Phnom Penh, Cambodia +855-23-997-725
Chile Rhona S.A. Vte. Agua Santa 4211 Casilla 30-D (P.O. Box) Vina del Mar, Chile +56-32-2-320-600
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Automation Building, No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Shanghai, 200336 +86-21-2322-3030
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. 9/F, Office Tower1 Henderson Centre 18 Jianguomennei
+86-10-6518-8830
BeiJing Branch Dajie DongCheng district BeiJing 100005
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Room 2512--2516, Great China International Exchange Square,
+86-755-2399-8272
ShenZhen Branch Jintian Rd.S., Futian District, Shenzhen, 518034
China
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Room 1609, North Tower, The Hub Center, No.1068, Xing Gang
+86-20-8923-6730
GuangZhou Branch East Road, Haizhu District, Guang Zhou, China 510335
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Block B, Room 407-408, Shangri-La Center Offeice Builiding,
+86-28-8446-8030
ChengDu Branch No.9 BinJiang East Road, Chengdu, China 610021
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Hong Kong) Ltd. 20/F., Cityplaza One, 111 king's Road, Taikoo shing, Hong Kong +852-2510-0555
Colombia Proelectrico Representaciones S.A. Carrera 42 # 75-367 Bod 109 Itagui Colombia +57-4-4441284
Czech Republic AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEMS S.R.O Technologická 374/6, CZ-708 00 Ostrava - Pustkovec +420 595 691 150
Denmark BEIJER ELECTRONICS A/S LYKKEGARDSVEJ 17, DK-4000 ROSKILDE +45(0)46/75 76 66
Egypt Cairo Electrical Group 9, Rostoum St. Garden City P.O. Box 165-11516 Maglis El-Shaab, Cairo - Egypt +20-2-27961337
France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. 25, Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex +33(0)1/55 68 55 68
Germany Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Gothaer Str. 8, 40880 Ratingen , Germany +49(0) 2102 486-0
KALAMARAKIS - SAPOUNAS S.A. IONIAS & NEROMILOU STR., CHAMOMILOS ACHARNES, ATHENS, 13678 Greece +30-2102 406000
Greece
UTECO 5, MAVROGENOUS STR., 18542 PIRAEUS, Greece +30-211-1206-900
Hungary Meltrade Ltd. Fertö utca 14. HU-1107 Budapest, Hungary +36(0)1-431-9726
India Mitsubishi Electric India Private Limited 2nd Floor, Tower A&B, Cyber Greens, DLF Cyber City, DLF Phase-III, Gurgaon - 122 022 Haryana, India +91-124-4630300
Indonesia P. T. Sahabat Indonesia P.O.Box 5045 Kawasan Industri Pergudangan, Jakarta, Indonesia +62-(0)21-6610651-9
Ireland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, IRL-Dublin 24, Ireland +353(0)1-4198800
Israel Gino Industries Ltd. 26, Ophir Street IL-32235 Haifa, Israel +972(0)4-867-0656
Italy Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Viale Colleoni 7, I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI), Italy +39 039-60531
Kazakhstan Kazpromavtomatika ul. Zhambyla 28, KAZ - 100017 Karaganda +7-7212-501000
Korea Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd 9F Gangseo Hangang xi-tower, 401 Yangcheon-ro, Gangseo-gu, Seoul 07528 Korea +82-2-3660-9572
Laos AROUNKIT CORPORATION IMPORT- EXPORT SOLE CO.,LTD SAPHANMO VILLAGE. SAYSETHA DISTRICT, VIENTIANE CAPITAL, LAOS +856-20-415899
Lebanon Comptoir d'Electricite Generale-Liban Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora, P.O. Box 11-2597 Beirut - Lebanon +961-1-240445
Lithuania Rifas UAB Tinklu 29A, LT-5300 Panevezys, Lithuania +370(0)45-582-728
Malaysia Mittric Sdn Bhd No. 5 Jalan Pemberita U1/49, Temasya Industrial Park, Glenmarie 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia +603-5569-3748
Malta ALFATRADE LTD 99 PAOLA HILL, PAOLA PLA 1702, Malta +356(0)21-697-816
Maroco SCHIELE MAROC KM 7,2 NOUVELLE ROUTE DE RABAT AIN SEBAA, 20600 Casablanca, Maroco +212 661 45 15 96
Myanmar Peace Myanmar Electric Co.,Ltd. NO137/139 Botahtaung Pagoda Road, Botahtaung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar +95-(0)1-202589
Nepal Watt&Volt House KHA 2-65, Volt House Dillibazar Post Box: 2108, Kathmandu, Nepal +977-1-4411330
Netherlands Imtech Marine & Offshore B.V. Sluisjesdijk 155, NL-3087 AG Rotterdam, Netherlands +31(0)10-487-19 11
North America Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061 USA +847-478-2100
Norway Scanelec AS Leirvikasen 43B, NO-5179 Godvik, Norway +47(0)55-506000
Middle East Comptoir d'Electricite Generale-International- Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora P.O.
+961-1-240430
Arab Countries & Cyprus S.A.L. Box 11-1314 Beirut - Lebanon
+92-(0)42-35752323
Prince Electric Co. 2-P, GULBERG II, LAHORE - 54660 PAKISTAN
Pakistan +92-(0)42-35753373
AL-KAMAL GROUP Office No. 7 & 8, 1st Floor, Barkat Ali Khan Center, 101 Circular Road, Lahore. Pakistan +92-(0)42-37631632
Philippines Edison Electric Integrated, Inc. 24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center, Edsa Cr. Ortigas Ave., Quezon City Metro Manila, Philippines +63-(0)2-634-8691
Poland Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch Krakowska 50, 32-083 Balice, Poland +48(0)12 630 47 00
Republic of Moldova Intehsis SRL bld. Traian 23/1, MD-2060 Kishinev, Moldova +373(0)22-66-4242
Romania Sirius Trading & Services SRL RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 +40-(0)21-430-40-06
Russia Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Moscow Branch 52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya Nab. 115054, Moscow, Russia +7 495 721-2070
Saudi Arabia Center of Electrical Goods Al-Shuwayer St. Side way of Salahuddin Al-Ayoubi St. P.O. Box 15955 Riyadh 11454 - Saudi Arabia +966-1-4770149
Singapore Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte. Ltd. 307 Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore 159943 +65-6473-2308
PROCONT, Presov Kupelna 1/, SK - 08001 Presov, Slovakia +421(0)51-7580 611
Slovakia
SIMAP Jana Derku 1671, SK - 91101 Trencin, Slovakia + 421(0)32 743 04 72
Slovenia Inea RBT d.o.o. Stegne 11, SI-1000 Ljubljana, Slovenia +386(0)1-513-8116
South Africa CBI-electric: low voltage Private Bag 2016, ZA-1600 Isando Gauteng, South Africa +27-(0)11-9282000
Spain Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubí 76-80, E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona), Spain +34(0)93-565-3131
Sweden Euro Energy Components AB Järnvägsgatan 36, S-434 24 Kungsbacka, Sweden +46(0)300-690040
Switzerland TriElec AG Muehlentalstrasse 136, CH-8201 Schaffhausen +41-(0)52-6258425
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd 5th Fl., No.105, Wu Kung 3rd, Wu-Ku Hsiang, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. +886-(0)2-2298-8889
Thailand United Trading & Import Co., Ltd. 77/12 Bamrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak Pomprab Bangkok Thailand +66-223-4220-3
Tunisia MOTRA Electric 3, Résidence Imen, Avenue des Martyrs Mourouj III, 2074 - El Mourouj III Ben Arous, Tunisia +216-71 474 599
Bayraktar Bulvarı Nutuk Sok. No:5, Posta Kutusu34384,
Turkey GTS +90(0)216 526 3990
TR-34775 Yukan Dudullu-Uemraniye, Istanbul, Turkey
United Kingdom Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Travellers Lane, UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB, United Kingdom +44(0)1707-276100
Uruguay Fierro Vignoli S.A. Avda. Uruguay 1274 Montevideo Uruguay +598-2-902-0808
Venezuela Adesco S.A. Calle 7 La Urbina Edificio Los Robles Locales C y D Planta Baja, Caracas - Venezuela +58-212-241-9952
Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. Head Office Unit01-04, 10th Floor, Vincom Center, 72 Le Thanh Ton Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam +84-8-3910-5945
Vietnam
Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. Hanoi Branch 6th Floor, Detech Tower, 8 Ton That Thuyet Street, My Dinh 2 Ward, Nam Tu Liem District, Hanoi City, Vietnam +84-4-3937-8075
For Safety : Please read the instruction manual carefully before using the products in this catalog.
Wiring and connection must be done by the person have a specialized knowledge of electric construction and wiring.
Revised publication, effective Sep. 2016.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Y-0720C 1609 printed in Japan oIPp This pamphlet is made from recycled paper.

Y0720c1609 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Y0720c1609 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Y0720c1609 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FACTORY AUTOMATION

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers

Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2. Detailed Specifications… ……………………………………………………………………………… 13

2 6 Miniature Circuit Breakers.................................... 44

3 3 Motor Protection Breakers.................................... 30

3. Special-purpose Breakers… …………………………………………………………………………… 57

5. Installation and Connection… ………………………………………………………………………… 91

9 6) Shunt Trip (SHT) .................................................................111

8. Handling and Maintenance……………………………………………………………………………… 231

Technologies based on long year experience are brought together

50kA /25kA 85kA /85kA Current C

Increased reaction force of Reaction circuit

Current B Fixed conductor

Breaking capacity of 5 models is 20% to 50% higher than the

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

The display is on the circuit breaker body and

Electronic Circuit Breaker Measuring Display Unit

Intelligent Communications through CC-Link

Electronic Energy Energy MELSEC-Q Series

Compact design for easy to use

Volume ratio 79%

250AF circuit breakers’ fixed types (NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NV250-CV,

Types of internal accessories are reduced from 3 types to 1 type

Conventional models Three types For 32/63AF

New models One type For 32 to 250AF

Innovative manufacturing using a robot-cell production line

Robot-cell Production Line

Individual unit production management system

Manual Adjustment Work

Use of Various Recyclable Materials

Nonuse of Hazardous Substances

Energy Saving at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Fukuyama Works

Global Networks of Sales Offices and Production Bases

Circuit Breakers NF-H/L NF63-HV

Ultra current-limiting class

Residual Current Circuit Breaker BV-D

Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload Protection BV-DN

Isolating Switch KB-D

Circuit Protectors CP30-BA CP-S

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Motor Protection Breakers

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers

Outline of Circuit Breakers

Miniature Circuit Breakers

Residual Current Circuit Breaker

Circuit Protectors Air Circuit Breakers Related Components

2. Instructions for Application

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers 24

3 Motor Protection Breakers 30

4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers 31

5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers 35

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers 44

8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 52

9 Earth Leakage Relays 54

NF-C (Economy class)

500V − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/4 7.5/4

IEC 60947-2 415V 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5

Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − d d

Auxiliary switch (AX) d(5) d (6) d (6) d (6) d (6) d(6)

Auxiliary switch (AX) d (4) d (4) d (4) d d (4) d d (*4) d

Auxiliary switch (AX) d (3) d d (3) d d (3) d d (3) d d (3) d d (3) d

Auxiliary switch (AX) d (4) d (4) d (4) d (4) d (*4)

Shunt trip (SHT) 102 d (4) d (4) d (4) d (4) d (*4)